Smart Sketch User Guide

SmartSketch v4.
0
Users Guide
October 2001
DVA007821
Copyright Copyright 2001 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001 Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Trademarks Intergraph, InterPlot, SmartSketch, Image Integrator, and the Intergraph logo are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. ActiveCGM is a registered trademark of InterCap Graphics Systems, Inc. Microsoft, the Windows logo, the Office logo, Visual Basic, ActiveX, IntelliMouse, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of AutoDesk. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS WHAT'S NEW IN SMARTSKETCH V4.0: AN OVERVIEW AutoCAD/MicroStation Translator Enhancements Productivity Enhancements Symbol Enhancements GETTING STARTED WITH SMARTSKETCH: AN OVERVIEW Installing SmartSketch: An Overview
System Management Services (SMS) Support Install SmartSketch Uninstall SmartSketch
III 1 1 1 3 4 6
7 20 20
Exploring the Interface: An Overview

Menu Bar and Menus Ribbons and Dialog Boxes Toolbars
21
22 22 23
Using the Keyboard

Standard Control Keys Function Keys
25
25 25
Using the Mouse

Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse
26
27
Viewing Your Work

Restore a View Pan a View Zoom Area Zoom In Zoom Out Switch to Another Open Document
28
29 29 30 30 31 31
Commands and Dialog Boxes

Cascade Command (Window Menu) Fit Command (View Menu) New Window Command (Window Menu) Pan Command (View Menu) Previous Command (View Menu) Window List Command (Window Menu) Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu) Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu) Zoom Area Command (View Menu) Zoom In Command (View Menu) Zoom Out Command (View Menu)
32
32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35
Getting Help for AutoCAD Users: An Overview

Command Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch
36
36
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide iii
Table of Contents
Task Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch 40
Getting Help for MicroStation Users: An Overview

Command Comparison: MicroStation to SmartSketch Task Comparison: MicroStation to SmartSketch
52
52 60
Using the Learning Center: An Overview

Access Online Tutorials
65
65
Accessing Support Resources: An Overview

User Assistance Access Online Support
66
67 68

About SmartSketch Command (Help Menu) Help Command (Main Toolbar) Learning Center Command (Help Menu) Help Topics Command (Help Menu) SmartSketch on the Web Command (Help Menu) SmartSketch Web Forum Command (Help Menu) Tip of the Day Command (Help Menu) Tip of the Day Dialog Box
69
69 69 69 69 69 70 70 70
UNDERSTANDING DOCUMENT CONCEPTS: AN OVERVIEW Setting Up Documents: An Overview

Create a Document Open a Document Set Up a Drawing Sheet View the Properties of a Document Set Document Properties Set File Locations
71 72
73 74 74 75 75 75

New Command (File Menu) File New Dialog Box Open Command (File Menu) File Open Dialog Box Options Command (Tools Menu) Options Dialog Box Properties Command (File Menu) Properties Dialog Box Sheet Setup Command (File Menu) Sheet Setup Dialog Box Most Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)
77
77 77 77 77 78 79 83 83 89 89 91
Managing Multi-sheet Documents: An Overview

Create a Background Sheet Display Background Sheets Activate a Drawing Sheet Change the Background Sheet Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets Rename a Drawing Sheet Delete a Drawing Sheet Move Sheet Border
93
96 97 97 97 98 99 99 99
Commands and Dialog Boxes iv SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
101
Table of Contents
New Sheet Command (Insert Menu) Working Sheets Command (View Menu) Move Sheet Border Command (File Menu) Move Sheet Border Dialog Box Background Sheets Command (View Menu) Rename Command (Shortcut Menu) Rename Dialog Box Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu) 101 101 101 101 103 103 103 103
Saving and Printing Documents: An Overview Saving Documents

Save a Document Saving a Document Automatically Setting AutoSave Options Send a Document to Others Close a Document Close a Document Without Saving Changes
104 105
106 107 107 108 108 108

Save Command (File Menu) Save As Dialog Box Save As Command (File Menu) AutoSave Command (Tools Menu) AutoSave Dialog Box Send Command (File Menu) Close Command (File Menu) Exit Command (File Menu)
109
109 109 109 109 110 110 111 111
Printing Documents
Print a Document Set Printing Options Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet Print Several Documents Simultaneously Print to a File
112
113 114 115 116 117

Print Command (File Menu) Print Dialog Box Printer Document Properties Dialog Box Print Area Dialog Box Settings Dialog Box
118
118 118 119 120 121
USING SMARTSKETCH TEMPLATES: AN OVERVIEW Using General Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Atlas Mapping Templates Basic Diagramming Templates Directional Mapping Templates Flowchart Templates Network Diagram Templates Office Layout Templates Organizational Chart Templates Workflow Diagram Templates
124 126
126 128 130 132 135 137 141 143
Using AEC Solutions Templates: An Overview

Architectural Templates
146
146
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide v
Table of Contents
HVAC Templates Landscape Templates Site Templates 148 151 153
Using Electrical Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Control Loop Templates Electrical Schematic Templates
156
157 158
Using Mechanical Engineering Templates: An Overview

Mechanical Templates
161
161
Using Process Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Ortho Piping Templates PFD and P&ID Templates Plot Plan Templates Process Block Diagramming Templates
165
166 168 171 173

Save as Template Command (File Menu) Organizational Chart Wizard (Tools Menu)
178
178 178
DRAWING BASIC ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Drawing Lines: An Overview

Draw a Line Draw a Point
179 181
181 182

Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) Line Ribbon Point Command Point Ribbon
183
183 183 184 184
Drawing Connectors: An Overview

Place a Connector Modify a Connector Format a Connector Attach a Connector to an Object Merge Connectors Split a Connector
186
187 189 192 192 193 193

Connector Command (Draw Toolbar) Connector Ribbon
194
194 194
Drawing Doublelines: An Overview

Draw a Doubleline
197
197

Place Doubleline Command (Draw Toolbar) Place Doubleline Ribbon
199
199 199
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses: An Overview Draw Circles

Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points Draw a Circle by Center Point Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements
201 202
202 202 203

Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)
205
205
vi SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Table of Contents
Circle by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Tangent Circle Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle Ribbon 205 205 205
Draw Arcs
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points Draw an Arc by Center Point Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements Draw Connected Lines and Arcs Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch Draw a Curve Insert a Node into a Curve Delete a Node from a Curve Change the Curve Type
207
207 208 208 209 210 211 212 212 213

Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc By Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Tangent Arc Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc Ribbon Curve Command (Draw Toolbar) Curve Ribbon
214
214 214 214 215 215 215
Draw Ellipses
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points Draw an Ellipse by Center Point
218
218 219

Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse Ribbon
220
220 220 220
Drawing Squares and Rectangles: An Overview

Draw a Rectangle or Square Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch
222
222 224

Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar) Rectangle Ribbon
225
225 225
Drawing FreeForm Shapes: An Overview

Draw a Line with FreeSketch Draw a Circle with FreeSketch Draw an Arc with FreeSketch Draw a Curve with FreeForm
226
227 228 229 229

FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar) FreeSketch Ribbon FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) FreeForm Ribbon
231
231 231 232 232
Creating Isometric Drawings: An Overview

Draw an Isometric Circle Draw an Isometric Line Draw an Isometric Rectangle
233
234 234 235

Isometric Circle Command Isometric Circle Ribbon
237
237 237
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide vii
Table of Contents
Isometric Line Command Isometric Line Ribbon Isometric Rectangle Command Isometric Rectangle Ribbon 238 239 239 239
SELECTING, MOVING, & COPYING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Selecting Elements: An Overview

Select an Element
241 243
244

Select Tool (Draw Toolbar) Select Tool Ribbon Select All Command (Edit Menu) Undo Command (Edit Menu) Redo Command (Edit Menu)
247
247 247 248 248 248
Moving Elements: An Overview

Move an Element with the Select Tool Move an Element Precisely
249
251 251

Move Command (Change Toolbar) Move Ribbon
252
252 252
Copying and Pasting Elements: An Overview

Copy an Element Copy an Element with the Select Tool Copy a Format Paste an Element Paste an Element with a Different Format Offset Elements
253
253 253 254 254 255 255

Copy Command (Edit Menu) Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) Paste Command (Edit Menu) Paste Special Command (Edit Menu) Paste Special Dialog Box Offset Command Offset Ribbon
257
257 257 257 257 258 258 258
Creating Patterns: An Overview

Draw a Circular Pattern Draw a Rectangular Pattern
260
260 260

Circular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar) Circular Pattern Ribbon Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar) Rectangular Pattern Ribbon Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box
262
262 262 262 263 263 264
Cutting or Deleting Elements: An Overview

Cut an Element Delete an Element
265
265 265
viii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Table of Contents Commands and Dialog Boxes

Cut Command (Edit Menu) Delete Command (Edit Menu)
267
267 267
ADDING TEXT TO DOCUMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Placing Annotations: An Overview

Place a Text Box Place a Balloon Move an Annotation Move a Text Box Delete Text in a Text Box Use Spell Checker Apply a Border to a Text Box Edit a Text Box Resize a Text Box Insert a Font Character into a Text Box Add a Leader Insert a Vertex in a Leader Delete a Vertex from a Leader
268 269
271 272 273 275 275 276 277 277 277 277 278 279 280

Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Text Box Ribbon Text Box Properties Dialog Box Balloon Command (Dimension Toolbar) Balloon Ribbon Balloon Properties Dialog Box Spelling Command (Tools Menu) Spelling Dialog Box Character Map Command (Tools Menu) Unicode Character Map Dialog Box Leader Command (Dimension Toolbar) Leader Ribbon Leader Properties Dialog Box
282
282 282 284 291 291 292 293 294 295 295 296 296 297
Labels: An Overview
Create a Text Label Edit a Text Label Move a Label Place a SmartLabel Place Multiple Labels Edit a SmartLabel Engineering Fonts
298
300 300 300 300 301 301 302
DRAWING WITH RELATIONSHIPS: AN OVERVIEW Using Relationships as You Draw: An Overview Intent Zones
Draw with Relationships Suspend Relationships Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command Delete a Relationship
303 306 308

310 310 311 311
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide ix
Table of Contents
Maintain Relationships Display or Hide Relationship Handles Lock an Element or Key Point Insert a Detail View 311 311 312 312

Relationships Command (Main Toolbar) Alignment Indicator Command (Tools Menu) SmartSketch Settings Command (Tools Menu) SmartSketch Dialog Box Maintain Relationships Command (Tools Menu) Relationship Handles Command (Tools Menu) Lock Command (Relationship Toolbar) Detail View Command (Insert Menu) Detail View Ribbon
314
314 314 314 315 316 316 316 316 316
Sample Workflows
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line Draw a Line Draw an Arc Draw a Horizontal Line Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained Connect Points While Drawing a Line Connect Points While Modifying a Line Establish More Than One Relationship
318
318 319 319 320 321 322 323 324
DRAWING PRECISELY: AN OVERVIEW Placing Elements in Precise Locations: An Overview

Draw with PinPoint Re-Orient PinPoint
325 326
327 327

PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) PinPoint Ribbon Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon
329
329 329 330
Placing Elements with a Grid: An Overview

Place Elements With a Grid
331
331

Grid Display Command (View Menu) Grid Snap Command (View Menu)
333
333 333
Dimensioning Drawing Elements: An Overview

Types of Dimensions
334
337
Dimension Groups
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points Place a Dimension Group Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group Set a Dimension Axis Set the Dimension Type Edit a Dimension Prefix Set the Dimension Units Move a Dimension
339
340 341 343 344 347 348 348 349 349
x SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Table of Contents
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements Place a Driving Dimension Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element 351 352 353 353

Dimension Command (Main Toolbar) Dimension Ribbon Dimension Properties Dialog Box Angle Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) Axis Command (Dimension Toolbar) Coordinate Dimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) Distance Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) Dimension Prefix Dialog Box Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) Symmetric Command (Relationship Toolbar) Symmetric Diameter Command (Dimension Toolbar)
355
355 355 359 366 366 367 367 368 368 369 370 370
Setting Paper and Model Units: An Overview

Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet
372
373
Measuring Distances and Areas: An Overview

Measure an Area Measure a Distance
375
375 376
Bearing and Azimuth

Set Bearing and Azimuth
378
378

Measure Area Command (Tools Menu) Measure Distance Command (Tools Menu) Bearing and Azimuth Command Set Bearing Dialog Box
379
379 379 380 380
Using the Variable Table: An Overview

Create a Variable with a Value or Expression Edit an Existing Variable Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet Edit a Formula Containing a Function Insert a Function Into a Formula Format a Column
381
383 384 385 386 387 387 388

Variables Command (Tools Menu) Variable Table Dialog Box Filter Command (Shortcut Menu) Filter Dialog Box Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box Open Source Command Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
389
389 389 391 392 392 393 394 394
Sample Workflows
Example: Draw a Line with PinPoint Place a Doubleline Precisely Measure the Length of a Line
395
395 395 396
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xi
Table of Contents
Dimension the Length of a Line Dimension the Diameter of a Circle Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values Creating a Variable with an External Function or Subroutine Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet 397 397 398 398 400
TRANSFORMING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Changing the Shape of an Element: An Overview

Modify an Element with the Select Tool
403 405
405
Rotating Elements: An Overview

Rotate an Element
407
407

Rotate Command (Change Toolbar) Rotate Ribbon
409
409 409
Mirroring Elements: An Overview

Mirror an Element
412
412

Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) Mirror Ribbon
414
414 414
Scaling Elements: An Overview

Scale an Element Scale an Element with Its Handles Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size
415
415 416 417

Scale Command (Change Toolbar) Scale Ribbon
418
418 418
Extending or Trimming Elements: An Overview

Extend an Element Trim an Element Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements Draw a Chamfer Draw a Fillet
419
420 421 421 422 425

Extend to Next Command (Draw Toolbar) Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) Trim Corner Command (Draw Toolbar) Chamfer Command (Draw Toolbar) Chamfer Ribbon Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) Fillet Ribbon
427
427 427 427 427 428 429 429
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements: An Overview

Make Elements Concentric Make Elements Parallel Make Elements Perpendicular Connect Elements Make Elements Tangent Make Elements Equal Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical
430
433 433 433 434 434 435 435
xii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Table of Contents
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis 436

Change Command (Main Toolbar) Colinear Command (Relationship Toolbar) Concentric Command (Relationship Toolbar) Connect Command (Relationship Toolbar) Equal Command (Relationship Toolbar) Horizontal/Vertical Command (Relationship Toolbar) Parallel Command (Relationship Toolbar) Perpendicular Command (Relationship Toolbar) Tangent Command (Relationship Toolbar)
437
437 437 437 437 437 438 438 438 438
ARRANGING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Grouping Elements: An Overview

Group or Ungroup Elements
439 440
441

Group Command (Change Toolbar) Group Ribbon Group Properties Dialog Box UnGroup Command (Change Toolbar)
443
443 443 444 444
Element Display Priority: An Overview

Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order Pull an Element Up in the Display Order Push an Element Down in the Display Order
446
446 447 447 447

Bring to Front Command (Change Toolbar) Send To Back Command (Change Toolbar) Pull Up Command (Change Toolbar) Push Down Command (Change Toolbar)
448
448 448 448 448
Using Layers to Arrange Elements: An Overview

Control the Display of Elements in a Window Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers Create a Layer Display or Hide Layers Change the Layer of an Element Change the Active Layer Create a Layer Group Modify Layers in a Layer Group Delete a Layer Group Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group
449
450 451 451 452 452 453 453 453 453 454

Colors Dialog Box Layers Command (Tools Menu) Layers Ribbon Layer Display Dialog Box Change Layer Dialog Box Layer Groups Command (Tools Menu) Groups Dialog Box Display Manager Command (Tools Menu)
455
455 455 455 456 457 457 457 458
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xiii
Table of Contents
Display Manager Dialog Box 459
USING SYMBOLS IN DOCUMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Creating Symbols: An Overview

Create a Symbol
462 462
462

Create Symbol Command (Draw Toolbar)
464
464
The Symbol Explorer: An Overview

Open a Symbol Library View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer View Documents with the Symbol Explorer Close the Symbol Explorer Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer Move the Symbol Explorer Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer
464
466 467 467 468 469 469 470 470 471 471

Symbol Explorer Command (Main Toolbar) Symbol Explorer Window Show Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu) View File Type Command (Shortcut Menu) Delete Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)
472
472 472 473 473 474
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles: An Overview

Associate a Symbol with an Element
475
477
Placing Symbols: An Overview

Place a Symbol Place Copies of a Symbol
479
479 481

Place Here Command (Shortcut Menu) Stamp Here Command (Shortcut Menu)
483
483 483
Editing Symbols: An Overview

Edit a Symbol Edit Symbol Properties
484
485 486

Symbol Properties Dialog Box Convert Command (Symbols Shortcut Menu)
488
488 489
Scaling Symbols: An Overview

Scale a Symbol
490
490
Mirroring Symbols: An Overview

Mirror a Symbol
492
492
Rotating Symbols: An Overview

Rotate a Symbol
493
494
Manipulating Symbols: An Overview

Manipulate a Symbol Unlock a Symbol From an Element Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points
495
496 496 497
xiv SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Table of Contents Mechanism Modeling: An Overview Sample Workflow

Create a Kinematics Animation
498 499
499
WORKING WITH ATTRIBUTES: AN OVERVIEW

Display the Attribute Viewer Move the Attribute Viewer Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer Edit Attributes Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set Create a Symbol Report Update a Symbol Report Reports
503
504 504 504 505 506 506 507 507

Attribute Viewer Dialog Box
509
509
MANAGING STYLES, FORMATS, AND COLORS: AN OVERVIEW Applying Formats with Styles: An Overview
Apply a Style Apply a Style to a Group of Elements Format Part of an Element Rename a Style Delete a Style Create a Style Using a Formatted Element Create a Style with the Style Command Change the Formats of a Style Save a Style to a Template Add Styles to the Current Document
510 511
513 513 513 514 514 515 515 515 516 516

Style Command (Format Menu) Style Dialog Box New Line Style Dialog Box New Text Box Style Dialog Box New Dimension Style Dialog Box Modify Line Style Dialog Box Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box Segmented Style Command Reapply Style Dialog Box Style Resources Dialog Box
518
518 518 520 521 521 521 521 521 522 522 523
Applying Unique Formats: An Overview

Format a Geometric Element Format a Text Box Format a Dimension or Annotation
523
524 525 525

Properties Command (Edit Menu) Element Properties Dialog Box Line Command (Format Menu) Format Line Dialog Box
527
527 527 534 534
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xv
Table of Contents
Text Box Command (Format Menu) Dimension Command (Format Menu) Format Dimension Dialog Box SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box 534 534 534 535
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries: An Overview

Place a Fill Format a Fill Create a Fill Color Refill a Modified Boundary
537
538 539 539 540

Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) Fill Properties Dialog Box Fill Ribbon Custom Color Name Dialog Box
541
541 541 541 542
Sample Workflows
Formatting a New Drawing Formatting an Existing Drawing
543
543 543
WORKING WITH OLE OBJECTS: AN OVERVIEW How Embedding Works: An Overview

Embed an Object Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software
545 549
550 551

Object Command (Insert Menu) Insert Object Dialog Box
553
553 553
How Linking Works: An Overview

Link an Object Open an OLE Object for Editing Edit a Link Change a Link Break a Link Close an Object's Document and Save the Changes
555
556 557 557 558 558 558

Links Command (Edit Menu) Links Dialog Box
560
560 560
CUSTOMIZING SMARTSKETCH: AN OVERVIEW Add-Ins Included with the Software

Customize the Software with the Options Command Create a New Toolbar Add a Button to a Toolbar Remove a Command from a Toolbar Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings Run a Macro Create a New Menu Add a Command to a Menu Delete a Command From a Menu Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings
561 562
563 563 563 564 564 564 564 565 565 566
xvi SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Table of Contents
Installing Additional Tools Install or Remove an Add-In 566 566

Add-Ins Command (Tools Menu) Customize Command (Tools Menu) Customize Dialog Box Toolbars Command (View Menu) Toolbars Dialog Box Macro Command (Tools Menu) Run Macro Dialog Box
568
568 568 569 570 570 571 571
Sample Workflow
Customizing a Toolbar
573
573
IMAGE INTEGRATION: AN OVERVIEW Working with Raster Images

Insert a Raster Image Position an Image by Dragging: Position an Image by a Single Click: Select a Rectangular Area of an Image Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image Fill an Image Area with Color Invert Colors in an Image View Image Properties Undo Changes to Images Redo Changes to Images Save Changes to a Linked Image Save as Image
575 575
577 577 578 579 580 581 582 582 583 583 584 584 584

Image Command (Insert Menu and Image Integrator Toolbar) Position Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Rectangular Select Area Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Polygonal Select Area Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Contrast and Brightness Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box Fill Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Fill Dialog Box Image Properties Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Image Properties Dialog Box Image Undo Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Image Redo Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Invert Command (Image Integrator Toolbar) Save as Image Command (File Menu) Save as Image Dialog Box Save Selected Image(s) Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
586
586 586 586 587 588 588 589 590 590 592 593 593 593 594 594 595
SYMBOL AUTHORING: AN OVERVIEW Planning Your Symbol: An Overview

Define Symbol Properties
597 597
598
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xvii
Table of Contents
Define Handles for a Symbol Create a Parametric Symbol Add a Symbol Attribute Modify a Symbol Attribute Remove an Attribute from a Symbol Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document Redefine the Origin of a Symbol Define an Icon for a Symbol 599 599 602 602 603 603 606 606
Managing Text in Symbols: An Overview

Define Smart Text Attributes for a SmartLabel Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol Define a Text-Driven Symbol Create a Leader for a SmartText Label
607
607 608 608 610
Integrating Programs with Your Symbol: An Overview

Add Commands to the Shortcut Menu for a Symbol Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol
611
611 612
Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols: An Overview

Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking
614
614
Defining SmartPoints: An Overview

Place a SmartPoint with Connect Point Attributes Place a SmartPoint with Drag Point Attributes Place a SmartPoint with Drop Point Attributes Edit SmartPoints for a Symbol
616
617 617 618 618
Symbol Lookup Tables: An Overview

Set Up an ODBC Data Source Generate a Lookup Table
620
620 621

SmartPoint Properties Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar) SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box Symbol Origin Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar) Symbol Properties Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar) Define Symbol Properties Dialog Box Lookup Table Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar) Lookup Table Dialog Box Symbol Representation Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar) Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box SmartText Editor Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar) SmartText Editor Dialog Box
622
622 622 624 624 625 630 631 632 633 633 634
USING THE INTERNET: AN OVERVIEW

Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer
635
636
Hyperlinks
Insert a Hyperlink Edit a Hyperlink Delete a Hyperlink Follow a Hyperlink ActiveCGM Save a Document as a Web Page
637
637 638 639 639 640 641
Commands and Dialog Boxes xviii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
642
Table of Contents
Hyperlink Command (File Menu) Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu) Save as Web Page Command (File Menu) Save as Web Page Dialog Box 642 642 642 643 643 643 643 644
WORKING WITH CAD DRAWINGS: AN OVERVIEW Working with MicroStation Files: An Overview
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export Open a MicroStation Document Place MicroStation Information in the Document Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File Add MicroStation Linestyles to a Document MicroStation Cells in Your Document Open a MicroStation Cell Library MicroStation Construction Class Information
645 646
648 652 657 660 661 663 663 664 665 666 666 667

MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box
668
669 671
Working with AutoCAD Files: An Overview

AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export Open an AutoCAD Document Place AutoCAD Information in the Document Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File
673
675 679 684 687 688 690 690

AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box
692
692 694
INDEX
697
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xix
What's New in SmartSketch v4.0: An Overview
What's New in SmartSketch v4.0: An Overview

AutoCAD/MicroStation Translator Enhancements
Improved Data Fidelity - When translating a .dgn or .dwg document, blocks and cells containing attribute or tag data are now translated into symbols with SmartLabels that display the attribute data. Reference File Layer Control - You have more control over reference files with the ability to turn on or off the display of layers in your AutoCAD and MicroStation reference files. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Productivity Enhancements
Improved product performance - Faster file open, faster display of objects and faster updates - upon opening a file, a "lightweight" representation of each object (instead of the whole object) is loaded into memory. Once selected or modified, the whole object is then loaded into memory. Format Painter command - Copy a selected object's format, including color, line weight, line style, and font, and apply it to other objects as you select them, whether the objects are similar or not. Save as Image command - Write the graphics on the current drawing sheet or defined area to a standard image file. Editable options include image file format, compression factor, and resolution. Enhanced view options - Turn off the display of the drawing sheet as well as specify whether the sheet outline is to be used during a fit. Detail View command - Insert a detail view based on graphics inside a user-defined envelope. You can further refine the detailed view by selecting a scale factor from 1.5 to 10. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 1
What's New in SmartSketch v4.0: An Overview Improved PinPoint tool - Enhanced PinPoint ribbon now provides four additional placement modes for precision placement of geometry: Relative Tracking moves the PinPoint target to last point clicked during a drawing command. Define Point Origin activates an additional ribbon bar containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for PinPoint. Save Document Origin saves the currently displayed X and Y values to the document. Reposition Target to Origin moves the PinPoint target to the X, Y position saved using Save Document Origin. Edit common attributes within a select set - If multiple symbols containing the same attributes are selected, these command attributes will be displayed in the attribute viewer for editing. Any changes made to one symbol's attributes is applied to all selected symbols. Enhanced options on the Connector ribbon: The Split Connector button splits a selected connector at a point defined by a single mouse click. Or use it to identify a symbol and split the connector based on the best two points on that symbol the resulting new connector is given the same properties as the original connector. The Merge Connector button allows you to select two connectors and merge them into one.
Improved Label placement and editing - New labels placed on a symbol will be glued to the symbol so that they move when the symbol is moved. You can also associate multiple labels to symbols. Improved hyperlinking to include logical names - Now the logical name of the default hyperlink displays as a tool tip when the mouse passes over an object containing an hyperlink. Logical names are also displayed on the shortcut menu for the Hyperlink command. Spell Checker - Uses Microsoft Word's Spell Checker to find possible spelling errors in all text boxes on the current drawing sheet. Enhanced file linking Linked objects inserted into a
2 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
What's New in SmartSketch v4.0: An Overview SmartSketch drawing are saved as relative links, increasing the portability of your drawings.
Symbol Enhancements
Single-click symbol placement - Select a symbol from Symbol Explorer and place multiple copies in your drawing sheet without having to drag it in mouse down mode. Improved Attribute Viewer: Edit displayed attributes before and during symbol placement. Use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute Viewer values.
Improved Symbol Authoring: The SmartPoint Properties dialog box allows you to place "smartpoints" which have one or more of the following behaviors: Connect Point, Drop Point, or Drag Point. New symbol behavior that allows a symbol to split elements on drop. Intended primarily to split connectors when placing an inline symbol, it will also split most other elements. More easily identifiable SmartPoint graphics.
Symbol Lookup tables - Ideal for use with Ortho and Structural content, these tables allow you to drive parameters of a symbol using data from spreadsheet, database, or any other ODBC data source. Important
To use the Improved Symbol Authoring and Symbol Lookup tables enhancements, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 3
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview

SmartSketch, formerly known as Imagineer Technical or Imagination Engineer, is the only desktop application that gives you the power to create quick sketches, complex engineering designs, production drawings, plot plans, schematics, business diagrams, and more. Industry solution templates with numerous symbols available for SmartSketch Sketch ideas spontaneously and accurately, instantly transforming them into precise CAD geometry What-if scenarios and testing real-world models reduce prototyping time Merge your designs with AutoCAD and MicroStation using the module for translation Add text and spreadsheets from Word, Excel, and PowerPoint; integrate with popular databases Share drawing data across the World Wide Web using the module for Web publishing
Industry Solutions Available in SmartSketch and in Additional Modules

Get a quick start in projects with workflow templates tailored to different industries including: Process: Process Flow Diagrams, P&ID, Electrical Schematics, Ortho Piping, Control Loop, Process Block Diagramming Business Diagrams: Workflow Diagramming, Basic Diagramming, Office Layout, Flowcharts, Organization Charts, Network Diagrams Network Diagram Technical Drawing Mapping: Atlas Mapping, Directional Mapping AEC: Architecture, Construction, HVAC, Plot Plans, Site, Landscape Mechanical: Mechanical Drawings (ANSI & ISO)
SmartSketch Works with Leading CAD Products

Unlike most low-end sketching and drawing products, SmartSketch supports major existing CAD environments such as AutoCAD and MicroStation. You have full import and export capabilities for traditional CAD data. In addition, you can work with .dgn and .dwg data in native formatsas if these formats were OLE-enabled. Acting as wrappers around foreign data, OLE servers allow you to simply drag AutoCAD or MicroStation data into SmartSketch. You can even locate points in the CAD geometry and work directly off those points in your SmartSketch document. This capabilitygiving you live access to legacy datamakes SmartSketch a powerful tool on your desktop.
Installing SmartSketch: An Overview

You can install SmartSketch 4.0 on an individual workstation or deploy it via a network. The following specifications are required in order to install SmartSketch 4.0 on a workstation: Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows ME, Windows 98, or Windows NT SP4 or higher Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher to view Programming guide. Pentium 133 microprocessor or higher 64 MB RAM recommended 83 MB disk space for minimum installation (175 MB disk recommended) CD-ROM drive 800 x 600 resolution or higher Microsoft or Microsoft-compatible mouse (IntelliMouse recommended)
Prior to running a silent setup of SmartSketch over a network, the System Management Services (SMS) administrator should ensure the following: 1. All existing versions of SmartSketch should be uninstalled prior to network installation. 2. The client machines should not have a directory by the same name to which SmartSketch is to be installed. 3. The client machine should have the following free disk space available: TEMP Dir Drive: 3000 kb System Drive : 4800 kb Additional hard drive space for Typical installation: 123,000 kb Additional hard drive space for Compact installation: 59, 000 kb Additional hard drive space for Custom installation: 165, 000 kb
Important The figures shown above are the maximum disk space that the product can use because of the file system overhead.
System Management Services (SMS) Support

Prior to installing SmartSketch, the SMS administrator should ensure the following before running a silent setup over a network: All existing versions of SmartSketch should be uninstalled prior to network installation. 1. The client machines should not have a directory by the same name to which SmartSketch is to be installed. 2. The client machine should have the following free disk space available: Note: The figures shown above are the maximum disk space that the product can use because of the file system overhead. TEMP Dir Drive: 3000 kb System Drive : 4800 kb Additional hard drive space for Typical installation: 123,000 kb Additional hard drive space for Compact installation: 59, 000 kb Additional hard drive space for Custom installation: 165, 000 kb
Three response (.iss) files are included with the product. The administrator can use them or create a customized .iss file by running Setup r from a command line.
Recording your own .iss file:

1. Choose No to indicate not to reboot the machine after installation. The setup will update the system when it is next rebooted. Note: If you must choose Yes to reboot immediately after setup, edit the .iss file you created as follows: in the Data keynames section, change the BootOption=O for [SdFinishReboot-0] to BootOption=3.
2. In the [File Transfer] section change OverwriteReadOnly=NoToAll to OverwriteReadOnly=YesToAll. A PDF file is also provided for use with the SMS server. You may create you own PDF file or import the one that is provided.
Setup.log
Setup.log is the default name for the silent setup log file, and its default location is Dis in the same folder as Setup.ins. You can specify a different name and location for Setup.log using the -f1 and -f2 switches with Setup.exe The Setup.log file contains three sections. The first section, [InstallShield Silent], identifies the version of InstallShield Silent used in the silent setup. It also identifies the file as a log file. The second section, [Application], identifies the installed application's name and version, and the company name. The third section, [ResponseResult], contains the result code indicating whether or not the silent setup succeeded. An integer value is assigned to the ResultCode keyname in the [ResponseResult] section. Setup places one of the following return values after the ResultCode keyname: 0 Success. -1 General error. -2 Invalid mode. -3 Required data not found in the Setup.iss file. -4 Not enough memory available. -5 File does not exist. -6 Cannot write to the response file. -7 Unable to write to the log file. -8 Invalid path to the InstallShield Silent response file. -9 Not a valid list type (string or number). -10 Data type is invalid. -11 Unknown error during setup. -12 Dialog boxes are out of order. -51 Cannot create the specified folder. -52 Cannot access the specified file or folder. -53 Invalid option selected.
The Setup.log file for a successful silent setup of SmartSketch is illustrated as follows: [InstallShield Silent] Version=v5.00.000 File=Log File [ Application] Name=SmartSketch LE Version=03.00
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Company=Intergraph Corporation Lang=0009 [ResponseResult] ResultCode=0
Setup.exe
Setup.exe is the main setup executable; it performs setup initialization and launches the appropriate Setup engine file (_instxxx.ex_, where xxx indicates the target platform) to execute the setup script (Setup.ins) on the target system. You can pass command line switches directly to Setup.exe. Syntax Setup [switches] Switches These switches are optional. They are not case sensitive; upper- or lowercase letters can be used: /f<path\CompiledScript> or -f<path\CompiledScript> - Specifies an alternate compiled script. Important Unless the compiled script (.ins file) also resides in the same directory as that of Setup.exe, the full path to the compiled script must be specified. _setup.dll must also reside in the same directory as your .ins file. For example, setup -ftest.ins will launch setup using Test.ins instead of Setup.ins. /f1<path\ResponseFile> or -f1<path\ResponseFile> - Specifies an alternate location and name of the response file (.iss file). Notes If this option is used when running Silent setup, the response file is read from the folder/file specified by<path\ResponseFile>. If this option is used along with the -r option, the response file is written to the folder/file specified by<path\ResponseFile>. If an alternate compiled script is specified using the -f switch, the f1 switch entry must follow the -f switch entry.
/f2<path\LogFile> or -f2<path\LogFile> - Specifies an alternate location and name of the log file created by Silent setup. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 9
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Note By default, Setup.log log file is created and stored in the same directory as that of Setup.ins. Important If an alternate compiled script is specified using the -f switch, the f2 switch entry must follow the -f switch entry.
/m<filename> or -m<filename> - Causes Setup.exe to generate a Management Information Format (.mif) file automatically at the end of the setup. Caution Do not include a paththe .mif file is always placed in the Windows folder. <filename> is optional. If you do not specify a filename, the resulting file will be called Status.mif.
/m1<serial number> or -m1<serial number> - Tells setup to place the indicated serial number in the created .mif file. /m2<locale string> or -m2<locale string> - Tells setup to place the indicated locale in the .mif file. English (ENU) is the default; refer to Microsoft documentation for a complete listing of locale strings. /r or -r - Causes Setup.exe automatically to generate a silent setup file (.iss file), which is a record of the setup input, in the Windows folder. /s or -s - Runs Silent setup to execute a silent setup. /SMS or -SMS - Prevents a network connection and Setup.exe from closing before the setup is complete. This switch works with setups originating from a Windows NT server over a network. Important SMS must be uppercase; this is a case-sensitive switch. /z or -z - Prevents Setup.exe from checking the available memory during initialization. Important This switch is necessary when running a setup on a machine with more than 256 MB of memory; if it is not used, Setup.exe reports insufficient memory and exits.
Comments
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Separate multiple command line switches with a space. But do not put a space inside a command line switch. For example, /r /fInstall.ins is valid, but /r/f Install.ins is not. When using long path and filename expressions with switches, enclose the expressions in double quotation marks. The enclosing double quotes tell the operating system that spaces within the quotation marks are not to be treated as command line delimiters.
Response File
A normal (non-silent) setup receives the necessary input from the user in the form of responses to dialog boxes. However, a silent setup does not prompt the user for input. A silent setup must get its user input from a different source. That source is the file (.iss file). A response file contains information similar to that which an end user would enter as responses to dialog boxes when running a normal setup. Silent setup reads the necessary input from the response file at run time. The format of response files resembles that of an .ini file, but response files have .iss extensions. A response file is a plain text file consisting of sections containing data entries. There are two ways in which you can create an response file: You can run the setup and have the setup record and create the response file for you, or you can write the response file from scratch.
Recording a Response File

You have the option of letting Setup create the response file for you. Simply run your setup with the Setup.exe -r command line parameter. Setup will record all your setup choices in Setup.iss and place the file in the Windows folder. All the Setup dialog box functions write values into the Setup.iss file when Setup runs in record mode (Setup -r).
Manually Creating a Response File

You can also create the response file completely by hand. As mentioned, the Setup.iss file is similar to an .ini file. The sections of a Setup response file must be in the following order: 1. Response File Header Section 2. Response File Application Header Section 3. Response File Dialog Box Sequence Section 4. Response File Dialog Box Data Section SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 11
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Section names are contained in square brackets, as in [InstallShield Silent]. Data entries follow their section names, and consist of <name=value> pairs, as inDlg0=Welcome-0. Follow these steps to create the response file: 1. Create a text file named Setup.iss using any text editor. 2. Enter the silent header into Setup.iss. 3. Enter the application header into Setup.iss. 4. Enter the dialog box sequence into Setup.iss. 5. Enter the dialog box data into Setup.iss. 6. Save and close Setup.iss. Three sample response files (Typical.iss, Compact.iss and Custom.iss) are delivered with the product that may be used for Typical, Compact or Custom setup or help familiarize you with the format.
Response File Header

All response files begin with a response file silent header. The response file silent header allows InstallShield to identify the file as a legitimate InstallShield response file. It also helps to verify that the response file corresponds to an setup created with the proper version of InstallShield. The format of the silent header is shown below. Enter the following lines at the beginning of your Setup.iss file: [InstallShield Silent] Version=v5.00.000 File=Response File
Use v5.00.000 in all response files.
Response File Application Header

The response file application header is the second block of information in the response file, immediately following the response file silent header. The response file application header allows setup developers to identify response files visually. It is not used by the setup script or by Setup.exe. Setup developers can use the application header to identify exactly which setup the response file is for, since it is often difficult to determine this by looking at the dialog box data. The format of the application header is shown below. Enter the following lines into your Setup.iss file below the silent header: 12 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview [Application] Name=SmartSketch Version=04.00 Company=Intergraph Corporation Lang=0009
Response File Dialog Box Sequence

The third block of information in the response file, after the silent header and the application header, is the response file dialog box sequence. The dialog box sequence section lists all dialog boxes you would need to use in a normal setup (including custom dialog boxes), in the order in which they would appear. The dialog boxes are listed under the section heading [DlgOrder]. Note: The dialog box numbering sequence begins at 0. There is no limit to the number of dialog boxes you can list.
The order and the number of dialog boxes are significant. When InstallShield Silent runs, if either the number or the order of the dialog boxes does not match the order or the number of the dialog boxes in the non-silent setup, the silent setup fails and the log file records the failure. Make one entry for each occurrence of a dialog box. A given dialog box may be listed more than once if it appears more than once in the setup. The format for a dialog box sequence entry is Dlg<#>=<DialogIdentifier>. Dlg<#> consists of the letters Dlg and a sequence number. The first dialog box in the setup is Dlg0. Each dialog box after that increments the value of <#> by one. <DialogIdentifier> is in the form functionname-<#>, where functionname is the name of the function that created the dialog box, and <#> represents the sequential order of that particular dialog box in the setup. For custom dialog boxes, you can use any unique alphanumeric name for the functionname portion of <DialogIdentifier>. For example, you could refer to a custom dialog box as MyDialog. If the tenth dialog box in the setup were the second occurrence of the custom dialog box MyDialog, there would be an entry in the dialog box sequence section like this: Dlg9=MyDialog-1
The <DialogIdentifier> expression will be used to identify the dialog box data section for the dialog box. Always end the dialog box sequence section with a statement of the form SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 13
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Count=<number of dialog boxes> that specifies the exact number of dialog boxes listed in the dialog box sequence section. Count every entry. Since dialog box numbering begins with 0, the value of Count will always be 1 greater than the highest <#> value for a dialog box sequence. The example below lists two dialog boxes, the Welcome dialog box and the AskOptions dialog box. Enter your dialog box sequence list into Setup.iss as shown in the example below. [DlgOrder] Dlg0=Welcome-0 Dlg1=AskOptions-0 Count=2
Response File Dialog Box Data Section

The last block of information in a response file is the response file dialog box data. The response file dialog box data is a collection of sections containing the values returned by each dialog box identified in the dialog box sequence section. Each dialog box has its own section. The values listed are the same values that the dialog box returns in a normal, user input-driven setup. The format for a dialog box data section is as follows: [<DialogIdentifier>] Result=value Keyname1=value Keyname2=value
The [<DialogIdentifier>] section header identifies the specific dialog box and is followed by the dialog box data entry list. <DialogIdentifier> is the same expression used to list the dialog box in the dialog box sequence section. Data entry items are in the format keyname=value. The keyname is a name for a value returned by a dialog box and recorded in the response file. All dialog boxes return a value for the keyname Result, reflecting the button that was clicked to end or exit the dialog box. Many dialog boxes will also set or return a value in a variable. For example, in a non-silent setup the AskDestPath dialog box returns the destination location in the svDir parameter. The line in the our script might look like the following: nResult = AskDestPath( szTitle, szMsg, svDir, 0 );
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview The corresponding dialog box data entry in the Setup.iss file for a silent setup might look like the following: [AskDestPath-0] Result=1sz Path=C:\Program Files\SmartSketch
In the previous example, Result=1 is equivalent to clicking the Next button in the dialog box, and szPath=C:\Program Files\SmartSketch is the value returned in the svDir parameter ofAskDestPath. The name of the variable used in the script is meaningless relative to the Setup.iss file. However, in the Setup.iss dialog box data sections, each built-in and Sd dialog box has its own set of keynames which map to its parameters. The keynames are important and must be exact as defined for each dialog box. Refer to Dialog box data keynames list, below.
Result Standard Values

All dialog boxes return a keyname value called Result, indicating which push button was clicked to end the dialog box. Unless otherwise indicated, the Result standard values are: 12 for the Back button 1 for the Next or OK button
Recording Component and Subcomponent Selections

Some dialog box functions allow the user to select components and subcomponents. There are three kinds of dialog box data keyname entries used to record component and subcomponent selections in response files:type, count, and <#> (described below). Every set of component selections and every set of subcomponent selections has one type keyname entry, one count keyname entry, and as many <#> keyname entries as are required to document each individual component or subcomponent selection. When creating keynames to record component selections, precede the type, count, and <#> keyname entries with the word "Component", thus: Component-type Component-count Component-0
When creating keynames to record subcomponent selections, precede the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 15
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview type, count, and <#> keyname entries with the name of the component to which the subcomponents belong, thus: Program Files-type Program Files-count Program Files-0 Program Files-1
To create complete value entries, use the equal sign to attach the values to the keynames. (The types of values assigned to each kind of keyname are described below.) The following example shows complete value entries for two components, Program Files and Binary Files, and two subcomponents of Program Files, Executables and Support Elements: Component-type=string Component-count=2Component-0=Program Files Component-1=Binary Files Program Files-type=string Program Files-count=2 Program Files-0=Executables Program Files-1=Support Elements
Type Keyname Entry

The type keyname indicates the data type of the components or subcomponents list. Since InstallShield dialog boxes currently use only string lists for components and subcomponents lists, type is always equal to "string", as in Component-type=string. Future versions may use number lists, in which case type could equal "number".
Count Keyname Entry

Count is equal to the number of selections for a given component or subcomponent entry. For example, if two components were selected for installation in the ComponentDialog dialog box, the count dialog box data entry would be Component-count=2. If two subcomponents of the Program Files component were selected, there would be a Program Files-count=2 entry.
<#> Keyname Entry

The number portion of the <#> keyname entry is simply a sequential (one-up) 16 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview number, beginning with 0, that numbers each recorded component or subcomponent selection. Since numbering begins with 0, the greatest number value will always be one less than the value of count. The value assigned to a <#> keyname entry is the selected component's or subcomponent's visible name (the string passed as the second parameter to ComponentAddItem when the components or subcomponents list was built). For example, assume the ComponentDialog dialog box offers the user a component selection of Program Files, Help Files, Sample Files, and Utilities. If the user selects Program Files and Help Files, then the dialog box data section for that instance of the ComponentDialog dialog box will have two list item entries and will look something like this: [ComponentDialog-0] szDir=C:\MYAPP\FILES Component-type=string Component-count=2 Component-0=Program Files Component-1=Help FilesResult=1
The following example shows how subcomponent list selections are recorded. The example is for an instance of the SdComponentMult dialog box. The example shows that two componentsProgram Files and Help Fileswere selected. It also shows that four subcomponents were chosenMain Files, Aux. Files, Main Help, and Tutorial Files. Main Files and Aux. Files are subcomponents of Program Files, and Main Help and Tutorial Files subcomponents of Help Files. [SdComponentMult-0] Component-type=string Component-count=2 Component-0=Program Files Component-1=Help Files Program Files-type=string Program Files-count=2 Program Files-0=Main Files Program Files-1=Aux. Files SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 17
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Help Files-type=string Help Files-count=2 Help Files-0=Main Help Help Files-1=Tutorial Files Result=1
Dialog Box Data Keynames List

The dialog box data keynames for the dialog boxes are listed in the following table. The first column contains the dialog box names. The second column lists the keynames applicable to each dialog box. The third column contains descriptions of the values associated with the keynames.
Dialog Box
AskYesNo-<#> Result
Keyname
Description
1=User selected Yes 0=User selected No
SdAskDestPath<#>
Result szDir
Standard values The path entered in the Destination Directory edit Field Standard values Component-type <subcomponent >-type Componentcount, String (the only value currently allowed)
SdComponentMult Result -<#>
The total number of component or subcomponent selections
<subcomponent >-count Componentnumber, The selected item's number in the list (numbering begins with "0")
<subcomponent >-<#> SdConfirmNewDir- Result <#> SdConfirmRegistra Result tion-<#>
1=User selected Yes 0=User selected No 1=User selected Yes

0=User selected No SdFinishReboot<#> Result 1=Finish BootOption 0=Do not restart Windows or the machine 2=Restart Windows 3=Reboot the machine SdLicense-<#> Result 12=Back 1=User selected Yes SdRegisteredUser- Result <#> Standard Values szName szCompany szSerial The text entered in the Company field The text entered in the Serial (number) field SdSelectFolder<#> Result szFolder Standard values The folder name entered in the Program Folder field 12=Back Or, when the Next button is clicked: 301=Typical radio button is currently selected szDir 302=Compact radio button is currently selected 303=Custom radio button is currently selected The path entered in the Destination Directory edit field SdStartCopy-<#> Result SdWelcome-<#> Result Standard values Standard values The text entered in the Name field
SdSetupType->#> Result
Install SmartSketch
SmartSketch automatically uninstalls any previous version of SmartSketch, Imagineer Technical or Imagination Engineer upon installation. 1. Determine whether to install from a CD or the network. Install from the network if you want to load symbols and tutorials in a networked location for distributed access. From a CD-ROM drive: Insert the CD into its drive. If the installation does not start on your Windows system, run Setup from your CD-ROM drive. Click setup.exe. From a Network: From Start on the taskbar, click Run, and enter the path on your network to the SmartSketch setup.exe file.
Tip
Record your installation path for quick reference.
2. Follow the installation instructions on your screen. Choose an installation option from below: Typical Compact Custom
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to finish the installation process. Notes For CD installations, leave the CD in the CD-ROM drive to access tutorials. For network installations, verify the network drive or UNC network connection where the product was installed. We recommend a UNC network connection, such as \\myserver\share\setup, so you can easily access the tutorials after installation.
Uninstall SmartSketch
Important The following procedure only pertains to uninstalling SmartSketch independent of an upgrade to or installation of a newer version of the product.
1. From your Windows desktop click Start > Settings > Control Panel. 20 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview 2. Click Add/Remove Programs. 3. From the program list, select the Intergraph SmartSketch component to remove. Important When uninstalling SmartSketch manually, we recommend the following guidelines: first, remove any installed custom add-in modules (Symbol Authoring, AEC Solutions, etc.), and then remove SmartSketch.
4. Click the Add/Remove button and follow any instructions in the uninstall wizard. Tips The wizard displays progress indicators during the uninstalling process. It is recommended that you reboot your computer after uninstalling SmartSketch.
Exploring the Interface: An Overview

SmartSketch features a standard Microsoft Windows menu bar command structure. You can access all commands from the menu bar directly or by using the command's keyboard shortcut. Additionally, many of the most often used commands are available on the toolbars provided by SmartSketch. These toolbars are completely customizable.
User Interface Components

Menu Bar and Menus Ribbons and Dialog Boxes Toolbars Keyboard Mouse Windows and Views
Menu Bar and Menus

The SmartSketch menu bar allows you to access all commands, divided by workflow or task. When you click a command, a description of the command appears in the message field at the bottom left of the SmartSketch window. You can also click the Help button on the Main toolbar, and then click a menu command to view a description of that command.
Ribbons and Dialog Boxes

Because SmartSketch is Office-Compatible, you will find the ribbons and dialog boxes work just like those in Windows. A unique ribbon appears when you click a specific command or when you select an element. These ribbons help you control various settings for the active command. You can place a ribbon bar only at the top or the bottom of the window. You can drag a ribbon to the top or the bottom, but not to the sides, of the window The following figure shows a ribbon.
Ribbons and dialog boxes contain one or more of the following tools: A check box sets or clears an option. When you click the check box, an X appears to show that the option is set. Clicking the check box again clears it.
Some options give you two or more choices. You can click an option to activate it.
A box accepts a value when you type it and press Tab or Enter. You can edit the text by highlighting it with the mouse and then pressing Backspace or Delete.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview A drop-down list box gives you several options to select from. In some cases, you can also type a value in the field.
A list box allows you to select an item from a list. You can scroll through the list using the scroll bar and double-click an item. Or, you can click an option on the list and then click OK on the dialog box.
Toolbars
Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartSketch. You can show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in your workspace. You can also add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own. To show or hide a toolbar, point to Toolbars on the View menu. The list shows all of the available toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. To show a toolbar that isn't checked, click its name. To hide a toolbar, click the name of the toolbar to clear the check mark. To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar and then drag the toolbar to the new location.
On a toolbar, some command buttons display fly-outs when you click and hold the command button. Fly-outs access commands that are closely associated with the button that you clicked. These types of buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right corner.
To add a command to a toolbar from a menu, click View > Toolbars > Customize and then click the Commands tab. In the Categories list, click the group that contains the command you want to add, and then in the Commands list, click that command and drag it to the toolbar in your workspace. To remove a command from a toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and release it anywhere in the 3D model viewing area (except on another toolbar). If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Dimension toolbar, you can reset the toolbar to its original state: Click View > Toolbars. Click the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to reset. Click Reset.
Click OK.
Using the Keyboard

Use the following keys and key combinations to execute functions or enter commands: Function Keys Control Keys
Standard Control Keys

The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts supported by SmartSketch. You can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter.
Ctrl + A Ctrl + C Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Ctrl + P Ctrl + S Ctrl + V Ctrl + X Ctrl + Y Ctrl + Z Select All Copy Text New Open Print Save Paste Text Cut Text Redo Undo
Function Keys
Certain function keys work only when the appropriate command is active. For instance, F9 through F12 are only available when you use PinPoint. The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Function key equivalents and modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to standard Microsoft Windows conventions.
F1 Shift + F1 F3 Alt + F4 Ctrl + F4 F5 Alt + F5 Ctrl + F7 F9 Ctrl + F9 F10 Help What's This? Help Grid Snap Exit Close File Update Active View Previous Zoom Level Paste From Clipboard Toggle PinPoint Display Cut to Clipboard PinPoint Lock X axis

Shift + F10 F11 F12 Select First Menu Item PinPoint Lock Y axis Reset PinPoint Home
Using the Mouse

Use a standard mouse or a Microsoft IntelliMouse to quickly and efficiently manipulate different views of the drawing. Use the left mouse button to do the following: Select multiple elements by dragging to fence them. Drag a selected element. Click or drag to draw an element. Select a menu or toolbar command. Double-click to activate an embedded or linked object.
Use the right mouse button to do the following: Restart a command. Display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. The commands on the menu depend upon your mouse location and which elements, if any, are selected.
You can also use the mouse to locate objects. As you move the pointer around on the drawing sheet, objects under the mouse change to a highlight color to indicate that they have been located. When you move the mouse away from a highlighted object, the object returns to its original color.
Microsoft IntelliMouse Pointing Device

You can use the Microsoft IntelliMouse with the software so that you can 26 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview manipulate different views of the document faster and more efficiently. Caution The newest version of Microsoft IntelliPoint Drivers (2.2) supports universal scrolling. Universal scrolling allows you to scroll up and down in any window that displays scroll bars by using the wheel button on the IntelliMouse. Universal scrolling prohibits the recognition of the scrolling behavior defined for the software. You must, therefore, identify the name of the software and any other applications as exceptions to universal scrolling.
When you do this: Rotate the wheel button forward Rotate the wheel button backwards Drag the wheel button Press Ctrl and drag the wheel button Press Shift and click the wheel button Press Alt and click the wheel button
The view does this: Zooms in at the current pointer location Zooms out at the current pointer location Pans from one location to another Zooms the area of the window that you defined by dragging the pointer Fits the graphics on the document to the window Restores the previous view
Tip You can perform any of these actions with a three-button mouse; you click the middle mouse button, instead of the wheel button. No action occurs when you click the wheel button just one time.

1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel. 2. Select the Mouse icon. 3. On the Mouse Properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab. 4. In the Universal Scrolling area of the dialog box, click Exceptions. 5. On the Exceptions for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click Add. 6. On the Add Exception for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click to open the Program Files folder. Next, click SmartSketch > Program > draft.exe. Then click Open. 7. Accept the new settings. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 27
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Note The appropriate IntelliMouse drivers, or equivalent, must be installed in order to see the wheel tab on the mouse properties dialog.
Viewing Your Work

You can manipulate windows and views to affect how you see a document on the computer screen. A window can be compared to a camera. When you look through a camera, you see a view of a real-world object. When you look through a window on the computer screen, you see a view of the objects in the document. In both cases, you can change the view by zooming in and out, and focusing on different parts of the document. You can also use the Microsoft IntelliMouse to zoom or pan views.
Windows
When you start the software, the application window displays a blank document. You can use commands on the File menu to create a new document or open an existing one. With the commands on the Window menu, you can create and arrange new windows that allow you to see more than one section of a document or more than one document. You can minimize open windows and display them as icons in the application work space.
Views
Views are what you see in software windows. With the view commands, you can do the following: Use Zoom Area to set the zoom area to see more detail in the document. Use Zoom In to enlarge the display of elements around a specified point in the document. Use Zoom Out to reduce the display of elements around a specified point in the document. Use Pan to position another part of the document in the center of a view, fit all of the document in a view, or identify the area of the document you want to see. Use Fit to restore the previous view of the document. Use Previous to restore the previous view.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Use Toolbars to display or hide toolbars in the application window.
Drawing Sheets
With drawing sheets, you can place different drawings on different sheets in a document. Working sheets are the drawing sheets on which you place most of your graphics. Background sheets are drawing sheets that allow you to define and display the border of a drawing sheet.
Restore a View
Click View > Previous. Notes You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu. You can also select the Previous option by right mouse clicking within the drawing area. You can also press Alt and click the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel to restore the view. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press <F5>.
Fit All Elements in the Active View

On the Main toolbar, click Fit Note If you have a Microsoft IntelliMouse, you can press Shift and click the mouse wheel to fit the view. .
Pan a View
1. On the Main toolbar, click Pan 2. Click in the view you want to pan. 3. Click in the view again to show how far you want to pan. Notes You can also drag the pointer to pan the view. When you drag using the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel, the view SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 29 .
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview pans. Click the wheel to start the pan, then click when the pan is complete. When you press and drag the mouse wheel and move the pointer from one location to another, the view pans from one location to another. To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press <F5>. To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.
Zoom Area
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area . 2. On the drawing sheet, drag around the area that you want to zoom in on. The view zooms in on the area you fenced with the pointer. Notes When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view zooms in at the current pointer location. You can also press Ctrl and drag the mouse wheel to zoom an area or window. To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press <F5>. To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.
Zoom In
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom In 2. Click the view. Notes You can drag to dynamically zoom in the view. When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view .
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview zooms in at the current pointer location. To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press <F5>. To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.
Zoom Out
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Out 2. Click the view. Notes You can drag to dynamically zoom out of the view. When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel backward, the view zooms out at the current pointer location. To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press <F5>. To exit the command, right-click or press ESC. .
Switch to Another Open Document

When multiple documents are open, you can switch between documents. Only one document at a time, called the active working document, can receive input. To switch between multiple documents, do one of the following: If you can see a portion of the document that you want to switch to, click its window. On the Window menu, click the document you want to work in. The document is displayed on top of other open documents.

Cascade Command (Window Menu)
Overlaps windows diagonally across the screen. Tip Cascade Windows is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Fit Command (View Menu)

Fits all visible elements in the active view. Tip You can also right-click to access Fit on the shortcut menu. If a selection is defined only those elements in the selection set are fitted.
New Window Command (Window Menu)

Opens a new window that displays the same document as the active window. The new window appears on top of all the other windows and becomes the active window. If you change the contents of the open document in one window, the other windows that contain the same document reflect the changes.
Tip New Window is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Pan Command (View Menu)

Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a document to see other areas of the drawing or model. Tip You can also right-click to access Pan on the shortcut menu.
Previous Command (View Menu)

Restores the previous view. Tip Previous View is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu. You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.
Window List Command (Window Menu)

Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list.
Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)

Arranges windows to fit horizontally on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen.
Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu)

Arranges windows to fit vertically on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen.
Zoom Area Command (View Menu)

Enlarges the display of elements in the active window. Notes If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom an area by holding Ctrl, pressing the mouse wheel or middle mouse button, and dragging the pointer. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5. You can also right-click to access Zoom Area on the shortcut menu.
Zoom In Command (View Menu)

Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point in the active window. Notes If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5. You can also right-click to access Zoom In on the shortcut menu.
Zoom Out Command (View Menu)

Reduces the display of elements around a specified point in the active window. Notes You can also zoom out by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5. You can also right-click to access Zoom Out on the shortcut menu.
Getting Help for AutoCAD Users: An Overview

This Help provides you with information about how you can use your AutoCAD files with SmartSketch to get the most out of both systems. A command comparison and task comparison will help the AutoCAD user become familiar with SmartSketch terminology.
Command Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch

This command comparison lists AutoCAD commands and their equivalent commands in SmartSketch. AutoCAD A Arc ...Center Start Angle ...Center Start End ...Center Start Length ...Start Center Angle ...Start Center End ...Start Center Length ...Start End Angle ...Start End Direction Area Array .....Polar ....Rectangular B Block C Change 36 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Arc By Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc By Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc By Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Measure Area Command (Tools Menu) Circular Pattern Command (flyout on the Change Toolbar) Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar) Symbols Properties Command (Edit Menu) and Style Command (Format Menu)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...color ...endpoint ...layer ...linetype ...style Circle ...2 Point Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) Circle by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) and Tangent Circle Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Tangent Circle Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Style Command (Format Menu) or the command ribbon. Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Copy Command (Change Toolbar) Copy Command (Change Toolbar) or Move Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option
...3 Point ...Center Radius ...Tangent Radius Color
Copy ...Multiple ...Single
D DIM ...diameter ...horizontal ...leader ...style Dimension ...Radius ...Save ...Variables ...Vertical
SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) Distance Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) Leader Command (Dimension Toolbar) Style Command (Format Menu) SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) Dimension Command (Format Menu) Dimension Command (Format Menu) SmartDimension Command (Dimension SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 37
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Toolbar) Open Command (File Menu) (choose a dxf format document) Save As Command (File Menu) (use the dxf file format)
DxfIn
DxfOut E Ellipse ....Center ... Axis Endpoint End Erase ...multiple objects ...single object Extend F Fillet G Grid H Hatch ...Single Hatch I J K L Layer ...OFF ...ON Line ...Line ...Osnap TAN
Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Exit Command (File Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Delete Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Delete Command (Edit Menu) Extend to Next Command (Draw Toolbar) (use direct manipulation of the handles.) Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and PinPoint Command (Tools Menu)
Style Command (Format Menu) and Fill Command (Draw Toolbar)
Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...perp Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) and SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Style Command (Format Menu) Properties Command (Edit Menu) Not Applicable Toolbars and Shortcut menus Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Move Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Move Command (Change Toolbar)
Linetype List M Mview Menu Mirror Move ...multiple objects ...single object N O Ortho Osnap ...INT P PSpace Pan Pline Plot Point
SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Drawing Sheets Pan Command (View Menu) FreeSketch Command (flyout on the Draw Toolbar) Print Command (File Menu) This command is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu. Exit Command (File Menu)
Q Quit R Redraw Regen Rename ...Block Rotate ....several objects S Save Scale
Screen refresh is automatic. Not applicable. Save As Command (File Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Rotate Command (Change Toolbar) Save Command (File Menu)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...a single object ...multiple objects Snap ...Standard Stretch Style T Text ...Justify Trim U Undo Units V W X Y Z Zoom ...All ...In ...Out ...Window Scale Command (Change Toolbar) Scale Command (Change Toolbar)
SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Scale Command (Change Toolbar) Style Command (Format Menu)
Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) and Chamfer Command (Draw Toolbar) Undo Command (Edit Menu)
Fit Command (View Menu) Zoom Area Command (View Menu) Zoom Out Command (View Menu) Zoom Area Command (View Menu)
Task Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch

This task and term comparison lists AutoCAD tasks and terms and the equivalent functionality in SmartSketch. AutoCAD A Angular Dimension The SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) measures the angles or sweep angles of arcs. The Angle Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) measures the angle between two elements. The Pin Point Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify coordinates. SmartSketch
Absolute Coordinates
Annotations
The annotation commands allow you to add text, balloons, and leaders to drawings. Although anonymous blocks are not necessary for crosshatching, you can use the Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) and select from several fill patterns. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to easily sketch curves. The software converts the approximation into a precision drawing. The software provides the Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar) and Circular Pattern Command (flyout on the Change Toolbar) for drawing patterns of elements. The terminator, such as an arrow or dot at the end of a dimension line shows which element a dimension measures. The dimensions in the software are associative.
Anonymous Block
Approximation Points
Array
Arrowhead
Associative Dimension AutoCAD Development System (ADS)
The software uses macros to create programs to run with the software. You can create programs that automate many software tasks.
AutoDesk Device The system architecture of The software uses GDI or Open Interface (ADI) GL for developing device drivers needed for peripherals. Axes Tripod The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) displays the xy axis as you draw. Programming with the software is easy. You can write macros for graphics or use 3rd Party LISPS that support the software architecture.
AutoLISP
B B-spline Curve The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to draw curves. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to draw curves.
Bezier Curve
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Bind Blip Marks OLE servers can be used to join files. Blip marks, temporary screen markers displayed when you designate a point, are not applicable to the software. The software automatically refreshes geometry as you draw. Symbols in the software are similar to AutoCAD blocks. You can also use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block in a software document.
Block
Block Definition Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file. Block Reference Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file. BYBLOCK The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to define the color or line type of symbols within a drawing. The Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define colors, line types and other properties associated with a layer.
BYLAYER
C Cartesian Coordinate System Centerline The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define precision points in space using a Cartesian coordinate system. The AutoCenter Line option in the SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a center line at the center of a curved element. The AutoCenter Line option in the SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a center line at the center of a curved element. The Chamfer Command (flyout on the Draw Toolbar) allows you to draw a line between existing lines. The existing lines are trimmed to the chamfer's end points.
Center Mark
Chamfer
Circular External OLE servers allow you to link or embed a file as a Reference reference file. 42 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Color Map The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to define the colors of elements. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to draw curves. The mouse cursor allows you to place graphics and annotations. It is a screen display device. The Shortcut menu automatically appears when you rightclick. The commands displayed on the Shortcut menu depend upon the type of element or object you select. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar allows you to draw curves. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar allows you to draw curves.
Cubic Curve
Cursor
Cursor Menu
Curve
Curve Fitting
D Default The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to predefine the default settings of elements.
Definition Points The software does not need definition points for placing an associative dimension because all dimensions are associated with the geometry. DIESEL (Direct Programming in the software allows you to program and Interpretively customize menu items. Evaluated String Expression Language) Diameter Dimension Dimension Line The SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a diameter dimension. A dimension line shows where a measurement starts and stops. All dimensions in the software have dimension lines. The arc spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of an angular dimension. An angular dimension can be placed with the SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) .
Dimension Line Arc
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Dimension Style The settings that determine the appearance of the dimension. You can set the dimension style formats in the software by using the Dimension Command (Format Menu). Dimension Text The value and text display of dimensioned elements is defined by using the Dimension Command (Format Menu). The dimensioning variables can be defined with the Dimension Command (Format Menu). Windows are used as display devices. The window coordinates are defined as view coordinates. Documentation drawings are two-dimensional drawings that describe a real world object. Documentation drawings are composed of drawing sheets. Geometry or documents can be moved by dragging them with the mouse cursor. Drawing sheets are used to draw your elements on.
Dimension Variables Display Extents
Documentation Drawing
Drag
Drawing
Drawing Extents The Fit Command (View Menu) displays the entire drawing in a window. Drawing File Documents are drawing files that can be saved on the disk. You can save files in the software format or in AutoCAD format. The units of measure for a drawing sheet can be English or metric. The files you create can be saved in the ASCII file format used by AutoCAD through OLE servers.
Drawing Unit
dxf (Drawing Interchange Format) E Entity Extension Lines
Elements are entities within documents. Extension lines, also called witness lines or projection lines, are parts of dimensions.
External Program The software allows you to write and run external programs. External OLE servers allow you to attach files to one another. Reference (xref) F Fill The Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles . The Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) creates a constant radius blend between two elements. The elements are trimmed to the end points of the fillet. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to place curves with interpolation and approximation points. The Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define how you want the information on specific layers to display.
Fillet
Fit Points
Freeze
G Graphics Area Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a drawing.
Graphics Cursor The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows you to place graphics and annotations. Graphics Screen / The windows of the software allow you to create graphics Graphics and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the Window window. Grips Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is selected for an element modification or edit. Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is selected for an element modification or edit.
Grips Modes
H Handle Handles in the software are similar to grips in AutoCAD.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Hatching The Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles . Horizontal or vertical dimensions can be placed with the Distance Between Command (Draw Toolbar) .
Horizontal Dimension I Icon Menu
Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus contain Command names. The SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to describe the sweep angle of a dimension. Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a new drawing. Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block or convert the graphics of an AutoCAD block. The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to create curves. The points that the curve passes through are created when you draw the curve. Islands are closed boundaries that have not been filled within an area that has been filled with the Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) .
Include Angle
Initial Environment Instance
Interpolation Points
Island
J K Key The software provides user properties, OLE servers, and Open Database Connection (ODBC) from Microsoft.
L Layer Layers allow you to group elements according to type or for manipulation purposes. A leader line with a terminator allows you to place annotations on drawings. The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to define
Leader
Linetype
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview dash definitions for lines. Link In AutoCAD, a link is a database connection between an SQL element and a database record. In the software, links allow you to reference information between documents.
M Macro The software allows you to write programs in the form of . A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are named and saved. When you program with the software, you use methods. A method is a named operation or instance. The Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) allows you to move elements or sets of elements about a mirror point. The mnemonics on menus and dialog boxes allow you to select commands quickly. In the software, you can create 2-D models, which represent real world objects, by drawing the real world object on a drawing sheet.
Method
Mirror
Mnemonic
Model Space
N Node The Curve Command (Draw Toolbar) in the software draws a curve that has nodes. The nodes describe the various key points along the curve. A perpendicular vector. In the software you can select either the command or the object first.
Normal Noun/Verb Selection
NURBS (NonA non-uniform rational B-spline curve. The software Uniform Rational curves are mathematically defined as NURBS. B-spline) Curve O Object Object Snap The software provides elements for drawing creation. The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and PinPoint SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 47
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview (Osnap) Command (Tools Menu) allow you to create precise elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the mouse pointer. The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allow you to create precise elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the mouse pointer. The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate positions and points on elements including elements on symbols . The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allow you to create precise elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the mouse pointer. The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define horizontal or vertical element positions on drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements and describes the relationship between the element and the position of the mouse pointer.
Object Snap Override
Origin
Ortho Mode
Orthogonal
P Pan The Pan Command (View Menu) allows you to shift the view of a drawing. Drawing sheets are 2-D areas that you can use to draw. Parallel dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) . A linear dimension can be parallel to the line it measures. You can personalize when you install the software. Handles and selection sets allow you to select geometry and objects. The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows you to place graphics and annotations.
Paper Space Parallel Dimension
Personalization Pick
Point Pline
An x and y position in space. The FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to create an element that is composed of one or more connected line or arc segments.
Polar Coordinate The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to System specify the coordinates of a point. Polygon Window Handles and selection sets highlight when geometry is selected for an element modification or edit. Polyline The FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to create an element that is composed of one or more connected line or arc segments.
Q R Radial Dimension Radial dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) . Real World Units The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets and then scale to real-world units. Redraw Regenerate Region Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw. Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw. Regions are automatically closed as you draw with the SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu). The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a point in your drawing and the other end of the line is attached to the mouse cursor. The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to connect end points by moving the pointer over the end SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 49
Relative Coordinates Rubber-Band Line
Running Object Snap
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview points. S Screen Menu Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus contain Command names. Scripts are written and run as macros. Programming with SmartSketch allows you to write macros for the software. A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are named and saved. The software provides group selection and manipulation using the Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and edit commands. The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define how you want to locate elements.
Script File
Selection Set
Snap Mode
Snap Resolution The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define locate zones that define how close the pointer must be to an element you want to recognize or select. Space T Text Style The Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) lets you define the text characteristics you want to use. The z value, or elevation, of a 3-D element is maintained as an attribute through OLE servers when an AutoCAD file is embedded in a software file. Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus contain Command names. The view commands allow you to start a Command while another is processing. Drawing Sheets allow you to draw in a 2-D work space.
Thickness
Toolbar
Transparent Command U UCS (User Coordinate System) Icon
The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Unit The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.
V Vector The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. The length of a line can be measured with the SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) . The Distance Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) can also be used to place a horizontal or vertical dimension. Windows are used to display drawings from a particular viewpoint. Drawing sheets allow you to define a bounded area.
Vertical Dimension
View
Viewport W WPolygon
The software provides group selection and manipulation using the Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) .
X XYZ Point Filters The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. Y Z Zoom Extents The Zoom Out Command (View Menu) and Zoom Area Command (View Menu) allow you to increase or decrease the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fit Command (View Menu) changes the display of a window so that all the elements are displayed.
Getting Help for MicroStation Users: An Overview

This Help provides you with information about how you can use your MicroStation files with SmartSketch to get the most out of both systems. A command comparison and task comparison will help the MicroStation user become familiar with SmartSketch terminology.
Command Comparison: MicroStation to SmartSketch

This command comparison lists MicroStation commands and their equivalent commands in SmartSketch . MicroStation A Active ...Color (CO=) ...Font (FT=) ...Keypoint ...Style ...Weight(WT=) Array .....Polar ....Rectangular B C Change ...Color ...Level ...Style 52 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Properties Command (Edit Menu) Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) Style Command (Format Menu) Style Command (Format Menu) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Style Command (Format Menu) Style Command (Format Menu) Circular Pattern Command (flyout on the Change Toolbar) Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Construct ...Tangent Arc1 Construct Bisector ...Angle Tangent Arc Command (Draw Toolbar) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) and SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 53
...Line Construct Circle ...Tangent to Three Elements
Construct Line ...AA1
Construct Perpendicular ...From
...To
Construct Tangent ...Between
...Circle 1
...Perpendicular
...To
...from Element
Copy Element
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Copy Command (Edit Menu) Move Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option Move Command (Change Toolbar) with copy and step distance option Symbols Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) Style Command (Format Menu); Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) Symbols Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Delete Command (Edit Menu) Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Delete Command (Edit Menu) SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) Dimension Command (Format Menu) Dimension Command (Format Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) Dimension Command (Format Menu) Dimension Command (Format Menu)
Copy Parallel ...by Distance Create Cell Create Chain ...Manual Crosshatch D Define Cell Origin Delete ...Element ...Partial Delete Cell Dimension ...Diameter Extended ...Radius ...Save style ...Size Arrow ...modify text location ...settings ...text style E Enter data field ...commands Exit Extend Element 2 Extend Line ...Intersection 54 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Exit Command (File Menu) Extend to Next Command (Draw Toolbar) Extend to Next Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...by Keyin F Fence ...Change Color ...Change Level ...Change Style ...Change Symbology ...Copy ...Delete ...Move ...Stretch Fence Array ...Polar Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Circular Pattern Command (flyout on the Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Rotate Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Scale Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and Scale Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar); Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar); Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar); Properties Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Copy Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Delete Command (Edit Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Move Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Move Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar)
...Rectangular
Fence Rotate ...Original Fence Scale ...Copy
...Original File Fence (FF=) Fillet ...Modify ...Nomodify
Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 55
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) Fit Command (View Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with Group Command (Change Toolbar) and Ungroup Command (Change Toolbar) Fill Command (Draw Toolbar)
...Single
Fit G Graphic Group
H Hatch I Identify ...Cell Increment Text Intersection J Justify ...Center ...Left ...Right K L Levels ...Off (OF=) ...On (ON=) Lock ...Axis ...Grid M Measure ...Area 56 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide Measure Area Command (Tools Menu) Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and select a symbol Macros with Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...Area Element ...Distance Points ...Radius Measure Area Command (Tools Menu) Measure Distance Command (Tools Menu) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) or SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) (Use direct manipulation of the handles) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) (Use direct manipulation of the handles) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) (Use direct manipulation of the handles) Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) (Use direct manipulation of the handles) Move Command (Change Toolbar) Move Command (Change Toolbar)
Mirror Copy ...Horizontal/Vertical ...Line Mirror Original ...Horizontal/Vertical ...Line Modify ...Element Modify Arc ...Angle ...Radius Move ...Element ...Up/Left/Right/Down N O P Place ...Lstring Point ...Mline ...Note ...Shape ...Shape Orthogonal ...Text FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar) Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 57
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Place Arc ...by Center ...by Edge ...by Radius Place Block ...Rotated Place Cell ...Absolute Place Circle ...Center ...by Diameter ...by Edge ...by Radius Place Ellipse ...Half Arc By Center Command (Draw Toolbar) Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Tangent Arc Command (Draw Toolbar) Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar) Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar) Symbols Circle by Center Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle by Center Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle by Center Command (Draw Toolbar) Circle by Center Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) and Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) and Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar) Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar) Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar) SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) Print Command (File Menu)
...Quarter
...by Center ...by Edge Place Line Place Point Place Text Plot Q Quit ...Stop R Rename Cell (CR)= Reset (button) Rotate 58 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Close Command (File Menu) Symbols Right mouse button.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...Copy ...Original S Save Scale ...Copy ...Original Select Cell ...Absolute Set ...Linefill Set Coordinates Show Library Stop Drawing T U Undo Update V W Window ...Area ...Center X Y Z Zoom ...In Zoom In Command (View Menu) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 59 Zoom Area Command (View Menu) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu. Pan Command (View Menu) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu. Undo Command (Edit Menu) Screen automatically refreshes. Rotate Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option Rotate Command (Change Toolbar) Save Command (File Menu) Scale Command (Change Toolbar) with copy option. Scale Command (Change Toolbar) Symbols Style Command (Format Menu); Fill Command ( Toolbar) PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) Symbols Screen automatically refreshes.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview ...Out Zoom Out Command (View Menu) Also located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
Task Comparison: MicroStation to SmartSketch

This task and term comparison lists MicroStation tasks and terms and the equivalent functionality in SmartSketch. MicroStation A Active Depth The active depth of a 3-D element is maintained through OLE servers as an attribute when a MicroStation file is embedded in a software file.
B C Cell Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use OLE servers to embed or link a MicroStation cell or convert a cell library. The ribbon allows you to give and receive feedback when you are using a command. It is not necessary to compress documents in the software.
Command Window
Compress
D Default The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to pre-define the default settings of elements. The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) is used to draw geometry. The software uses the left mouse button for providing input points.
Data Point
Data Button
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Dimension Units The Dimension Command (Format Menu) allows you to specify the units you want to use when you place dimensions. The Dimension Command (Format Menu) allows you to specify how your dimensions appear when you place them. The UnGroup Command (Change Toolbar) allows you to remove an element from a group. Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a drawing. Drawing sheets are part of the software document. The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a point in your drawing and the other end of the line is attached to the pointer.
Dimension Format
Drop Status
Design ".dgn" file
Dynamic Update
E Element Attributes The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to define the attributes of elements.
F Fence The software provides group selection and manipulation using the Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and edit commands. Font support includes TrueType fonts
Font G Graphics Cursor
The pointer is a screen display device that allows you to place graphics and annotations. The windows of the software allow you to create graphics and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the window.
Graphics Screen / Graphics Window
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview H Handles Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is selected for modification. The Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.
Hatching
I Identify The Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to identify elements for selection and manipulation.
J K L Level The Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) allows you to define layers and styles for layers. The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to define the line styles of elements.
Line style
M MicroCSL The software allows you to program and customize. The Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) allows you to move elements or sets of elements about a mirror point.
Mirror
N O Origin The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. The software Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate positions and points on elements including elements on symbols.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview P Parameter The software allows you to define user properties of elements and objects. The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for command selection.
Pull-down Menus
Q R Real World Units The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets and then scale to real-world units. The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. Reset by releasing a button or by selecting a new command.
Relative Coordinates
Reset Button
S Screen Menu The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for command selection. Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a new drawing.
Seed File
T Tags The provide a mechanism for using database features. The software SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate the key points of elements as you draw.
Tentative
U UCS (User Coordinate System) The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) Icon allows you to specify the coordinates of a point.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview Update Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.
V View Views are used to display the information in a window. Windows display drawings from a particular viewpoint.
W Working Units The software allows you to specify the working units you want to use when you draw.
X Y Z Z Depth The z value of a 3-D element is maintained as an attribute through OLE servers when a MicroStation file is embedded into a software file. The Zoom Out Command (View Menu) and Zoom Area Command (View Menu) allow you to increase or decrease the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fit Command (View Menu) changes the display of a window to display all elements.
Zoom
Using the Learning Center: An Overview

Each tutorial in the SmartSketch Learning Center contains a combination of step-by-step guidelines and video demonstrations to help you learn to use SmartSketch. For optimal performance of the multimedia content, you should install the tutorial locally while you learn to use the product. You can also run the tutorials over the network, but network traffic may degrade the sound or visual quality of the multimedia. The tutorial files occupy a large amount of space on the SmartSketch CD and on the hard drive of your computer, so after you have worked through each tutorial, you may want to delete the Tutorials directory from your computer to conserve memory. The Tutorials directory resides in the SmartSketch directory at the installation location for SmartSketch. Caution If the tutorials exist on the server, do not delete them; otherwise, other users on the network will be unable to access them. If you delete Learning Center tutorials from your computer, the Help > Learning SmartSketch command continues to open the Learning Center, but the links to tutorials no longer work.
Access Online Tutorials

1. Click Help > Learning SmartSketch. 2. Select a tutorial. 3. Follow the instructions in the Learning Center to navigate within the tutorials and view demonstrations. 4. Return to the product at anytime by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the bottom of your screen. Notes You can open tutorials from either the SmartSketch CD or from the network. If you installed the software from the CD, leave the CD in the CDROM drive to open tutorials. If you installed the software from a network, verify the network drive or Universal Naming Convention (UNC) network connection. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 65
Accessing Support Resources: An Overview

Web Site
The Intergraph web site brings you fast, convenient, and up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph's support, products, services, and direction. Our web address is http://www.intergraph.com/pbs. Additionally, the SmartSketch on the Web command (available via the Help menu) offers a myriad of tools to help you use SmartSketch more efficiently, keep up-to-date on product happenings, view a web gallery of SmartSketch drawings, and contact Intergraph. Important To use the SmartSketch on the Web command, you must be connected to the Internet with a modem or other connection.
Intergraph's Knowledge Base

If you have Internet access and have bought product maintenance, you may want to try our knowledge base at http://smart.intergraph.com.
Telephone Support
In the United States, call Intergraph's standard support number at 1-800-7667701, Monday through Friday, except holidays. If you are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. Please have the following information when you call: The product's name, version, and serial number. Your name and telephone number. A brief description of the problem.
Customization Services
Intergraph provides consulting services to help you take advantage of the SmartSketch Application Programming Interface (API). The services range from basic telephone consultation to on-site custom programming and complete turnkey solutions. Contact us at the following: http://www.smartsketch.com 1-800-260-0246 (inside the United States of America)
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview 1-256-730-3707 (international callers)
User Assistance
SmartSketch's user assistance supplies command information as you perform tasks. You can access different kinds of information any time you are running the software. This information could include reference topics, narrative descriptions, or instructional material. In addition, SmartSketch provides several learning tools that you can activate from the online Help menu. SmartSketch offers the following important user assistance features:
Online Help
Complete command descriptions give you more information. When you click Help or press Shift + F1, the pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a question mark. You can then get contextsensitive Help for any command by clicking the toolbar button or by clicking the menu command at the top of the window. A structured table of contents, an index, and full-text search capabilities provide easy access to Help topics. Press F1 any time you need online Help during a design session. When a command is active, the Help topic for that command appears. If no command is active, then the table of contents for the Help topics appears.
You can also access the table of contents by clicking Help Topics on the Help menu.
Learning Tools
You can use About SmartSketch on the Help menu to see your software version and license information.
User Interface Features

ToolTips helps you find command names. When you pause the pointer on the command button on the toolbar, a yellow label displays the command's name. Brief command descriptions show you the basic function of a command. When you point the pointer at the command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the Status Bar at the bottom of the window. Also, messages that explain your actions for each step of the command appear in the Status Bar.
Display Frequently Asked Questions

1. Click Help > SmartSketch on the Web. 2. Follow the instructions on the HTML page to navigate within the site and to leave the site. 3. Return to the SmartSketch product at any time by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the bottom of your screen.
Access Online Support

1. Click Help > Learning SmartSketch. 2. Follow the instructions on the web page to navigate within the site and to leave the site. 3. Return to the product at anytime by clicking the product icon on the bottom of your screen.

About SmartSketch Command (Help Menu)
Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.
Help Command (Main Toolbar)

Displays context-sensitive Help on an item in the current window. You can use this command to get help on any item even when the item is not active. When this command is active, the pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a question mark. Tip You can press Shift + F1 to get context-sensitive Help on an active command.
Learning Center Command (Help Menu)

Accesses a set of multi-media tutorials to help you get up and running with the software.
Help Topics Command (Help Menu)

Displays the table of contents for the SmartSketch Help topics, which include step-by-step instructions for using the software, reference information, examples of features, and technical support information. It also provides access to the Help index and full-text search.
SmartSketch on the Web Command (Help Menu)

Activates your World Wide Web browser and opens the SmartSketch World Wide Web page. On this page, you can access registration and support information, learning tools, and other items to help you use SmartSketch more SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 69
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview efficiently.
SmartSketch Web Forum Command (Help Menu)

Allows you to access Intergraph's online community of SmartSketch users. In addition to facilitating communication between Intergraph personnel and other SmartSketch users, the forum also provides access to short, informative video clips that illustrate step-by-step guidelines for performing sophisticated workflows. These clips may be viewed online, or they may be downloaded to your local machine for later viewing.
Tip of the Day Command (Help Menu)

Displays tips about using features in the software. This command also offers a tip each time you start the software.
Tip of the Day Dialog Box

Displays a tip each time you start the software. You can also activate this dialog box by choosing Tip of the Day from the Help menu.
Dialog Box Options

Did You Know - Displays a tip about using a feature. More Tips - Displays a list of available tips. Next Tip - Displays the next tip in the list. Show Tips At Startup - Displays a tip every time you start the software. If you do not want to display tips when you start the software, clear this option.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview

SmartSketch provides quick and easy to use tools for setting up, saving, and printing documents. You can create documents by selecting one of many industry standard templates provided with SmartSketch, or you can open SmartSketch using NORMAL.igr as a starting template. Once a document has been created, the document itself can be saved as a template for future use. With Sheet Setup on the File menu, you can create unlimited sheets within a document. Each sheet acts like a separate drawing. You can make changes to each sheet individually, and then save them collectively in a multi-sheet document. The SmartSketch File menu provides several options for saving your documents, including the ability to automatically save open documents at specified intervals or to save an existing document in a new format. You can print your documents by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.
Setting Up Documents: An Overview

When you start SmartSketch, a new, blank document opens. You can format each new document you create or use a pre-formatted template as a starting point for a new document and save the changes when you are finished. When you create a drawing, the drawing is displayed on your screen. You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your document, and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your document. Any changes you make are temporarily stored in memory. You have to save the document to preserve the changes to your document. You can also save documents in a specific format.
Opening Existing Documents

Open on the File menu opens existing documents. SmartSketch keeps track of the documents you open and displays them at the bottom of the File menu. Options on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries SmartSketch displays in the list. To open one of the documents, choose it from the list.
Setting Up Properties for a Document

Properties on the File menu allows you to view, edit, and store properties for a document. Document properties can include the title, the author, and keywords that identify important information. These properties also can include document statistics, such as document size and the date that a document was created and last modified. Some properties, such as the date the document was last modified, are updated automatically.
Setting Up Units of Measure for a Document

The units of measure settings for a document are stored as a property. You can set units of measure in both English and metric units for values such as length, area, or angles. Once you set the units of measure, all the measurements in the drawing are affected. For example, if you set the length unit of measure to inches, then all the measurements in the drawing display in inches. You can change the unit of measure at any time while you are drawing, and the document still retains complete accuracy of the measurements in the drawing. The precision readout determines the accuracy of the unit readout value by setting the number of significant figures to display. The precision setting does 72 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview not alter the numbers that you type into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50 mm. Tip When you set the units of measure for a document, the settings do not affect the dimensional values for the document. You can set units for the dimensional values with the Dimension Properties dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting a dimension and then clicking Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also set the dimension units by editing a dimension style with Dimension on the Format menu.
Working with Several Open Documents

Several documents can remain open in the same session. You can use Cut, Copy, and Paste to move or copy information between the documents or within one open document. You can use commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open documents so that you can view them easily. You can also use Object on the Insert menu to import objects, such as drawings, spreadsheets, or text created in other software, into an open document. You can link or embed the imported objects. You can also drag information from another document into an open document.
Create a Document
1. On the Main toolbar, click the New File icon , or click File > New. 2. In the Templates list, select the template you want to use to create the document. Notes If you want to create a template, you can simply save the document to the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you installed the software. A different filename extension is not needed. You can change the directory where templates are saved by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the directory that you want to use on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
Open a Document
To Open a document without leaving the software. 1. On the Main toolbar, click Open Tip You also can click File > Open. 4. Select the directory containing the document you want to open. 5. Type the name of the document or select it from the list of documents. 6. On the Open dialog box, click Open. .
To Drag and Drop a Document

1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the document that you want. 2. Drag the document to the title bar at the top of the software window. Notes You can open one of the last documents you worked on by selecting from the list at the bottom of the File menu. In the Open dialog box, you can double-click the document name for the document to open the document. If you do not see the document you want to open, make sure the drive, directory, and type are correct. If you do not know the location of the document, you can look for the document. On the Windows Taskbar, click Start > Find.
Set Up a Drawing Sheet

1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want. Tip If you want to set up a background sheet, click the Background tab and set the options you want. Notes You can save the sheet setup as a default using Save Defaults on the Sheet Setup dialog box. The current settings will then be used as the default settings for any new drawing sheets you create in the document.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview You can set up options for an existing drawing sheet by doubleclicking any tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.
View the Properties of a Document

1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Properties dialog box, click the tab that contains the information you want to see. Tip You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box. Notes The Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. If the document has unsaved changes, you must save the document to update the property information.
Set Document Properties

1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that you want, such as summary information or keywords. Notes You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.
Set File Locations

1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Options dialog box, click the File Locations tab. 3. Select one of the file types in the list. 4. Click Modify and, on the Modify Location dialog box, select the directory where you want the software to look for the file type.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Notes You can set the software to look for files on another machine. To connect to another machine, click the Modify button to define other directories or network paths.

New Command (File Menu)
Creates a new document or template. You can use a template to create the document.
File New Dialog Box

Creates a new document or template.
Dialog Box Options

Templates - Lists the templates available in the TEMPLATE directory that is located in the directory where you installed the software. Select the template that you want to use to create a new document or template. Tip You can change the directory where templates are stored by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the directory that you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box. If you change this setting, the Templates list on the File New dialog box displays a list of the templates in the directory that you specified.
Open Command (File Menu)

Opens an existing document or template in a new window.
File Open Dialog Box

Controls how a document is opened. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 77
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.
Options Command (Tools Menu)

Changes settings that control screen appearance, document location, user information, and so forth. Note Tools > Options also allows you to set options for importing MicroStation or AutoCAD documents into SmartSketch. These foreign data settings are available only when the CAD Translator module is installed.
Options Dialog Box

Sets options for the current document. For example, you can set the grid display by clicking the View tab.
Options Dialog Box Tabs
Colors Tab General Tab File Locations Tab View Tab Symbols Tab Reference Files Tab
Colors Tab
Controls color settings for the active document.
Tab Options
Sheet - Sets the default color of all drawing sheets in the active document. Highlight - Sets the highlight color. Selected Element - Sets the color of selected elements. Disabled Elements - Sets the color of disabled elements. Handles - Sets the color of handles when an element is selected.
General Tab
Controls settings such as the display of 3-D effects and the number of entries in the list of recently used files.
Tab Options
Update Links Automatically At Open - Updates links automatically when the document is open and this option is set. Recently Used Files List - Sets the number of entries for the Recent Files area of the File menu when the Recent Files area is set. Dimension Keyin Values Automatically - Places dimensions for recognized SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 79
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview step values or for values you type in a ribbon field. Display Unit Of Measurement Labels - Displays the units of measurement in the value field. Undo Steps - Sets the number of operations that can be undone.
File Locations Tab

Specifies the default location for documents, templates, and other objects you create or use in the software. You can use the following types of documents: Documents User-defined templates Fonts Macros MicroStation references AutoCAD references
Tab Options
File Types - Indicates the file type for which you want to specify a location. Location - Displays the designated location for each file type. Modify - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box. The directory selected with the dialog box is displayed in the Location column on this tab. After you select a location, you can delete it later by selecting the location in the Location column and pressing Delete.
Reference Files Tab

Tab Options
Scale - Sets a scale option for importing a document. Coincident - Brings in a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at full scale (1:1) and coincident to its original coordinate position. The setting shifts the drawing sheet to the lower left of the document graphic range and then determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet. If the current document already contains graphics, the drawing sheet shifts to include those graphics.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Tip If you use the Coincident setting, the reference file does not appear when you drag the pointer.
Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, 2 represents the size of the drawing and 1 represents the size of the real-world object. Tip Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet, but allows you to specify where to insert the file by clicking on the drawing sheet.
Custom Scale - Sets the scale that you type in the boxes for a document that you insert or drag. For example, when you type in 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes, the scale of the foreign document is one-and-a-half times its original size.
Symbols Tab
Determines the default actions when you drag a symbol into the document. You can override the settings on this tab when you drag a symbol. You can press Ctrl to embed the symbol or Ctrl + Shift to link the symbol.
Tab Options
Drag and Drop Default - Specifies actions when you drag a symbol into the document. Embed - Sets the default action so that the symbol embeds when you drag it on the drawing sheet. Embedding the symbol means that the software places a copy of the symbol in the document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that symbol within the current document reflect those changes. Link - Sets the default action so that the symbol is linked when you drag it into the document. Linking the symbol allows you to edit the original symbol document. The symbol that you placed on the drawing sheet updates automatically. If you edit the symbol inside the active document, those changes are saved in the .sym document on your computer.
View Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls the appearance of the software and document window, such as the display of the graph paper, ruler, and scroll bar.
Tab Options
Display As Printed - Displays the document as it appears on paper. Window - Controls the window display. Vertical Scroll Bar - Displays the vertical scroll bar of the active window. Horizontal Scroll Bar - Displays the horizontal scroll bar of the active window. Status Bar - Displays the status bar of the application. Sheet Tabs - Displays the drawing sheet tabs. Grid - Allows you to set options for the grid. Note The grid display option must be checked from the view menu before these settings will be visable.
Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid lines are not considered part of the document and do not print. Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid Style - Changes the format of the grid lines to either static or dynamic. When you zoom in or out, the software dynamically generates the grid lines for a dynamic grid . You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. The grid maintains a constant minimum spacing. Grid Index - Determines the number of index grid lines, also known as minor grid lines, to be equally spaced between the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in the Grid Style list box. Grid Spacing - Sets the spacing of the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in the Grid Style list box. The selected options on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box determine the units that you can enter, such as inches or centimeters. 82 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Tip You can open the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu.
Grid Density - Changes the number of dashes in the index lines, or minor grid lines, between intersections with the grid lines. This option is available only if you select Dynamic in the Grid Style list box. Sheet outline - Allows you to set options for the outline of the drawing sheet. Display - Displays the outline of a drawing sheet so you can view its boundaries. Use during fit - Specifies whether or not to use the sheet outline during a fit.
Properties Command (File Menu)

Accesses general information about the current document. You can review and edit the following document information: the document summary, statistics, units, and Browser properties. If a symbol document (.sym) is open, you can review and edit the general, unit, behavior, and specific symbol properties for the document.
Properties Dialog Box

Tracks information about the properties of a document. Tip You must save the document before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box. If a symbol document (.sym) is open, the only tabs that appear are the General, Units, Browser, Symbols, and Behavior tabs.
Tabs
General Tab Summary Tab Statistics Tab Units Tab Browser Tab Symbols Tab
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Behavior Tab
Behavior Tab
Tab Options
Insertion Type - Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type. Update - Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status of a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all. Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square when you drag it into the active document. Lock Scale - Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document. Tip You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the symbol handles.
Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships . If you clear the check box, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships. This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when it is dragged from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet. The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship. 84 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the underlined dimensional value.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.
Nested Display - Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private. When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.
Browser Tab
Sets the home address for the active document. Every time you open this document and click Home on the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address in the Address box. This tab is available only for SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 85
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview documents that are symbols and have an .sym extension.
Tab Options
Address - Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a document and then open the Symbol Explorer and click Home, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address that you type here. You can any address that you use in a web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer; for example, you can type http://www.ingr.com. If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols on your computer, you can enter the following syntax in the Address box: <application.path>\..\<path of symbols. For example, you could enter <application.path>\..\symbols\arch.htm. Browse - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box so that you can set another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in. You can set the dialog box to look in directories on your computer or a network drive.
General Tab
Displays general information about the current document. Tip If some of the following information is not available, the boxes display "Unknown."
Tab Options
Filename - Displays the name of the document. Type - Displays the type of document. The type is based on the application used to create the document. Location - Displays the directory containing the document. Size - Displays the size of the document in bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes. MS-DOS Name - Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a File Allocation Table file naming system. These types of documents have an eight-character name and three-character extension. Created - Displays the date and time the document was created or copied. Modified - Displays the date and time the document was last modified. Accessed - Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. 86 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Attributes - Displays the attributes of the current document. These settings are read-only. Read-Only - Indicates that the document is read-only. You cannot open a read-only file for writing. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. Archive - Shows that the document is an archive document. Hidden - Indicates that the document is a hidden document. You usually cannot see this document in the Windows Explorer. System - Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this document unless you change the options in the Internet Explorer.
Statistics Tab
Displays detailed information about the current document. The software automatically generates these properties when you create, save, or print the document.
Tab Options
Created - Displays the date and time the document was created or copied. Creating Application - Displays the name of the application that created the document. Modified - Displays the date and time the document was last modified. Accessed - Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Last Saved By - Displays the name of the person who last saved the document. Saving Application - Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. Currently Opened By - Displays the name of the person who has the document open.
Summary Tab
Displays the title and author, if available, along with keywords and comments for the current document. The software generates the author and template information when you create, save, or print the document. You can also edit these properties, with the exception of the template, unless the document is write-protected.
Tab Options
Title - Specifies the title of the current document. Subject - Gives a general description of the current document. Author - Displays the name of the person who created the document. Keywords - Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. Comments - Specifies comments about the current document. Template - Displays the name of the document template that was used to create the document.
Symbol Tab
Defines the symbol properties for an .sym document. With this tab, you can assign descriptive information that identifies the symbol. When you drag the symbol into a document, these values appear in the Attribute Viewer. For example, if you wanted to define a bill of materials, you can assign manufacturing information on this tab for a door symbol, place the symbol in a document, and then create a report that displays the manufacturing information.
Tab Options
Name - Defines a property name. Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can choose from Character, Number, Money, or Date. Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer's name, a serial number, or other descriptive information as a value. Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol.
Units Tab
Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length, area, or angle values in a drawing. The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to display. It sets the accuracy of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the 88 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50 mm.
Tab Options
Length Readout - Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document. Angle Readout - Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document. Area Readout - Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document.
Sheet Setup Command (File Menu)

Defines the properties of the working sheet. You can display and modify the following properties: the name, size, and scale used in the working sheet; and the properties of the working sheet margin. You can also select the background sheet you want to use. You can save settings only for the active working sheet. These settings can also be saved so that they are used when you add a new working sheet to the document. To display a working sheet, use Working Sheets. Tip Sheet Setup is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Sheet Setup Dialog Box

Defines the properties of the active drawing sheet.
Tabs

Size and Scale Tab Background Tab Name Tab
Size and Scale Tab

Defines details for the drawing sheet size, scale, and print setup information.
Tab Options
Sheet Size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet. Same As Print Setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the current print setup definition. For example, if the printer is set up as 8 1/2 X 11, the drawing sheet size is set up as 8 1/2 X 11. Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered width and height values. Drawing Scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet. Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the realworld object being described. Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world. Paper Units - Sets the paper units for the drawing sheet. Units - Controls the display of numeric values in dialog boxes that define the size of non-scaled objects. Some examples of non-scaled object values are text height and line width. This setting does not affect dimension units. Only value boxes use this option. For example, if you are working in feet and inches, you can specify that you want to read and enter values for text height in fractional inches. (1/8" instead of 0.00'-0.125" ) Tip When printing or plotting a drawing sheet, the non-scaled items appear on the printed document with the exact size that you specify.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Precision - Sets the number of significant figures to display, or the accuracy of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not change the numbers that you can type in the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up to the next whole number. For example, if you set this control to .001 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches, then the line length value is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches. If you set this control to 0.01 and you type a line length value of 3.5 mm, the length value appears as 3.50 mm.
Background Tab
Defines the color, margin settings and background sheet display information.
Tab Options
Background Sheet - Specifies the background sheet that you want to use for the working sheet. If you have not created a background sheet, this box does not display any options. You must first create a background sheet before you can select it from the list. All graphics on the background sheet display on the working sheet. Changing the background sheet updates the size and margin settings of the working sheet to the values defined by the selected background sheet. Show Background - Displays the background sheet graphics on the selected working sheet. Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
Name Tab
Defines the name of a drawing sheet. You can also change the name of a drawing sheet.
Tab Options
Sheet Name - Specifies a name for the drawing sheet. You can also use this box to rename a drawing sheet by selecting the sheet in the document before clicking Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Most Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)

Opens one of the documents that you worked on most recently. The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu. You can change the number of SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 91
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview files listed on the menu by clickingTools > Options and selecting the General tab.
Managing Multi-sheet Documents: An Overview

Drawing sheets are similar to pages in a notebook. You can place different sketches or drawings on different drawing sheets in the document. For example, you can draw one idea for a design on one drawing sheet and another idea on another drawing sheet, and then save both drawings in the same document. There is no limit to the number of sheets you can have in a document. When you create a new document, a default sheet appears with a border and a title box. You can modify the default settings with Sheet Setup on the File menu. For example, you can give a specific name to a sheet by setting options with this command. If you want to insert new sheets, click New Sheet on the Insert menu.
Each sheet acts like a separate drawing and can have different scales and sheet borders. If you want to locate or use relationships between elements, you should place the elements on the same sheet. You can display a number of drawing sheets on top of each other and simultaneously view the drawings on all of the drawing sheets, much as you would view a stack of transparencies.
Areas of a Drawing Sheet

A drawing sheet has two areas that affect the way you work - the sheet outline and the working sheet. The sheet outline (A) shows the orientation of the sheet and the default print region of the sheet. You can change the size and orientation of the sheet outline with Sheet Setup on the File menu.
You can draw new elements on the sheet outline or outside the borders of the outline. All new graphics that you create are placed on the active drawing sheet. The sheet where you will create most of your graphics is called a Error! Hyperlink reference not valid.. In a document, you can create as many working sheets as you need to plan your project. A working sheet can have a single background sheet attached to it.
Choosing a Sheet Size

You can modify a drawing sheets characteristics, such as the size and scale of the sheet, with Sheet Setup on the File menu. Sheet Setup also allows you to set the defaults for all new working sheets created in the document. You can do this by setting the options you want and then clicking Save as Default.
Drawing Sheet Scale

Drawing sheets allow you to use a specified scale as you draw. When you 94 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview specify the scale with Sheet Setup the File menu, everything on the drawing sheet is scaled except for Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. and annotations. For example, if the scale is one inch to ten inches and you place a line 30 inches long, the line is three inches long in proportion to the drawing sheet and three inches long when printed. However, a dimension measures the length of the line as 30 inches. The dimension and annotation sizes in your working sheets are independent of the drawing view scale. For example, when you define the height and size of dimension text, these values specify how you want the dimensions to appear when you print the drawing. The graphics on the attached background sheet are displayed at a 1:1 scale. The scale set with Sheet Setup on the File menu does not affect them.
Manipulating Drawing Sheets

At the bottom of the drawing sheet, you can see drawing sheet tabs that allow you to manipulate and display the drawing sheets in your document. When you open a document or create a new one, the tabs are displayed at the bottom of the workspace. There is a tab for each drawing sheet in your document.
Attaching a Background Sheet

After you set up the drawing sheet, you can attach a background sheet. A background sheet is used as a backdrop to the working sheet. For example, you can add borders to a drawing, draw a title block, insert a raster image, or draw geometry. You can make one background sheet and attach the same background sheet to several different drawing sheets.
When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet with the Sheet Setup command, the items on the background sheet are displayed and printed. The size of the working sheet is automatically set to the size of the background sheet you attach. This is so the paper sizes and graphics on both sheets line up. Background sheets allow you to customize your borders and title blocks so that they match your company standards and requirements. You can use the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 95
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview background sheet delivered in a template or design your own background sheet. You can create tailor-made background sheets by adding your company logo, creating any other graphics that you need, and using various styles and options. A typical customization scheme would be to have a different background sheet for each standard-sized drawing (A, B, C, D; or A0, A1, A2, A3, A4).
Sheets and Document Templates

You can re-use your sheets by creating and saving them in a document template. When you create a new document based on a template, all of the drawing sheets that are part of the template are copied into your new document.
Create a New Drawing Sheet

Click Insert > New Sheet. The new sheet is inserted after the active drawing sheet. Notes You can attach a background sheet to any drawing sheet using Sheet Setup on the File menu. Click the Background tab on the Sheet Setup dialog box to find the background sheet settings.
Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs

On the current drawing sheet, click a scroll button next to the drawing sheet tabs. Clicking a scroll button displays the drawing sheet tabs so that you can access them easily and select a drawing sheet. Click the scroll buttons of the following picture to find out what each button does:
Tip Clicking a scroll button does not display a different drawing sheet. If the document has only a few drawing sheets, the scroll buttons might not be available.
Create a Background Sheet

1. Click View > Background Sheets. 2. Click Insert > New Sheet. The background sheet is created using the default drawing sheet settings. 3. Click File > Sheet Setup. 96 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview 4. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want. 5. On the new background sheet, draw any graphics, such as title blocks and borders, that you want to appear on your working sheets. 6. Click View > Working Sheets. 7. Click File > Sheet Setup. 8. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab. 9. Click the Background Sheet list box and select the name of the background sheet you just created to attach the new background sheet to the working sheet. Notes You can double-click any tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.
Display Background Sheets

Click View > Background Sheets.
Activate a Drawing Sheet

Click the tab of the drawing sheet you want to activate. Notes You can display an available shortcut menu by right-clicking while the pointer is over a drawing sheet tab. You can double-click any tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.
Change the Background Sheet

1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab. 3. Select a new background sheet from the list. Tip If a background sheet has not been created, the list does not display SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 97
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview any options. Notes When you change the background sheet, the size and margins of your working sheet equal the settings of the selected background sheet. You can double-click any tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.
Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets

To display or manipulate a drawing sheet, you must click a drawing sheet tab. Drawing sheet tabs are displayed at the bottom of the work space. There is a tab for each drawing sheet in your document.
To select a drawing sheet

Click a drawing sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed and the name of the drawing sheet appears in bold. This drawing sheet becomes the working sheet.
To select several drawing sheets

Press and hold Ctrl and click one or more tabs. Tip To de-select several drawing sheets, press and hold Ctrl and click one or more current drawing sheet tabs.
To select a range of drawing sheets

Click the first tab in the range, hold Shift, and then click the last tab in the range. Tip To de-select all of the drawing sheets in a range, click any tab that is not part of the range.
To select all drawing sheets at once

On the shortcut menu, click Select All Sheets.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Tip To access this command, you must hold the pointer over one of the drawing sheet tabs and right-click. Notes When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document.
Rename a Drawing Sheet

1. On the drawing sheet, click the tab of the sheet you want to rename. 2. Click File > Sheet Setup. 3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Name tab and type a new name for the sheet you selected. Notes You can also rename a drawing sheet using Rename on the shortcut menu. You can get the shortcut menu by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab and right-clicking.
Delete a Drawing Sheet

1. Click Edit > Delete Sheet. 2. Confirm the selection. Notes Delete Sheet deletes the active drawing sheet and any drawing sheets whose drawing sheet tabs are selected.
Move Sheet Border

1. Click File > Move Sheet Border. 2. Specify the options to move, scale, and select the paper size for the sheet. Notes To access the Move Sheet Border dialog box, right-click in the active working sheet. When you open a foreign data file and the software creates the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 99
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview graphic objects relative to their original X, Y positions, the objects often position off the existing sheet. Your changes to the sheet scale and size appear in the Sheet Setup dialog box. When you click the settings that you want on the Move Sheet Border dialog box, you can click Apply to preview your settings. When you click Apply, the settings apply to the active sheet. However, the settings are not final until you click OK.

New Sheet Command (Insert Menu)
Creates a new drawing sheet in the document using the default drawing sheet settings. You can change the default settings using Sheet Setup. You can create either a working sheet or a background sheet with this command. To create a background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle on the View menu before selecting New Sheet. To create a working sheet, clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting New Sheet. Tip Insert Sheet is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Working Sheets Command (View Menu)

Displays all working sheets in a document. If a background sheet is attached to the working sheet, the graphics on the background sheet are displayed on the working sheet. When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet, the software automatically adjusts the size and the margin of the working sheet to match the size and margin of the background sheet.
Move Sheet Border Command (File Menu)

Moves the active working sheet to reposition, scale, and select paper size.
Move Sheet Border Dialog Box

Allows you to reposition or scale a working sheet and selects paper size. Tip When you click the settings that you want on this dialog box, you can click Apply to preview your settings. When you click Apply, the settings update the active sheet. However, the settings are not final until you click OK.
Dialog Box Options

Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Sheet Origin Location - Specifies the X and Y coordinates for the sheet origin. The sheet origin is the lower left corner of the drawing sheet. After setting these coordinates, click Apply. Interactive Move - Allows you to use the pointer to identify a location for the lower left corner of the sheet. Selecting this option automatically attaches the drawing sheet border to the pointer. Click once and the sheet is in the location that you want. You must click Apply for your changes to start. Caution While you are moving the sheet border with the pointer, the Move Sheet Border dialog box is not displayed. It appears again after you click the pointer to complete the move.
Drawing Scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet. Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This ratio means that the representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the realworld elements contained in the document. Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 1:2 ratio, the 1 represents the distance of the drawing sheet and the 2 represents the real-world distance. That is, every centimeter of paper is equal to two centimeters of real-world distance. Thus, the largest real-world element that you can represent on an 21.59 x 27.94 cm drawing sheet is 43.18 x 55.88 cm. Tip When the first value is smaller than the second value, the sheet size is usually increased. When the first number is larger than the second number, the sheet size is usually reduced.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world. Sheet Size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet. Same As Print Setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the settings for the default system printer. For example, if the printer is set up as 27.94 x 43.18 cm paper, the drawing sheet size is set to 27.94 x 43.18 cm. Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered x and y 102 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview values. Previous - Clears the last set of options that you applied to the drawing sheet.
Background Sheets Command (View Menu)

Switches the view from a working sheet to the background sheet. When you set this toggle, all of the background sheets in the document are displayed as tabs at the bottom of window. All working sheet tabs are hidden. You can use a background sheet to draw graphics that you want to display on more than one drawing sheet. For example, you can draw borders and title blocks that contain your company logo, your name, and information about the drawings. You can display background sheet graphics on any or all working sheets, using Sheet Setup.
Rename Command (Shortcut Menu)

Renames a sheet. Tip Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must move the pointer over a drawing sheet tab.
Rename Dialog Box

Renames a drawing sheet.
Dialog Box Options

New Name - Renames the active sheet when you type a new name.
Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Deletes the active drawing sheet and any other sheets whose tabs are selected. You can delete either a working sheet or a background sheet with this command. To delete a background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle on the View menu before selecting Delete Sheet. To delete a working sheet, clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting Delete Sheet.
Saving and Printing Documents: An Overview

To keep your work for future use, you must give the document a name and save it. After you save it, the document is available each time you want to use it. It's best to name and save a document soon after you start working on it. After that, it's a good idea to frequently save drawings or diagrams as you work. You should also be sure to save any template files that you change. You can print your drawings by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.
Saving Documents
When you first save a new document, the software provides a default name and directory location. You can give the document a meaningful name and specify where you want to store the document. When you open an existing document, the software copies the document from its stored location and displays it on the screen. As you work, the changes you make to the document are displayed on your screen. To preserve these changes, you must again save the document. Tip You can quickly save changes to an open document by clicking the Save button on the Main toolbar.
After you save a document, it remains displayed on the screen. You can use Close to close the document and clear it from your screen, or you can use Exit to close the document and exit the software.
Saving a Copy
If you need to make a copy of your work, click Save As on the File menu and type a different name for the document in the Save As dialog box.
Saving Documents to .cgm Format

The Computer Graphics Metafile (.cgm) provides an efficient way to make information available on the Internet. You can use Save As to save documents in .cgm format. Once in .cgm format, you can place the graphics on a web page (.html or .htm) and view them with browsers such as the Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. cgm is an efficient format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web because it takes up little storage space, renders quickly, and has the ability to zoom to achieve more detail. These types of drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks, allowing quick access to information outside the drawing.
Saving Documents to HTML Format

In addition to the cgm format, you can use Save As Web Page to save documents in .html format. This command saves the document in an HTML document; the graphics in the document are embedded in the HTML as .cgm graphics. You can then view the document with browsers such as the Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Important To use this functionality, you must install the Web Publishing module.
Closing a Document
If you want to close a document without saving your work, click Close on the File menu and then, when prompted to save your work, click No. If you do want to save your work, click Yes. If you decide not to close the document at all, click Cancel.
Saving a Document Automatically

You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval that you specify. This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of an unexpected system shutdown. You can set several options for AutoSave, including how often to save, which documents to save, and whether to be prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or more documents open. Caution If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, you must install it by clicking Add-Ins on the Tools menu.
Sending a Document to Others

After you finish drawing a sketch or adding notes to it, you can send the document to other users by clicking Send on the File menu. An e-mail message appears, allowing you to attach the drawing to the message. You can also embed or link the drawing to a Word document and send the document in e-mail to other users.
Save a Document
If you save a document that has not previously been saved, the software automatically prompts you to indicate if you want to save the changes.
To save the active document

1. Click File > Save. 2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved the active document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of the following: If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
To save a document in a different format

1. Click File > Save As. 2. Select the drive and directory for the new document. 3. In the File Name box, type a new name for the document. 4. In the Save As Type box, select the document format you want to use.
To save a document that was created in a different format

1. Click File > Save As. 2. Select the drive and directory for the new document. 3. In the File Name box, type a new name for the document. 4. In the Save As Type box, select the document format you want to use. Notes If the active document is read-only, you can save changes only by saving the document with a new name.
Saving a Document Automatically

You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval that you specify. This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of an unexpected system shutdown. You can set several options for AutoSave, including how often to save, which documents to save, and whether to be prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or more documents open. Caution If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, you must install it by clicking Add-Ins on the Tools menu.
Setting AutoSave Options

Tip You must install the AutoSave add-in using Add-Ins on the Tools menu before you set AutoSave options.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview 1. Click Tools > AutoSave. 2. Select the options you want from the AutoSave dialog box. 3. Click OK.
Send a Document to Others

1. Open the document you want to send. 2. Click File > Send. 3. Select the recipients using your electronic mail application's dialog box. 4. Type the subject and the accompanying message. 5. Send the message with the document attached.
Close a Document
1. Click File > Close. 2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of the following: If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
Close a Document Without Saving Changes

Any changes not saved when you close a document or exit SmartSketch are lost and cannot be recovered. If you want to close the document without saving any changes, select the No button on the Close dialog box. When you open the document again, it will revert to the state when the last save was performed.

Save Command (File Menu)
Saves the active document with its currently defined name, directory, and format. If you are saving the document for the first time, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to.
Save As Dialog Box

Specifies the name of, location of, and format for a document when you save it. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.
When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities.
Save As Command (File Menu)

Saves the active document to a new name, directory, and format.
AutoSave Command (Tools Menu)

Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify. Tip If you do not have AutoSave on the Tools menu, the AutoSave add-in has not been installed. Click Related Topics for more SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 109
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview information.
AutoSave Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Automatic Save Every __ Minutes - Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify. Save Options - Saves either the active document or all documents that are open. Save Active Document Only - Saves only the active document. Save All Open Documents - Saves all documents that are open. Prompt Before Saving - Displays a dialog box whenever AutoSave begins saving documents. You can click one of the following buttons to answer the dialog box question: "Save changes in <document name>?" Save - Saves the document. Skip - Skips to the next document. Does not save the current document. Available only when Save All Open Documents is selected. Cancel - Cancels the current AutoSave session. Note The Save As dialog box appears if the document has not yet been saved.
Send Command (File Menu)

Activates your electronic mail application so you can send a mail message with the active document attached. Tip Send Mail is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Close Command (File Menu)

Closes the active document. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to. Tip Close is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Exit Command (File Menu)

Closes all open documents and exits the software. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to.
Printing Documents
You can print your documents on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to high-end laser printers. Except for the color settings and a few special effects, your drawing prints exactly as it appears on the drawing sheet.
Preparing to Print
The printer you use affects the way the current document prints and displays text on the screen. Before you print a document, you must install and select the printer that you want to use. For more information about installation, see your printer documentation. Before you print, you will want to choose a printer and the settings for it. To do this, click Print on the File menu and then click the printer that you want to use. You can set properties for the printer by clicking Properties. To set the print range and scale, click Settings.
Printing a Document
As you work on a document, you might need to send a copy of it to a specified printer, plotter, or file. You can click Print on the File menu to do the following: Print an entire document or specific sheets from a document. Print a draft copy of a document. Set printing options, such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print.
The software supports WSYWIG plotting, using standard Windows NT plotting capabilities. The software also supports pen plotters, subject to the limitations of the device driver. Elements appear the same on the screen and in the printed document. However, the fonts that you choose can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts, printer fonts, and screen fonts. Use scalable fonts, such as TrueType fonts, to confirm that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. If you use printer fonts, you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font, the screen display of the document will closely match the printed document.
Printing Part of a Document

You can print selected sheets in a document or a selected area. This practice is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them. To print selected sheets, you should first select sheets in the document to make them active. To do this, you can click the drawing sheet tabs of the sheets that you want while pressing Ctrl. Then, you select Print on the File menu and click Selected Sheets on the dialog box. When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document. To print a selected area, you should first select the drawing sheets that you want to print. Then, you select Print on the File menu and click Print Area on the dialog box. After you click OK, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag over the area that you want to print. The Print Area dialog box then automatically appears and allows you to set options for printing the selected area.
Printing Time
Required time for printing varies by document. Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items: Curved elements Many fills that have complex colors, patterns, or textures Large bitmaps Links to various documents
The type of printer that you have also affects the printing time. PostScript printers print faster than LaserJet printers because they can calculate faster. Some older versions of PostScript printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times.
Print a Document
Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both display and printing, select the printer you will use before you begin working on a document. Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 113
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview computer or network, install a printer driver, and select the printer you will use to print the document. For more information about how to install a printer, see the printer's documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click Print on the File menu and then click Properties. 1. Click File > Print Tip You can also click the Print button on the Main toolbar .
2. On the Print dialog box, in the Name box, select the printer you want to use. 3. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want. 4. In the Print range box, specify the range of pages you want to print. Notes You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. It is a good idea to save your document before you print it. This way, if a printer error or other problem occurs, you will not lose any work completed since the last time you saved the document. You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options on Tools menu. Then, on the View tab, click the Display As Printed check box.
Set Printing Options

1. On the Main toolbar, click Print 2. Do one of the following: To print A selected area of a sheet Do this Under Print Range, click Print Area and then click OK. A set of crosshairs appears that you can drag to define the area. The Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you can set options for printing the area. In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper. .
A range of continuous sheets
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Noncontinuous sheets In the Sheets box, type the sheet numbers, separated by commas. For example, to print pages 1 and 6, type 1,6. In the document, select the sheets you want to print; then, on the Print dialog box, click Selected Sheets. This prints the selected sheets as a composite drawing, like layers on a single sheet of paper. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document. Click All Sheets. This is recommended only when all the sheets have the same orientation and paper size. In the Number of Copies box, type or select a number of copies. To sort the sheets by sheet number, select the Collate Copies check box.
Selected sheets
An entire document
Multiple copies of the entire document
Notes When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation. Click File > Sheet Setup to specify the drawing sheet size and scale.
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet

Because the available fonts available on the selected printer affect both display and printing, select the printer to use before you begin working on a document. Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network, install a printer driver, and select the printer to print the document. For more information about installing a printer, see the printer documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click Print on the File menu, and then click Properties. 1. On the Main toolbar, click Print .
2. On the Print dialog box in the Name box, select the printer you want to SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 115
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview use. 3. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want. 4. In the Print Range box, click Print Area and click OK. When a set of crosshairs appears, drag them to define the area that you want to print. 7. On the Print Area dialog box, set the options to print the area that you selected. Notes You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation. When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets print as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document. Click Sheet Setup on the File menu to specify the drawing sheet size and scale. Saving your document before you print it is a good idea. This way, if a printer error or other problem occurs, you will not lose any work completed since the last time you saved the document. You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options on Tools menu. Then, on the View tab, click the Display As Printed check box.
Print Several Documents Simultaneously

Caution Caution The command line that you type to print several documents simultaneously uses the options that you set in the software, except for printer selection and the number of copies. Before you begin, review the options on the Print dialog box. On that dialog box, click Settings to review the options on the Settings dialog box.
1. On the Windows Taskbar, in the Programs menu, click MS-DOS Prompt. 2. In the DOS Window, type a command line with the following syntax: smartsketch.exe<space>-p<space>-q<space><printer path><space>116 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview c<space><integer for number of copies><space><document path><space><document path><space><document path, and so forth> Example: smartsketch.exe p q \\print1\laserjet c 2 c:\temp\first file.igr c:\temp\second_file.igr smartsketch.exe<space>-p<space>-q<space><printer path><space>c<space><integer for number of copies><space><document path><space><document path><space><document path, and so forth> Example smartsketch.exe p q \\print1\laserjet c 2 c:\temp\first file.igr c:\temp\second_file.igr Tip Spaces separate the document paths. If the filename contains a space, you must use double quotes. 1. Press Enter to print the document. Notes You can use the command line locally or remotely when the Windows NT Server Resource Kit is installed. You can print from local and network printers and plotters. You can also print multiple documents with an asterisk ( * ) in the file name as a wildcard. The software is compatible with AIMPWV (Asset and Information ManagementPrint Without View).
Print to a File
1. On the Main toolbar, click Print 3. Click OK. 4. On the Print to file dialog box, type the name of the file and select the directory that you want to print to. . 2. On the Print dialog box, set Print to file.

Print Command (File Menu)
Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file. Options are available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and other printing characteristics. Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer, see the Windows documentation.
Print Dialog Box

Controls the way a document prints.
Dialog Box Options

Name - Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list of all the configured printers available for printing. Properties - Accesses the Printer Document Properties dialog box. Status - Displays the current status of the selected printer. This area is readonly. Type - Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only. Where - Displays the printer path or location for the currently selected printer. This area is read-only. Comment - Displays any comments you input during printer configuration. This area is read-only. Print To File - Prints the document to a file, instead of a printer. You specify the file's name on the Print To File dialog box after you set the check box and click OK on the Print dialog box. This saves a document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer or plotter. Then, you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have installed. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can 118 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities. Print Range - Displays options for selecting the print range. All Sheets - Prints all drawing sheets in the active document. Selected Sheets - Prints all the sheets that you selected as a composite document, as layers all on one sheet of paper. Sheets - Specifies the range of pages that you want to print. You can enter the starting page you want to print as the "From" value and the ending page you want to print as the "To" value. In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper. Print Area - Accesses the Print Area dialog box. When you click this option and then click OK on the dialog box, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag the crosshairs to define the area that you want to print. Then, the Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you can set various options for printing the area that you selected. Copies - Sets options for the number of copies you want to print. Number Of Copies - Specifies the number of copies you want to print. Collate - Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies. Pure Black and White - Prints a black and white document. Settings - Accesses the Settings dialog box. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the in the upper right corner of the dialog box and Question Mark click the control that you want information about.
Printer Document Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for the current printer that you selected on the Print dialog box. The settings available on this dialog box depend on the type of printer that you selected. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 119
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the in the upper right corner of the dialog box and Question Mark click the control that you want information about.
Print Area Dialog Box

Specifies the area that you want to print.
Dialog Box Options

Scale - Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document. Best Fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device. Manual Scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the design length to 1. Tip If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values.
Paper Length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print. Design Length - Specifies a design length. Origin - Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper. Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. X - Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin. Y - Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin. 120 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper. XY Range - Clears the previous defined print area and prompts you to define a new print area.
Settings Dialog Box

Controls the print area of a selected sheet.
Dialog Box Options

Scale - Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document. Best Fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device. Manual Scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the design length to 1. Tip If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values.
Paper Length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print. Design Length - Specifies a design length. Origin - Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper. Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. X - Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin. Y - Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin. Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper. Tip If you click Manual Scale and enter values in the Paper Length SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 121
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes change to reflect the values. Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview An element is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic geometric elementfreeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.
You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you want to place a line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click two points to indicate where to start and finish the line. If you do not want to place another line, you can right-click to end the operation. Tip Right-clicking ends most operations in the software. You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. With this method, you drag the pointer as if it were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as rectangles, circles, and arcs, with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The mouse-down method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and modification. If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the line. This method, sometimes called mouseup drawing, is typically used for precision placement and when you want to draw elements that are related to each other. In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type values in the ribbon to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc Continuous and then type 3.0 in the Length box on the ribbon box and press Enter to lock the length value.
When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click anywhere on the drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line. Then, you move the line around and click again to set the line's orientation angle.
If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar. If you want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main toolbar.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview

Templates are used as a starting point in creating a document. A template is a file that provides tools such as text, formats, geometry, dimensions, units of measurement, toolbars, and styles that are used to produce a new document that uses a specified format. You can either use one of the pre-defined templates SmartSketch provides or you can create your own.
SmartSketch Industry-Specific Templates

SmartSketch provides an extensive selection of templates on which you can base your documents. The template that you use depends on the type of information you want to put in the document. For example, if you want to create a drawing that contains a schematic of an electrical component, you can use an electrical schematic template. When you select a specific template, tools are available that allow you to create either a schematic diagram or a precision drawing. Schematic diagrams are primarily created using symbols, connectors, and text at a 1:1 scale. Schematic diagrams do not represent a logical flow. The Schematic toolbar is available when you select a template designed to create a schematic diagram. Precision drawings represent physical elements such as lines, arcs, curves, and rectangles that you draw precisely with the Draw toolbar. Precision drawings are created at real-world scale, and you can maintain relationships between elements in precision drawings.
Additionally, when you base a document on a particular template, that template automatically points to the symbols that you would most likely use for that type of document. The Symbol Explorer displays the appropriate symbol set for the task. To base new documents on a template, choose New on the File menu and select the template from the list. You can also open the template and save the document under another name.
Saving a Document as a Template

If you find it necessary to use the same document settings over and over in different drawings, you may want to use a copy of that drawing to use as a starting point for other drawings.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Note Document settings might include drawing sheet settings, scales, actual elements that you draw, and a background sheet.
In these cases, you can use the drawing to create a template to use as a starting point for many different drawings. Use Save As Template on the File menu to save the current document as a template. This command saves the document in the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you installed the software. A different file extension in the name of the document is not necessary. Tip You can change the directory where templates are saved by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the directory that you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
Using General Diagramming Templates: An Overview

SmartSketch provides General Diagramming templates for mapping, basic diagrams, network diagrams, flowchart diagrams, workflow diagrams, and office layout diagrams. The general diagramming templates provide the following: Imperial templates-These templates have imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI or ASA dimensioning, and Arial, ANSI, or Architectural text. Metric templates-These templates have metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial or ISO text. Note The dimensioning and text standard will vary with each template. For example, the Atlas Mapping Imperial template provides ANSI dimensioning and Arial text, while the Office Layout Imperial template provides ASA dimensioning and Architectural text.
General diagramming template symbols are provided in the Symbol Explorer. Also, tools to create drawings using the general diagramming templates are available on the Draw toolbar.
Atlas Mapping Templates

You use these templates to produce maps. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text. Atlas Map symbols for the United States are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing window.
Mapping Workflow
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Tip You can create maps with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1. 8. Draw the map. Place map symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down the Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release the Ctrl key and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 1. Set up the sheet.
When you drag and pause a symbol over an existing map symbol drop point, a tool tip appears, identifying the state to be placed adjacently. Dropping the symbol on the drop point ensures that the state boundaries match perfectly. 9. Place text. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 127
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 10. Finish the drawing. Finish the map by drawing details, adding text, or modifying the symbols to enhance the map. The following symbol sets aid in drawing maps. Content Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH United States Map symbols. These \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING symbols have drag points as well as special behaviors for enhanced \ATLAS MAP\US STATES placement and modification.
Basic Diagramming Templates

You use these templates to produce business diagrams. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text.
Basic diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.
Setting Up a Basic Diagram

Tip You can create business diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 11. Prepare to draw. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. 128 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
1. Set up the sheet.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Simple Diagramming Workflow

1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.
Optimal Diagramming Workflow

1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically during placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using grid snap or visual alignment. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
12. Connect the symbols by using Connector. When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode will be temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any angle with or without grid snap. 13. Place text. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 14. Finish the diagram. Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets are aid in drawing diagrams. Content \PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \BASIC Description Common business diagramming symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.
Directional Mapping Templates

You use these templates to produce directional maps. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters,
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text. Directional Map symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing window.
Directional Mapping Workflow

Tip You can create maps with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1. 15. Draw a directional map. Draw transportation routes first using Line/Arc Continuous or Curve on the Draw toolbar. Select a linestyle such as Rural Road or Railroad. When you use Line/Arc Continuous, press Shift+A to draw an arc. To turn line mode back on, press Shift+L. When you use Curve, press the left mouse button as you draw. You can label transportation routes by double-clicking the line and typing the name of the road or railroad. The text automatically aligns to linear elements. 1. Set up the sheet.
16. Place symbols. Place directional map symbols to represent landmarks by dragging from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 131
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 17. Place text. Double-click symbols or lines to place text. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for repositioning or editing text properties or moving properties, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 18. Finish the map. Draw details and modify the color or linestyles of the symbols to enhance the map. The following symbol sets aid in drawing directional maps. Content Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH Directional Map symbols have \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING special behaviors for enhanced \DIRECTIONAL MAP placement and modification.
Flowchart Templates
You use these templates to produce flowcharts and diagrams. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and Arial text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text.
Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and TQM symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create flowcharts and diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.
Setting Up a Flowchart
Tip You can create flowcharts and diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 1. Set up the sheet. 2. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allows enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 3. Prepare to draw. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using the SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Drawing a Simple Flowchart and Diagram

Drawing an Optimal Flowchart and Diagram

1. Place flowchart and diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 133
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 19. Connect the symbols by using Connector. When drawing connectors, set the clearance using Clearance. Type the minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode will be temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any angle with or without grid snap. 20. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbols. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Rightclick on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Then with the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 21. Finish the diagram. Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets are provided to aid in drawing diagrams. Content Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING TQM symbols. You can doubleclick these symbols to place text. \FLOWCHART These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.
Network Diagram Templates

You use these templates to produce network diagrams. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and ANSI text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text.
Network Diagram symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create network diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.
Network Diagram Workflow

Tip You can create network diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size. The network symbols are accurately scaled to 1/10th of their true size so you should leave the sheet scale at 1:1, the default. 22. Prepare to draw. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static. Set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw.
Simple Network Diagram

Optimal Network Diagram

1. Place network diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 135
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
Some network symbols mount into the rack or chassis symbols when you drag the symbol into a rack or chassis. When you pause over a drop point in a chassis or rack, a tool tip appears; for example, Attach Module. When you move a symbol, all associated symbols follow. To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the green lock. This frees the symbol from the element. A symbol is not associated to an element if a green lock is not displayed when you select the symbol. 23. Add attributes to the network symbols by selecting the symbol and editing fields in the Attribute Viewer. 24. Connect the symbols by using Connector, or by dragging in Cable symbols and then connecting the endpoints to network symbols. The result is a symbolized connector with attribution. When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be placed on a target or any of the symbol vector geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled. Note the connect points display a tool tip when the connector end point is drawn or modified over a port on the network symbol. 136 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview You can edit attribute information on the connector and the network symbols in the Attribute Viewer. SmartLabels are provided for network symbols and cables. These SmartLabels appear in the Symbol Explorer in the network symbol directories. When you drag a network SmartLabel over the drag point (usually the lower left corner) of a network symbol, the label associates to the symbol and accesses the symbol attribute information. The description attribute data is displayed in the label. The cable labels display the type and the speed-type of the cable. 25. Place text. Double-click on the symbols to place text below the symbol or connector. The active text settings in the file are used. Right click on text to edit properties. To move the text, select and highlight the text. Click the green lock to unlock; then with the pointer, drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 26. Report on the network diagram. Drag a report from the Symbol Explorer on to the sheet and follow the instructions. An Excel spreadsheet is updated from the attributes of all the network symbols in the file. The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams. Content \PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \NETWORK DIAGRAM Description Network diagram symbols that include Cables, Chassis, Cards, Modules, Input-Output Devices, Intelligent Network Devices, Network Accessories, Nonintelligent Network Devices, Physical Plant, and Servers and Storage devices. These symbols have attribution and special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.
Office Layout Templates

You use these templates to produce Office Layout drawings. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 137
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ASA dimensioning, and Architectural text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text.
Office layout symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create office layout drawings appears on the left of the drawing window.
Office Layout Workflow

Tip You should create office layout drawings with Maintain Relationships set on.
1. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1' for the Imperial template and 1:50 for the Metric template. 27. Prepare to draw. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking. Tip You can begin by drawing the office walls or by referencing or opening a floor plan drawing.
28. Draw walls. Click Place Doubleline on the Draw toolbar and set the thickness of the walls to be drawn in the ribbon. Click the appropriate button on the ribbon to indicate whether you draw from the center of the wall or one of the edges (primary line buttons). 138 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Draw the walls first. Next use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup. If you press Alt while drawing, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled. When you draw the walls, you may want to select a neutral gray for the line color. After you draw the walls, you can avoid cleaning the intersections by color filling the walls with a solid fill of the same neutral gray color. Use the door and window symbols to complete the floor plan. These symbols automatically align to the wall and can be mirrored, scaled and rotated after placement. Tip You can also use Place Doubleline for drawing office partitions, along-wall working surfaces, counter tops, work benches, stockroom shelves, custom bookcases, custom desks, and cat walks. If you press and hold Shift while drawing with Place Doubleline, the end caps do not automatically merge into another section of doubleline. This feature is useful for drawing partitions perpendicular to walls. You can use Fillet to round the corners of counter tops.
29. Reference or open an existing floor plan. Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging the existing file into the drawing window. Or click the Open command on the File menu to open an existing floor plan file. Tip You can reference or open any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document.
30. Place office layout symbols. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. Office Layout symbols can be physically associated to walls or other symbols. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 139
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview When you move a symbol or a wall, all associated symbols follow. To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the green lock to unlock the association. A symbol is not associated if a green lock is not displayed when the symbol is selected. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
31. Annotate the drawing. Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. To label, double-click symbols, walls, or other drawn elements. The active text settings in the file are used for labels that you double-click. To edit existing text properties, right-click text and select properties from the pop-up menu. To move text, click to select; then click the green lock to unlock. Move by dragging the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 32. Finish the drawing. Change the color of symbols to enhance furniture or identify existing and new equipment. You can also use connectors to enhance the drawing by adding communication and computer networking lines. The following symbol sets aid in creating office layout drawings. Content Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH Office Layout symbols have special \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \OFFICE behaviors for enhanced placement and LAYOUT modification.
Organizational Chart Templates

You use these templates to produce organizational charts. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text.
Org Chart symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create organizational charts appears on the left of the drawing window.
Automated Organizational Chart Creation

1. Load the add-in. On the Main toolbar, click Add-Ins on the Tools menu and check the box for Org Chart Wizard. 33. The Wizard of Org. On the Main toolbar, click Org Chart Wizard on the Tools menu and follow the instructions to continue. This wizard creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. The completion of the wizard results in a new sheet added to the open file containing your chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors interactively as if the chart had been drawn manually.
Organizational Chart Workflow

Tip You can create organizational charts with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 34. Prepare to draw. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 141
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Simple Workflow Diagram

Optimal Workflow Diagram

1. Place Org Chart symbols by dragging them from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. These symbols automatically expand to the size of the text. You can also size them by using the yellow handles. Tip You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
35. Connect the symbols by using Connector. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance: to the minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in the connector appears. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the 142 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press the Alt key while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap. 36. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for editing properties, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Rightclick the highlighted text to edit properties. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 37. Finish the organizational chart. Use color to modify the symbols and use connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets aid in drawing organizational charts. Content \PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \ORG CHARTS Description Organizational Chart symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.
Workflow Diagram Templates

You use these templates to produce workflow diagrams. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text.
Work flow symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create workflow diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 143
Schematic Workflow
Tip You can create workflow diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 38. Prepare to draw. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid settings, click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Drawing a Simple Workflow Diagram

Drawing an Optimal Workflow Diagram

1. Place symbols. Place symbols by using the pointer to drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using Grid Snap or visual alignment. 144 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press the Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
39. Connect the symbols. Use Connector. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance on the ribbon to the minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in the connector occurs. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap. 40. Place text. Double-click symbols to edit text labels at the bottom of the symbols. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 41. Finish the diagram. Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets aid in drawing workflow diagrams. Content \PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH \SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \WORKFLOW DIAGRAM Description Workflow Diagram symbols. These symbols have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.
Using AEC Solutions Templates: An Overview

SmartSketch provides AEC templates for use with its AEC Solutions module. You must install this module before you can use the AEC templates. After installing the AEC Solutions module, you will be able to use the AEC templates with any AutoCAD, MicroStation, DXF, or IGR reference file. The AEC templates are precision templates designed according to accepted industry standards. The templates have imperial units in feet and inches, as well as metric units in meters and centimeters. ANSI and architectural and ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders and Architectural fill styles are also provided with the AEC templates. The AEC template symbols are based on AIA, ASHRAE, and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs. The AEC templates also provide ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards.
Architectural Templates
You use these precision templates to produce architectural designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards. Architectural (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. Architectural (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Floor Plans

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. 1. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the 146 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet. 42. Select a border or create one. The Architectural templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders from Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border. Tip The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI).
43. From the View tab on the Options dialog box, set the grid settings to Grid style to Static, Grid spacing to 1, and Grid index to 1. 44. Draw the perimeter walls. Workflow A: Draw the approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline and SmartSketch. Use Trim, Trim to Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup between elements where walls overlap or do not intersect cleanly. Workflow B: Verify on the Tools menu that Maintain Relationships is set on. Draw the approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline, SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Then adjust the distance between walls (doubleline graphics) usingSelect Tool on the Draw toolbar to make precision distances with PinPoint. Use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup between elements. Short cut keys F9 and F12 for PinPoint are useful when you draw walls. Avoid trimming for openings, doors, or windows. Press and hold Shift while using Place Doubleline; this action prevents a beginning or end cap from being placed. (Pressing and holding Shift while using Place Doubleline is useful for tracing.)
1. Draw the interior walls. 2. Using the same techniques and commands you used to draw the perimeter walls, add the appropriate interior walls and adjust accordingly. 3. Place door and window symbols.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Doors folder from the Plan Symbols folder in the tree view. Drag the door symbols onto the represented wall elements, and use the bold parameters that appear in the Attribute Viewer to change the size of the door and the handles that appear to orient the door to the position you want. Repeat the same steps you used to place doors for placing windows and all other types of symbols. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
45. Annotate the drawing. Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label windows and doors, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. Or use labels provided in the Label directory in the Plan Symbols directory. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content Elevation Symbols Plan Symbols Description Symbols of typical elevation view content based on AIA standards and other common designs. Symbols of typical plan view content based on AIA standards and other common designs. Some symbols such as doors and windows can be modified by parameters that appear when the symbols are placed.
Important To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions module.
HVAC Templates
You use these precision templates to produce HVAC designs and drawings 148 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview according to accepted industry standards. HVAC (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs. HVAC (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Double Line Duct Layout

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. Tip To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships off. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet. 46. Reference a floor plan or open one. Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click File on the Open menu to open (translate) the file. Tip Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, DXF, or IGR document can be a reference file. Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Double Line Duct folder from the HVAC folder in the tree view. Drag the duct symbols over the reference file, connecting one to another. Use the bold parameters that appear in the Attribute Viewer to change the size of the duct.
47. Place duct symbols.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Tips You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label double line ducts, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. 49. Select a border or create one. The HVAC templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders with Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border. Tip The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Description HVAC symbols designed to best fit Double Line Duct and Single Line Duct Layout workflows. Several of these symbols are designed with special behaviors and parametric properties. HVAC symbols designed to ASHRAE standards.
48. Annotate the drawing.
Content HVAC (Intergraph)
HVAC (ASHRAE) Important
To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview module.
Landscape Templates
Use these precision templates to produce landscape designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards. Landscape (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. Landscape (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Landscape Designs

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. Tip To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships off. Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale for the design. The default scale is inches = 1 foot, which is appropriate for the average plan on a D Size sheet. 50. Reference a floor plan or open one. Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or use Open on the File menu to open (translate) the file. Tip Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a reference file. If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw tool bar, SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 151
51. Create a foot print.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview you can trace the outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline shape of the building. Either delete or move the reference file to a layer and turn it off. 52. Place symbols. Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate positions. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
53. Annotate the drawing Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label landscape symbols, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. 54. Select a border or create one. The Landscape templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border. Tip The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). Description Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation symbols for commercial and residential Landscape
55. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content Elevations Symbols 152 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview design. Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan symbols for commercial and residential Landscape design.
Plan Symbols Important
To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions module.
Site Templates
You use these precision templates to produce site designs and drawings according to accepted industry standards. Site (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. Site (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs. The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Site Designs

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards. Tip To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships off. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet. 56. Reference a floor plan or open one. Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click the Open command to open (translate) the file.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Tip Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a reference file. If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw toolbar, you can trace the outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline shape of the building. Either delete or move the reference file to a layer and turn it off. 58. Place symbols. Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate positions. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
57. Create a foot print.
59. Annotate the drawing. Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label site symbols, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them. 60. Select a border or create one. The Site templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border. Tip The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). Description
61. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content 154 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Elevations Symbols Plan Symbols Important
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation symbols for commercial and residential Site design. Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan symbols for commercial and residential Site design.
To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions module.
Using Electrical Diagramming Templates: An Overview

This collection of industry-specific templates (both Imperial and Metric) includes task-specific toolbars and industry-standard symbols that allow you to quickly and easily create sophisticated electrical schematics. Using simple drag-and-drop methods, you can easily position electrical components into their appropriate locations on the drawing sheet. With intelligent routing - the Connector command you can connect components at each symbol's connect points, or you can drag-and-drop components onto the connectors you've already placed. Many inline components such as resistors, batteries, capacitors, diodes, and switches auto-align and glue when dropped onto a connector. Drawing annotation is easy: simply double-click a component or connector, then type the text. Many symbols (such as resistors, batteries, and capacitors) have predefined SmartLabels that can be edited with a double-click selection. There is also an annotation symbol directory with drag-and-drop auto-sizing text boxes. This module delivers 250 electrical symbols, including: Circuit Protectors Contacts and Relays Electron Tubes Fundamental Items High Voltage Logic Gates Qualifying Symbols Rotating Mach Semiconductors Diodes, Thyristors, Transistors Signaling Switches Terminal & Connectors Transformers & Inductors
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Transmission Path
The Control Loop Diagram template includes more than 200 control loopspecific symbols. The symbols are grouped into logical categories and include Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Diagramming module.
Control Loop Templates

You use this schematic template to produce control loop diagrams using Intergraph supplied symbols according to accepted industry standards. Imperial TemplateThis template defaults to a B size sheet. The sheet background consists of two sections divided into two categories. The main sections are Field and I/O Building. The Field section is divided into Instrument and Junction Box categories. The I/O Building is divided into Termination Rack and I/O Cabinet categories. Tip If you need a different configuration for the background, click Background Sheets on the View menu, and select a sheet and modify as needed. Then click Working Sheets on the View menu. The working sheet displays the changes that were made in the background sheet.
Control Loop Workflow

Tip You should create schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships cleared.
1. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet size is B with a scale of 1:1. 2. Place symbols. The Symbol Explorer defaults to the Control Loop symbol set. The set is divided into logical components such as controllers, recorder, terminal strips, transmitters and others. Select a component and drag it to the location you want. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 157
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Tip A typical configuration might be as follows: FieldInstrument Thermocouple, Junction Box- 3 Wire Terminal Strip; I/O BuildingTermination Rack3 Wire Terminal Strip w/ground and I/O CabinetElectrical Recorder. Connect points have been placed on each component where typical connections can be made. 63. Edit attributes. Some components have attributes associated with them that change the text associated with them. Select the component, and change the attributes you want to change in the Symbol Explorer. The text labels are updated to display the input values. The following symbol sets to aid in control loop diagramming. Content Control Loop Diagrams Description Control Loop symbols categorized into the following groupings: Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Positioners, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips, Transmitters and Valves.
62. Click Connector and connect the components together as you want.
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Diagramming module.
Electrical Schematic Templates

You use these schematic templates to produce electrical drawings according to accepted industry standards. Imperial TemplateThis template is defined with ANSI sheet sizes and borders. The default sheet size is C with a 1:1 scale. Metric TemplateThis template is defined with ISO sheet sizes and borders. The default sheet size is A1 with a 1:1 scale.
Both templates point to the electrical symbol sets. The electrical symbols include main classifications of the following: Circuit Protectors, Contacts and Relays, Electron Tubes, Fundamental Items, High Voltage, Logic Gates, Qualifying Symbols, Rotating Mach, Semiconductors, Signaling and Readout 158 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Devices, Switches, Terminals and Connectors, Transformers and Inductors, and Transmission Path. Tip You should design schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships set off (default setting).
Electrical Workflow 1
1. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale. 64. Place an initial symbol correctly rotated. 65. Route a connector from that symbol to form a rough outline of the circuit. 66. From the Symbol Explorer, select the type of symbol or component needed, and drag the component onto the sheet and over the connector. The connector is highlighted when the pointer moves over the element. Most of the components automatically align to the connector. Drop the symbol, and it is placed, associated to the connector. Or, if the orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to rotate the symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is dropped, it maintains the orientation. 67. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer. When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the symbol also changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select the text box and delete text from the symbol. 68. Continue adding or modifying connectors and adding components until the circuit is complete.
Electrical Workflow 2
1. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale. 69. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the component onto the sheet to the location you want. Or, if the orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to rotate the symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is dropped, it maintains the orientation. 70. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer. When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the symbol also changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 159
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview the text box and delete text from the symbol. 71. Continue dragging and dropping components as needed to complete the circuit. 72. Using Connector, connect the individual components. 73. Continue adding components and connecting them together until the circuit is complete.
Differences in Workflow 1 and 2

Workflow 1 places the symbol or component on the connector or wire. It does not break the wire. It only masks out the connector beneath it. In this case the components are glued to the connector. To modify the circuit in such a case, you move the connector, and the symbols follow it to the new location. Workflow 2 places a connector or wire between the components that are placed. Workflow 2 is more of a real-world flow. In this case, you can select and move the components, and the connector or wires move to adjust to the new component location. You can combine the workflows. You must, however, remember which is the parent and which is the child when you combine the two.
The following symbol sets aid in electrical schematic creation. Content Electrical Symbols Description Circuit Protectors Contacts and Relays Electron Tubes Fundamental Items High Voltage Items Logic Gates Qualifying Symbols Rotating Mach & Comp Assembly Semiconductors Diodes Thyristors Transistors Signaling & Readout Devices Switches Terminal & Connectors Transformers & Inductors Transmission Path
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Diagramming module.
Using Mechanical Engineering Templates: An Overview

SmartSketch provides tools that let you create part drawings and assembly drawings that provide information for manufacturinga product. Part drawings (or detail drawings) show each part contained in a product. Assembly drawings show how all the parts fit together. These drawing templates (Metric and Imperial) are available with the GD&T (Geometric Dimension and Tolerancing) and Weld Symbols module. GD&T and Weld Symbols are symbol sets that let you create and place GD&T and Weld Symbols into SmartSketch drawings. The symbols are placed through a simple drag-anddrop operation from the Symbol Explorer. You can also place Text Fields that build up the symbols via this same drag-and-drop operation. Several of the symbols feature multiple representations that you can easily access with a simple right-mouse click on your placed symbol. Once you see the representation you like, you simply left-mouse click it to change the display of the symbol in your drawing. GD&T symbols include input fields - such as tolerance value - which are easily accessed with a simple double-click of your mouse; you can then edit the input field to change its value. You can access these symbols when you open one of the Mechanical templates in SmartSketch. Important To use this functionality, you must install the GD&T and Weld Symbols module.
Mechanical Templates
ANSI TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes and borders, implements the ANSI Y14.5 dimensioning standard, and provides ANSI Y14.5 GD&T and American Welding Society (AWS) Weld symbols. ISO TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes and borders, implements the ISO dimensioning standard, and provides ISO GD&T and Weld symbols.
The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Part Design Workflow

Tip You should design individual parts with Maintain Relationships turned on. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small parts. 74. Sketch the part. 75. Draw the elements, using the tools from the Draw toolbar and the SmartSketch Settings command. As you draw, relationships are established that capture your design intent. Tip As an example the system remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. You do not need to give much attention to the exact size of the part; it is often easier to dimension the part and change the dimensions later. Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the part. These dimensions drive dimensions that can be changed to iterate your design. Redundant dimensions are shown through the driven elements. 77. Refine the drawing. Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design. If you plan to use the part in a mechanism or assembly, then select all of the geometry and create a symbol with an appropriate name.
76. Dimension the part.
Mechanism Modeling Workflow

Tip You can design mechanisms, using rigid body symbols. You should set Maintain Relationships to On in the mechanism file. You must save each part in the mechanism as a symbol and turn Allow Rotation by Relationships on, using the Symbol Authoring tools, so the parts can act as a rigid body in the mechanism. 162 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
1. Prepare the parts.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 78. Start a new drawing. You should create the mechanism in a new drawing with an appropriate sheet scale for the whole mechanism. Set the symbol browser to the location of the components. 79. Drag the parts. Drag the parts into their rough location on the sheet, but do not give much attention to precision placement or orientation. 80. Connect the parts. Use the tools on the Relationship toolbar to establish the relationships between the parts in the mechanism. Connect allows you to connect a specific location on one part to a specific location on another part. Use relationship indicators to determine the connection type, such as end point to center point or end point to midpoint. You can also use specific tools to establish other relationships, such as tangent, parallel, perpendicular, colinear, concentric, and others. 81. Create driving dimensions. Use SmartDimension or other dimensioning tools to establish the controlling dimensions for the mechanism. 82. Move the mechanism. Select a driving dimension and change the value to move the mechanism into a specific configuration.
Production Drafting Workflow

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the ANSI standards. Tip To produce a fairly complex production drawing, set Maintain Relationships off. Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the part. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small parts on an A-Size sheet. 83. Draw the views. Draw a principle view of the part using the draw tools (with precision keyin values on the ribbon), SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Draw other views using SmartSketch Settings to align key edges from each view. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 163
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 84. Annotate the drawing. Use the text, dimensioning, GD&T symbols, and weld symbols to annotate the drawing. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. The following symbol sets are provided to aid in production drafting. Content Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) Symbols Description Datum and feature control frames are provided according to the ANSI Y14.5 or ISO standard. Components of each frame are provided as symbols with appropriate drag points to fit into the frames. The weld reference line and components are provided according to the American Welding Society (AWS) or ISO standard.
Weld Symbols
Important To use this functionality, you must install the GD&T and Weld Symbols module.
Using Process Diagramming Templates: An Overview

SmartSketch provides industry-specific templates, task-specific toolbars, and industry-standard symbols that let you produce 2D process diagrams, schematics, and precision drawings. With the included report macros, you can easily create component reports. Using simple drag-and-drop actions let you quickly position major components of a process system into their appropriate locations in the drawing area. With SmartSketch's intelligent routing - the Connector command together with predefined linestyles to represent pipes and instrumentation lines, you can connect components at each symbol's connect points. You can place other inline components, such as valves, directly on a pipeline or instrumentation line. Process application templates (both Imperial and Metric) present industrystandard sheet sizes and properties so that you can produce: Control Loop Diagrams This template includes more than 200 control loop-specific symbols. The symbols are grouped in logical categories such as Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters. Process Block Diagrams This template includes 24 typical block diagram symbols. Each symbol has a double-click text action that lets you enter the text needed for each particular process in the diagram. Ortho Piping Diagrams This template delivers more than 850 ortho piping symbols, grouped by size and function. Each size contains 150# and 300# valves and valve assemblies, flanges, elbows, tees, and actuators. By using pre-defined line and doubleline styles that depict the sizes and types of pipes, you can create both associative and non-associative piping layouts. PFDs and P&IDs The Process Flow and P&ID templates are grouped by ANSI, ISO, and Intergraph symbol standards. The ANSI symbol set contains approximately 150 symbols; the ISO symbol set contains approximately 240 symbols; the Intergraph PFD symbol set contains more than 370 symbols, and the Intergraph P&ID symbol set contains more than 860 symbols. Many Intergraph process symbols have a set of pre-selected attributes that can be edited via the Attribute Viewer (you can add additional attributes to any symbol). Every pipeline, SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 165
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview instrumentation line, and symbol can have SmartLabels applied to add and display attribute information. Based on these attributes, reports- such as Vessel Reports, Pump/Compressor Reports, Heat Exchanger Reports, and Stream Reports- can be easily generated using delivered report macros. You simply drag-and-drop these macros into the diagram just as you would any other symbol in the Symbol Explorer. Plot Plans This template delivers 36 parametric symbols, which include Annotation, Equipment, Roads, Site, and Vehicles directories. When used with the ImageScape LT module for SmartSketch LE, raster images can then be referenced and scaled to the correct size and orientation, and vector graphics can be drawn on top to accurately represent the new facilities. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
Ortho Piping Templates

You use this precision template to produce orthographic piping drawings, using common sized components and pipes. Ortho Piping TemplateThis template has imperial units in feet and inches, with a precision of 1/32. The sheet scale is set to 1/2 = 1.
ANSI, ISO, DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are available in the template. The default dimension type is ANSI. When you open this template, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Ortho Piping Workflow 1 (Small Layouts)

You can create small layouts with Maintain Relationships set on. Select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/2 = 1. 85. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of piping to be placed. A list of folders containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is displayed. 86. Place a line. 166 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 87. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. On the ribbon, select the appropriate line style. Click to place the line. 88. Drag one of the piping components into the document close to the end of the pipe where it is placed. Example 150# Gate Valve with flanges. If the orientation of the valve is not correct relative to the pipe, use the left or right arrow keys to rotate as needed. Click the symbol. 89. To display the Relationships toolbar, click Relationships on the Main toolbar 90. On the Relationships toolbar, click Connect. 91. Identify the center on one end of the valve as the first point to connect to. You can see the midpoint indicator as the pointer moves over the center of the end of the valve. 92. Identify the end of the line placed previously as the other end to connect. The valve moves to the end of the pipe. If Maintain Relationships is set on, the valve remains connected when modifications are made. 93. Place another line from the other end of the valve. Select the midpoint of the end of the valve from which to start. Place the line an approximate length. 94. From the 4 Els directory select the 90 degree elbow and drag it into the file. Use the rotate keys to rotate to a correct orientation. Connect the midpoint of the elbow to the end point of the 4 line. 95. Repeat the process as needed until the layout is complete. 96. Place dimensions between key components of the layout. Tip Workflow method 1 is recommended for small layouts because the constraints needed to handle a large piping layout may make the system too slow for practical use.
Ortho Piping Workflow 2 (Large Layouts)

You should create large piping layouts with Maintain Relationships set off. Be sure to select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings.
1. To set up the sheet, select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the piping layout. The default scale is 1/2 = 1. 2. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of components to be placed. A list of folders containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is displayed. 3. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. Draw a single line, centerline, layout of the piping system to be drawn. Placing centerlines on a different layer is recommended. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 167
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 4. From the Symbol Explorer, select the proper sized components to be placed, and drag the components onto the line. 5. When the components are placed in their proper locations, turn off the centerline layer. 6. Select Place Doubleline, a flyout on the Line/Arc Continuous. Set the placement option on the toolbar to Center Primary Line; then select a width. 7. Use relationship indicators to locate the midpoint of one of the components, and click the left mouse button. Use midpoint to locate the end of the next component that has been placed, and right-click. A doubleline representing the size of the pipe is placed. 8. Continue connecting components in this manner until all components are connected. Tip To show pipes crossing, the doubleline representing the pipe on top can be filled or patterned with a blank color. The pipe that is to be displayed below can be selected and pushed to the bottom in the display. To select and push the pipe to the bottom, click Send to Back on the Change toolbar. You can place pipes using the method in Workflow 1 with Line/Arc Continuous instead of using Place Doubleline.
The following symbol sets aid in Ortho Piping layouts. Content Description
Orthographic Piping Symbols Each Size contains the following: 150# Valves Sizes 1,2,3,4,6,8,10,12 Inches 300# Valves Actuators Annotation Els Olet Reducers Welds 2. and 2 Inch sizes also include 600# and 800# valves. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
PFD and P&ID Templates

You use these schematic templates to produce process flow diagrams according to accepted industry standards. 168 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview PFD (Intergraph) TemplateThis template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams. The default symbol set is a subset of the Intergraph SP2D symbol set. The delivered set draws most PFDs. If you need other Intergraph symbols, you can copy them from the P&ID (Intergraph) symbol set. PFD ANSI TemplateThis template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams based on ANSI Process Flow Standards. ASA Z32.2.3-1949. PFD ISO TemplateThis template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams based on ISO Process Flow Standards. (General RulesFlow Diagrams for Process Plants - ISO 10628) P&ID (Intergraph) TemplateThis template is set up to be a schematic template to create process flow diagrams and P&ID diagrams. The symbol set is the Intergraph SP2D symbol set, consisting of approximately 1000 symbols. You can reconfigure the symbol locations and directories to your specification for easy location.
PFD and P&ID Workflow

Tip You should create schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships cleared. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the schematic drawing. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for the symbol sizes. 97. Place symbols. Drag in the major components of the PFD and place them at locations on the sheet. These components usually include vessels, pumps, and heat exchangers. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol: Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 169
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol. 98. Enter attribute information for the individual components. To enter data in the attributes, select the symbol and add the information in the Attribute Viewer. 99. Attach nozzles to major equipment. Nozzles are automatically aligned and can be placed anywhere on the major equipment. 100. From the Schematic toolbar select Connector.
Connect the major components together at the locations you want on each symbol. 101. Each symbol has predefined connect points; however, the connector can connect to any graphic location on the symbol. The connector routes itself away from the original symbol and toward the target symbol. You can attach connectors to connectors. A connector being placed or modified can have its starting or ending point anywhere along another connector. Set connector flow direction at any time.
There are two methods to set the flow direction: When you place the connector, you can use the options on the connector toolbar to select the starting and ending terminator for the connector. You can drag an arrowhead symbol from the browser and connect it to the end of the connector.
102. Drag inline symbol components such as valves onto the connectors. The valve symbols have automated aligning turned on. This means that the valve automatically aligns to the direction of the connector. Note that the valve is placed on top of the connector and hides the portion of the connector that the valve covers. 103. To associate a text box with a symbol that does not already have associated text, first double-click the symbol, and then type in text. 170 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Moving the symbol causes the text to move and maintain its relative location to the symbol. If a symbol already has associated text, double-clicking the symbol allows you to edit the text.
104. After you have placed components and connectors, you can modify the symbols and/or connectors by selecting and dragging them to a new location. You can select and drag multiple symbols to a new location. You can select and modify single connectors. You can adjust segments of connectors to new locations or move and reattach endpoints. Description Intergraph Symbol set containing symbols needed for creating PFDs, P&IDs, and Material Handling drawings. Symbol set that is a subset of the P&ID (Intergraph) set. Symbols are adequate to create most PFDs. Other symbols from P&ID or other symbol sets can be copied to the PFD directory and are displayed for selection. Symbol set based on the ISO 10628 standard. General rules for flow diagrams for process plants. Symbol set based on ASA Z32.2.3-1949 ASME Y32.2.2.3 Graphical symbols for pipe fittings, valves and piping.
The following symbol sets aid in schematic drawings of PFDs and P&IDs. Content P&ID (Intergraph)
PFD (Intergraph)
PFD (ISO Standard) PFD (ANSI)
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
Plot Plan Templates

You use these precision templates to produce plot plan and equipment layout drawings. Plot Plan (Imperial) TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes and borders. Plot Plan (Metric) TemplateThis template has metric units in SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 171
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview millimeters, ISO sheet sizes and borders, and implements the ISO dimensioning. The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Plot Plan Workflow

Tip You can draw plot plans associatively or non-associatively. The default behavior is non-associative. To draw the plot plan associatively, set Maintain Relationships on. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet scale is 1 in:100 ft. for imperial and 1mm:1000mm for metric. 105. Sketch the layout.
Draw the geometry for roads, buildings or equipment, using the tools from the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings. As you draw, relationships are established that capture your design intent. As an example, with Maintain Relationships set on, the software remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. 106. Drag any symbols that are needed for the drawing.
You can place symbols precisely, relative to other components using PinPoint or the precision Move. 107. Dimension the part.
Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the layout. If Maintain Relationships is set on, these dimensions are driving dimensions that can be changed to iterate your design. Redundant dimensions are shown through the driven elements. 108. Finish the drawing.
Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design. The following symbol sets aid in construction of plot plan drawings. Content Plot Plan Description Assorted symbols to aid in the construction of Plot Plans. Symbols include direction arrow, buildings, vessels,
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview tanks, vehicles, and others. Some of the symbols are parametric and can be changed in the content explorer. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
Process Block Diagramming Templates

You use these templates to produce process block diagrams. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text.
Basic Diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these two templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.
Setting Up a Process Block Diagram

Tip You can create block diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. It is suggested that you accept the default, Maintain Relationships set off. Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 109. Prepare to draw.
Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing. These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed. Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results. You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Drawing a Simple Diagram

Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview 1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. 2. Use Connector to connect symbols. 3. Double-click each symbol to add text.
Drawing an Optimal Diagram

1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the pointer to drag from the Symbol Explorer. Place multiple copies of a symbol by using the right mouse button to drag and by selecting Stamp Here. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment. 110. Connect the symbols by using Connector.
When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance: to the minimum distance from the symbol so that the first turn in the connector appears. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the alignment indicators are temporarily be disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap. 111. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Rightclick on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Then with the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 112. Finish the diagram. 174 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Use fills and modify the elements in symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams. Content Process Block Diagrams Description Common Basic diagramming symbols. You can double-click these symbols to place text. These symbols also have special behaviors for enhanced placement and modification.
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
Technical Drawing Templates: An Overview

You use these templates to produce technical drawings, sketches, and illustrations. Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text. Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text.
A set of simple drawing elements is also available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create precision drawings appears on the left of the drawing window.
Drawing/Sketching Workflow
Tip You can create technical drawings with Maintain Relationships set on or off. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to enough paper space to draw. The default scale is 1:1. 113. Draw elements.
Use the tools on the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings, or drag symbols available in the Symbol Explorer. Place multiple copies of symbols by using the right mouse button to drag and by selecting Stamp Here, or by pressing Ctrl while dragging a symbol from the Symbol Explorer. If Maintain Relationships is set on, relationships between drawn objects SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 175
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview are established. As an example the system remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. You can use Trim, Extend to Next, and Fillet to efficiently modify drawn geometry. 114. Annotate the drawing.
Use text, dimensioning, and labels to annotate the drawing. Doubleclicking on any drawn object (except fills, dimensions, and leaders) creates an associative text box. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. 115. Finish the drawing.Use patterns and fills and modify the symbols to enhance the drawing. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting. Content Description
\ProgramFiles\ Commonly drawn elements such as line, SmartSketch\Symbols\Drawing rectangle, ellipse, circle, and others are provided to quickly begin a drawing. These symbols become drawing elements when placed so they are easily edited along with drawn elements.
Create a Template
1. Click File > New. 2. On the File New dialog box, select the Template to use as the basis for your new file. 3. Click OK to create the new file. 4. Complete any changes to be included as part of the template.
Save a Document as a Template

1. Click File > Save As Template. 2. In the Save As Template dialog box, specify the directory in which to save the new template. 3. In the File Name box, type a unique name for the new template. The template will be saved in the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you installed the software.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview Tip You can use the extension .igr. It is not necessary to use a different file extension for templates. Notes You can change the default directory where templates are saved by selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the directory that you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.

Save as Template Command (File Menu)
Saves a document as a template. The template is stored in the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you installed the software.
Organizational Chart Wizard (Tools Menu)

Creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. Adds a new sheet to the open file containing your chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview

An Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic geometric elementfreeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.
You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you want to place a line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click two points to indicate where to start and finish the line. If you do not want to place another line, you can right-click to end the operation. Tip Right-clicking ends most operations in the software. You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. With this method, you drag the pointer as if it were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as rectangles, circles, and arcs, with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The mouse-down method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and modification. If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the line. This method, sometimes called mouseup drawing, is typically used for precision placement and when you want to draw elements that are related to each other. In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type values in the ribbon to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc Continuous and then type 3.0 in the Length box on the ribbon box and press Enter to lock the length value.
When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click anywhere on the drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line. Then, you move the line around and click again to set the line's orientation angle.
If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar. If you want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main toolbar.
Drawing Lines: An Overview

If you want to place a line, you click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click a point on the drawing sheet to indicate where to start the line. You click a second point to indicate where to end the line. If you do not want to place another line, right-click to end the operation. You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You then click on the drawing sheet to place the line. You can also use a combination of clicks and ribbon input to place the line. For example, you can type a line length in the ribbon box to lock the length value and then set the line's orientation angle graphically. You can set the color and line type by clicking a style in the Style list box.
Draw a Line
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. 2. Click the point where you want the line to begin. 3. Click the point where you want the line to end. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the line. 4. Do one of the following: Tip If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 181 Right-click to end the line. To draw a series of connected lines, click at the point where you want each line segment to end, and then right-click.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Notes Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a line, you can drag the pointer to draw a line. You can press Esc to end a line or a line segment. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line.
Draw a Point
Note Point is available only if you use Customize to place it on a toolbar or menu. .
1. On your customized toolbar, click Point 2. Click to place a point. Notes
Instead of clicking to place the point, you can type values in the coordinate boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. The coordinate origin is located at the bottom left corner of the window. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a point.

Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws one line or a series of connected lines. When you draw a series of lines, the second point of one line is the first point of the next line. You can also draw a continuous series of lines and arcs that can be perpendicular or tangent to each other. You can create an open or closed shape by drawing lines and arcs in any combination. The last point of the line or arc is the first point of the next line or arc. Note The Line/Arc Continuous command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press Shift+A. While drawing, you can toggle between the two modes by pressing Shift+A for arc mode or pressing Shift+L for line mode.
Line Ribbon
Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Line - Switches the drawing mode from arc to line.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Arc - Switches the drawing mode from line to arc. Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values. Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value is counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the x axis.
Point Command
Draws a point. The point is displayed as a filled rectangle.
Tip Point is available only if you use Customize to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Point Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with 184 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview the X option.
Drawing Connectors: An Overview

You can use a connector to join two elements together. The Connector tool, located on both the Schematic and Draw toolbars, provides a convenient way to draw schematic diagrams and other types of drawings.
Connector allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space. Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. You can also modify the connector after you place it by inserting or moving a line segment, inserting or moving a vertex, or moving an element with a connector. There are special connector styles that you can use in your diagram. On the Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box. You can then draw a connector that displays the line style that you selected. For example, in documents based on the Process Block Diagram template, you can select Future and Phantom in the Line Style box on the ribbon. When you select Future and draw a connector, the connector appears as a dashed line. 186 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
When you select Phantom and draw a connector, it appears grayed out; the connector is highlighted when you point to it.
Besides line styles, you can also select line start and line end terminators on the Connector ribbon. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can apply.
Place a Connector
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector . 116. Click to begin drawing the connector or move the pointer over the element to highlight the potential key points or connect points. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. The active point along the element is a filled red circle. You can connect to any point on the element. Tip If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at any angle.
117. After you select a starting point, the direction in which you move from that point determines the angle at which the connector is drawn. The following picture shows that the pointer has been moved away from the initial point in a downward direction.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview You can generate two or more line segments with each click. When the pointer crosses the current line segment, the software automatically generates another segment. The following graphic shows a connector with three line segments although you clicked only once.
To switch between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments, click Diagonal Mode (Alt). If the element itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjusted appropriately so that the connector is perpendicular to the element. If you are connecting to a symbol, the connect point may have a pre-defined angle to which the connector must connect.
To create a connector path

After you select a point to move from, you can click points to force a connector to go to a certain path.
To end the connector

You can end a connector in the following ways: After you place one or more connector line segments, right click to end the connector. To attach the connector to another element, move the pointer over the element to display the potential connect points. However, you can connect to any point on the element.
When the point closest to the pointer is highlighted, you can click to define the end of the connector. The pointer snaps to connect points. Notes The software calculates the angle for the ending the connection point, based on how you approach the element. If the calculated angle is not correct when you move the pointer
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview away from the point, you can move the pointer back over the point and try again. As you drag connected elements or symbols, the connections are maintained.
Modify a Connector
To modify a connector, select the connector, using the Select Tool. You can then change the connector in several ways.
To insert a line segment

To insert a line segment into the connector, click Insert Segment Mode (Shift) on the ribbon, or press Shift.
The pointer changes to a directional arrow when the command is in Insert Segment mode, and the pointer is positioned over a connector segment. Drag the pointer diagonally to define the shape of the segment.
The following graphic shows the connector dynamics display as you drag the pointer (A).
When you release the drag, the segment is inserted as part of the connector.
To move a line segment

To move a line segment, first move the pointer over a horizontal SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 189
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview line segment or a vertical line segment. Then click the segment and drag it to the location you want.
To insert a vertex
To insert a vertex, first click Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the ribbon, or press Alt. Move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical line segment to which you want to add the vertex, and drag the segment to a new location. The pointer changes to a directional arrow. As you drag the segment, the software inserts a vertex.
In the following graphic a vertex has been inserted in a horizontal line segment.
To move a vertex
To move a vertex, move the pointer over the vertex. Then drag the vertex to move it. When Diagonal mode is not active, you can move the vertex only in a horizontal or vertical direction. The following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are horizontal or vertical.
When Diagonal mode is active, you can move the vertex in any direction. This action means that connector line segments are not limited to horizontal or vertical orientation.
The following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are no longer horizontal or vertical.
To move an element with a connector

To move an element that is connected, select the element with the connector and move it. The connector moves with the element. Tip To find out how to move an element, click Related Topics.
To modify end points

You modify end points to move a connector from one connect point to another or to move a connector point to another location. To move a connector, first select the connector. Then click the connector and drag it to a connect point or another location.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Tip After you connect a point, you can drag it to another connect point.
Format a Connector
1. Select a connector. 118. Notes On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element Properties dialog box, set the options you want. You can also format a connector before you attach it by setting options on the ribbon. Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line style formats. To change a line style, click the Style list on the ribbon, and select a style. To change clearance, type a value in the Clearance box on the ribbon. On the Connector ribbon, set the options you want.
Attach a Connector to an Object

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector.
119.
In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators.
120. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points. Tip The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs. Click the symbol to place the connector. Tip The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the point that you clicked. Otherwise, the connector attaches to a keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.
121.
Merge Connectors
1. Select two connectors. Important The first connector selected drives the manner in which the merge occurs such that the properties of the first connector selected will be applied to the second connector.
on the Connectors ribbon. The 2. Click the Merge Connectors button connectors merge into a single connector. Notes: If more than two connectors are selected, the Merge Connectors command is disabled on the Connectors ribbon.
Split a Connector
1. Click a connector. 2. Click the Split Connector button on the Connector ribbon.
3. Click the point at which to split the connector. Notes When you click within the range of a symbol on the connector, the software trims the two resulting connectors to the symbol's range. If the symbol has connect points, the software attaches the resulting connectors to the symbol at the connect points. This command displays the connect points located on a symbol. Split connector should not be used to trim a single connector to the edge of a symbol. In this instance, the connector should be modified directly with its end handles. The Clearance value on the Connector ribbon will determine the shortest length of a connector. Thus, if one end of a split connector is shorter than the clearance value, that segment length will be increased to match the value.

Connector Command (Draw Toolbar)
Connects two elements together. Using a connector, you can connect to an element by connecting to: Key points. Hollow gray circles indicate potential key points (such as endpoint, midpoint, and others) on an element, when the element is located by the pointer. Connect points. Hollow red circles indicate potential connect points on a symbol. Any point on an element. A solid red filled circle is displayed when the pointer locates an element at a point other than its key points. Note You must click the Connector command before you see the points for connecting on the element. You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.
Connector Ribbon
When you click Connector on the Draw toolbar, you can place a connector. When you select a connector, you can change it. Most of the options on the Connector ribbon are the same whether you are placing or modifying a connector. The only difference is when you select a connector for modification. When you modify a connector, an additional option is available to insert a segment into the selected connector. This last option is Insert Segment Mode (Shift).
Ribbon Bar Options

Style - Sets the line style for the connector. Line Color - Sets the line color for the connector. You can click More to 194 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the connector line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width for the connector. Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for starting the connector. Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector. Tip Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles. Diagonal Mode (Alt) - Allows you to either place or modify a connector.
Placing a Connector
Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector. Tip To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments, you can also press Alt.
Modifying a Connector
Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a selected connector. Tip This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or when you press Alt.
Insert/Move Vertex (Alt) - Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a selected connector. Tip You can also activate this option by selecting a connector and pressing Alt.
Insert Segment Mode (Alt + S) - Inserts line segments into the connector. This option is available only when you are modifying a connector. Tip You can also activate this option by selecting a connector and pressing Shift.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Split Connector Mode - Splits a selected connector at a point defined by a mouse click. Note The Split Connector button also allows you to identify a symbol and split the connector based on two points on that symbol. Merge Connector Mode - Takes two connectors and merges them into one. Note This command only works when two connectors are selected. If more than two connectors are selected (or no connectors are selected) the command is disabled on the ribbon.
Clearance - Specifies the amount of space that is maintained between the connector and the connected element. (Also known as range avoidance.)
Placing a Connector
Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector. Tip To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal line segments, you can also press Alt.
Modifying a Connector
Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a selected connector. Tip This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or when you press Alt.
Insert Segment Mode (Shift) - Inserts line segments into the connector. This option is available only when you are modifying a connector. Tip This option is active when you click Insert Segment Mode (Shift), or when you press Shift.
Drawing Doublelines: An Overview

You can use Place Doubleline to place a doubleline as you draw and clean corners as you place the lines. This command is very useful in drawing an architectural floor plan for a house or a factory. Place Doubleline also miters joints and trims as it you draw. It puts endcaps on single lines. On the Place Doubleline toolbar, you can define the thickness of the doubleline and whether you draw the doubleline from the left, right, or center.
Draw a Doubleline
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline 122. Click the point to begin the doubleline. .
123. Click the point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the doubleline. 124. Tip If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again. Notes PinPoint, in conjunction with Place Doubleline, allows you to place the doubleline relative to a known point. You can use driven dimensions to determine distances between doubleline elements. Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon to place precise lines. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints of the lines. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 197 Do one of the following: Right-click to end the doubleline. To draw a series of connected doublelines, click the points to end each doubleline segment, and then right-click.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview If Maintain Relationships is set, you can use Selection to select portions of the drawing to be moved while the relationships are maintained. When you use Point On, you can draw a doubleline tangent to two curved elements. First, click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone on the first element. Use the software to establish a tangent relationship to the other element. Tip If you do not use the tangent intent zone, the line connects to the elements, but is not tangent to them. You can use the software to make an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another element. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a doubleline.

Place Doubleline Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws a doubleline or a series of connected doublelines. When you draw a series of lines, the second point of one line is the first point of the next line. This button is most effective if you use it in a document based on one of the architectural templates in the AEC category. Tip This button appears on a set of fly-out buttons. If you cannot locate this button, click and hold Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar.
Place Doubleline Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type. Line Width - Sets the line width. Left Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the left side. Right Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the right side.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Center Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the center. Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values. Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value is counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the x axis. Thickness - Determines the thickness of the doubleline. This thickness is the distance between the doublelines. To change the width of each of the individual lines, use Line Width.
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses: An Overview

If you want to draw a circle, you can click Circle By Center Point on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click a point to define the center of the circle. To place the circle, you click a second point to define the distance of the circle radius from the first point. You can use other commands on the Draw toolbar to place arcs, ellipses, and other types of circles.
Besides clicking the pointer, you can also place circles by clicking Circle By Center Point and then holding the mouse button down and drawing freehand. After you close the loop, the circle appears. You can also place a precise circle by clicking Circle By Center Point and then typing values into the ribbon. After you press Enter, a circle appears around the pointer. You can then place the defined circle by clicking the point you want on the drawing sheet.
Draw Circles
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle By 3 Points . 2. Click three points on the circumference of the circle.
Notes Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a circle. Instead of clicking to define the circumference of the circle, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.
Draw a Circle by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle By Center 3. Click to define the radius. . 2. Click the location where you want the center point.
Notes Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a circle. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Circle . 2. Move the pointer along an element until the software recognizes a point on element relationship or a key point. 3. Click to make the circle tangent. 4. Do one of the following to define the radius: Notes Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values in the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 203 Move the pointer until the circle is in the position that you want, and then click. Move the pointer until the software recognizes a tangent or key point relationship with another element, and then click.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview draw a diagonal line, and the software automatically changes it to a circle. You can define the radius first to make a circle tangent to the first element, but not fixed in one position on it. After you type a value in the Diameter or Radius box, move the pointer along the element until the software recognizes a point on element relationship, and then click. The circle is then displayed dynamically, and you can move it along the element freely until you make it tangent to another element or key point. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.

Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference.
Circle by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a circle using a center point and radius.
Tangent Circle Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements.
Circle Ribbon
Sets options for placing circles. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Line Width - Sets the line width. Diameter - Sets the diameter of the circle. Radius - Sets the radius.
Draw Arcs
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points 2. Click the location to begin the sweep of the arc. 3. Do one of the following: Click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc, and then click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc. Click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc, and then click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc. .
Tip Use the intent zones at the first and second points to specify if the third point is between the first two or beyond one of the first two. Notes Instead of clicking to define the sweep and the midpoint, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to an arc. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.
Draw an Arc by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by Center Point 2. Click the point where you want the center point. 3. Click where you want to begin and end the sweep of the arc. Tip You can change the arc direction by moving the pointer. .
Notes Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type a value on the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to an arc. You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Arc
2. Click an element to which you want the new arc to be tangent. You can click the end point of a line or curved element, or any point on the element. 208 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview 3. Move the pointer through one of the intent zones displayed at the position you just clicked. If the command dynamics show an arc perpendicular to the existing element, move the pointer back to the intent zones and exit through a different quadrant. 125. When the command dynamics show an arc that is tangent to the first element, move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the tangent relationship with another element and then click. Notes Instead of clicking to define the radius and sweep of the arc, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous
This command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press Shift+A. 126. Click the location to begin the line or arc. 127. Click the location to end the line or arc. You can use intent zones to specify if you want to draw a tangent or perpendicular arc. 128. If you are drawing an arc, click a point on the arc to define the radius. Tip After you draw an arc, the command switches back to line mode automatically. You can switch back to arc mode if you want to draw another arc.
129. Continue drawing lines or arcs, pressing Shift+A to switch to arc mode and Shift+L to switch to line mode. 130. Right-click to finish. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 209
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Tip If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again. Notes Instead of pressing Shift+L or Shift+A to switch modes, you can use Line or Arc on the ribbon. You can make the first line or arc tangent or perpendicular to an element. First, move the pointer to the element to which you want to be tangent. Click when the software recognizes a Point On the relationship. Then use the intent zones to indicate if you want the line to be tangent or perpendicular. Instead of clicking locations on the drawing sheet, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Using the ribbon boxes to type values does not affect the settings of the Line or Arc modes.
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch . 2. On the ribbon, set the line and arc element types with Element Type, and clear the other element types. 3. Drag to draw a line or arc. When you stop moving the pointer, do not release the mouse button. 4. Drag to draw a series of line segments and arcs, continuing to hold the mouse button as you draw each line and arc. 5. When you have finished, release the mouse button. Notes Use Adjust to adjust the geometry you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical and the arcs as tangent to the connected elements. The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview point of the line. You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line or an arc.
Draw a Curve
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Curve 2. Do one of the following: To draw an open curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open. .
To draw a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed.
131. Click three or more points on the drawing sheet. These points represent nodes on the curve. Tip You must place at least three points to draw a curve. Right-click to end the curve. Notes You can drag the pointer to draw the shape of a curve. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a curve, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a curve. The nodes at the start point and end point of a curve are always smooth. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 211 132.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a curve.
Insert a Node into a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Insert Node. 3. Position the pointer at the location to add a node.
133. Notes
Click to insert the node.
You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
Delete a Node from a Curve
1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete Node. 3. Select the node you want to delete. Notes You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
Change the Curve Type

1. Select the curve. 2. Do one of the following: To change an open curve to a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed. To change a closed curve to an open curve, select the node you want to open, and then set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.
Tip If you do not select a node, the software opens the curve at the node that was automatically activated when you selected the curve. Notes You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
Change the Node Type

1. Select the curve. 2. Select the node you want to change. 3. On the ribbon, click the button for the node type you want to change the node to: Smooth, Symmetric, or Cusp. Notes You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.

Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc. The end points are not tangent or perpendicular to other elements.
Arc By Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines the center of the arc and the next two points define the sweep.
Tangent Arc Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. The first point defines one end of the arc. If you place the first point on a key point of an element you want the arc to be tangent or perpendicular to, then the second point defines the sweep. If you place the first point in free space, then this command works like Arc by 3 Points. In this case the first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc. Tip While in dynamics for the second point, you can set the orientation of the arc by passing the pointer through one of the four quadrants of the first point's intent zone.
Arc Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Radius - Sets the radius. Sweep - Sets the sweep angle.
Curve Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a smooth, open or closed curve. A series of curves can have smooth, symmetric and cusp nodes. The node at the start point and the node at the end point of a curve are always smooth.
Curve Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Open - Sets the curve type to open. Closed - Sets the curve type to closed. Important The following options appear on the Curve ribbon only when a curve or curve element is selected.
Previous Node - Activates the previous node on the curve. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit. Next Node - Activates the next node on the curve. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit. Symmetric - Gives a curve the same curvature on each side of the selected node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.
Smooth - Gives a curve a different curvature on each side of the selected node. The start point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.
Cusp - Makes a curve bend sharply at the selected node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.
Draw Ellipses
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse By 3 Points 2. Click the location to begin the primary axis. .
134. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle.
135. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis. Tip The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.
Notes Instead of clicking to define the primary and secondary axes of an ellipse, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line, and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an ellipse.
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by Center . 2. Click the location for the center of the primary axis. 3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. 4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis. Tip The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis. Notes Instead of clicking to define the axes and rotation angle of the ellipse, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an ellipse.

Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. The center point and the next point define half the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws an ellipse using three edge points. The first two points define the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.
Ellipse Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Primary - Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based 220 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview on the primary axis.
Secondary - Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular to the primary axis. Angle - Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Drawing Squares and Rectangles: An Overview

To draw a rectangle or square, you click Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click two different points to define the rectangle. If you want to precisely define the dimensions of the square, you can type values into the ribbon and press Enter.
If you place dimensions on a rectangle, these are always driven dimensions. This means that if you edit the dimensional value of the dimension, the rectangle does not change. You need to edit the values on the rectangle ribbon to change the rectangle. Also, you cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines. Tip If you want to place a rectangle that has driving dimensions, you need to place four separate lines in the shape of a rectangle by selecting Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar.
Draw a Rectangle or Square

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Rectangle . 2. Click the location for one corner of the rectangle or square.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview 3. Click to define the rotation angle and the width of the rectangle or square. 4. Do one of the following: Notes Instead of clicking to draw the rectangle or square, you can type values in the Width, Height, and Angle boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. Instead of clicking several different points to draw a rectangle, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a rectangle. To draw a rectangle, click to define the height. To draw a square, hold the Shift key, and then click. The command automatically makes the height equal to the width.
You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square. If you place dimensions on a rectangle, they are always driven dimensions. You cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines.
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch
1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch
2. On the ribbon, set the rectangle Element Type and clear the other Element Type buttons. 3. Drag the pointer to sketch the diagonal of the rectangle. Notes Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets the diagonal as a rectangle or square. You can use the buttons on the ribbon and shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square.

Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws a rectangle using three points. The first two points define the width and rotation angle of the rectangle, and the third point defines the height. You can also draw a square with this command.
Rectangle Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Width - Sets the width of the rectangle or square. Height - Sets the height of the rectangle or square. Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Drawing FreeForm Shapes: An Overview

As you draw, you can place precisely defined lines, arcs, and circles by clicking and typing values in the ribbon. You can also use tools to quickly sketch a design and let the software convert it into a precision drawing. FreeSketch and FreeForm allow you to quickly place fluid lines and let the software convert these into precision shapes. FreeSketch draws lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles, and FreeForm draws curves (splines).
You can begin sketching anywhere on the drawing sheet. You can draw in free space or use key points or end points of elements as reference points.
How FreeSketch and FreeForm Work

As you drag the pointer, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the pointer, the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns the sketch into a precise drawing. You can control the accuracy of the shape recognition using the ribbon options.
FreeSketch and FreeForm Options

FreeSketch Adjust controls how closely FreeSketch interprets mouse movements. When Adjust On is set, the software interprets all lines as either 226 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview horizontal or vertical, and all arcs as tangent. The first figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust On is set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust Off is set.
FreeForm Smoothing controls how closely the software interprets mouse movements when drawing curves. The first figure shows how FreeForm interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing On is set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing Off is set.
Draw a Line with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch .
2. On the ribbon, set the Line element type and clear the other element type buttons. 3. Drag to draw a line or a series of connected lines.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Notes Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical when you finish drawing. The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line.
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch
Tip Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box must be set to draw circles that are tangent to other elements. .
2. On the ribbon, set the Circle element type and clear the other element type buttons. 3. Drag to sketch the shape of the circle or the diameter of the circle. Notes Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets your pointer movements as a circle. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a circle.
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch
Tip You must set Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that are tangent to other elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. .
2. On the ribbon, set the Arc element type and clear the other element type buttons. 3. Drag to draw an arc. Notes Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. When Adjust is on, the software interprets arcs as tangent to the connected elements. The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the arc. When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an arc.
Draw a Curve with FreeForm

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeForm 2. Drag to draw a curve. Notes Smooth allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw. When Smooth is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 229 .
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview When Smooth is on, the software creates smooth, symmetric, or cusp curves. You can begin or end your drawing using the end point or key point of an element. You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve. You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a curve.

FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a precision drawing. You can specify which of these elements you want to draw using the ribbon.
FreeSketch Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Adjust On - Draws all lines recognized in the rough sketch as horizontal or vertical in the precision drawing, and draws all arcs recognized in the rough sketch as tangent in the precision drawing. Adjust Off - Does not adjust the orientation of lines and arcs in your rough sketch. Line - Draws lines in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch. Arc - Draws arcs in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Circle - Draws circles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch. Rectangle - Draw rectangles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws freeform curves, or splines.
FreeForm Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Smoothing On - Draws cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves in the precision drawing by recognizing these shapes in the rough sketch. Smoothing Off - Draws elements that closely resemble the movements of your pointer, without smoothing them into cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves.
Creating Isometric Drawings: An Overview

If you want to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements, such as cubes, you can create an isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not a true 3D drawing, because you cannot view the drawing in perspective or from another angle. However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning the elements and objects in a drawing along three major axes.
The software supplies several tools to create these types of documents: Isometric Rectangle Isometric Circle Isometric Line Segmented Styles button Tip To access these commands, you must place them on a toolbar or menu with Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
You can also access dimension styles that you configure to appear at an angle for isometric drawings. These styles are available for any type of dimension, except for chained dimensions and angular dimensions. You can create a document based on one of the Technical Drawing templates and access these dimension styles. Special fonts for isometric drawings are also available in any template. These fonts are displayed at an angle. The fonts are stored in a resource file in the following location: <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\TEMPLATE\STYLES\ISOFONTS.RSC. You must set the location for these fonts on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 233
Draw an Isometric Circle
Tip To access this command, you must place the command on a toolbar or menu usingCustomize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw. .
1. Click Isometric Circle
2. Click a point to define the center point of the isometric circle. 3. Click a second point to complete the circle. Caution You cannot drag the pointer to draw the circle. Notes You can set the plane on which to place the circle by setting options on the ribbon.
Draw an Isometric Line
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu with Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw. .
1. Click Isometric Line
2. Click a point to start the line. 3. Click a point to complete the line. Caution You cannot drag the pointer to draw the line. Notes You can set the angle for placing the line by setting options on the ribbon bar.
Draw an Isometric Rectangle
Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu using Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw. .
1. Click Isometric Rectangle Caution
To confirm that the isometric rectangle consists of lines that remain connected when you relocate them using the Select Tool command, turn on Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If this option is not on, Isometric Rectangle creates a rectangle composed of four separate lines that do not stay connected if you move each line. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 235
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview 136. 137. 138. Click a point to start defining the rectangle base. Click a second point to complete the rectangle base. Click a third point to complete the rectangle.
Caution You cannot drag the pointer to draw the rectangle. Notes To set the plane on which to place the rectangle, you can set options on the ribbon.

Isometric Circle Command
Allows you to draw an isometric circle. You can use this button to create 2D circles that look like 3D circles.
Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu with Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
Isometric Circle Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Top - Allows you to draw the circle on the top plane.
Left - Allows you to draw the circle on the left plane.
Right - Allows you to draw the circle on the right plane.
Diameter - Sets the diameter of the isometric circle. Radius - Defines the radius of the isometric circle.
Isometric Line Command

Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or 90 degrees in an isometric drawing. This command creates 2D lines that look like they are in a 3D plane.
Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu using Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
Isometric Line Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Length - Sets the length of the isometric line. Angle - Sets the angle of the isometric line.
Isometric Rectangle Command

Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle. You can use this command to create 2D rectangles that look like 3D rectangles.
Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu using Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Top - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the top plane.
Left - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the left plane.
Right - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the right plane.
Width - Sets the width of the isometric rectangle. Height - Sets the height of the isometric rectangle.
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview

SmartSketch provides several simple methods for utilizing existing elements. You can quickly move or copy an existing element or group of elements onto a drawing sheet. Moving or copying elements saves you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project.
Selecting Elements
You can select individual or multiple elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. When you click the Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the highlight color. When an element is highlighted you can click to select it. You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements. You can also use a tool called PickQuick to select elements that overlap. To use it, you should move the Select Tool pointer over the elements, and pause the mouse. When an ellipsis displays you can left-click or right-click to display the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers; when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select it.
Moving Elements
SmartSketch provides several methods for moving elements. You can drag an element with the Select Tool or specify precision points with Move on the Change toolbar. You can also use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a known position on your drawing.
Copying Elements
You can copy elements with one of many methods: You can select an object and click Copy on the Main toolbar. The selected item is placed on the Clipboard. Then, when you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet. The element will not change from its original form. You can copy one or more elements by clicking the Select Tool on SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 241
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview the Draw toolbar. After the pointer changes to show that the element can be copied, hold the Ctrl key and drag the copy to its new location. Formatting, such as line weight, line color, and line style, can be copied from selected objects and applied to other objects as they are selected using Format Painter on the Main toolbar. You can make several copies of elements that are the same by selecting the element and clicking Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar. You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change toolbar to create copies.
Cutting and Deleting Elements

You can cut an element by clicking Cut on the Main toolbar. The element is placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to place the element in the current document or into other documents. Important If you do not Paste the element after cutting, it will be permanently removed from the document.
You can permanently remove an element by selecting the element and pressing Delete on your keyboard. You can also permanently remove an element by clicking Edit on the Main toolbar and then selecting Delete.
Selecting Elements: An Overview

To select an element, you must use Select Tool at the top of the Draw toolbar. You can select lines, arcs, or annotations, such as dimensions or fills. You can also select element groups, embedded or linked objects, symbols, or handles on elements that indicate relationships.
Selecting Single Elements

To select an element, you can click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar .
When you click Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the highlight color. When an element is highlighted, you can click to select it.
When you select an individual element, the following things happen: The element changes to the selection color. You can change the selection color using Options on the Tools menu. The element's handles are displayed. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected element, such as end points and center points. Handles allow you to directly modify the element drag a handle to change the element's shape. Although you can select more than one element at a time, only one element can have handles at a time. The element's important properties are displayed on a ribbon. If the element is linked or embedded into the current document, selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing.
When you select multiple elements or grouped elements, they change to the selection color.
Selecting Multiple Elements

You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements. You can use the ribbon to select whether you want only elements completely enclosed by the fence to be selected or any element that is partly enclosed by the fence. Many manipulation commands, like delete, move, copy, and rotate, SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 243
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview act upon all elements in the selection set.
Selecting an Element That Overlaps Other Elements

If you want to select an element that overlaps other elements, and you cannot highlight the element you want by moving the pointer over it, you can use a tool called PickQuick. To use it, you should move the pointer over the elements and pause the mouse. When the software displays an ellipsis, or three small circles, by the pointer, you can left-click or right-click to display a small toolbar that shows the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select it.
Deselecting Elements
To deselect an element or group of elements, you can click any point on the drawing sheet.
Select an Element
1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool. 2. Do one of the following: Tip You can also right-click and click Select All. To select one element, click it. To select more than one element hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each element. To select more than one element at once, drag to fence the objects. To select one of several overlapping elements, use PickQuick
To select an element with PickQuick

PickQuick helps you to select elements that overlap each other. 1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the pointer there. 139. When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The software displays the PickQuick toolbar near the pointer, with a button for 244 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview each selectable element.
140. Move the pointer over PickQuick without clicking to highlight the corresponding elements.
141. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar.
To clear a selection
Do one of the following: Click in free space. Right-click in free space. Select another element without holding the Shift or Ctrl key.
To clear the selection of one element and leave other elements selected, click the element while holding the Shift key. Notes When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 245
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview you pass the pointer over them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it. You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options. You can change the element highlight and selection colors with Options on the Tools menu.
Undo Actions
Do one of the following: To undo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Undo . To undo more than one action, click the down arrow next to Undo on the Main toolbar, and select the actions you want to undo. Tip You can do this action only if you have placed Undo List on the Main toolbar. You can place the button by clicking Customize on the Tools menu. Notes You cannot restore broken links with Undo.
Redo Actions
Do one of the following: To redo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Redo . To redo more than one action, click the down arrow next to Redo on the Main toolbar, and select the actions you want to undo or redo. Tip You can do this action only if you have placed Redo List on the Main toolbar. You can place the button by clicking Customize on the Tools menu.

Select Tool (Draw Toolbar)
Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select, modify, and manipulate elements. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.
Select Tool Ribbon

The default selection ribbon is displayed only when nothing is selected. Once you select an object, the selection ribbon is replaced with a ribbon bar for editing the selected object. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Inside - Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected. Overlapping - Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are selected, as well as elements inside the fence. Top Down - Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to individual elements in a group. Bottom Up - Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as opposed to the whole group. Expand - Displays another ribbon depending on the items that you selected on the drawing sheet. This button appears when you select ten or more items on the drawing sheet. When you click it, another ribbon appears. The options that appear depend on the types of elements that you selected. For example, if you select eleven lines, then the Line ribbon appears. If you select several types of items, then only the common properties for those types of elements appear on the Select Tool ribbon. For example, if you select nine SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 247
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview lines and a circle, then the ribbon displays the Style, Line Type, Width, and Color options. For more information about the options that appear, see the Help topic for the selected element's ribbon. If the items that you selected have no common properties, then no options will appear if you click Expand. For example, if you select a dimension and ten lines and then click Expand, a ribbon does not appear.
Select All Command (Edit Menu)

Selects all visible elements in a window. Tip You can also access this command when you position the pointer in the document and right-click.
Undo Command (Edit Menu)

Reverses an action. You can change the number of actions that can be undone using Options. You then click the General tab on the Options dialog box. Tip You can place Undo List or Redo List on the Main toolbar by clicking Customize on the Tools menu.
Redo Command (Edit Menu)

Repeats the most recent action taken or reverses the most recent Undo. Tip You can place Undo List or Redo List on the Main toolbar by clicking Customize on the Tools menu.
Moving Elements: An Overview

You can move elements on the drawing sheet with one of several methods: Dragging elements with the Select Tool. Specifying precision points with Move on the Change toolbar. Tip You can also click Scale and Rotate on the Change toolbar to move elements.
Using the Select Tool

To move an element, you must first select it with Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can drag the selected element to move it without changing its shape.
Tip The element's handles do not need to be displayed for you to move it. If they are displayed, and you want to move the element and not modify it, position the pointer so it is not over a handle.
You can move an element with precision if you use the relationships indicators.
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview When you modify a drawing, elements with maintained relationships automatically update to honor the relationship. For example, if you move an element that shares a maintained parallel relationship with another element, the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a line and an arc share a maintained tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.
Moving Elements by Specifying Precision Points

You can move a line that shares a tangent relationship with an arc if you select the line and click Move on the Change toolbar. As you move the line, the line moves without maintaining the relationship with the arc. You can then specify a from point and a to point by clicking on the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move any element by specifying precision points with Move.
Move an Element
1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Move 142. 143. Click to define the from point. .
If you want to copy the elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
144. Click to define the to point. After the elements move, the relationships with other elements are not maintained. Notes You can click Move before you select elements to move. You can use drag to move elements. Select the elements, then drag them to their new location and drop. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy elements, you can hold Ctrl while you click to position the elements. You can use the ribbon boxes to specify the to point. The values are relative distances along the x and y axes. You must click to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the selection set. When you move or copy elements, the to point becomes the next from point. The software maintains relationships within the select set if they are still applicable after you have moved or copied the elements. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom,
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview Fit, and Pan, while you are using Move. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Move at the point where you left off.
Move an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool. 2. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. 3. Drag the element to its new position.
To move an element with precision

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool. 2. Position the pointer over the element you want to move, at a location where the software recognizes a key point. 3. Begin to drag the element. 4. Release the element when the software recognizes the key point of another element, or a relationship between the element you are moving and another element. Notes If you want to move a selected element, make sure to position the pointer away from any of the element's handles. Dragging a handle modifies the element instead of moving it.
Move an Element Precisely

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a known position in your drawing. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool 145. 146. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint . .
Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
147. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element. 148. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element. PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag. 149. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 251

Move Command (Change Toolbar)
Moves elements from one location to another. You can specify the locations by clicking on the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move one or more elements at a time, and you can move element groups.
Move Ribbon
Specifies the from point and to point when you move objects or elements. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Copy - Copies the elements in the selection set. Step Value - Increments or decrements the value displayed in the ribbon boxes. For example, typing a step value of 0.25 and moving the pointer away from the from point would increment the distance from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and so forth.
Copying and Pasting Elements: An Overview

You can copy any element, dimension, or object by selecting it and clicking Copy on the Main toolbar. Copying places the selected item on the Clipboard. When you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet. You can also copy an element with the Select Tool. You click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar, select the element, and press Ctrl as you drag the element across the drawing sheet. You can also copy several selected elements in the same manner. When you copy elements that have relationships, the relationships are copied and retained when possible. For example, if you make a copy of two related lines, the relationship is also copied. However, if you copy one of two lines that are related to each other, the relationship is not copied. Tip You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change toolbar to create copies.
Copy an Element
1. Select an element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Copy Notes After you copy an element and its relationships, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents. When you paste the element, it is pasted on top of the element you copied. To see the pasted element, you must drag it. .
Copy an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool 2. Select one or more elements. 3. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. The pointer changes to show that the element can now be copied. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 253 .
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview 4. Hold the Ctrl key and drag the copy to its new location.
Copy a Format
1. Click the object with the formatting you want to copy. 2. Click the Format Painter button Notes If a connector with a line terminator is selected as the object from which to copy, the terminator will be added to any other linear geometry selected with the Format Painter. This is the only way to apply terminators to linear geometry that is not a connector. You can apply format changes to multiple objects by dragging a fence around the desired objects. When copying a format from text to geometry, or vice versa, only the color is applied. .
3. Click another object to apply the new formatting.
Paste an Element
You can place elements on the Clipboard with Copy or Cut, then paste the elements into the current document or another document. 1. Open the document in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Paste Tip You can also right-click and click the Paste command. Notes The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Copy or Cut again. You cannot run Paste if the Clipboard is empty. You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste. Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste. .
Paste an Element with a Different Format

1. Cut or copy the element you want to paste. 2. Click Edit > Paste Special. 3. To embed the information, click Paste. 4. To link the information, click Paste Link. 5. In the As box, select the format that you want to use to paste the information 6. To paste the information into the lower left corner of the current document, click OK. Notes The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Paste Special again. You cannot run Paste Special if the Clipboard is empty. If you select an element as the insertion point and that element cannot be replaced, the Clipboard contents are not pasted at the insertion point. You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste Special. You can use Redo to repeatedly paste the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point. If the Clipboard contains data, and you have selected data in the document, the software replaces the selected data with the contents of the Clipboard. Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste Special.
Offset Elements
You can select elements to be offset before you use Offset. Or you can select Offset before you select the elements. 1. On the Change toolbar, click Offset .
2. Click the element or elements that you want to offset. 3. In the Step Distance box on the ribbon, type the distance that you want to offset the selected elements. 4. Click to define the direction in which you want to offset the elements.
Notes If the Change toolbar is not displayed, click Change on the Main toolbar. To select a chain of connected elements, select Offset Chain.

Copy Command (Edit Menu)
Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared among the elements are also copied. However, when you copy an element that shares a relationship with an element that you are not copying, the relationship is not copied.
Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar)

Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and line style, from a selected object and applies it to other objects as they are selected. The two objects do not have to be similar. Format Painter will format all objects including text, dimensions, and groups; however, it will not re-format symbols
Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the source document. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.
Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format.
Paste Special Dialog Box

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the Mark control that you want information about.
Offset Command
Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. This command copies elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs and circles. Offset copies the original element at a specified distance. Offsetting outside the perimeter of the original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the perimeter of the original element creates a smaller element.
Elements are transitioned as necessary during the offset operation.
Offset Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Select Chain - Selects a chain of continuous elements. If this option is not selected, Offset selects only an individual element. 258 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview Step Distance - Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy. Cumulative Offset - Sets the total distance of the current offset graphic element from the original graphic element. The following graphic illustrates the difference between step distance (A) and cumulative offset (B).
Creating Patterns: An Overview

Patterns are useful if you want to create several elements quickly that are the same without using several commands. You can create patterns by selecting one or more elements and making several copies of it with Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar.
To modify individual members of the pattern, you can select an individual member of the pattern and change it the way you would any other element.
Draw a Circular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
150. 151.
On the Change toolbar, click Circular Pattern
Click where you want the center of the circular pattern to be.
152. Use the ribbon boxes and the Circular Pattern Options dialog box to define other characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows. 153. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
Notes If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar.
Draw a Rectangular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview 154. On the Change toolbar, click Rectangular Pattern .
155. To define a rectangular area for the pattern, click Pattern Options on the ribbon. 156. On the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box, select Fit to Rectangle. Tip Use the ribbon boxes and the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box to define other characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows. On the drawing sheet, click to identify one corner of the pattern and click to identify the opposite corner of the pattern. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
Notes If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar.

Circular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar)
Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern on the drawing sheet.
Circular Pattern Ribbon

Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the Tool Tip.
Ribbon Options
Options - Displays the Circular Pattern Options dialog box. Count - Sets the number of copies in the pattern. Rows - Sets the number of arc-shaped rows in the pattern. This option is available only when Rows on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Multiple Inward or Multiple Outward. Angle - Sets the angle of the pattern. This box sets the sweep angle between pattern members when Pattern Control on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Incremental Array. This box also sets the total sweep angle when Pattern Control is set to Fit To Arc. Row Spacing - Sets the distance between adjacent arc-shaped rows in the pattern, as measured from the bottom of one row to the bottom of the next. The bottom is the side closest to the center point of the circular pattern.
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Pattern Control - Specifies how the pattern is constructed. 262 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview Incremental Array - Draws a pattern with a set sweep angle between members. Fit To Arc - Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along an arc. Rows - Controls how pattern rows are arranged. Single Row - Draws a single row of pattern members. Multiple Inward - Draws multiple rows, each one closer to the pattern center than the last. Multiple Outward - Draws multiple rows, each one farther away from the pattern center than the last. Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar)

Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern on the drawing sheet.
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Options - Displays the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box. X Count - Sets the number of pattern members along the x axis of the pattern rectangle. Y Count - Sets the number of pattern members along the y axis of the pattern rectangle. X Offset - Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the x axis of the pattern rectangle. Y Offset - Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the y axis of the pattern rectangle. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 263
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview Angle - Sets the rotation angle of the pattern rectangle. Finish - Completes the pattern. When you click this button, the pattern is created on the drawing sheet and you can select other elements.
Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Pattern Control - Specifies how the pattern is constructed. Incremental ArrayDraws a pattern with a set offset between members. Fit To RectangleDraws a pattern by evenly spacing members along the x and y axes of the pattern rectangle. Stagger - Controls whether pattern members are arranged in a straight matrix, or whether every other row or column is offset from its default position. Options are None, for a straight matrix, Rows, to offset alternate pattern rows, and Columns, to offset alternate pattern columns. Stagger - Sets the row or column stagger distance to the specified distance. Stagger = 1/2 Offset - Sets the row or column stagger distance to half the X Offset or Y Offset value. Include Last Column - Controls whether to include the last staggered column in the pattern or to exclude the last column. Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
Cutting or Deleting Elements: An Overview

You can delete elements by selecting them and clicking Cut on the Main toolbar or by pressing Delete. Clicking Cut allows you to paste the element in another location. Pressing Delete removes the element permanently. Relationships that are no longer applicable after you delete an element are automatically deleted. For example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel lines, the parallel relationship is deleted from the remaining line.
Cut an Element
1. Select an element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Cut Notes After you cut an element and its relationships from a document, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents. When relationships exist between elements, cutting the elements from a document deletes the relationships. If there is a relationship between a selected element and an unselected element, you can do one of the following: Cut and paste only the selected element. Cut and paste both elements and their relationship. Cut and paste only the selected element and the relationship, then reconnect the relationship to another element. .
Delete an Element
1. Select an element. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 265
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview 2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete. Tip When you delete an element and its relationships, the relationships are not pasted to the Clipboard and cannot be reinserted. However, you can restore an element and its relationships by immediately using Undo.

Cut Command (Edit Menu)
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Delete Command (Edit Menu)

Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed on it. You cannot reinsert or paste elements deleted with this command. However, you can retrieve the data by immediately clicking Undo.
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview

You can add text to documents using different types of tools: Annotations, such as text boxes and balloons. Labels, such as text labels and SmartLabels.
You also can add text using a drag-and-drop operation. For example, you can drag an Excel spreadsheet to a document to create a bill of materials.
Placing Annotations: An Overview

An essential part of the drawing process is adding text, notes, and annotations. Annotations are text and graphics that give information about a drawing. You can add this information quickly and easily with the text and annotation commands in the software. To place annotations in a document, you can click one of the following buttons: Text Box on the Draw toolbar
Balloon on the Dimension toolbar
Tip For more information about adding associative text to a document, click Related Topics.
Annotations with Leaders

When you create a balloon, you can place it with a leader by setting options on the ribbon. The leader can point to another element or be placed in free space. Annotations with leaders have the following components:
(A) Leader line (B) Break line SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 269
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview (C) Terminator (D) Annotation You can manipulate the annotation by selecting the leader and moving parts of it. You can control the display of a leader break line and terminator and insert or delete vertices on a leader.
Adding Leaders
You can add a leader to an annotation using Leader. An annotation can have more than one leader. The terminator end of the annotation can point to an element or be placed in free space. The annotation end of a new leader must connect to an annotation or the leader on an annotation.
You can create a callout by placing a text box and adding a leader to it with Leader.
Annotations and Associations

Annotations can be associative or non-associative. An associative annotation moves when its associated element moves. Text boxes differ from the other annotations in that they are always non-associative. If you attach the terminator of a leader to an element, the annotation moves with the element.
If you point the terminator of a leader to free space, the annotation is not associative to any element in the drawing. To make an annotation associative, you can select the terminator of the leader and drag it to an element.
Formatting Annotations
You can format an annotation several ways. If you want several annotations to look the same, you can apply a style by selecting it on the ribbon. You can apply dimension styles to balloons, but not text boxes. You can apply text styles to text boxes. Tip If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click the balloon leader to select the balloon. Then, you can change the formats of the balloon.
If you want annotations to look unique, you can select an annotation and edit its properties with the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
Place a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box . 2. To place a text box, drag to define the location and size of the text box. To see the text box, begin typing text. When you place text by this method, the width measures exactly between the two points. Text is wrapped, if necessary. The height measures at least the height between the two points. If necessary, the height of the text box increases to fit all of the text. Notes To place a text box, you can also click a point, and begin typing text.
When you place text by this method, the height and width are set to Auto SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 271
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview mode. The size of the text box increases automatically to contain all of the text. The text does not wrap. You can also place a text box by double-clicking any element. A blinking pointer appears below or in the center of the element. You can press Enter to create a new line in a text box. When you are in edit mode, a border appears around the text box. To place a callout, you can add a leader to the text box using Leader on the Dimension toolbar.
Place a Balloon
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Balloon . 2. On the ribbon, set the options you want. In the Balloon Text box, type the text that you want to appear in the balloon. 3. To place a balloon with a leader, click where you want to place the terminator end of the leader. The terminator end can be on an element or a point in free space.
157.
Click where you want to place the balloon end of the leader.
Notes To place a balloon without a leader, click on an element that you want to attach the balloon to. You can also click a point in free space.
Move an Annotation
1. Select an annotation to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the parts of the annotation, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a part of the annotation or a handle.
158. Click a handle and drag the leader or annotation to its new location. 159. The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move an annotation. The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of an annotation.
To move a terminator
When a terminator is connected to an element, drag the terminator handle to a new location along the element. If you drag the handle off the end of an open element, such as a line, an extension line automatically appears. The annotation and break line do not move.
When a terminator is connected to an element, disconnect the terminator by holding the Alt key while you drag the terminator handle. The terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator in free space.
To reconnect a terminator to an element, drag the terminator handle to an element. The terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator connected to an element.
To move a leader line

Click a leader line and then drag the break line of a leader. The break line and annotation move and the leader line changes in length, but not orientation.
If a leader was placed with the Leader command, you can move the leader away from the annotation and attach it to another annotation or element. Click the leader line and then drag the handle to the annotation or leader that you want to connect to.
To move a handle
1. Click a leader line and do one of the following: Drag the handle closest to the annotation to move the annotation.
Drag the handle on a break line to move the leader line and annotation.
Drag a vertex handle to a new location.
Move a Text Box

Drag the text box to the location that you want. Notes If handles of the text box are displayed, drag the highlighted border of the text box (or anywhere inside of the text box) to move it dragging one of the solid square handles resizes it.
Delete Text in a Text Box

1. Select the text that you want to delete in the text box. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 275
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview 2. Press Delete on the keyboard.
Use Spell Checker

1. Click Tools > Spelling. The Spelling dialog box appears when the first word not found in the Microsoft Word main dictionary is found. The Suggestions box lists recommended replacements. To leave the word unchanged: Click Ignore or click Ignore All.
To change the word not found: If necessary, click the desired word in the Suggestions list. Click Change or Change All. Tip You can also type your replacement text in the Not in Dictionary box and then click Change or Change All.
To leave the word unchanged, and add it to the custom dictionary: Click Add.
To leave the word unchanged and add it to the AutoCorrect list: 1. Click AutoCorrect. 2. Click OK when notified that the spell check is complete. Tips You can click Cancel to close the spell checker at any time. If you need information on any of the spell checking options, click to display Microsoft Word Help. Important This feature requires Microsoft Word 2000; otherwise, the spelling option is disabled. Clicking the Options button in the Spelling dialog box will open the Spelling and Grammar dialog box; however, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules Word uses to check spelling. Word's grammar-check capabilities
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview are not functional in SmartSketch documents. Notes If no spelling errors are found, the Spelling dialog box will not display. The Spell Checker will check text boxes and double-click labels. It does not check SmartLabels, text embedded in symbols, or text inside a leader.
Apply a Border to a Text Box

1. Select the text box to which you want to apply a border. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. 3. On the Border and Fill tab of the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the options for the type of border that you want. Notes You can also apply a border by selecting a text box and clicking Border on the ribbon. To see a text box border that is greater than 2 mm, set Display As Printed on the View tab of the Options dialog box.
Edit a Text Box

1. Select the text box that you want to edit. 2. Double-click the box. 3. Point to the location to edit the text and type the text that you want.
Resize a Text Box

1. Click a text box to display its handles. 2. Drag a handle until the text box is the size you want. Tip You cannot drag hollow handles.
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click the Text Box button and place a text box .
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview 2. On the Dimension toolbar, click Character Map 4. Click Select. 5. Continue to click the characters you want, clicking Select after you click each character. 6. On the Unicode Character Map dialog box, click Copy to copy the characters to the Clipboard. 7. Click inside the text box where you want to paste the characters. 8. Press Ctrl-V to paste. .
3. On the font character chart, click the character you want to insert.
Add a Leader
1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader
2. Click a text box, callout, or another leader to place the annotation end of the leader.
160. Click any element to place the terminator end of the leader, or click in free space.
Notes You can place either end of a leader first. After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element that is valid for placing the other end of
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview the leader. For example, if you add the annotation end of the leader to a text box, the command then allows you to select only elements that are valid for placing the terminator end of a leader. You could select a circle, but not another text box. If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon.
Insert a Vertex in a Leader
1. Select a leader to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.
161. Position the pointer over the leader where you want to insert a vertex. 162. Hold the Alt key and click.
163.
Drag the handle to position the new vertex.
Notes You cannot insert a vertex on the horizontal break line of a leader.
Delete a Vertex from a Leader

1. Select the leader that has the vertex you want to delete. This displays its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.
164.
Position the pointer over the vertex you want to delete.
165.
Hold the Alt key and click the handle on the vertex.

Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar)
Places a text box in a document.
You can find this command in the following locations: Draw toolbar Schematic toolbar
Text Box Ribbon

Formats a text box. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Style - Lists and applies the available styles. Font - Lists and applies the available fonts. Font Size - Applies a text size. Text Color - Sets the color of the font. Bold - Makes text bold. Italic - Italicizes text. Underline - Underlines text. 282 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Paragraph Alignment - Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area edges in edit mode. Tip You can also align the paragraph after you select text.
Border - Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to either display no border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow. More - Displays more options on the ribbon. Height - Sets the height of the text box. Width - Sets the width of the text box. Notes If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is driving the dimension. If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto Save. The same is true for Width. If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you drag a text box, Width is not available.
Angle - Sets the angle of the text box. Horizontal Text Orientation - Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the document. Vertical Text Orientation - Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the document. Left To Right - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed from left to right, as you would see in an English paragraph. Right To Left - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed from right to left, as you would see in an Arabic or Japanese paragraph.
Text Box Properties Dialog Box

Formats the font, paragraph, borders, or shading of a text box.
Border and Fill Tab

Tab Options
Border - Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box. Show Border - Displays the outline of the text box. Line Style - Sets the linestyle for the text box. Border Color - Sets the color of the border. Line Width - Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the text box. Shadow - Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box. Shadow Offset - Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world units of the text box. Fill Color - Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This value overrides the style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set the fill color to transparent, no fill is visible on the boundary. You can also apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements always cover other elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill pattern when you apply both to the same boundary.
Info Tab
Tab Options
Sheet - Shows the drawing sheet for an element. Layer - Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet. Origin - Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y axes. Tip All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units except origin. Origin is always in world units.
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Width - Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto (the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field. Height - Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto (the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field. Angle - Sets the angle of the text box. Tip The text box always rotates about the origin. Text Orientation - Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or vertically. Units Space - Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units. Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in inches. Other units are also available. World units indicate real world distances, but can be scaled down to fit a sheet of paper. Note Within the SmartSketch drawing environment, world units is synonymous with the term model units found in other CAD packages.
Text Flow - Determines the direction in which the characters are displayed in a text box. Left To Right - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed from left to right, as you would see in an English paragraph. Right To Left - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed from right to left, as you would see in an Arabic or Japanese paragraph. Justification - Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the shape (text box) according to the horizontal and vertical components. The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is, margins are inside the outside edges of the text box. The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4) margins around the text box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).
The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines the text area capline, even if the line has been clipped out of the text box. The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location of characters. The largest descender for any font on the line defines the baseline. Therefore, the largest descender of the fonts used on the last line defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of the text box. The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These components apply to both single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text, the cap height of the first line is used for the capline of the text, and the descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text. Horizontal - Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape (text box), text area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right positions. Vertical - Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text box), text area, and the text within the text box. 286 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Text Baseline - Specifies the text area baseline. Text Top - Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of the top margin. Text Capline - Specifies the text area capline. Text Half Ascender - Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline to the top of the text area. Text Half Cap - Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline and baseline. Text Center - Specifies the center of the text area. Text Bottom - Specifies the bottom of the text area. Shape Top - Specifies the top edge of the shape. Shape Center - Specifies center of the shape. Shape Bottom - Specifies the bottom of the shape. Text Alignment - Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape (text box). You must define horizontal and vertical components together. Horizontal - Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of formatted text. Values for horizontal alignment include Left, Center, and Right. If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) Vertical - Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or Justify area of the text box. If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
Horizontal Paragraph Alignment Properties

Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Left - Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area. Center - Places the formatted text in the center of the text area. Right - Places the formatted text in the right of the text area.
Vertical Paragraph Alignment Properties

Top - Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area. Center - Places the formatted text in the center of the text area. Bottom - Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
Shape Alignment Properties

Positions the text within the text area. Top - Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area. Center - Places the formatted text in the center of the text area. Bottom - Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area. Justified - Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area. Places the last line of the last paragraph at the bottom of the text area. Places remaining paragraphs at equal distance between the first and last paragraphs.
Margins
Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area. Margins are in the same units as the text box. Top - Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of the text area. Bottom - Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the bottom edge of the text area. Left - Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of the text area. Right - Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right edge of the text area.
Paragraph Tab
Tab Options
Text Style - Displays the style for a text box. Font - Lists and applies the available fonts. Font Size - Applies a text size. Font Style - Lists the available font styles. Underline - Underlines text. Language - Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the lines wrap in the paragraph. Units Space - Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must exist in the same units. Note Within the SmartSketch drawing environment, world units is synonymous with the term model units found in other CAD packages.
Text Color - Sets the color of the font. Spacing - Determines the amount of space between lines and paragraphs in a text box. Text Alignment - Specifies alignment for each paragraph within the block of formatted text. Values for horizontal alignment include Left, Center, and Right. If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.) If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab. Line spacing - Lists and applies the amount of vertical space between lines of text. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 289
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line. 1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines. Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines.
Paragraph Spacing - Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph. Before - Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points. After - Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.
User Tab
Tab Options
Attribute Set - Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press Enter. Save - Places the attribute set on the element that you selected. Remove - Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected. Attributes - Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press Enter. Name - Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set. Type - Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date. Value - Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that you selected in the Type box. Add - Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the table. Delete - Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a row in the table.
Balloon Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a balloon containing text. You can use balloons to refer to an element or a point in free space. You can set options for controlling the size and shape of the balloon, text presentation, and leader display.
Balloon Ribbon
Determines the size and shape of the balloon and the text within the balloon. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Dimension Style - Lists and applies the available styles. Leader - Displays the leader line. Break Line - Places a break line on the leader. Height - Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the text height defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter multiplied by the dimension text height. Text - Specifies the text you want inside the balloon. Shape - Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes. Sides - Specifies the number of sides for the balloon. This option only appears when you select an N-sided shape in the Shapes box on the ribbon.
Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a balloon.
General Tab
Tab Options
Balloon Text - Enters text in the balloon. Balloon Height - Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the text height defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter multiplied by the dimension text height. Balloon Shape - Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes. Number Of Sides - Sets the number of sides of an n-sided balloon shape. You must click N-Sides in the Shape list to use this option. You can then type the value you want.
Text and Leader Tab

Tab Options
Text - Specifies how the text appears in a balloon annotation. Font - Specifies the font to use for the text in the balloon annotation. Font Style - Specifies the font style to use, such as bold or italic, for the text in the balloon annotation. Font Size - Displays the text size. You can type a size in the box.
Leader And Projection Line

Specifies how the leader and projection line are displayed. Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line where the leader line meets the annotation text. For example, when break line is set to 1, the break line looks like the following picture.
Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want to attach the leader to. This value is a ratio of the font size. 292 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Extension - Sets the distance that the leader line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a ratio of the font size.
Color and Width

Color - Sets the color of an annotation. Line Width - Sets the line width of all lines in an annotation. Terminator - Specifies how the terminator is displayed on the leader. Type - Sets the terminator type. Click different parts of the following picture to find out which terminator type you want to use.
Length - Sets the length of the terminator. This value is a ratio of the font size. For example, in the following picture, the length is set to three times the size of the font.
Spelling Command (Tools Menu)

Uses the Microsoft Word spell checker to identify misspelled words and SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 293
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview unknown words (that is, words that are not in Word's dictionary). You can choose the correction you want to make, or you can make your own changes.
Spelling Dialog Box

Displays possible spelling errors within the SmartSketch document and offers suggestions for correcting the errors.
Dialog Box Options

Not in Dictionary - Displays a possible error, such as a misspelled word or a duplicated word. The possible errors appear in highlighted text. You can edit the text in this box and then click Change to accept the correction. Suggestions - Lists suggested corrections for the highlighted text in the Not in Dictionary box. Spelling error replacement word suggestions are from the main dictionary and open custom dictionaries. Ignore - Leaves the highlighted text unchanged and finds the next spelling error. Ignore All - Leaves all instances of the highlighted text unchanged throughout the document and continues to check the remainder of the document. Add - Adds the highlighted word in the Not in Dictionary box to the custom dictionary. Change - Accepts the current selection in the Suggestions box or accepts the edited text you have entered in the Not in Dictionary box. Delete - Deletes a duplicated word. Note If the error is a duplicate word, the Change button becomes a Deletebutton. Change All - Changes all instances of an error in the active document. AutoCorrect - Adds a spelling error and its correction to the AutoCorrect list so that the misspelled word will automatically correct as you type. Options - Opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box. Important Word's grammar-check capabilities are not functional in SmartSketch documents. Consequently, you can only edit the
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules Word uses to check spelling. Undo - Reverses the most recent spelling check actions. Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the active document. Close - Closes the dialog box after a change has been accepted. Note After a change has been accepted, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.
Character Map Command (Tools Menu)

Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert special characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You can use this command when you type or edit text in a text box. Tip If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this command is not available, you must install the Character Map accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon and then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software, you can find the Character Map software in the Accessories category. For detailed instructions on how to add the Character Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove Programs.
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box

Selects special characters for inserting into a text box.
Dialog Box Options

Font - Lists the available fonts. Subset - Lists the subsets for a particular font. Next - Displays the next subset in the Subset list for a font. Previous - Displays the previous subset in the Subset list for a font. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 295
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Characters To Copy - Displays selected characters to copy to the Clipboard. Select - Copies selected characters to the Characters To Copy box. Copy - Copies the selected characters from the Characters To Copy box to the Clipboard.
Leader Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. You can place either end of the leader first: the annotation end or the terminator end. You can attach the annotation end of a leader to one of the following: Text box Balloon Another leader on a dimension or annotation
You can place the terminator end of a leader in one of the following ways: Attach it to an element. Place it in free space.
Leader Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview Dimension Style - Lists and applies the available styles. Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line at the annotation end of a leader.
Leader Properties Dialog Box

Edits the properties of an element to which you have added a leader using Add Leader.
Labels: An Overview
Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information about the objects or elements in the document. There are two types of labels: text labels and SmartLabels. Text labels are associated with an element or object. If you move the element or object, the text label moves with it. You can create text labels in a document by double-clicking an element or object. A text label appears near the element so that you can type text. The label appears at the location where the element is double-clicked, except for closed elements, such as a circle or rectangle. The label position on closed elements is the center of the element. When you enter the text that you want, the text label orients itself with the element.
Another kind of label, a SmartLabel, can be associated to an object or element's text attributes. A SmartLabel is often distinguished by a question mark in the display.
A SmartLabel displays the attributes of the element or object as text in the document. You can drag SmartLabels from the Symbol Explorer into the current document. SmartLabels have an .sym extension. As you change an element's or object's attributes in the Attribute Viewer or the Properties dialog box, the SmartLabel's text displays those changes.
If an element or object has no attributes, and you drag a SmartLabel to it, the element or object picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For example, you might want to assign attributes to a heat exchanger, such as pressure and material type. If the SmartLabel has the pressure and material type defined, and the heat exchanger does not, the SmartLabel's pressure and material type are copied to the heat exchanger.
If an element already has existing attributes, a SmartLabel placed on the element displays the values for the existing attributes. For example, if the heat exchanger already has values for pressure and material type attributes, the values of those attributes are filled in for a SmartLabel placed on the heat exchanger. Tip Not all SmartLabels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some SmartLabels contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the SmartLabel.
Create a Text Label

1. Double-click an element or object. A small, blinking pointer appears below the element or object. For a closed element, the pointer appears in the center of that element 2. Type the text in the label. 3. Click outside the label to complete it. The text label rotates to align with the element or object to which it is associated.
Notes You can edit a text label like a text box.
Edit a Text Label

1. Double-click the label. 2. Type the text in the label. 3. Click a point outside the label to complete the operation. The text label rotates to align with the element or object to which it is associated. Notes You can format a text label like a text box. Select the label and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Text Properties.
Move a Label
If a text label or SmartLabel is associated with an element or object, drag the element or object. The label moves with the element or object. If a label is not associated with an element or object, drag the label.
Place a SmartLabel
1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer 2. Browse to the directory. 3. Drag the SmartLabel into the document. If you place the SmartLabel near an element in the document, the SmartLabel is associated with that 300 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide .
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview element.
Place Multiple Labels

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar. 2. Double-click the symbol that you want to add a label to. A cursor appears below the symbol. Tip Double-click the symbol away from any existing labels. Type the text. Right-click your mouse to deselect the text command. 166. 167. Notes The associated label will move with the symbol. The symbol label text can be edited by double-clicking on the label. The associated label can be moved by selecting it, unlocking it, and moving it to the desired location. Tip A small green lock represents a lock handle. You click the lock handle to unlock the symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol is associated.
Edit a SmartLabel
1. Double-click an element or object. 2. In the Attribute Viewer, type the values that you want for the label. Notes You can edit the properties or parameters of a SmartLabel. You can also edit the properties of the elements or text in the SmartLabel. Select the SmartLabel and then click Edit Graphic Properties or Edit Text Properties on the shortcut menu. If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you cannot select or open the SmartLabel to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new SmartLabel.
Engineering Fonts
The engineering fonts delivered with the software contain industry-specific fonts, special characters, and symbols that you can use to annotate engineering drawings. These fonts include degree symbols, diameter symbols, and other special characters and symbols that are not usually included in a typical word processing package. Your choice of font should be based on the industry for which you are creating engineering drawings. The software provides TrueType fonts; with TrueType fonts, what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. The screen display of the document closely matches the printed document. When you open a .dwg or .dgn document, the software provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD or MicroStation font. You can make changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Options.
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview

As you move the pointer, the software automatically updates values in the ribbon, giving you constant feedback on the size and position of the element you are drawing. As you draw, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the element you are drawing by the pointerthis feedback is called a relationship indicator. This temporary display shows the look of the elements if you place the element at the current location.
The software gives you more information about the element that you are drawing by displaying relationships between the temporary, dynamic element and the following items: Other elements in the drawing Horizontal and vertical orientations Origin of the element that you are drawing
When the software recognizes a relationship, it displays a relationship indicator at the pointer. As you move the pointer, the software updates the indicator to show new relationships. If a relationship indicator appears by the pointer when you click to draw the element, the software applies that relationship to the element. Relationship End point Midpoint Intersection Horizontal Vertical Relationship Indicator
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview Point On Element Perpendicular Parallel Tangent Center For example, if the horizontal relationship indicator appears when you click to place the second end point of a line, then the line is exactly horizontal.
Relationships
You can set the types of relationships you want the software to recognize usingSmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. The software can recognize one or two relationships at a time. When the software recognizes two relationships, it displays both relationship indicators at the pointer.
Locate Zone
You do not have to move the pointer to an exact position for the software to recognize a relationship. The software recognizes relationships for any element within the locate zone of the pointer. The circle around the pointer crosshair or at the end of the pointer arrow indicates the locate zone. You can change the size of the locate zone with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.
Infinite Elements
The software recognizes the Point On Element relationship for lines and arcs as if these elements were infinite. In the following example, the software recognizes a Point On Element relationship when you position the pointer directly over an element and also when you move the pointer off the element. 304 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using Relationships as You Draw: An Overview

You can use relationships to capture and remember your design intent as your sketch. You can make your drawings associative by applying those relationshipsor you can sketch designs that do not use relationships.
How Relationships Affect a Drawing

You can move and change an element that does not use relationships in various ways without affecting other parts of the design. For example, when no relationships exist between two lines, you can move and change each line without affecting the other. When you modify a part of a drawing that has a relationship to another part of the drawing, the other part updates automatically. For example, if you apply a perpendicular relationship between the two lines and move one line, the other line moves with it. The software remembers the relationship between these two elements and always maintains the perpendicular relationship between the lines. You can manipulate either of the two lines and the software will move or modify the line automatically to maintain the relationship. Applying and maintaining relationships in the design simplifies changes to the design later. In the following drawing, all the relationships were automatically established as the design took shape on the drawing sheet. If you want to change the design, you simply modify one segment of it and all the relationships are maintained.
Applying and Maintaining Relationships

You can place elements that are related to each other as you draw. First, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. Then, as you click commands on the Draw toolbar and place lines, arcs, and circles, you should watch the relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. When a relationship indicator appears by the pointer, you can click to apply that relationship to the element that you are drawing.
Visualizing Maintained Relationships

When you apply relationships, relationship handles appear on the related elements. The handles are symbols that show how elements are related. You can display or hide the relationship handles in your drawings by setting or clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu. Relationship 306 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide Relationship Handle
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview Colinear Connect Concentric Equal Horizontal/Vertical Tangent Symmetric Parallel Perpendicular Lock For example, the following four lines appear with relationship handles (A) turned off and with relationship handles (B) displayed.
Applying Relationships to Existing Geometry

You can apply relationships to geometry after you place it with the buttons on the Relationship toolbar. These buttons include parallel, tangent, connect, and so on. You can use relationships created with these buttons if you set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu.
Removing Relationships
You can quit using all the relationships that you have applied to the drawing if you clear Maintain Relationships. You can also remove individual relationships by selecting a relationship handle and deleting it. Clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu hides the handles, but the relationships are still maintained and used in the design.
When to Maintain Relationships

Maintaining relationships makes designing more productive and revisions much easier. However, relationships can slow drawing and changes on large data sets. You should decide whether to use relationships depending on the speed of your computer and the importance of easy revision. For conceptual sketching and diagrams, you might want to use relationships SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 307
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview by setting Maintain Relationships. This method allows you to quickly get your ideas on paper and revise them easily using direct modification and driving dimensions. The kinds of projects in which you might want to use relationships include mechanical concepts, architectural details, layouts, and schematic diagrams.
When to Design Without Relationships

For more complex projects where you initially need to draw with precision, you should not use relationships in the document. You can then draw with precision by using the PinPoint tool and entering values on ribbons. You can still use relationships within symbols. The kinds of projects in which you might want to draw without relationships include multiple-view drawings, floor plans, maps, and detailed designs. Tip If you switch between using relationships and not using them while you draw, you can receive confusing results.
Intent Zones
As you draw and modify elements, small quadrants called intent zones appear next to the pointer. The software uses intent zones to interpret your intentions as you draw. Intent zones allow you to draw and modify elements many ways using few commands. You do not need to select a different command for every type of element.
How Intent Zones Work

When you click to begin drawing certain elements, the software divides the region around the clicked position into intent zones. By moving the pointer into one of these intent zones on the way to your next click location, you can tell the software what you want to do next. The last intent zone you move the pointer into is the active zone. To change the active intent zone, move the mouse pointer into the zone you want to use, then move it to the position where you want to click next.
Drawing Tangent or Perpendicular Arcs

You can use intent zones to change the result of Tangent Arc. To draw an arc tangent to a line, first click a point on the line to place the first end point of the arc. Then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone and click to place the second end point of the arc.
If you want to draw a perpendicular arc instead, you can move the pointer back into the intent zone region and out through the perpendicular zone before clicking to place the second end point of the arc. The arc is then perpendicular to the line.
You can also use intent zones to define the arc direction.
Drawing Arcs by Three Points

When you use Arc by 3 Points, intent zones allow you to input the three points in any order. You can also use intent zones to change the arc direction.
Drawing Lines Tangent or Connected to Curved Elements

Using intent zones with Line/Arc Continuous, you can draw a line tangent to a circle or arc. Or you can draw a line that is connected to the circle or arc, but not tangent to it.
Draw with Relationships

1. Set the SmartSketch options so that the software recognizes the relationships you want to use. You can set the options with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. 2. On the Draw toolbar, click a drawing command. 3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet to find relationships. 4. Click when the software recognizes a relationship you want to use for the element you are drawing. When you click with a relationship indicator displayed at the pointer, the relationship is established in the drawing. Notes If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles as you draw. These relationships are maintained when you modify the drawing.
Suspend Relationships
1. Hold Alt. The software does not recognize any relationships while you hold this key. 2. Release Alt to re-activate the software's ability to recognize relationships.
Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command

1. Click Tools > Maintain Relationships. 2. Draw as usual. The software automatically establishes recognized relationships. For each relationship, a relationship handle is placed on the related elements. Notes Relationships cannot be established in certain cases.
Delete a Relationship
Note If the relationship handles are hidden, click Relationship Handles on the Relationship toolbar to display them.
1. Select a relationship handle. 2. Press Delete.
Maintain Relationships
Click Tools > Maintain Relationships. When Maintain Relationships is set and you apply relationships to new or existing elements, the software places relationship handles on the elements. Elements that share relationships are associative; when you move an element, the other elements on the drawing sheet move according to the relationships they have with the element that you moved.
Display or Hide Relationship Handles

Click Tools > Relationship Handles to turn on and turn off the display of relationship handles. Tip If a checkmark appears next to Relationship Handles, the display is on. Note You can also click Relationship Handles on the Relationship toolbar to toggle relationship handles on and off. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 311
Lock an Element or Key Point

On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock . Click an element or key point to lock the element and prevent it from being modified.
Insert a Detail View

1. Click Insert > Detail View. 2. Click the shape of the detail view, either Circular or Rectangular. 3. Click the Caption box and type a caption that the software places with the drawing detail. Tip You can define the active font for the Detail View caption by using Format > Text Box. Select a scale for the drawing detail in the Scale Factor box. Tip You can click the scale factor box and type a value instead of selecting an available value from the pull down list.
168.
169. Select an existing sheet for displaying the detail view in the Place detail on: combo box. 170. Select the Display envelope check box to display the boundary of the detailed view on the drawing. Tip When displayed, detail view boundaries (envelopes) can be moved to a different location in the drawing to change the contents of the detail view. To do this, click the detail view envelope in the drawing. Then using the displayed center point, drag the envelope to a new location in the drawing. The contents of the detail view update to reflect the location of the envelope. Notes The detail view is a SmartFrame. You can edit its properties by selecting the detail view and displaying the shortcut menu. The envelope, labels, and detail view can all be moved to different locations at any time. Labels can be edited at any time. The contents inside a detail view cannot be edited; however, if the
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview contents inside the envelope are modified, changes are reflected in the detail view once the screen is repainted. If the detail view is deleted, the envelope and associated labels are also deleted. However, if the envelope or any labels are deleted, the detail view will remain.

Relationships Command (Main Toolbar)
Displays the Relationship toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to create relationships between two drawing elements. Tip To maintain the relationship between elements when you modify either one of the elements, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu.
Alignment Indicator Command (Tools Menu)

Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or vertical alignment while you draw or modify elements. Alignment indicators work similarly to relationship indicators. If you click when a horizontal or vertical indicator line is displayed, the element you are drawing or modifying will be horizontally or vertically aligned with the element the indicator line leads to.
SmartSketch Settings Command (Tools Menu)

Sets up what relationships are recognized by the software. The relationships selected on the SmartSketch dialog box are recognized as you draw.
SmartSketch Dialog Box

Customizes the operation of the software in recognizing and placing relationships. You can set pointer behavior and specify which relationships are recognized as you draw.
Relationships Tab
This tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the software as you draw. Set the relationships you want to recognize, and clear the relationships you do not want to recognize. Clear all relationships so that the software does not place relationship handles.
Cursor Tab
Tab Options
Cursor Setup - Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the pointer. Locate Zone - Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region around the pointer. The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate zone so that you do not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For example, if part of an element is within the locate zone, the software recognizes a Point On relationship. The size of the locate zone is indicated by a circle around the center of the pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid. Intent Zone - Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow drawing commands to interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid. Preview - Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected relationship.
Maintain Relationships Command (Tools Menu)

Places relationship handles as you draw. When this option is set, the software places relationship handles for relationships that the software recognizes, and for relationships that you apply using the commands on the Relationship toolbar.
Relationship Handles Command (Tools Menu)

Displays any relationship handles on elements.
Lock Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Controls elements so they cannot be modified. When you use this button, you can lock the length, angle, radius, or position of an element. You can also lock keypoints on elements, such as endpoints of a line or the center of a circle, in their absolute positions.
Detail View Command (Insert Menu)

Places either a circular or rectangular detail view into your drawing. Tip Detail View is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Detail View Ribbon

Places a detail view based on graphics inside a user-defined envelope. This command is accessed via the Insert menu.
Ribbon Bar Options

Drawing with Relationships: An Overview Circular detail - Places a detail with a circular envelope and detail view shape. Rectangular detail - Places a detail with a rectangular envelope and detail view shape. Caption - Specifies the label for the envelope and detail. Scale Factor - Specifies the factor to which the detail view is scaled. Tip You can either select a value from the drop-down list, or type a value of your own.
Place detail on - Specifies the sheet in the document in which the detail is to be placed. Display envelope - Turns on or off the display of the detail envelope.
Sample Workflows
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line
You can use relationships to connect an element you are drawing with an existing element. You can apply a connect relationship as you draw the lines, or draw the line without a connect relationship.
1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings. 2. On the Relationships tab, set End Point, and click OK. 3. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 4. Move the pointer to the end of a line in the application window. The software displays the End Point relationship indicator at the pointer. 5. While the software displays the relationship indicator, click to place the first end point of the new line. This end point is connected to the end point of the previous line.
171. line. 172.
Click where you want to place the second end point of the new The new line and the previous line have connected end points.
Notes If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a connect relationship handle at the point where the two lines connect.
If you do not want to place a connect relationship, you can follow the same procedure with Maintain Relationships cleared. The end points of the two lines will still be exactly coincident when you draw them. Tip
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship Handles on the Tools menu.
Draw a Line
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous 2. Click where you want a new line to begin. .
173. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. Notice that the line follows the movement of the pointer. At the same time, the pointer recognizes any relationships it encounters, such as a horizontal relationship. When the pointer finds a relationship, a relationship indicator appears at the pointer.
174. Click to place the end point of the line according to the displayed relationships. 175. Continue clicking to draw additional line segments, or right-click to end the command.
Draw an Arc
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc By Center Point 2. Click where you want to place the center point. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 319 .
176. Move the pointer horizontally, to a position where the software recognizes step angle alignment with the center point.
177.
Click where you want the sweep to begin.
178. Move the pointer to a position where the software identifies the step angle you want to use for the sweep.
179. While the step angle relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end of the sweep.
Draw a Horizontal Line

You can use relationships to draw a line that is exactly horizontal. You can apply a horizontal relationship as you draw the line, or draw the line without a horizontal relationship.
1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings. 2. On the Relationships tab, select Horizontal Or Vertical, and then click OK. 3. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 4. Click where you want to place the first end point of the line, anywhere in the application window.
180. Move the pointer around in the window. Notice that the dynamic line display always extends from the end point you just placed to the 320 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview current pointer position. You may also see relationship indicators displayed at the pointer.
181. Move the pointer to make the dynamic line approximately horizontal. 182. When the horizontal relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to place the second end point.
Notes If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a horizontal relationship handle on the new line.
If you do not want to place a horizontal relationship, you can follow the same procedure with Maintain Relationships cleared. The line will still be exactly horizontal when you draw it. Tip
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship Handles on the Tools menu.
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained

Relationships cannot be maintained in certain cases, as in the following example. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc By 3 Points .
2. Click where you want the sweep of the arc to begin.
183.
Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes a SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 321
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview point on element relationship with a line on the drawing sheet.
184. When the Point On relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the second input point for the arc. 185. Move the pointer past the line and click. The position of this input point defines it as the end of the sweep, making the point in the middle a key point that cannot have relationships. The software recognizes this, and does not maintain the point on element relationship.
Notes If the third input point for the arc had been between the first two points, then it would have been interpreted as the arc midpoint, making the second input point one end of the arc sweep. In this case, the point would have been constrainable, and the software would have maintained the point on element relationship.
Connect Points While Drawing a Line

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 2. Click where you want the line to begin.
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview 186. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the end point of a line on the drawing sheet.
187. When the point on relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end of the line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where the two lines meet.
Connect Points While Modifying a Line

1. Select the line you want to modify.
188. Position the Select Tool over the handle at the end of the line you want to modify. The pointer changes to a plus (+) shape to indicate that you have located the handle.
189. Drag the handle to a position where the software recognizes the end point of another line on the drawing sheet.
190.
Release the mouse button to place the end point of the line you are SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 323
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview modifying at the end point of the stationary line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where the two lines meet.
Establish More Than One Relationship

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous 2. Click where you want the line to begin. .
191. Move the pointer to recognize point on element and tangent relationships with a circle on the drawing sheet.
192. While the point on element and tangent relationship indicators are displayed at the pointer, click to define the end point of the line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a relationship handle for each recognized relationship.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview

Engineering and architectural diagrams and drawings require accurate measurements and precise positioning of elements and symbols. SmartSketch provides a variety of positioning and dimensioning tools that are easy to use but powerful enough for the most complex drawings. Many types of drawings require a drawing scale that makes it possible to represent very large or very small objects on a sheet of paper. You can set up your SmartSketch drawings with the drawing scale and measurement units you need to create a wide range of drawings. When you are positioning elements and symbols on a drawing sheet, speed and precision count. You can easily align symbols with other symbols or with locations indicated by guides, rulers, and grids. You can also position symbols at exact x-and y-coordinates in your drawing. You can also display the dimensions of elements in your drawings. With SmartSketch's measurement and dimensioning tools, you can calculate and display linear and angular dimensions. When you resize an element that has attached dimensions, the dimensions update automatically.
Placing Elements in Precise Locations: An Overview

PinPoint is a tool that helps you draw and modify elements relative to known positions in a drawing. You can place a target point and then the software dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical distance between the pointer and the target point. You can use PinPoint with all element drawing commands. You can run PinPoint from the Tools menu or the Main toolbar.
How PinPoint Works

PinPoint allows you to provide coordinate input to commands as you draw. The x and y coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position anywhere in the window. You can change the location of the target point at any time by clicking Reposition Target on the ribbon and then clicking a new position in the window. As you move the pointer around, PinPoint dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical distance between the pointer position and the target point. Help lines show the PinPoint X and Y axis and the PinPoint orientation.
Locking and Freeing Values

You can lock the x coordinate or the y coordinate using the X and Y boxes on the ribbon. When one coordinate value is locked, you can position the other coordinate by clicking a position in the window. Or you can set both values using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for a locked value, you can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing Backspace or Delete.
PinPoint Orientation
In its default orientation, PinPoint's x axis is horizontal. You can re-orient the x axis to any angle by setting the angle on the PinPoint ribbon. The figure shows the PinPoint angle set to 20 degrees.
Draw with PinPoint

1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint . 2. Click where you want the target point to be. 3. Run any drawing command. As you move the pointer, PinPoint displays the coordinates of the current mouse location in relation to the target point. To provide precision input to the current command, click when the coordinate display indicates that the pointer is in the correct position or type coordinate values in the X and Y ribbon boxes. Caution You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap. Notes When the pointer reaches a distance from the target point that is a multiple of the Step Value set on the ribbon, the related coordinate value and help line become bold. If you know the exact x and y distances from the target point that you want to use as command input, you can type the values in the X and Y ribbon boxes. You can type a known x or y value into the X or Y ribbon box to lock one axis position, then graphically define the coordinate for the other axis. You can move the target point at any time. Click Reposition on the ribbon, then click where you want the target point to be. You can re-orient the PinPoint x axis. Type a positive value in the Angle box on the PinPoint ribbon to rotate the axis counterclockwise, or a negative value to rotate the axis clockwise.
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point

Do one of the following: On the PinPoint ribbon, click Reposition. The target point is attached to the pointer. Click where you want the target point to be. Press F12. The target point moves to the current pointer location.
Re-Orient PinPoint
The default PinPoint orientation is with the PinPoint x axis horizontal. To reSmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 327
Drawing Precisely: An Overview orient the PinPoint x axis, type an angle in the ribbon Angle box. A positive value rotates the horizontal axis counterclockwise. A negative value rotates the axis clockwise. The y axis is automatically repositioned to remain perpendicular to the x axis.

PinPoint Command (Tools Menu)
Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the pointer. The displayed coordinates are relative to a target position that you set and can reset at any time. Using PinPoint, you can draw elements at known locations on the drawing sheet, draw elements known distances apart, and so forth. You can use PinPoint with all drawing commands Caution You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.
PinPoint Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Display On/Off (F9) - Displays or hides the PinPoint help lines and distance values. Reposition Target (F12) -Attaches the target point to the pointer so that you can reposition the target point. Click where you want the target point to be. Relative Tracking - When toggled on, PinPoint is in relative mode such that the PinPoint target moves to the last point clicked during a drawing command. Define PinPoint Origin - Activates the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for PinPoint. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 329
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Note To save this origin, you must select the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Reposition Target to Origin - Moves the PinPoint target to the X,Y position that was saved using the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar. Angle - Specifies the angle of the PinPoint x help line relative to its default horizontal orientation. Positive values rotate the horizontal line counterclockwise. Negative values rotate the horizontal line clockwise. Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value. The step value is an incremental distance along the PinPoint coordinate axes. When the distance between the target position and the current pointer location is an increment of the step value, the related coordinate value and help line become bold.
Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon

When you click the Define PinPoint Origin button on the PinPoint ribbon bar, the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar is displayed. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Save PinPoint Origin - Saves the currently displayed X and Y values to the document. Target X - Locks the horizontal distance between the target point and the current pointer location to the value you type. Target Y - Locks the vertical distance between the target point and the current pointer location to the value you type.
Placing Elements with a Grid: An Overview

The grid and its grid lines allow you to place elements in the document by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can use the grid if you want the elements to line up at regular intervals in the document. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document. When you set Grid Snap on the View menu, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can view the grid by clicking Grid Display on the View menu. The grid lines do not print. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab of the Options dialog box. When you zoom in or out, the grid lines for a dynamic grid are generated dynamically. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. You can set up the increment settings on the View tab of the Options dialog box.
Place Elements With a Grid

1. Click View > Grid Display. Tip This step is optional. You do not have to display the grid to align elements with it. On the View menu, select Grid Snap. Place the elements that you want with the grid.
193. 194. Notes
You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Options dialog box. When you perform Step 3, a red crosshair will appear at the pointer showing where an element's points are placed. Elements align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 331
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Grid snap does not work while you identify elements that are aligned along grid lines. To override this, press the Alt key while identifying these elements. Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the indicators by pressing Alt.

Grid Display Command (View Menu)
Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid is not part of the document and does not print. Tip You can also access Grid Display by right-clicking. You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box.
Grid Snap Command (View Menu)

Allows you to align elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, the software always aligns elements with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid lines do not print. Tip You can also access Grid Snap by right clicking. You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box.
Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the indicators by holding down Alt.
Dimensioning Drawing Elements: An Overview

Dimensions supply information about the size, location, and orientation of elements, such as the length of a line, the distance between points, or the angle of a line. Dimensions are associative to the elements they refer to, so you can make design changes easily.
You can use the commands on the Dimension toolbar to place the following types of dimensions: (A) Linear dimensions (B) Angular dimensions (C) Diameter dimensions (D) Radial dimensions (E) Dimension groups Dimension commands on the Dimension toolbar have a ribbon that sets 334 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview options for placing the dimension. When you select a dimension in the drawing, the same ribbon options appear. You can use the options to change the selected dimension.
Placing Dimensions
To dimension elements, you can use a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar, such as SmartDimension, and then select the elements you want to dimension. As you place dimensions, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the dimension you are placing. This temporary display shows what the new dimension will look like if you click at the current pointer position. The dimension orientation changes depending on where you move the pointer. For example, when you click Distance Between on the Dimension toolbar and select an origin element and an element to measure to, the dimension dynamically adjusts its orientation depending on where you position your pointer.
Because you can dynamically control the orientation of a dimension during placement, you can place dimensions quickly and efficiently without having to use several commands. Each of the dimension commands uses placement dynamics that allow you to control how the dimension will look before you place it.
Placing Dimensions with the Dimension Axis

Axis on the Dimension toolbar sets the orientation of the dimension axis on the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension. You must set Explicit on the Dimension ribbon to place dimensions that are perpendicular or parallel to new dimension axis.
Dimensioning While You Draw

Drawing Precisely: An Overview To dimension elements as you draw them, you can set Dimension Keyin Values Automatically with Options on the Tools menu. Although placing dimensions as you draw is convenient, it might be necessary to delete unneeded dimensions when you have finished your design. Tip Dimensions placed with this option are only driven dimensions.
Using Dimensions to Drive Elements

You can place a dimension that controls the size or location of the element to which it refers. This type of dimension is known as a driving dimension. If you use the ribbon to change the dimensional value of a driving dimension, the element updates.
Dimensions that are not driving dimensions are called driven dimensions. The value of a driven dimension is controlled by the element it refers to. If the element changes, the dimensional value updates. Because both driving and driven dimensions are associative to the element they refer to, you can change the design more easily without having to delete and re-apply elements or dimensions when you update the design. If you want to create a driving dimension, you must first set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. When you are placing dimensions, an option on the ribbon allows you to specify whether a dimension is driving or driven. A driving dimension and a driven dimension are distinguished by color. There are different colors for driving dimensions and driven dimensions in a dimension style.
Not-to-Scale Dimensions
You can override the value of a driven dimension by editing its dimensional value. This makes the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15 millimeters. 336 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Formatting Dimensions
If you want two or more dimensions to look the same, you can select the dimensions and apply a style with the ribbon. If you want to format dimensions so that they look unique, you can select a dimension and edit its formats on the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
Using Expressions in Dimensions

There are many instances when the dimensions of individual features in a design are related. For example, the bend radius used to manufacture a sheet metal part is usually a function of the stock thickness. You can define and automate these types of design relationships with expressions. You can select a dimension and then use the Variables command on the Tools menu to enter a formula. When the formula is solved, the dimensional value changes to the value that the formula calculates. You might want to use dimensions with expressions for the following purposes: Drive a dimension by another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B Drive a dimension by a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5 Drive a dimension by a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = pi * Dimension B
Setting or Modifying Units of Measure

To set the units of measure for a dimension, you can use Properties on the Edit menu. To set the units of measure for a document, you can click Properties on the File menu and then click the Units tab.
Types of Dimensions
A linear dimension measures the length of a line or the distance between two points or elements. You can place linear dimensions with the Distance Between and SmartDimension commands.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview An angular dimension measures the angle of a line, the sweep angle of an arc, or the angle between two or more lines or points. You can place angular dimensions with the Angle Between and SmartDimension commands. A radial dimension measures the radius of elements, such as arcs, circles, ellipses, or curves. You can place a radial dimension with the SmartDimension command. A diameter dimension measures the diameter of elements, such as circles and ellipses. You can place a diameter dimension with the SmartDimension command. The components of a dimension are as follows:
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Projection line Dimension line Dimensional value Terminator
(E) (F) (G)
Break line Symbol Connect line
Dimension Groups
You can place dimensions in dimension groups with several commands. This makes the dimensions easier to manipulate on the drawing sheet. All members of a stacked or chained dimension group share the same dimension axis. Stacked dimension group
Chained dimension group
A coordinate dimension group is another type of dimension group. Coordinate dimensions measure the position of key points or elements from a common origin. All the dimensions within the group measure from a common origin. You should use coordinate dimensions when you want to dimension elements in relation to a common origin or zero point.
When you are placing dimension groups with Distance Between or Angle Between, the pointer position determines what type of dimension group will be placed. After you place the first dimension in a group and click the second element you want to measure, if the pointer is below the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a chained group.
If the pointer is above the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a stacked group.
You can place dimension groups with the following buttons on the Dimension toolbar: Distance Between Angle Between Symmetric Diameter Coordinate Dimension
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension

You can place the following types of dimensions with SmartDimension: Linear dimension Angular dimension Radial dimension Diameter dimension .
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension 2. Click an element.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Tip The command determines the type of dimension to place, depending on the type of element you select, and displays the dimension dynamically so you can position it. Position the dimension, and then click a point to place it. Notes SmartDimension automatically determines the type of dimension to place based on the element that you select, such as linear, radial, or angular. However, you can specify a different dimension type. For example, if you click SmartDimension and then select a circle, the Diameter on the ribbon is active; you then place a diameter dimension. If you want to place a radial dimension instead, you can click Radial on the ribbon before you click to place the dimension. To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu, select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the dimension that you place is a driving dimension by default. You can change a dimension to driving or driven by selecting it and then clicking Driving/Driven on the ribbon. To place a horizontal or vertical dimension between the end points of an angled line, you must press Shift. A connector is not considered to be a geometric element; consequently, it cannot be dimensioned.
195.
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons. 196. Distance Between Angle Between Click an element or key point to identify the origin element.
197.
Click an element or key point to measure to. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 341
198. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically follows the movement of the pointer. 199. Click to place the dimension.
200. If you want to place another dimension, click another element or key point to select the next measurement element. Tip The origin element for this dimension is the element that you selected in step 2. Click to place the next dimension. Notes After placing several dimensions, if you want to use a different origin element for additional dimensions, right-click to start over. After you click the two elements that you want to place the dimension between, the orientation of the dimension changes depending on where you move the pointer.
201.
Before you place a dimension between two elements or keypoints, you can use Axis to set the orientation of the dimension axis on the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance Between. After you define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension axis.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview A connector is not considered to be a geometric element; consequently, it cannot be dimensioned.
Place a Dimension Group

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons: 202. Distance Between Angle Between Symmetric Diameter Coordinate Dimension Click an element that you want to measure.
203.
Click to place the dimension.
204.
Click another element that you want to measure.
205.
Click to place the dimension in the dimension group.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Notes The first dimension that you place in a dimension group is the origin dimension. Coordinate Dimension places coordinate dimensions. Coordinate dimensions can only be placed in a group. You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on any side of the elements that you want to dimension.
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group
1. Click the element that the dimension measures.
206. Click a point for the dimension. This action adds the dimension to the dimension group.
Notes If you change a dimension group, the group updates automatically. If you delete a dimension from the middle of a chained dimension group, the group splits into two groups. If you place a dimension group using Axis and then delete the first or middle dimension from the group, this action deletes all the dimensions after the removed dimension.
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Symmetric Diameter . 2. Click an element or key point. This element or key point is the origin.
207.
Click an element to measure or a key point to measure to.
208. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically follows the movement of the pointer. 209. Click to place the dimension.
210. To place another dimension, click another element to measure or key point to measure to. Tip The origin element for this dimension is the first element or key point that you selected. Click to place the dimension. Notes To use a different origin element for additional dimensions, rightclick to resume editing. After you click the two elements that you want to dimension between, the dimension changes depending on where you move the pointer.
211.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Turn on Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as half. Turn off Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as full.
Set a Dimension Axis

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Axis . 2. Click an element to which you want the dimension axis to be parallel or perpendicular.
212. Choose distance between, then place a dimension. You can now place a dimension that runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined.
213. To use the dimension axis that you set using Axis, click Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension toolbar. 214. On the ribbon, set Explicit in the Dimension Axis box. After you define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension axis.
Set the Dimension Type

Dimension types control how the dimension is displayed. You can set the dimension type before or after you place a dimension. On the ribbon, click one of the options on the Dimension Type list on the palette to set the dimension type. Note In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see the type of dimension and an example of what the dimension will look like.
Edit a Dimension Prefix

1. Select a dimension. 2. On the ribbon, click Prefix .
3. On the Dimension Prefix dialog box, type the characters that you want to appear as prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information in the appropriate boxes. Tip While you type information in one of the boxes, you can also click a symbol at the top of the dialog box to add symbols to the prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview 215. Notes You can also use the Dimension Prefix dialog box while you place a dimension. You can change the prefix or suffix gap by selecting a dimension. Then, you can click Properties on the Edit menu. On the Spacing tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box, change the prefix or suffix gap. You can also set the superfix or subfix gap on this tab. Click Apply to change the dimension that you selected.
Set the Dimension Units

1. Select a dimension. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. 3. On the Dimension Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. 4. Set the options you want to use for the dimension unit. Notes You can set the dimension units for a dimension that you are about to place using Dimension on the Format menu. You can save the dimension unit settings in a dimension style using Style on the Format menu.
Move a Dimension
1. Click part of the dimension that you want to move. 2. Drag the dimension to a new location. The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move a dimension. The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of a dimension.
To move the dimension line

Click the dimension line and drag the dimension.
To move the dimension text

1. Click the dimension text. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:
216.
Drag the dimension to one of the following positions: Along the dimension line
Outside of the dimension line
Outside of the projection line
To move the terminator

Drawing Precisely: An Overview Click the terminator and drag it.
To move the projection line

Click the projection line and drag it.
Tip You can lengthen or shorten the projection line.
To move the leader break line

For radial dimensions, you can move the break line of the leader line. Click the dimension text. Then, drag the text while pressing Shift.
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements

You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements. Driving dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size, orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on, or between elements, you can change the element size by editing their dimensional valuesyou do not have to delete or redraw elements at different sizes. For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 351
Drawing Precisely: An Overview value of the radius dimension changes the size of the arc.
To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements, and key points you want to relate. Tip In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu before creating your dimension.
Place a Driving Dimension

1. On the Tools menu, set Maintain Relationships. 2. Select an element. 3. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following commands: SmartDimension Distance Between Angle Between
The dimensions that you place will be driving dimensions by default. Notes To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and, on the ribbon, click Driving/Driven. To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog box.
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension

1. On the Tools menu, set Maintain Relationships. 2. Select the driven dimension you want to change. 3. On the ribbon, click Driving/Driven. The color of the dimension changes to indicate a driving dimension. Notes To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu, select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the dimension that you place by default is a driving dimension. To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and click Driving/Driven. To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog box.
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element

When you override the value of a driven dimension by editing the dimensional value, the resulting dimension is not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value of 15 millimeters to 30 millimeters, the actual size of the visible line remains 15 millimeters. Only the dimension text is changed; the line remains unchanged.
To change the value of a dimension without changing the actual element: 1. Select a driven dimension. Tip A color that you set with Style on the Format menu indicates a driven dimension. You can also set the color by selecting a SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 353
Drawing Precisely: An Overview dimension and clicking Properties on the Edit menu. 217. On the ribbon, delete the dimensional value from the Value box and type a new value. Notes To restore the dimension value to the original value of the element select a dimension, right mouse click and select Not to Scale on the shortcut menu. You can show dimensions that are not-to-scale by using Styles on the Format menu. This option places a zig-zag or straight line under the dimensional values that are not-to-scale. To return the dimensional value to the value of the element it actually measures, delete all the characters from the Value box on the ribbon. You can also select a dimension and clear Not To Scale on the shortcut menu.

Dimension Command (Main Toolbar)
Displays the Dimension toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to place and modify dimensions and annotations.
Dimension Ribbon
Sets options for dimensions. Some options on this toolbar are not available until you select an element on the drawing sheet. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Dimension Style - Lists and applies the available dimension styles. Round-Off - Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values as appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension being placed and contains values as appropriate for the dimension. Dimension Value - Sets the dimensional value. Driving/Driven - Toggles the selected dimension between a driving and driven state. If you want to set this option before you place a dimension, you must setMaintain Relationships on the Tools menu. Auto Center Mark - Places a center line crosshair at the center of the radius of curvature being measured by the dimension. Jog - Offsets the projection line of a coordinate or radial dimension. You can use this option to prevent the projection line that you are placing from overlapping other dimensions. Dimension Axis - Sets the orientation of dimensions placed by Distance SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 355
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Between or Coordinate Dimension. This option is not available until you select one of those buttons. This option is not available after you select the origin element. When you click Default, the dimensions that you place are parallel or perpendicular to the horizontal edge of the drawing sheet. When you click Implicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or perpendicular to the element that you are dimensioning. When you click Explicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or perpendicular to the element that you set the dimension axis to with the Axis on the Dimension Toolbar. You can use Explicit when the default horizontal and vertical axes are not appropriate for the geometry that you are dimensioning. Complement - Places an angular dimension at the 180 degree complement. Half/Full - Toggles between half and full. When you toggle this option, the symmetric diameter appears as half or full. The following options are available only if you click SmartDimension button on the Dimension toolbar and select an element: Length - Places a linear dimension for the following: The length of a line The arc length of an arc The horizontal or vertical distance between the end points of a line
Angle - Places an angular dimension for the angle of a line or the sweep angle of an arc.
Radius - Places a radial dimension for the following: Arc Circle Ellipse Curve
Diameter - Places a diameter dimension for an arc or circle.
Prefix - Opens or closes the Dimension Prefix dialog box for specifying prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix information. Dimension Type - Specifies the dimension type and the related tolerances. Tip In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see the type of dimension and an example of what the dimension will look like.
Upper Tolerance - Sets the primary upper tolerance value. This option is available for tolerance or limits dimension types only. Lower Tolerance - Sets the primary lower tolerance value. This option is available for tolerance or limits dimension types only. Class - Sets the tolerance class. This option is available for the class dimension type only. You can set the deviation (letters) and the grade (numbers).
Dimension Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a dimension or dimension style. You can point to a dimension and right-click to access this dialog box from Properties on the shortcut menu.
General Tab
Sets general properties for dimensions.
Tab Options
Color- Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension. Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions. Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions. Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are driving or driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes on driving dimensions are changed. Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual. Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in the drawing view. Manual- Scales a dimensional value. The scale value determines the dimensional value. Important Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.
Units Tab
Sets the primary units for dimensions.
Tab Options
Linear - Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension. Units - Sets the primary units for linear dimensions. Unit Label - Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit label. Subunit Label - Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 359
Drawing Precisely: An Overview subunit label. Round -Off - Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension. Maximum Subunits - Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a value up to 18. This value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type 13, the dimension appears as 13 inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch. Angular - Sets the units for an angular dimension. Units - Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees, Deg-Min-Sec, or Radians. Round -Off - Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension. Zeroes - Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension. Leading - Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left. Trailing - Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000. Delimiter - Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension. Period - Sets a period as the decimal delimiter. Comma - Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter. Space - Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.
Secondary Units Tab

Sets the secondary units for dimensions.
Tab Options
Linear - Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension. Units - Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For 360 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be millimeters. When you place the dimension, it displays both units. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit. Unit Label - Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up to 20 characters. Subunit Label - Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up to 20 characters. Round -Off - Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. Maximum Subunits - Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary subunits in drawings with dual unit display. Zeroes - Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension. Leading - Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left. Trailing - Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000. Dual Unit Display - Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary units for dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit is millimeters. Both units display when you place the dimension. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
Text Tab
Sets the text options for dimensions.
Tab Options
Text - Sets text options for a dimension. Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text. Font Style- Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension. Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension. Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example, the dimension text looks like the following picture when you select Vertical. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 361
Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The base line is an imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For example, when you select Above, the dimension text looks like the following picture.
Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have related tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon bar. Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For example, if you enter .5, the size of the tolerance text will be half the size of the dimension text. Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.
Lines and Coordinate Tab

Tab Options
Dimension Lines - Sets options for dimension lines. Connect - Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators when you place the dimension text and terminators outside the projection lines. Width - Sets the width of the dimension line. Stack Pitch - Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. Break Line - Sets the size of the break line for the dimension line. This value is a ratio of the text size. Coordinate - Sets options for coordinate dimensions. Auto-Jog - Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can use this option only when you place a coordinate or radial dimension. If you set Auto-Jog and the distance between two dimensions is less than the value 362 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a jog in the projection line. Common Origin - Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate dimensions. You can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none. Text Position - Positions text in a coordinate dimension. Stack Pitch - Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. Projection Line - Sets options for the projection line of a dimension. Display - Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and measurement. You can use this option to hide projection lines when they overlap and you are using a pen plotter. Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension text size. Extension - Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension text size. Angle - Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option is useful when you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings. Center Mark - Places a center line automatically when you dimension a nonlinear element. Extend Center Mark - Displays projection lines on center marks. Align Groups - Sets the length of all projection lines in a dimension group to equal the shortest projection line in the group.
Spacing Tab
Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text value.
Tab Options
Text Clearance Gap - Sets the space between the text and the dimension line. Dual Display Vertical Gap - Sets the space between the primary and secondary units when dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit Display on the Secondary Units tab so that dimensions display two units. Line Spacing - Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 363
Drawing Precisely: An Overview the dimension text. Dimension Above Line Gap - Sets the space between the dimension text and the dimension line. Horizontal Tolerance Gap - Sets the space between the dimensional value and the tolerance on dimensions. Vertical Tolerance Gap - Sets the space between the upper and lower tolerance value on dimensions. Vertical Limits Gap - Sets the space between the upper and lower dimensional values on limit dimensions. Symbol Gap - Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line. You can also set the space between the symbol and the dimension text. Prefix/Suffix Gap - Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and the dimension text. Horizontal Box Gap - Sets the space between the dimension text and the horizontal edges of the box on dimensions. Vertical Box Gap - Sets the space between the dimension text and the vertical edges of the box on dimensions.
Terminator And Symbol Tab

Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions.
Tab Options
Terminator - Sets options for terminators. Type - Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Click the various dimensions in the following picture to see the different types.
Freespace Type - Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator placed in free space. 364 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview Size - Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to be 2, the terminator is twice the size of the dimension text.
Origin Type - Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear dimension. Inside Limit - Sets the inside limit for the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. This setting controls when the terminators appear on the outside of the projection lines according to the options that you set. Datum Type - Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select Normal, the datum frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If you select Anchor, the datum frame uses an anchor terminator. Display - Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends display. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both origin and measurement. The following picture shows the display when you select Origin and Measurement.
Symbol - Sets options for symbols in dimensions. Placement - Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and radial dimensions and linear dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol before or after the dimension. You can also hide the symbol. Suppress Diameter - Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter dimensions. Not To Scale - Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven dimensions with overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on linear dimensions. You can override a driven dimension value by typing a new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon.
Angle Between Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a dimension that measures the angle between elements or key points. You can place angular dimensions in stacked or chained dimension groups. You can also add angular dimensions to existing dimension groups.
Axis Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. A dimension axis allows you to place dimensions that are perpendicular to or parallel to an element. The default axis in a drawing is perpendicular or parallel to the horizontal axis of a drawing sheet. Dimensions placed along the default axis look like this:
After you set a dimension axis with Axis, you can now place a dimension that runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined. To use the axis that you have just specified, you must set the type of dimension axis that you want to use on the dimension ribbon. You do this by clicking Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension toolbar. Then, you click Explicit in the Dimension Axis box on the ribbon so that you can use the dimension axis that you set with Axis.
Coordinate Dimension Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a dimension that measures the distance from a common origin to one or more key points or elements. The coordinate dimensions that refer to the common origin are members of a coordinate dimension group. You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on either side of the origin with respect to the dimension axis. You can also add additional coordinate dimensions to existing coordinate dimension groups.
Distance Between Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a linear dimension that measures the distance between elements or key points. You can place linear dimensions in stacked dimension groups.
You can place chained dimension groups.
You can also add linear dimensions to existing linear dimension groups.
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box

Adds prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix text to a dimensional value. You can use this dialog box while you place or edit a dimension.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
Superfix Prefix Value Suffix Subfix
Dialog Box Options

Special Characters - Applies a font character to the dimension prefix. You can use the buttons to apply font characters, such as a diameter, counterbore, depth, and initial length. Superfix - Specifies superfix information. Prefix - Specifies prefix information. Suffix - Specifies suffix information. Subfix - Specifies subfix information. Apply - Applies the prefix to the dimension.
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu)

Returns a driven dimension to its actual value. You can use this command only on a dimensional value that has been edited. Editing a dimensional value overrides the original value and makes the dimension not-to-scale. For 368 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15 millimeters.
Tip Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select a dimension.
SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a dimension for the following: Length and angle of a line
Radius and diameter of a circle
Length, angle, radius, and diameter of an arc
Radius of an ellipse or curve
Symmetric Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes elements symmetric about an axis. The characteristics of the elements on each side of the axis, such as size and position, are maintained by the symmetric relationship.
Symmetric Diameter Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a dimension that measures the distance between a center line and another element or key point, multiplies the distance by two, and displays the value as a diameter. You can place dimensions that measure the symmetric diameter of elements in a dimension group. You can also add additional symmetric diameter dimensions to an existing dimension group.
Setting Paper and Model Units: An Overview

Each document in the software is a container of sheets, where each sheet is a virtual sheet of paper that displays model information. The software supports measurements in two different spaces: paper space and model space. The paper space units represent physical measurements on the virtual sheet. The model space units represent real-world measurements associated with the model. Note Within the SmartSketch drawing environment, model space is synonymous with the term world space.
You can define the relationship between paper space and model space on the Sheet Setup dialog box. The default relationship between the paper and model spaces is 1:1. In other words, one unit of model space is equivalent to one unit of paper space. For example, if a text box with a font size of 1 inch in paper space is compared to a vertical line 1 inch in length, the text box and line appear on the paper to have the same height. However, if you change the drawing scale to 1:2, the line appears half as tall on the sheet as the text. If you change the drawing scale to 2:1, the line appears twice as tall on the sheet as the text. In either case, if you select the line, the length readout remains at 1 inch. In the current software, you can place only balloons, leaders, and dimensions in paper space. These graphics annotate objects in the model space but appear in paper space. You can place text boxes in either paper space or model space. Tips If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet with Insert > Object, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document. You can set or change the size for dimension text and annotations by clicking Style on the Format menu. On the Style dialog box, you select the type of style you want to set or modify (dimension or text), and then click New or Modify to set the font size for dimension text or a text box. Changing the font size of dimension-text style or a text-box style changes only the dimension text or annotations with the
Drawing Precisely: An Overview modified style applied to them. You can also set the font size for individual dimension text or annotations by overriding the style that you applied. You do this by selecting the dimension or text box and editing its properties with Properties on the shortcut menu or from the Edit menu. You can adjust how the model units fit within the printable sheet area by clicking Sheet Setup on the File menu. On the Size and Scale tab, you can select a scale setting by clicking an item on the Select Scale dropdown list. The value that you select causes the model to resize within the printable area, but neither the paper unit information (dimensions and annotations) or model unit information is scaled.
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet

1. Click File > Sheet Setup. 2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet size that you want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is displayed. 3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if the elements do not fit on the sheet. 4. On the File menu, click Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to the overall drawing size. 5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom. You should use the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine the custom scale for the drawing sheet. After you close the dialog box, the drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All dimensions appear in real-world units. Caution If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document. Notes If you select Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing, the dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another set of geometry SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 373
Drawing Precisely: An Overview in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Measuring Distances and Areas: An Overview

You can also measure the length of a line or the diameter of a circle by selecting the element and looking at the value on the ribbon. For more detailed work, the software provides commands for measuring distances or areas in a drawing. Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances or areas with these commands. Measure Distance measures the distance between points on elements and points in free space.
Measure Area measures the area inside one or more closed boundaries.
The distances are shown using the current units of measure for the document. To set the units for measuring distances or areas, you can use Properties on the File menu.
Measure an Area
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Measure Area 2. Click inside a closed boundary to measure its area. The area measurement for the closed boundary appears next to the pointer. The measured area appears as a gray fill. .
Tip As you click points, press Shift to display the total area by the pointer. Notes If you are measuring multiple areas and want to clear a measurement, click inside one of the filled, closed boundaries that you have measured while pressing the Shift key. When you are drawing elements or modifying a drawing, you can measure an area with Measure Area at any time. You can press Tab to move between the area and total area. You can also press Ctrl + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press Ctrl + V to paste the value to a text box or ribbon field.
Measure a Distance
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Measure Distance . 2. Click in free space or click a key point. This identifies the point to measure from.
218. Click a point to measure to. The distance between the two points appears next to the pointer. 219. Click another point to measure to. The distance between the last two points and the distance between the first point and the last point appear next to the pointer. Notes When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are the distances, as measured along the X and Y axes. When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that you clicked appears next to the pointer. When you are in the middle of a task, you can use Measure Distance at any time. You can press Tab to move between the distance and total distance. You can also press Ctrl + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press Ctrl + V to paste the value to a text box or ribbon field.
Set the Unit of Measure

1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. You can set the units for the length, area, or angle of a drawing. Tip This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 377
Drawing Precisely: An Overview units for dimensions, click Style on the Format menu and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control the format for dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click Properties on the Edit menu and set the units for dimensions that you have selected. 220. On the Units tab, set the options you want.
Bearing and Azimuth

You may want to orient your drawing in an environment with a specific bearing and azimuth. This tool may be useful for applications such as civil engineering. Tip Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Tools to access the command.
Set Bearing and Azimuth

1. From a customized toolbar, click Bearing and Azimuth Tip Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize to place it on a toolbar or menu. .
221. Click Default, Bearing, or Azimuth to select the orientation for the drawing or element. 222. When you select Azimuth, you can change the current settings of Base Bearing and Direction.

Measure Area Command (Tools Menu)
Displays the most recently selected area of the boundary in the current units. It also displays the total area of all selected boundaries in the current document units. You press Shift to display this value.
Measure Distance Command (Tools Menu)

Measures the distance between points in free space or between key points. When you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance at any time. When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are the distances, as measured along the x and y axes.
When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that you clicked appears next to the pointer.
Bearing and Azimuth Command

Allows you to determine how to display the angle for the selected element. Tip Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Tools to access the command.
Set Bearing Dialog Box

Controls the selection of Default, Bearing, and Azimuth angle settings. Also controls the azimuth settings for Base Bearing and Direction. Tip Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Tools to access the command.
Dialog Box Options

Default - Sets defaults for bearing and azimuth. Bearing - Determination of position to refer to an angle. Azimuth - Horizontal direction expressed as an angle, progressing from a fixed point, based on a circle. Base Bearing - Direction (North, South, East, West) bearing to refer to an angle. Direction - Clockwise or counterclockwise indicator for the angle bearing.
Using the Variable Table: An Overview

You can use the Variable Table to define and edit functional relationships between the dimensions of a design in a familiar spreadsheet format. The Variable Table is accessed with Variables on the Tools menu. There are two types of variables: dimensions displayed in the design and variables you create directly in the Variable Table. Dimension variables directly control elements of a design. A user variable must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159. You can use variables to do the following: Drive a dimension with another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B Define a constant; pi=3.14 Drive a dimension with a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5 Drive a dimension with a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = pi * Dimension B Drive a dimension with a formula that includes a function; Dimension A = Dimension B + cos(Dimension C) Drive a dimension with a value from a spreadsheet, such as a Microsoft Excel document, by copying the value from the spreadsheet into the Variable Table. Besides Excel, you can use any other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
Accessing the Variable Table

Once you select Variables on the Tools menu, a table appears with the following columns: Type, Name, Value, and Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.
Entering Data into the Variable Table

When you open the Variable Table in the document, all the dimensional values for the dimensions on the drawing sheet appear in the columns. The name that appears in the Name column is automatically generated by the software. You can change the name to something more logical if you want. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 381
Restricting the Display of Variables

You can restrict the display of variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window: You can display only the variables for dimensions that the software created. You can also display variables that are associated with elements in the current document or the active window You can also display a set of elements that you have selected in the document.
Creating Expressions
The system provides a set of standard mathematical functions. The functions can be typed in with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the function. The Function Wizard is convenient when you forget the proper syntax for a math function. You start the Function Wizard by clicking Fx in the Variable Table. The function is written in the Formula column of the selected row.
Examples
Suppose you draw a sheet metal bracket and you want to build a relationship between the bend radius and stock thickness. You can use a formula in the Variable Table to build and manage this relationship. The following example illustrates how the Variable Table would look if you built a relationship that changes the bend radius when the stock thickness changes. Type Variable Dimension Name Stock_thickness Bend_radius Value .25 .375 Formula
5 * s t o c k _ t h i c
Drawing Precisely: An Overview k n e s s Here are some more examples of how you might set up the Variable Table: Type Variable Name c Value 0 k g Variable Variable d e 10.0 rad 20 mm @c:\bearing.xls!sheet 1!R6C3 @c:\bearing.xls!sheet 1R!6C3 Formula
Argument Conventions
The following argument conventions are used in the Variable Table: In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional arguments are not. Argument names should follow the rules for Visual Basic. In the text where functions and arguments are defined, required and optional arguments are not bold. Use the format in the syntax line to determine whether an argument is required or optional.
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression

1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type for the variables value. The default type is Distance, which means that any expression created will be for a distance. For example, if you want to create a variable to control an angular dimension, you mustselect Angular. Tip To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list. In the Name column, click an empty cell. Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press Enter. 223. 224.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview 225. In the same row, in the Formula column, do one of the following: Type the value that you want for the variable. Type a simple expression for the variable. A simple expression consists of using basic mathematical operators to set up an equation using values and other variables. For example, if variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, you can type the following formulas when creating a new variable: Var1 * Var2 Var1 / 3.0 (Var2 + 5.0) * Var1 Var2 ^ 2
Tip
References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you create the variable Var1, you cannot reference it using var1. Click Enter to create the variable.
226.
Edit an Existing Variable

1. In the document, select the dimensions that you want to appear in the Variable Table. 2. Click Tools > Variables. 3. The Variable Table automatically displays the dimensions that are selected in the document. To see other dimensions and variables, click Filter on the Variable Table window. 4. On the Filter dialog box, set the following options to specify which variables or dimensions are displayed in the Variable Table. For example, to see all the dimensions and variables in the Variable Table, set the following options: Tip When you click OK, the settings are saved, so the next time you use Filter, the last settings are used. A convenient method of In the Type box, select Dimensions and User Variables. In the Named By box, select Both. In the Graphics In box, select File.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview limiting the number of variables and dimensions displayed is to name the ones you use frequently. Then, on the Filter dialog box, in the Named By box, click Users to display the named variables and dimensions. 227. Once a variable is displayed in the Variable Table, you can change any of its attributes, except its type and the unit type. On the Variable Table, in the Value column of a variable, enter a new value to change the variable. 228. In the Formula column, click the cell and use one of several methods to create a new formula. Notes To access Filters on the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable Table and right-click.
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine

1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type. This is the unit type for the variables value. The default type is Distance. Tip To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list. In the Name column, click an empty cell. Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press Enter. In the same row, in the Formula column, click a cell. Click Function Wizard. Click the function that you want in the Function Wizard dialog 229. 230. 231. 232. 233. box.
234. Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the available functions and appropriate input. For example, if the variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, some valid formulas using functions are as follows: Tip References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you create the variable Var1, you cannot reference SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 385 Sqr(Var1) * Sin(Var2) Sqr( Var1^2 + Var2^2 )
Drawing Precisely: An Overview it using var1. Notes You can write external functions and subroutines in BASIC and use them as variable formulas. You can write these functions in Visual Basic, or any text editor, and save them in a .BAS file. The Function Wizard steps you through the process of selecting the BASIC module, the specific function, and the necessary input and output. If you type a function and you cannot remember the argument list, press Ctrl + A after you have typed the equal sign, function name, and opening parenthesis. This activates the Function Wizard with the function already selected for you. You can also enter expressions with functions directly in the cell in the Formula column.
Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet

You can use Microsoft Excel to link a variable to a spreadsheet. Besides Excel, you can use other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects. Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in the design document. 1. In another application, such as Excel, open the document that contains the spreadsheet you want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional relationships. Tip You can edit this link with Links on the Edit menu. 235. Open the design document that you want to link to and, on the Tools menu, click Variables. Arrange the windows of the spreadsheet document and the Variable Table in the design document so that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents. 236. In the spreadsheet, select the cell that you want to link to. It can be a single cell or two adjacent cells, where the first cell contains the value and the second cell contains the units. A 1. B
3.75 in 237. Copy the selected cells. For example, if you are using Excel, click Copy on the Edit menu. 386 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview 238. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to link the spreadsheet to. 239. Tip To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable Table and right-click. Select Enter to accept the value you pasted. When you edit the value in the spreadsheet, the variable in the Variable Table updates as well. For example, when you link the dimensions in the design document to an Excel spreadsheet, you can change the dimensions of the design by editing the corresponding values in the Excel spreadsheet. The design document automatically updates. Notes You can edit the links with Edit Links on the shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
Edit a Formula Containing a Function

1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, click a cell that contains a formula that has a function. 3. Select a function that you want to replace. 4. Click Function Wizard. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the function you selected. 5. Type a new function to replace the existing function. 6. Click Next. 7. Click Finish to replace the function in the formula.
Insert a Function Into a Formula

1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, click the function cell in which you want to enter the formula. 3. Click Function Wizard. 4. Click the function category and the function name. 5. Click Next. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the arguments for the function. 6. Type the values for the arguments. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 387
Drawing Precisely: An Overview 7. Click Finish to enter the completed function into your formula. Notes You can enter values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the boxes on the Function Wizard dialog box. These entries must produce valid values for the argument. If an argument is required, the word "required" appears in the display area on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box.
Format a Column
1. Click Tools > Variables. 2. Drag the appropriate grid lines to adjust the column width.

Variables Command (Tools Menu)
Accesses the Variable Table, which operates much like a software spreadsheet. The Variable Table allows you to define and manipulate drawing variables and their values, as well as establish functional relationships between the design variables. For example, you can use the Variable Table to create expressions for dimensional values. Tip Variables is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Variable Table Dialog Box

Displays, defines, and manipulates design variables and functional relationships between the variables. This table operates much like a software spreadsheet. The design variables can be dimensions in the document or variables defined with the Variable Table. The table consists of the following columns: Type, Name, Value, Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.
Dialog Box Options

Unit Type - Specifies the unit of measure for the variable entered in the Variable Table. The box is located in the top left corner of the Variable Table. The default type is distance which means that any expression created will be a distance parameter. For example, if you want to create a variable to control an angular dimensions, you should change the unit type to angular. Then, the variable created will be an angular type, which can be used to control an angular dimensional relationship. Enter - Accepts the edits you have made in the cell. Cancel - Clears the contents of the cell and returns the cell to its previous value. Filter - Access the Filter dialog box so that you can restrict the display of SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 389
Drawing Precisely: An Overview variables in the Variable Table window. Function Wizard - Accesses the Function Wizard dialog box. Help - Activates online Help for the Variable Table dialog box.
The following items describe the columns in the Variable Table:

Type - Displays the variable type, generally the type of a dimension, such as DIM, VAR, SCALAR, and so forth. DIM refers to a dimensional relationship. VAR refers to a variable that you have created. This option is read-only. Name - Names the variable. By default, the software places the name of a dimension in this column. These names can be renamed to a more logical one, if you want. You must always name user-defined variables when you create them. A variable must be named if you want to refer to it in the Formula column of another row. You can change the name by editing the Name cell and then selecting Check at the top of the Variable Table. Variable names should meet the following requirements: They must begin with a letter. They must contain only letters, numbers, and the underscore character; you cannot use punctuation characters and spaces. They must be forty characters or less.
Value - Displays the current value of the variable. A variable always has a value. You cannot edit the value of a variable that has formula. You can edit driving dimensions with the Variable Table. Formula - Displays the function or relation that defines the value of the variable. You can enter a mathematical expression in a cell in this column to calculate the value for a corresponding dimension. If the Formula cell is empty, then the variable value is independent of other variables. When using variable names within a formula, the names are case sensitive. For example, the names var1 and Var1 reference two different variables. If a value is defined by a formula, the formula appears in the Formula cell. You can enter an algebraic expression in the formula cell to define the value of the variable. The single line expression must be in standard Visual Basic syntax. The formula can include any available function. The resulting value of the formula is shown in the Value column of the variable. The software provides a set of standard mathematical functions. You can also 390 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview select Visual Basic functions that you wrote and saved. The functions can be typed in with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the inputs to the function. If the function does not contain proper syntax, the software displays a message indicating that there is an error in the formula.
Alphabetical List of Functions

The following functions are available in the Variable Table. They are referred to as math and trig functions. ABS ATN COS EXP Returns the absolute value of a number Returns the arctangent of a number Returns the cosine of a number Returns e raised to the power of a given number FIX Returns the integer portion of a number. INT Rounds a number down to the nearest integer LOG Returns the natural algorithm of a number RND Rounds a number to a specified number of digits SGN Returns an integer indicating the sign of a number SIN Returns the sine of the given angle SQR Returns the square root of number. TAN Returns the tangent of an angle The following functions are also available in the Variable Table. User, Visual Basic Relates variables through a user function, usually defined with Visual Basic.
Filter Command (Shortcut Menu)

Restricts the display in the Variable Table to variables that you select on the Filter dialog box. Tip To select this command from the shortcut menu, you must first select Variables on the Tools menu and then pause the mouse pointer in the Variable Table window.
Filter Dialog Box

Controls which variables appear in the Variable Table.
Dialog Box Options

Type - Specifies the type of variables that are displayed in the Variable Table. If you click Dimension, then only dimension variables are displayed in the Variable Table; these variables directly control elements of a design. If you click User Variables, then only logical variables that you created are displayed. This variable type cannot directly control a design. A user variable must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159. Variables can control dimensional relationships by setting the dimensional relationship equal to the variable. Named By - Controls the view in the Variable Table so that only named variables are displayed. User - Displays only variables that you have named. System - Displays only variables, usually the dimensions, that the software has created. Both - Displays all variables that are named. Graphics In - Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document, active window, or group of elements that you have selected. Last Selected Window - Displays variables that are associated with elements in the active window. Select Set - Displays variables that are associated with elements in a group that you have selected in the document. File - Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document.
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box

Selects the function you want to enter.
Dialog Box Options

Function Category - Selects subsets of all available functions. If you click the All in the Function Category box, all the available functions appear. If you select any other category, only those functions that belong to that category 392 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview appear. Custom functions that you define are included under their assigned categories, or in the user-defined category if no other categories are assigned. See the alphabetical list of functions. Function Name - Lists all built-in and custom functions that are available in the selected category. Also lists built-in and custom macro functions if a macro sheet is active. The display area describes the selected function. Next - Moves to the next dialog box of the Function Wizard. You should click Next after you have selected the function you want to insert into the Formula Bar or the selected cell. After you finish typing values into the appropriate fields, the Function Wizard Step 2 Of 2 dialog box is displayed. This dialog box appears first if you are entering a math and trig function. Tip If you select a function that you defined using Visual Basic, a dialog box appears first that allows you to open the document that contains the function. After you open the document, the Function Wizard Step 2 Of 2 dialog box is displayed.
Finish - Inserts the function into the Formula Bar. If you do not enter an argument, the software inserts the argument names as placeholders in the formula. Cancel - Closes the Function Wizard dialog box without entering anything into the Formula Bar or into the selected cell.
Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box

Enters values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the fields. The dialog box changes according to the function you select in the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box. Your entries must produce valid values for the arguments. If an argument is required for the function to be entered successfully, the word "required" appears in brackets in the display area.
Dialog Box Options

FuncName - Displays the name of the function. FnSummary - Displays a summary of the function. Number - Displays the number of the function. First Arg - Displays the argument of the variable. In the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box, if the selected variable is a subroutine that you defined, SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 393
Drawing Precisely: An Overview more than one box appears on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box. The checkbox to the right of the field indicates whether the variable is an input or output argument. Back - Moves from the current Function Wizard dialog box to the preceding one. Finish - Enters the completed function in the Variable Table.
Open Source Command

Opens a spreadsheet in the Variable Table that has been linked to it with Paste Link. Tips Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select Variables on the Tools menu. To access the Open Source command, right-click the Formula box in the Variable Table. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Links. Select a link, and then click Open Source.
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Links data in a document to a cell in the Variable Table. Tip Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select Variables on the Tools menu.
Sample Workflows
Example: Draw a Line with PinPoint
You can use PinPoint to draw a line starting at a specific x and y distance from a known position in your drawing. 1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint .
2. Click where you want the target point to be. 3. Change the step value in the PinPoint Ribbon if it is not already set to a value that is appropriate for the operation. 4. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous . 5. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. PinPoint displays at the pointer its current x and y positions in relation to the target point. 6. Click when the pointer is positioned where you want the line to begin. 7. Click where you want the second point of the line to be, or type the length and/or angle on the Line/Arc Continuous ribbon and then click to draw the line. 8. If you are finished with the PinPoint command, click PinPoint on the Main toolbar to dismiss the command.
Place a Doubleline Precisely

1. On the Tools menu, set the PinPoint option On. Tip You can click Reposition Target on the PinPoint toolbar or press F12 to change the location of the target point to the current position.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline. 2. Click a point to start the doubleline. 3. Click a point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the doubleline. 4. To end the doubleline, right-click. 5. Pause over the doubleline, and press F12 to reposition the target point and to precisely determine the starting point of the next doubleline. 6. Place the second doubleline relative to a known point on the first one. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 395
Notes You can also press F9 to set PinPoint on or off. Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input. You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints of the lines. You can use the software to create an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another element. You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a doubleline.
Measure the Length of a Line

Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance. For example, consider the following workflow. 1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.
240. On the Tools menu, click Measure Distance and measure a distance. Tip You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a distance.
241. Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is still activeyou can pick up where you left off and continue using Line/Arc Continuous.
Dimension the Length of a Line

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension . 2. Click a line. SmartDimension dynamically displays a linear dimension.
242.
Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension . 2. Click a circle. SmartDimension dynamically displays a diameter dimension.
243.
Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values

You can use the Variable Table to create expressions that change dimensions in the drawing when you change the expressions. 1. Open a drawing document. 2. On the Tools menu, click Variables. The Variable Table appears in a window. 3. On the Variable Table window, click Filter and define which variables you want to display in the Variable Table. For example, on the Filter dialog box, if you select Dimensions in Type and then select Window, this displays all the dimensions that appear in the active window. 4. In the Variable Table, click the Formula cell that displays the dimension that you want to edit and type an arithmetic expression to calculate the value of the dimension: V681/2. When you type an entry in the cell, the entry also appears in the Formula Bar. Type Name Value Formula Dimension V680 4.25 mm V681/2 Dimension V681 3.00 mm 244. On the Formula Bar, click Enter or press Enter to calculate the result of the expression. In this example, when V681 is modified, V680 is automatically updated to reflect the relationship. Type Dimension Dimension Name V680 V681 Value 50 mm 3.00 mm Formula V681/2
Creating a Variable with an External Function or Subroutine

The following example uses a following function and subroutine written in BASIC. They are stored in a document called FUNCTIONS.BAS. To see the syntax of the function and subroutine, click Function.
In FUNCTIONS.BAS, the function AddTwo takes two numbers as input, adds them, and outputs a single value. A function can take any number of arguments as input, but can only output a single value. When using a function as the formula of a variable, the result of the function is the value of the variable. The input to the function can be specific value or other variables. The subroutine Normalize takes three values as input and outputs three 398 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Drawing Precisely: An Overview values. Output variables need to be specified by using the ByRef keyword. Using ByRef specifies that the variable is being passed in as reference and can be modified by the subroutine. Since a subroutine can have multiple output values, it can be used as the formula for several variables. To use the document FUNCTIONS.BAS in a Variable Table, you can take the following steps: 1. On the Tools menu, click Variables. 2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select Distance. 3. In appropriate cells, type the following entries to create three input variables. Type Name Value Formula Var Var1 5.50 in Var Var2 3.25 in Var Var3 7.80 in 245. In appropriate cells, type three more entries to create three output variables with any value: X, Y, and Z.
Type Name Value Formula
Var
Var1
5 0 i n
Var Var Var Var Var
Var2 Var3 X Y Z
3.25 in 7.80 in 0.00 in 0.00 in 0.00 in
246. Select any of the output variables (X, Y, or Z) and click Fx to start the Function Wizard. 247. On the Function Wizard - Step 1 of 2 dialog box, in the Function Category list, select User Defined. 248. it. On the Open dialog box, select the functions.bas document to open
249. On the Function Wizard - Step 1 of 2 dialog box, in the Function Category box, click Visual Basic. In the Function Name box, click Functions.Normalize to select the function that you want to use from the functions.bas document.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview 250. Click Next.
251. On the Function Wizard - Step 2 of 2 dialog box, type the entries shown to specify the value or variable that is to be used as input for each input argument and the variable to be used for each output argument. In this box InX As Double InY As Double InZ As Double ByRef OutX As Double ByRef OutY As Double ByRef OutZ As Double 252. Click Finish. Type this Var1 Var2 Var3 X Y Z
The result within the Variable Table is shown below. The function is assigned as the formula to all of the variable that were specified to be output of the function. If any of the input values, (Var1, Var2, or Var3), change, the function is automatically run and the output variables are updated. Type Var Var Var Var Var Var Name Var1 Var2 Var3 X Y Z Value 5.50 in 3.25 7.80 0.55 0.32 0.77 Formula
Functions.Normalize( Var1,Var2,Var3,X,Y, Z) Functions.Normalize( Var1,Var2,Var3,X,Y, Z) Functions.Normalize( Var1,Var2,Var3,X,Y, Z)
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet

Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in the design document. You can link to a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects. 1. In the current document, create a rectangle and dimensions as shown.
253. On the Tools menu, click Variables to display the dimensions you defined. Type Dim Dim Tip Although the values that appear in the Name column are automatically generated by the software, you can edit the names. Name _V112 _V114 Value 30.00 mm 60.00 mm Formula
254. In Excel, create and save a document that contains the spreadsheet you want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional relationships as follows: A B 1. height 35 2. width 65 255. Arrange the windows of the Excel document and the SmartSketch document so that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents. 256. 257. In the Excel document, select the cell that you want to link to. On the Edit menu, click Copy to copy the selected cells.
258. Click on the SmartSketch document so that it becomes the active document. 259. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to link the spreadsheet to. 260. Tip To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable Table and right-click. Click Enter to accept the value you pasted. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
261.
262. Repeat the previous steps as needed for the other values. The resulting Variable Table should update as follows: Type Dim Name _V112 Value 35.00 mm Formula @C:\variable\part1.xl
Drawing Precisely: An Overview s!Sheet!R1C2 Dim _V114 65.00 mm @C:\variable\part1.xl s!SheetR2C2 When you edit the value in the Excel document, the variable in the Variable Table updates as well. When you link the dimensions in the SmartSketch document to the Excel document, you can change the dimensions of the SmartSketch document by editing the corresponding values in the Excel document. The SmartSketch document automatically updates.
Transforming Elements: An Overview

Using the software tools, you can easily change the shape, size, angle, or relationship of an existing element. The Draw, Change, and Relationship toolbars contain most of the buttons that you can use to transform an element.
The Draw Toolbar

Element handles can be used to quickly transform elements. For example, you can change an arc by clicking the element with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and dragging the element's handles. The selected arc is transformed to a straight line by dragging the mid point handle. The selected arc is transformed to a circle by dragging an end point handle. The Draw toolbar also provides options for extending or trimming elements. You can click Extend to Next to extend an element, or you can click Trimor Trim Corner to trim an element. You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.
The Change Toolbar

Elements can be mirrored by clicking Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can also mirror and copy elements. You can rotate an element a precise angle about a specified point by using Rotate on the Change toolbar. You can use the Rotate Ribbon to change Step Angle, Rotation Angle, and Position Angle values. You can also use the Change toolbar to scale elements. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. After clicking Scale on the Change toolbar, you can use the Scale Ribbon to increase the Scale Factor. Important You cannot use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.
The Relationship Toolbar

You can also use the Relationship toolbar to transform elements. For example, selecting Equal and clicking two elements will make the elements equal in size.
Transforming Elements: An Overview The software will only allow you to select elements that are valid input for a specific command. For example, if you use the Concentric button, only circles, arcs, or ellipses can be selected. Note When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained.
Changing the Shape of an Element: An Overview

You can change the size, position, or orientation of an element with your pointer. When you select an element with the Select Tool, its handles are displayed at key positions.
You can change the shape of a selected element by dragging one of its handles. The first figure shows the effect of dragging an end point handle. The second figure shows the effect of dragging the mid point handle.
Modify an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool. 2. Select an element. 3. Position the pointer over one of the element's handles. The pointer changes to show that the element can now be modified. 4. Drag the element handle to reposition it. You can use relationships to position the handle precisely.
Transforming Elements: An Overview Notes To retain the angle or aspect ratio of the element you are modifying, hold the Shift key while you drag the element's handle. To suspend the effect of relationship handles so that you can modify the element more freely, hold the Alt key while you drag the handle. The software maintains relationships as appropriate for the modified element.
Rotating Elements: An Overview

Using Rotate on the Change toolbar, you can rotate one or more elements a precise angle about a specified point. You can first select the element and then click Rotate, or you can click the button and then the element. As you click to define the reference points for the rotation, the software dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation, you can enter values in the ribbon. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new positions with a positive value. The Position Angle box displays an absolute angle of the new position of the rotation. You can type values in both of these boxes and preview the results. You then click to complete the rotation of the element. By default, a copy is made of the element when you rotate it. If you do not want a copy, you should clear Copy on the ribbon.
Rotate an Element
1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate .
3. If you want to copy the rotated elements, click Copy on the ribbon. 4. Click where you want the center of rotation to be. The software dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. 5. Click to define the other end of the reference axis. The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and elements being rotated. The location and position of the reference axis defines the rotation from point. 6. Position the elements where you want them and then click to define the rotation to point. Notes To rotate by increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the ribbon.
Transforming Elements: An Overview You can click Rotate before you select elements to rotate. You can use relationship indicators to define the rotation from and to points. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy the rotated elements, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point. Relationships between elements within the selection set are maintained if the relationships still apply after the elements have been rotated. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using Rotate.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Rotate at the point where you left off.

Rotate Command (Change Toolbar)
Rotates one or more elements a precise distance or angle about a specified point.
Rotate Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Copy - Creates a copy of the element that you are rotating. If you do not want a copy of the rotated element, then clear this option. Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an element rotates from a temporary axis. The temporary axis is the line between the element's center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate the element from (B).
You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic.
Transforming Elements: An Overview Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point that you rotate from and the point that you rotate to. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) is shown with the point that you rotate the element from (B).
The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated element. The value is always positive.
Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the element, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point that you rotate to. The position angle is always a positive value that is measured counter-clockwise from the axis.
Mirroring Elements: An Overview

To mirror an element, you can click Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror with or without making a copy.
Mirror an Element
You can mirror elements by defining a mirror axis or by using a linear element as a mirror axis. You can also mirror and copy elements.
To mirror about an existing mirror axis or linear element

1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror .
3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon. 4. Locate a mirror axis. The mirrored elements are displayed dynamically on the other side of the Tip If you locate a linear element, the element can be part of the selection set. Position the pointer so that the mirrored elements are where you
263.
Transforming Elements: An Overview want them, then click.
To mirror about a mirror axis that you define

1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror. 3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon. 4. Define one end of the mirror axis by click in free space or by clicking a key point. The software displays the mirror axis and mirrored elements dynamically. 5. Move the pointer until the mirror axis and the mirrored elements where you want them to be, then click. Notes If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a symmetric relationship when you mirror and copy elements. The mirror axis is used as the symmetry axis. Relationships within the selection set are copied to the mirrored elements if they are still applicable. You can click Mirror before you select elements to mirror. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to mirror and copy, you can hold Ctrl while you click to position the elements. Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the Position Angle box on the ribbon. You can use relationship indicators to define a mirror axis. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using Mirror.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Mirror at the point where you left off.

Mirror Command (Change Toolbar)
Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror without copying, or mirror and copy.
Mirror Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Copy - Mirrors and copies the elements in the selection set. Position Angle - Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle measurement is the point you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. Setting the position angle to 0 extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen, 90 extends the axis vertically to the top, 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left, and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.
Scaling Elements: An Overview

Scale on the Change toolbar reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The scale factor is the same along the x and y axes. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. You cannot use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view. Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after the elements have been scaled. If not, the relationships are deleted. To define the new scale, you can click points on the drawing sheet or you can type a value in the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. You can also use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse.
Scale an Element
1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Scale .
3. If you want to copy the scaled elements, click Copy on the ribbon. 4. Click where you want the scale origin to be. The software displays a crosshair at the scale origin, and dynamically displays a line between the scale origin and the pointer.
264. Move the pointer until the elements are the size you want and then click.
Notes Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after the elements have been scaled. You can click Scale before you select elements to scale. Instead of clicking to define the new scale, you can use the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to scale and copy, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the new scale. You can use relationship indicators with this command. You can use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse. You can use the Reference box on the ribbon to change how the command dynamics correspond to the Scale Factor. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Scale an Element with Its Handles

You can use handles to scale framed elements such as text boxes, symbols, and linked or embedded objects. 1. Select an element. 2. Position the pointer over one of its handles. 3. Drag the handle to scale the element or object. Notes You can also click Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the
Transforming Elements: An Overview drawing; the dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu. Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after the elements have been scaled.
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size

When you insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation document into a drawing sheet using Object on the Insert menu, the object is automatically scaled to fit the print area of the drawing sheet. The print area size changes depending on the selected working sheet. In some cases, you might want to work in model space and not paper space. 1. Click Insert > Object to insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation object. 2. Highlight the inserted object with the Select tool. 3. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. 4. On the Info tab of the Properties dialog box, click Scale (1:1). After you close the dialog box, the inserted object changes back to the original model size. Notes If an inserted object was scaled before bringing it into the drawing sheet, you might need to adjust the scale on the Properties dialog box to get the results you want. After inserting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document, if you have not performed any other actions, you can click Undo on the Edit menu to change the object back to the original model size.

Scale Command (Change Toolbar)
Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The scale factor is the same along the X and Y axis. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. You can use Scale to scale, or to simultaneously scale and copy.
Scale Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Copy - Scales and copies the elements in the selection set. Step - Specifies the step value for the Scale Factor. The step value causes the Scale Factor to be decreased or increased in increments as you move the pointer toward or away from the scale origin. For example, if you set the step value to 0.25, the scale increases in increments of 0.25 as you move the pointer away from the scale origin. Scale Factor - Specifies how much the software reduces or enlarges the element. A scale factor between zero and one reduces; a scale factor greater than one enlarges. Reference - Specifies how long the dynamic line from the scale origin to the pointer has to be in order to achieve a Scale Factor of 1. For example, if you set Reference to 1, for every inch you move the pointer away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one. If you set Reference to 2, for every two inches you move the pointer away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one.
Extending or Trimming Elements: An Overview

You can trim or extend elements with buttons on the Draw toolbar. You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.
Relationships are added or removed as necessary when you trim or extend an element. For example, if you trim part of a circle and more than one arc remains, concentric and equal relationships are applied between the remaining arcs.
You can also draw a chamfer on two different elements with Chamfer on the Draw toolbar. The elements must be linear, but do not have to intersect. The elements cannot be parallel to each other.
When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer (B).
To place a fillet, you can click Fillet on the Draw toolbar and then select the elements you want to modify. As with any command, you can use a combination of clicks and ribbon input.
Extend an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Next 2. Do one of the following: To extend one element at a time, click each element near the end you want to extend. To extend more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements near the end you want to extend. When you release the mouse button, all the elements are extended. .
Notes Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible results. When you move the pointer over elements, SmartSketch displays the extension that will be drawn if you click.
If an element does not extend in the direction you want it to, move your pointer closer to the end of the element you want to extend.
Trim an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim 2. Do one of the following: To trim one element at a time, click each element you want to trim. To trim more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements. When you release the mouse button, all the elements are trimmed. .
Notes Before you click an element to trim, you can use PickQuick to see which portion of the element will be trimmed. When you move the pointer over the elements, PickQuick highlights the portion of the element that will be trimmed if you click. If you trim an element that does not intersect any other elements, the command trims the entire element, effectively deleting the element.
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Corner 2. Do one of the following: Click each element you want to trim or extend. .
Drag the pointer over one or more elements, then release the mouse button. The parts of the element over which you dragged the mouse remainother parts are trimmed or extended as necessary.
Tip You can draw only one corner at a time by dragging the pointer.
Draw a Chamfer
Tip You can draw a chamfer only between linear elements. .
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Chamfer
2. On the ribbon, type a distance value in the Setback A box. The first linear element will be set back this distance from the corner. 3. Do one of the following: To define the setback distance for the second linear element, type a value in the Setback B box on the ribbon. To define the chamfer angle, type a value in the Angle box on the ribbon.
265. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback A value. 266. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback B value or the chamfer angle value. 422 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Transforming Elements: An Overview Tip The lines that you select do not need to intersect, but they cannot be parallel. 3. Click to draw the chamfer. Notes When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer.
You can draw a chamfer with equal chamfer angles. Click the two linear elements you want to use. When the chamfer is displayed dynamically, move the pointer until the setback distance you want to use is displayed, then click.
You can switch the setback values for the linear elements. After you click the linear elements you want to use, move the mouse pointer to one side or the other of the temporary line display, then click.
When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw the chamfer in any of the quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the chamfer.
You can easily draw more than one 45 degree chamfer with the same setback distance. On the ribbon, type a value in the Setback A or Setback B box. The value in the setback box is active until you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw equivalent chamfers.
You can draw a chamfer by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to draw the chamfer between. When you use this method, the setback distance and angle boxes on the ribbon are not active.
Draw a Fillet
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet. 2. On the ribbon, type a radius in the Radius box. 3. Click one of the elements that you want to draw the fillet between. You can draw a fillet between arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, and curves. 4. Click the other element. 5. Click to draw the fillet. Notes You can draw a fillet without typing a radius. Click the two elements you want to use. Then move the pointer to a position that defines the radius, and click.
When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw a fillet at any of the quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the fillet.
You can draw a fillet at a corner with one click. On the ribbon, type a value in the Radius box. Position the pointer over a corner, then click.
The value in the Radius box is active until you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw fillets with the same radius.
You can draw a fillet by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to draw the fillet between. When you use this method, the Radius box on the ribbon is not active.

Extend to Next Command (Draw Toolbar)
Extends one or more open elements until they intersect with the nearest element in the active window. The extension direction is determined by the position where you select the element to extend. For example, if you select a horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line extends to the right. If there is no possible intersection between the element you want to extend and any other element in the view, the command does not extend the element.
Trim Command (Draw Toolbar)

Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions.
Trim Corner Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a corner by extending and/or trimming two selected open elements.
Chamfer Command (Draw Toolbar)
Transforming Elements: An Overview Draws a chamfer, or bevel, between two linear elements. You can control the chamfer angle and the setback distances for both elements.
Chamfer Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Angle - Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first linear element you select. Setback B - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the second linear element you select.
Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a fillet between two elements. The elements can be arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, or curves.
Fillet Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style. Line Width - Sets the line width. Radius - Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements: An Overview

You can apply relationships as you draw and place elements by using the relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. You can also apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet.
Applying Relationships to Existing Elements

To apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet, click a button on the Relationship toolbar and then select the elements you want to relate. When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained. For example, selecting Equal and clicking two circles makes the two circles equal in size.
If a line and arc are not tangent, applying a tangent relationship modifies one or both elements to make them tangent.
When you use commands on the Relationship toolbar, the software allows you to select only elements that are valid input for that command. For example, when you use Concentric, the command allows you to select only circles, arcs, and ellipses. Perhaps you begin designing with a few key design parameters. You would usually draw known elements in relation to one another and then draw additional elements to fill in the blanks.
As you draw and add elements to the drawing, the relationships are maintained and additional relationships are applied.
Modifying Elements That Share Relationships

If two elements share a relationship, the relationship is maintained when you modify either one of the elements. For example, if you move a circle that has a tangent relationship with a line, the line also moves. The elements remain tangent. If you move a circle that does not have a tangent relationship with a line, the line does not move.
Other elements that share relationships maintain them in the following ways: If a line and an arc share a tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.
If a line and arc share a connect relationship, they remain connected when either is modified.
If two lines are horizontal, they remain horizontal even if you change the position and length of one of the lines.
Deleting Relationships
You can delete a relationship as you would delete any other element. You select a relationship handle, and then click Delete. Relationships are automatically deleted when their deletion is necessary to allow a modification to occur. For example, if you rotate an element that has a horizontal relationship applied to it, the relationship is automatically deleted. If you want to change an element by adding or removing a relationship, and the element does not change the way you expect, it may be controlled by a driving dimension. You can toggle the dimension from driving to driven, and 432 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Transforming Elements: An Overview then make the change.
Make Elements Concentric

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric 2. Click an arc or circle. .
267. Click another arc or circle. One element moves to make the two elements concentric.
Notes The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.
Make Elements Parallel

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Parallel 2. Click a line. 3. Click another line. One line moves to make the two lines parallel. Notes The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location. .
Make Elements Perpendicular

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Perpendicular 2. Click a line. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 433 .
Transforming Elements: An Overview 3. Click a line, arc, or circle. One line moves to make the two elements perpendicular. Notes The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.
Connect Elements
1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect 2. Click an element at a key point. .
268. Click another element or key point. One element moves to connect the elements.
Notes The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.
Make Elements Tangent

You can make two elements tangent.
To make elements tangent where their end points meet

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent . 2. Click at a point where two end points meet. The elements are adjusted to make the two elements tangent.
To make elements tangent that are not connected at an end point

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent. 2. Click an element. 3. Click another element. One element moves to make the two elements tangent. Notes The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location.
Make Elements Equal

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Equal 2. Click an element. 3. Click another element. The elements become equal. Notes You can make the following elements equal: two lines, two arcs, two circles, and an arc and a circle. You cannot make a line equal to an arc or circle. .
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Horizontal/Vertical 2. Do one of the following: Notes The current orientation of the line determines how it is positioned SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 435 To make a line horizontal or vertical, click the line. To make two key points horizontal or vertical, click a key point, and then click another key point. .
Transforming Elements: An Overview after you select it. For example, if a line is closer to a horizontal orientation than a vertical orientation, the line becomes horizontal.
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Symmetric 3. Click an element. 4. Click another element. The two elements become symmetrical about the axis. Notes The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a new location. . 2. Click a line that you want to use as a symmetry axis.

Change Command (Main Toolbar)
Displays the Change toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to manipulate elements.
Colinear Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two lines colinear.
Concentric Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or circle.
Connect Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Connects two elements or key points at one point. This command also connects a key point on an element to a position that you select on another element.
Equal Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes elements or dimension values equal. You can make the length of lines, the radius of arcs and circles, and the values of dimensions equal.
Horizontal/Vertical Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes a line horizontal or vertical, or horizontally or vertically aligns two key points.
Parallel Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two lines parallel.
Perpendicular Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two elements perpendicular. You can make two lines, a line and an arc, or a line and a circle perpendicular.
Tangent Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two elements tangent. You can make two circles or arcs tangent. You can also make a circle, or an arc, and a line tangent.
Arranging Elements: An Overview

You can arrange elements so that they can be more easily manipulated on a drawing sheet. Several features for arranging elements are provided in the SmartSketch software. The Group command on the Change toolbar allows you to group elements that reside in the same document and drawing sheet together. The elements can then be modified as a unit. You can ungroup elements by clicking Ungroup on the Change toolbar. You can also use Layers on the Main toolbar to arrange elements. Each time you draw an element it is assigned to the active layer. You can use Layers to see which layer is active or to change the active layer. The Display Manager on the Tools menu allows you to control the way elements appear on sheets or layers by changing settings such as, line type or color. Elements that overlap are displayed in the order they are drawn. A newly created element is placed in front of all other elements because it has the highest display priority. An element's display priority can easily be changed. You can pull an element up one position, push it down one position, send it to the back, or bring it to the front by selecting the appropriate command on the Change toolbar.
Grouping Elements: An Overview

A group is a set of elements that you have selected. The set behaves like any other select set. Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. For example, you could place the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern into a group. This would allow you to move, copy, or delete the entire pattern at once, as if it were a single element. The following list describes some of the properties of groups: An element can be a member of only one group. Grouped elements must reside in the same document and be on the same drawing sheet. Any locatable element can be grouped. Any combination of elements, such as lines, text, circles, and so forth, can be grouped.
You can use Group to nest two or more entire groups within a larger group, or you can nest individual elements and groups within a larger group. Once elements are grouped, you can use Ungroup to ungroup all of the elements at the same time. You can also use Ungroup and PickQuick to remove one or more elements from a group.
Selecting Groups and Members of Groups

The options on the Select Tool ribbon allow you to select an entire group or individual members of a group. If you set the bottom-up option, you can select individual members. If you select the top down option, you can select all the members. You can also use PickQuick to select one or more group members or an entire group.
Performing Tasks on Groups

Once you select a group, you can use a command or ribbon option on all of its members. For example, when you move, copy, or delete a group, all of its members are moved, copied, or deleted. You can move or apply relationships to a member of a group and the changes do not affect the position of the other members of the group. When you copy an entire group, all of its members are copied, including nested groups. The software creates a new group that contains all of the 440 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Arranging Elements: An Overview members of the original group. When you copy one member of a group, only that member is copied. If you use PickQuick to select a member of a group, you can perform tasks on the member individually, without affecting other members.
Group or Ungroup Elements

Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. The elements must reside in the same document and drawing sheet.
To group elements
1. Select two or more elements. Tip You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group. On the Change toolbar, click Group .
269.
To ungroup elements
1. Select a group. 270. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup .
To remove one element from a group

1. Use PickQuick to select the element you want to remove from the group. 271. Notes You can nest groups by selecting two or more groups. You can then ungroup the entire group or any of its members. You can select a group and other elements and use Group to group them. You can perform tasks on all members of a group by selecting the group and then selecting the command or ribbon option you want to use. You can use PickQuick to select and edit one or more members of a group. You can use the bottom-up selection method instead of PickQuick, to select individual group members. Set Bottom Up on the Select tool ribbon. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 441 On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup .
Arranging Elements: An Overview You can use the Properties dialog box to find out if an element is part of a group. Select the element and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties.

Group Command (Change Toolbar)
Binds elements so you can locate, select, and manipulate them as a unit. Grouped elements are usually related, such as the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern. When you select a group, the Group ribbon is displayed so you can edit the entire group or any of its members.
Group Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the style for all of the elements in a group. Color - Sets the color for all of the elements in a group. Line Type - Sets the line types and styles for all of the elements in a group. Width - Sets the line width for all of the elements in a group. Name - Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when you create it. Properties - Accesses the Properties dialog box for the group.
Group Properties Dialog Box

Displays the properties of the selected group.
Info Tab
Tab Options
Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You can't edit any of these. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet the element is on. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Name - Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when you create it. Number Of Items - Displays the number of elements in the group. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group. Is Nested Within Another Group - Shows whether the group is nested within another group. This label updates automatically when you nest a group using Group, or ungroup a group using Ungroup. Contains Nested Groups - Displays whether or not the selected group contains nested groups. Closed - The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves; whether the end points of these elements are connected; and whether the members of the group form a closed region. This box updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group. End-Point Connected - The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves, and whether the end points of these elements are connected. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
UnGroup Command (Change Toolbar)

Removes elements from groups that were defined using Group. You can 444 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Arranging Elements: An Overview remove individual elements from a group.
Element Display Priority: An Overview

When 2-D elements overlap, their display priority determines which is in front. The first element you draw is displayed behind all other elementsit has the lowest display priority. A newly created element is displayed in front of all other elementsit has the highest display priority. For example, if you draw a circle, then an ellipse, and then a rectangle, the circle is displayed in back. The ellipse is displayed between the circle and the rectangle, and the rectangle is displayed in front.
Changing the Element Display Priority

You can change an element's display priority by pulling it up one position, pushing it down one position, sending it to the back, or bringing it to the front. One click on the striped box changes the display priority.
You can change the display priority of a group the same way. The display priority of elements within the group does not change.
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order

1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Bring To Front Notes When you select a single element, the element moves to the front of the display. When you bring more than one element or an element group to the .
Arranging Elements: An Overview front of the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.
Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order

1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Send To Back Notes When you select a single element, the element moves to the back of the display. When you send more than one element or an element group to the back of the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group. .
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order

1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Pull Up Notes When you pull more than one element or an element group up one position in the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group. .
Push an Element Down in the Display Order

1. Select one or more elements. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Push Down Notes When you push more than one element or an element group down one position in the display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group. .

Bring to Front Command (Change Toolbar)
Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the front of the display order.
Send To Back Command (Change Toolbar)

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the back of the display order.
Pull Up Command (Change Toolbar)

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups up one position in the display order. If more than one element overlaps the selected elements, the selected elements do not move all the way to the front. To quickly move elements to the front, click Bring To Front.
Push Down Command (Change Toolbar)

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups down one position in the display order. If the selected elements overlap more than one other element, the selected elements do not move all the way to the back. To quickly move elements to the back, click Send To Back.
Using Layers to Arrange Elements: An Overview

Layers and display settings can help you group elements so that you can manipulate them more easily on a drawing sheet. Layers and display settings also make it easier to keep track of different types of elements. Each drawing sheet in a document can contain several layers. When you draw an element, it is assigned to the active layer. To see which layer is active, or to change the active layer, you can use Layers on the Main toolbar.
Controlling the Display of Elements and Objects

After assigning an element or object to a layer, you can set display criteria to control the way items appear in a window by using Display Manager on the Tools menu. With this command, you can set display criteria for any sheet and its associated layers in the current document. The display settings can include the color or line type and line width of elements or objects. Tip If two windows are open for the same document, the display settings that you select with the Display Manager dialog box affect every window view of the drawing sheet.
Displaying Layers
To view elements on specific layers, you can turn on one or more layers by selecting Layers. When you turn layers off, you cannot see the elements assigned to the layers on the drawing sheet. For example, you can assign lines to one layer and closed elements to another layer. Then, if you turn off the layer for closed elements and turn on the layer for lines, you see only lines on the drawing sheet.
You can still see relationships between elements that are assigned to different layers on a drawing sheet. For example, suppose a line and a circle are tangent and they are assigned to different layers. If the line's layer is displayed and the circle's layer is hidden, you can still see the tangent relationship handle on the line. If the line's layer is hidden as well, the tangent relationship handle is hidden. With Display Manager on the Tools menu, you can control the way elements appear on sheets or layers by changing settings, such as the line type or color. You can also create custom colors for the display.
Layers and Layer Groups

While layers provide a way to control the display of elements on a drawing sheet, layer groups give you another way to control the display of elements on drawing sheets. You can use Layer Groups on the Tools menu to define layer groups.
Creating New Layers

You can create new layers using Layer Groups, or by typing a new layer name on the ribbon. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
Assigning Elements to Layers

Although you can assign an element to only one layer, you can change the layer to which an element is assigned. You can find out which layer an element is assigned to by selecting it and using Properties on the Edit menu.
Control the Display of Elements in a Window

1. Click Tools > Display Manager. 2. On the Sheets tab, set the options you want to use for displaying elements in a window. The color, line type, and width settings are applied to all the 450 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Arranging Elements: An Overview elements on the sheet. Tip To set the display for a specific layer on a sheet, select the sheet on the Sheets tab. The layers that are in that sheet are displayed on the Layers tab. You can specify display settings for each layer in a sheet by clicking the Layers tab and setting the options you want. Notes If you want to quickly display or hide layers for the current drawing sheet, you can click Layers on the Tools menu. Then, on the Layers ribbon, you can click Layer Status to display or hide layers.
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers

When you use Display Manager to control the way elements or objects appear in window, you can create custom colors for the display of sheets or layers. 1. Click Tools > Display Manager. 2. On the Display Manager dialog box, click the row of the layer or sheet you want to change the color of. 3. Click the cell in the Color column. 4. At the bottom of the palette, click More. 5. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to create a new color. 6. Click Add to Custom Colors. 7. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you created. This name appears on the palette that you access when you click a cell in the Color column.
Create a Layer
1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers . 2. On the Layers ribbon, type the name of the new layer in the Layer box and press Enter. Notes You can also create a layer using Layer Groups on the Tools SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 451
Arranging Elements: An Overview menu. On the Groups dialog box, you type the name of a new layer in the Layers box and press Enter. The name of the new layer is displayed at the bottom of the Layers table. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet. You can create as many layers on a drawing sheet as you need.
Display or Hide Layers

1. On the Main toolbar, click the Layers icon or select Tools > Layers 2. On the Layers ribbon, click the Layer Status icon. The Layer Display dialog box displays all layers available for the current drawing sheet. The layers that appear in gray text are hidden or turned off. The layer that appears in red text is the active layer. 3. Click a layer name to display or hide the layer on the drawing sheet. 4. Click Apply. Notes If you want to display or hide layers for drawing sheets other than the current sheet, you can use Display Manager on the Tools menu. On the Display Manager dialog box, Sheets tab, click the sheet you want. Then, on the Layers tab, in the Layers column, click the layers you want to display or hide. These settings override the settings on the Layer Display dialog box. .
Change the Layer of an Element

An element can be assigned to only one layer. 1. Select the elements whose layer you want to change. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
3. On the Layers ribbon, click Change Layer. 4. On the Change Layer dialog box, in the Change All To list, click the layer to change the elements to. Notes You can also change the layer of an element by selecting the element and clicking Properties on the Edit menu.
Change the Active Layer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers . 2. On the Layers ribbon, type or select the name of another layer in the Layer box. Notes If you type the name of a layer that does not exist, a new layer is created.
Create a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Groups dialog box, in the Groups box, type the name of the new group and press Enter. 3. In the Layers table, in the Grouped column, click each box to include the layers in the group. Notes In the Grouped column, if the check box beside the layer name already has a check mark, the layer is a member of the current layer group. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
Modify Layers in a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, select the group you want to change by clicking the button on the left side of the row. In the Layers table, if the check box by the layer name is set, the layer is in the layer group. 3. In the Layers table, set or clear the check box of each layer to add or remove it from the layer group.
Delete a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, click on the layer group you want to delete.
Arranging Elements: An Overview 3. Press Delete.
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups. 2. On the Groups dialog box, click a group in the Groups table. Tip You should click directly on the Group name to change it. The name then highlights and a blinking pointer appears, allowing you to type the new name. To change the name of a group, type the new name and press Enter. To change the name of a layer, click the name of the layer you want to change in the Layers table. Then, type a new name and press Enter.
3. Do one of the following:

Colors Dialog Box
Creates colors that you define by mixing a combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity values or red, green, and blue values. After you click Define Custom Colors, the easiest way to experiment with different colors is to drag the pointer around on the color matrix. After you create a color and close the dialog box, the Custom Color Name dialog box appears, allowing you to save the custom color with a name. To change the settings for a custom color, you can click a custom color box and then specify a different color. To define a new custom color, click an empty custom color box, specify a new color, and then click Add To Custom Colors. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the in the upper right corner of the dialog box and Question Mark click the control that you want information about.
Layers Command (Tools Menu)

Displays or hides layers. This command also sets the active layer and changes the layer of an element. Tip You can set display criteria for all the sheets and their associated layers in the current document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.
Layers Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Layer - Displays the active layer on the drawing sheet. You can change the active layer by selecting from a list of all the layers on the active sheet. Typing a new layer name creates a new layer. Change Layer - Accesses the Change Layer dialog box so that you can change the layer of elements. This option is available only when you have selected a set of elements on the drawing. Layer Status - Accesses the Layer Display dialog box. This dialog box has a Layer list that you can use to display or hide layers on the drawing sheet.
Layer Display Dialog Box

Sets display criteria for the layers in the current drawing sheet. Note You can set display criteria for all the sheets in the current document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.
Dialog Box Options

Active Layer Only - Displays the active layer. If this option is set and the active layer changes, then the new active layer is displayed and the previous active layer is hidden. Layers - Displays a list of layers on the active drawing sheet. Bold, black text shows that the layer is displayed on the drawing sheet. Plain, gray text shows the layer is hidden. Bold, red text preceded by a bullet shows that the layer is active. Occupied Only - Lists only layers containing elements. Empty layers do not appear on the list. Groups - Displays or hides the layer groups list on the dialog box. When you click this button, the dialog box displays a list of all layer groups for the active drawing sheet. You can select a group from the list to display or hide these layers on the drawing sheet. On - Displays the layers in the selected layer group. Off - Hides the layers in the selected layer group. Apply - Applies the current display settings to all windows. The dialog 456 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Arranging Elements: An Overview remains displayed. Close - Applies the current display settings to all windows and closes the dialog.
Change Layer Dialog Box

Note This option is available only when one or more elements are selected.
Dialog Box Options

Current Layers - Lists the layers for all the selected elements. Change All To - Lists all the layers for the active sheet. Selecting a layer from the list changes the layer for all the elements in the selection set.
Layer Groups Command (Tools Menu)

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers on the current working sheet.
Groups Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers for the active sheet in the active window. You cannot delete the active layer or a layer that has elements placed on it.
Dialog Box Options

Layers - Displays a list of all the layers on the current drawing sheet, so that you can create new layers. You can type the name of a layer in the Layers box to create a new layer. You can also add or remove layers in a layer group with the Layers table. When you select a group in the Groups table, the check boxes in the Grouped column of the Layers table indicate the status of the layers. If the check box is set, the layer is a member of the group that you selected in the Groups table. If the check box is cleared, the layer is not a member of the group. Groups - Displays all layer groups for the current sheet. You can define a new group by typing a name in the Groups box. You can select a group from the Groups table to display the layers in the group in the Groups table. To select a group, you must click the button on the left side of the row for a SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 457
Arranging Elements: An Overview group. You can use the Description column to add a description to the layer group. Typing a name of an existing layer group makes that group active. You can then add or remove layers in a group.
Display Manager Command (Tools Menu)

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their associated layers in the document. Tip You can quickly set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools menu.
Display Manager Dialog Box

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their associated layers in the document. Tip You can set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools menu.
Sheets Tab
Controls the way elements or objects appear on a drawing sheet.
Tab Options
Row Button - Specifies at what level you want to display or hide items. When you click a button to the left of a row, an arrow appears by that row. Clicking this button selects the drawing sheet or element so that you can modify its display. If you select a drawing sheet, any options you set on the Layer tab of the Display Manager dialog box are applied to the sheet that you selected. Sheets - Displays a list of sheets in the current document. An arrow appears by the current active drawing sheet. You can control the display of each sheet by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Line Type, or Width columns. Display - Display controls the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to the element, the element is displayed in the active document (if its layer is displayed). A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab. You can set the box next to each element to display all the elements. On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the software can locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it on the screen, but you cannot locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot lock the active layer. If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot locate the element or layer in the active document or drawing SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 459
Arranging Elements: An Overview sheet. If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or layer is not locked and you can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a drawing sheet or element or applies another color to an element. You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for an element or linked object. Width - Overrides a line width for all elements on a drawing sheet. OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Apply - Applies the current display settings without closing the Display Manager dialog box. Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time. Help - Activates the online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
Layers Tab
Controls the way layers and layer groups appear in a window.
Tab Options
Row Button - Indicates the layer being modified. The active layer cannot be modified and is indicated by a solid filled check box in the display column. Layers - Controls the display using layers and layers groups. The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list followed by individual layers. You can control the display of each layer by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Type, or Width columns. Display - Displays the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to the element, the element is displayed in the active document (if its layer is displayed). A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
Arranging Elements: An Overview You can set the box next to each element to display all the elements. On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the software can locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it on the screen, but you cannot locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot lock the active layer. If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot locate the element or layer in the active document or drawing sheet. If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or layer is not locked and you can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a layer or layer group or applies another color to an element. You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for an element or linked object. Width - Selects another line width for layer or layer group. OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box. Apply - Applies the current display settings. Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time. Help - Activates the online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview

Symbols increase drawing productivity because they allow you to access existing graphic data quickly and easily. With a symbol, you can place graphic information repeatedly without re-creating it. Symbols save you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project. Symbols are contained in documents with an .sym extension.
Parametric symbols are also available. You can modify these symbols by changing a parameter value.
Creating Symbols: An Overview

A symbol is a document with an .sym extension. You can create a symbol by selecting any geometry and clicking Create Symbol on the Draw toolbar. You must then define the origin by clicking the point that you want in the select set. After defining the origin, you can save the select set as a symbol with the Save As dialog box. Note Symbols that you create display a 90-degree rotation angle as a default behavior.
Create a Symbol
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Create Symbol 2. Select a set of elements on the drawing sheet. .
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Tip When creating a symbol using different elements, press Ctrl while choosing elements with the Select tool. Caution The Save As dialog box automatically appears at this point. You do not need to use Save As on the File menu to open this dialog box. 4. On the Save As dialog box, select the directory where you want to save the symbol. 5. Type the name that you want for the symbol. The software saves the document with an .sym extension.
3. Click a point on the drawing sheet to define the origin of the symbol.

Create Symbol Command (Draw Toolbar)
Allows you to create a symbol. Tip This button is available only when you select elements.
The Symbol Explorer: An Overview

You can use Symbol Explorer to drag symbols from a directory to the current document. You can also use Symbol Explorer to view document directories on your computer or a network drive. Symbol Explorer can also display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your computer. When you click Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar , Symbol Explorer is displayed on the right side of the main window. The buttons on the Symbol Explorer are similar to the ones in the Windows Explorer. For example, you can click a Favorites button to go to one of your favorite web sites. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to point to a directory, you see a tree view, the contents of the directory, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you see the contents of that page, if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed. If Internet Explorer is not installed, then the software prompts you to install it.
Placing Symbols
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview The main use of the Symbol Explorer is to drag symbols from a directory to the current document. The Symbol Explorer acts much like the Windows Explorer. To view symbols, you can type the name of the directory in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer; or you can click the Explore Elsewhere button and set the directory path that the Symbol Explorer looks in. If you click Home at the top of the Symbol Explorer, it displays the home page for the symbols that are associated with the template on which the active document is based. You can override this property by setting a new address with Properties on the File menu. On the Properties dialog box, you click the Browser tab to set the option. After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols, you can drag a symbol from the Symbol Explorer to the current document.
Displaying HTML Pages

The Symbol Explorer can display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your computer. To view an HTML page in the Symbol Explorer, you must enter the entire directory path and filename in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer. To view HTML pages on the World Wide Web, you must type the HTTP address in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer. When you do this, the Symbol Explorer displays the HTML page of the address you entered. The Symbol Explorer can display any web site that you have permissions to access. Caution HTML pages appear only if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed.
Searching Document Directories

You can view the Symbols of any directory on your computer or the network with the Symbol Explorer. You can type the path of the directory in the Address Box; or you can click Browse and set the directory path on the dialog box. After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols of the directory that you want, you can double-click any document, much like the Windows Explorer, and the software that created the document opens and displays the document for editing. You can drag any document created by software that supports OLE 2.0 into the current document. These documents can include .igr, .dgn, .dwg, and .dxf types. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 465
Symbol Explorer Settings

When you set options for the Symbol Explorer, the current document stores and uses these the next time you open the document. You can define a different home page for each document in the Symbol Explorer with Properties on the File menu. On the Properties dialog box, you click Browser to set the option. When you set the address for the home page on the Properties dialog box, the Symbol Explorer goes to that address when you click the Home button at the top of the Symbol Explorer. Tip The address can be a directory on a local or network drive or an HTTP address to a web page.
Open a Symbol Library

Before you place a symbol on the drawing sheet, you can set an option to link or embed the symbol with Options on the Tools menu. On the Options dialog box, click the Symbols tab to set the option. Before you open a symbol library, you must either have installed the needed symbols or place the CD-ROM for installing the software in the appropriate drive. 1. Click File > Open. 2. Select a template or create a document. Tip For example, if you want to open a symbol library of architectural symbols, you can click an architectural template to create a document based on that template.
3. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer automatically displays the symbols library associated with the template . 4. Drag the symbols from the Symbol Explorer window into the document. Notes If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbol directory associated with the current document or template. You can also use links from a web page to navigate in a symbol
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview library. Sometimes a web page appears depending on the template for the current document.
View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window . 2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the HTTP address and press Enter. For example, you could type the following: http://www.ingr.com. The World Wide Web page appears inside the Symbol Explorer. Tip If you cannot see the entire Web page, you can double-click the bar at the top of the Symbol Explorer to undock it. You can then resize the Symbol Explorer window so that you can see the entire page. Notes You can use many of the same tools to view web pages that are available in the Windows Internet Explorer. For example, if you click Back at the top of the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer returns to the previous page. If you open or create a document while Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated with the current document.
View Documents with the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window . 2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the directory to go to and press Enter. For example, you could type the following: C:\DRAWING FILES. Tip You can also change the directory by clicking Browse at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box. You can then enter another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in.
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Notes You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If you want to view just one type of document, such as symbols, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click View, and then File Type. If you double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer, the software that created the document opens and displays the document. For example, if you double-click the SYMBOL.sym document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym document. Or, if you double-click a document with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens. If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated with the current document. You can filter the view in the Symbol Explorer window to display only certain types of documents, such as MicroStation, AutoCAD, or other types. You can click View File Type on the shortcut menu in the Symbol Explorer window. For example, to display only AutoCAD documents, you can select the AutoCAD option for .dwg documents. When you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg documents. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, the software prompts you to install it.
Close the Symbol Explorer

On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer Notes You can also close the Symbol Explorer by clicking Toolbars on the View menu. On the Toolbars dialog box, you should clear the Symbol Explorer check box. .
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right side of the main window . 2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the directory that you want to go to and press Enter. For example, you could type the following: C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\. Tip You can also change the directory by clicking Browse at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box. You can then enter another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in.
3. Double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer. The software that created the document opens and displays the document. For example, if you double-click on the SYMBOL.sym document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym document. Or, if you double-click a document with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens. Notes If you double-click on a directory in the Symbol Explorer, a separate window for the Windows Explorer opens. You must click Browse to select a new directory for the Symbol Explorer. You can drag any document that supports OLE 2.0 from the Symbol Explorer to the drawing sheet. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in the style of the Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, then the software prompts you to install it.
Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer

1. Click File > Properties. 2. On the Behavior tab of the Properties dialog box, type the HTTP address of the home page that you want for the Symbol Explorer. In the Symbol Explorer, when you click Home, the Symbol Explorer displays the Web page for the address that you typed. Tip The address that you enter on the Behavior tab of the Properties SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 469
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview dialog box is saved with the current template and document. Notes You can also set the home page while the Symbol Explorer is open. In the Symbol Explorer window, right-click and, on the shortcut menu, select Set Document Home. If you do not set the home page for the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer displays the symbol directory that is associated with the template that the active document is based on. If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated with the current document. If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols on your computer, you can type the following syntax in the Address box: <application.path>\..\<path of symbols. For example, you could enter <application.path>\..\symbols\arch.htm.
Move the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window . 2. Double-click the bar at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display it as a separate window from the main window. You can now drag the Symbol Explorer and relocate it. You can also resize the Symbol Explorer window. Notes If the Symbol Explorer is displayed as a separate window from the main window, double-click the bar at the top to make it part of the main window again. You can dock the Symbol Explorer at any place in the window. If you resize the Symbol Explorer and the double-click it to make it part of the main window, the Symbol Explorer size remains the same.
Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer 470 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview appears on the right of the main window .
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, on the shortcut menu, click Show Favorites. A bar appears at the top of the bottom pane. You can click one of these bars to go to a favorite document or directory.
Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window . 2. In the Symbol Explorer window, select the directory or document that you want to add to a list of favorites. 3. In the Symbol Explorer window, right-click and then click Add To Favorites. A bar appears at the top of the bottom pane. You can click this bar to go to a favorite document or directory.
Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of the main window . 2. In the Symbol Explorer window, select the bar in the bottom pane that you want to delete. Tip You can also select a favorite directory, HTML page, or file in the Symbol Explorer window.
3. Right-click, and, then on the shortcut menu, click Delete Favorite.

Symbol Explorer Command (Main Toolbar)
Activates the Symbol Explorer window. The Symbol Explorer window allows you to organize and manage documents and symbols. You can browse document directories on the computer hard drive or the network. You can also view HTML pages on the Internet, the computer hard drive, or CD-ROM drive.
Symbol Explorer Window

Displays files in a directory or World Wide Web pages (HTML pages). You can use the Symbol Explorer window just like you would the Windows Explorer or Windows Internet Explorer. You can also use Symbol Explorer to drag symbols (.sym) from the Symbol Explorer window to the current document. Tip Within the Symbol Explorer window, you can access several commands that allow you to change or filter the view in the window. For example, you can change the window to show only symbols. You can also add directories or web addresses to a list of favorites. If you want to place several copies of a symbol, you can click the Stamp Here command. To access these commands, place the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
Window Options
Back - Takes you backward to the previous location of the Symbol Explorer, either a web page or a directory path. Forward - Takes you forward to the previous location of the Symbol Explorer, either a web page or a directory path. Stop - Halts the loading of an HTML page. Refresh - Reloads the current HTML page or directory. 472 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Home - Takes the Symbol Explorer back to the home page that you set with Properties on the File menu. If you do not set the home page with this command, the Symbol Explorer opens the symbols directory associated with the template that the active document is based on. Address - Sets the current location for the Symbol Explorer. You can type in a directory or a World Wide Web address and then press Enter. Some examples of what you can type in are as follows: http://www.ingr.com C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\ Tips If you want to view an HTML page on your hard drive, you must enter the entire path and filename in the address box. If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, the software prompts you to install it.
Show Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)

Shows bars in the Symbol Explorer window that point to documents or web pages that you added to the list of favorites. When you click a bar, the Symbol Explorer displays the associated documents or web pages. Tip To access this command, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
View File Type Command (Shortcut Menu)

Filters the view in the Symbol Explorer window according to the document type that you select. For example, if you want to see only AutoCAD documents, you could select the AutoCAD option for .dwg documents. When you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg documents. Tip To access this command, pause the pointer in the Symbol SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 473
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Explorer content window and right-click. Select the View option.
Delete Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)

Deletes the selected bar from the Symbol Explorer window and removes the item from the list of favorites. Tip To access this command, pause the pointer over the favorite directory, HTML page, or file in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles: An Overview

Symbols can display different types of behavior depending on how the symbol was created. When you drag a symbol into a document, you can check out different characteristics of the symbol to see what it can do. Depending on how the symbol was created, some symbols automatically ungroup into individual elements in the document when you place the symbol. For example, if you place a symbol that contains a circle and a rectangle in a document, the symbol immediately ungroups. The parts of the symbol, the circle and rectangle, act as a separate circle and rectangle, not a symbol.
Labels
Some symbols have a label that appears as a question mark under the symbol. To change the text in the label, you can double-click the question mark. When the Attribute Viewer appears, you can then edit the text in the Value column and press Enter.
Commands on the Shortcut Menu

While the symbol is selected, right-click and look at the shortcut menu. Some symbols have special commands on the shortcut menu that run custom processes for the symbol. If the shortcut menu has Help, you can access a Help file that displays special information about the symbol. Commands on the shortcut menu can also activate different representations of the same symbol. For example, you can access different representations of the same valve symbol, with a flanged globe, a welded globe, and so forth.
Drop Points
You can move the symbol around in the document with the Select Tool. You can discover special behaviors by dragging the symbol over an element or another symbol.
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Some symbols automatically connect to other symbols. These symbols were created with drop points for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when you exactly align the drag point and drop point. You can then attach the symbol to the other at a precision point.
ToolTips
If you pass the pointer over the drop points on a symbol, you might see ToolTips. These ToolTips display special information about different parts or points on the symbol. For example, the serial number for networking diagramming equipment can appear in a ToolTip.
Custom Processes
Some symbols actually run special processes when you drag them, doubleclick them, or perform other actions. If you select the symbol and click the right mouse button, you might also see special custom commands for the symbol on the shortcut menu.
Displaying Attributes on an Element

Some symbols can display attributes that are assigned to an element. When you drag the symbol to the element with attributes, the symbol automatically displays the values of those attributes.
Handles
When you select a symbol, different handles appear on the symbol. Some symbols have several different kinds of handles:
Black boxes on the outside corners of the range box lines represent scale handles (A). You can drag a scale handle to resize the entire symbol. Yellow boxes in the middle of the range box lines represent standard parametric handles (B). You can drag a parametric handle to resize part of the symbol. A green plus sign represents a mirror handle (C). You can drag a mirror handle to create a copy of the symbol directly horizontal or vertical to the original symbol. A large green circle represents a rotate handle (D). You can drag this handle to rotate the entire symbol. Specific increments are displayed by the pointer while you rotate the symbol. A series of small green circles represents drag points (E). You can use these points to attach the symbol at a precise point to another symbol or element. A small green lock represents a lock handle (F). You can click the lock handle to unlock the symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol was associated. Tip
A lock handle appears only if you drag the symbol to an element with one of the drag points on the symbol. For more information about the way these handles work, click Related Topics.
Associate a Symbol with an Element

Drag the symbol to a position near the target element. The symbol automatically aligns itself with the element. The symbol is now associated with the element. If you move the element, the symbol moves along the element. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 477
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview If you move the symbol, it moves along the element, but not away from it. At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target element again, you can click the lock handle again. The symbol stays in the new position, but is now associated to the target element again. If you select another element or command after unlocking the symbol and moving it, you cannot re-establish the association with the target element. Notes If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select the symbol and click the lock handle to unlock it. You can then move the symbol away from the target element.
Placing Symbols: An Overview

To place a symbol, you can use single-click placement or drag the symbol from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer into the current document.
Symbol Libraries
After starting the software, you can open a template or document. For most standard templates, the Symbol Explorer automatically opens and displays a default directory for all the symbols that would be appropriate to use with that template. For example, templates in the Process category point to directories with process diagram symbols. Tip To open the Symbol Explorer, you can also click Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar. You might need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer. The Home path is stored on the Browser tab of the File Properties dialog box.
When you click a symbol in the Symbol Explorer, the pointer attaches to the origin of the symbol by default to drag it in. At that instance, the origin is the drag point. Some symbols contain more than one drag point. These appear as green dots on the symbol. These drag points are useful if you want to place a symbol using a particular part of the symbol. You can change to another drag point by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys. By default, every element in a symbol does not appear when you place the symbol in a document. For example, if you place a symbol that contains dimensions in a document, the dimensions are not displayed.
Place a Symbol
Tip Before you place a symbol, you can set an option to link or embed the symbol with Options on the Tools menu.
1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer automatically displays the symbol library associated with the template or document Caution For some documents, you might need to click Home in the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 479 .
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Symbol Explorer. The Browser tab on the File Properties dialog box stores the Home path. 2. In the Symbol Explorer window, browse to the directory that contains the symbols that you want. 3. Drag the symbol from the Symbol Explorer window into the active document. Notes You also can place a symbol by clicking the symbol in the Symbol Explorer, and then clicking the location to place the symbol in the document. This single-click placement allows you to place multiple symbols in document without dragging each copy of the symbol. Single-click placement also allows you to change attribute and parameter values for the symbol before placement, including Lookup Table values. You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If you want to view just one type of document, such as symbols, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, click View, and then click File Type. If you use a certain symbol library for many different documents, you can access the library quickly by adding it to your list of favorites in the Symbol Explorer. Point to the Symbol Explorer window, right-click, and click Add To Favorites. To place several copies of a symbol, you can click Stamp Here on the shortcut menu. You also can place a symbol by dragging it from Windows Explorer. You can set the default option to link or embed the symbol when you drag it with Options on the Tools menu. You set the option on the Symbol tab of the Options dialog box. If you press Ctrl while you drag a symbol, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the symbol is linked. Tip Pressing the keys overrides the option that you set for dragging symbols on the Options dialog box. Sometimes when you place a symbol that contains dimensions in a document, the software does not display the dimensions. This behavior depends on options that you set when you created the symbol. However, if you open the symbol to edit it, the dimensions appear.
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to display the symbol directory associated with the current document or template.
Place Copies of a Symbol

Using Single Click Placement
1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer automatically displays the symbol library associated with the template or document Caution For some documents, you need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer. You can edit the Home value by clicking the Browser tab of the File Properties dialog box. .
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, go to the directory that contains the symbols that you want. 3. Click on the symbol in the Symbol Explorer window. 4. Click the desired location in the active document to place the symbol. Tip While in single-click placement mode, you can place multiple copies of the selected symbol with each additional mouse click. To cancel single-click placement mode, press the Esc key or click the right mouse button.
Using Mouse-Down Mode (Dragging)

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer automatically displays the symbol library associated with the template or document Caution For some documents, you need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer. You can edit the Home value by clicking the Browser tab of the File Properties dialog box. .
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, go to the directory that contains the symbols that you want. 3. Select a symbol while pressing the right mouse button. 4. While pressing the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the document. 5. On the shortcut menu, click Stamp Here. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 481
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview 6. Click a point in the document to place the symbol 7. Click another point in the document to place a copy of the symbol. You can click as many points as you want to place multiple copies of the same symbol. Notes If you decide that you do not want to place several copies of a symbol, you can click Place Here on the shortcut menu. This places one instance of the symbol.

Place Here Command (Shortcut Menu)
Places one instance of a symbol as you drag a symbol into a document. Tip You can access this command by dragging and dropping a symbol into a document with the right mouse button.
Stamp Here Command (Shortcut Menu)

Places more than one instance of a symbol as you drag a symbol into a document. This command allows you to copy a symbol quickly and easily as you place it. Tip You can access this command by dragging a symbol into a document with the right mouse button.
Editing Symbols: An Overview

You can edit a symbol by opening the .sym file directly. You can also edit a symbol that you drag from the Symbol Explorer to place into a drawing. After you drag the symbol, you can manipulate it by actions such as mirroring, rotating, and sizing. To edit a symbol, you should select it and click Open on the shortcut menu. Tip To display the shortcut menu, highlight a symbol with the pointer and right-click.
You can also edit the properties and parameters of some symbols to change the symbols. When you drag these special symbols into a document, the Attribute Viewer automatically displays the properties and parameters. The properties are in plain text. The parameters are identified with bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters. Tip If the Symbol Explorer is closed, you can also access the properties and parameters of a symbol by selecting it and clicking Symbol Explorer.
Editing Embedded or Linked Symbols

If the symbol is linked, you can open the symbol and edit it. The symbol that you placed on the drawing sheet updates automatically. Those same changes are saved in the .sym document on the hard drive. Embedding the symbol means that a copy of the symbol was placed in the document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that symbol within the current document reflect those changes. Tip Before placing a symbol, you can set an option to link or embed the symbol when you drag the symbol into the document. You can do this by clicking Options on the Tools menu and then setting the option you want on the Symbols tab.
Editing Parts of a Symbol

To edit parts of a symbol as individual elements on the drawing sheet, you can convert the symbol to a group of individual graphics. To do this, you place the symbol on a drawing sheet, select it, and then click Convert on the shortcut 484 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview menu to convert the symbol into an element group. To ungroup the elements so that you can edit them individually, you can click Ungroup on the Change toolbar. You can now edit the individual elements. Tip You must place a symbol in a document at the default scale (1:1) if you want to use Convert. Caution If you convert the symbol into an element group, you cannot turn the group back into a symbol.
Symbol Labels
To create a label, you can double-click the symbol. A blinking pointer appears below, above, or in the middle of the symbol so that you can start typing the text that you want.
Changing Parameters
You can change the parameters of a symbol with the Parameters tab on the Properties dialog box. You can change the value of the parameter, but you cannot change the name of the parameter.
Edit a Symbol
The way that you edit a symbol depends on if the symbol is linked or embedded. You can determine whether to link or embed the symbol by setting an option with Options on the Tools menu before you place the symbol on the drawing sheet.
To Edit a Symbol Document Directly

1. Click File > Open. 2. Select the symbol document that you want to edit. The document has an .sym extension. 3. Edit the symbol. 4. Click File > Save. Caution You cannot edit the connect points, drag points, handles, or other properties of a symbol directly. Tip If you want to quickly edit a symbol, you can open the Symbol SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 485
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview Explorer and double-click any symbol to for editing.
To Edit an Embedded Symbol

1. Select the symbol. 2. Click Open on the shortcut menu. 3. Edit the symbol. 4. Click File > Update. The software changes the symbol in the current document. 5. Click File > Close to close the symbol document and return to the document that contains the symbol. Tip If you change a linked symbol, the software also records those changes in the source document on your computer and the instance of the symbol in the current document.
To Edit Elements in a Symbol

If you want to edit individual elements of a symbol, you must convert the symbol to elements in the current document. 1. Select the symbol on the drawing sheet. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Convert to convert the symbol to a group of elements. Tip You must insert a symbol at the default scale (1:1) if you want to use Convert.
3. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup to separate the elements so that you can edit them individually. You can now edit the symbol elements just like ones that you created with one of the drawing commands. Notes If a symbol containing a SmartLabel is placed into a document, you cannot select the SmartLabel and open it to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new SmartLabel.
Edit Symbol Properties

1. Click a symbol in a drawing. 2. Click Edit > Properties. 486 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview 3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want to use. Tips You can use the Attribute Viewer to view user properties and parameters of a symbol. These properties include attributes, parameters, and look-up table values. You can also select a symbol and then click the Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar. To see a symbol's properties, simply select the symbol. In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text. The parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters/attributes in the Name column. To change the values, click the Value column, type the information that you want, and press Enter. Notes You can use Attribute Viewer to view user properties and parameters of a symbol. These properties include the dimensions and other items. To open the Attribute Viewer, double-click a symbol. You can also select a symbol and then click Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar. In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text. The parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters in the Name column. To change the values, click the Value column, type the information that you want, and press Enter.

Symbol Properties Dialog Box
Defines the properties of a symbol.
Info Tab
Displays and allows you to set symbol placement options such as the symbol angle, layer on which you want to place the symbol, and coordinates for the symbol.
Tab Options
Name - Displays the name of the parent document of the symbol. Layer - Specifies the layer on which you place the symbol. When you place a symbol, it is placed on the active layer. X Origin - Specifies the X coordinate of the symbol origin. Y Origin - Specifies the Y coordinate of the symbol origin. Angle - Displays the current angle of the symbol. You can specify a new angle. The number of degrees increases in the counterclockwise direction. For example, 90 degrees is at the top of the screen.
Parametric Tab
Displays information about the parameters in the symbol. The parameters that appear on this tab are the same items that appear in the Attribute Viewer when you select the symbol. You can change the name of the value of the parameter, but not the name. When you change the value, you must click Apply for the change to take effect on the symbol.
User Tab
Displays and allows you to set property options for each symbol that you place. This feature provides an administrative tool for tracking property information, such as the serial number of label text, for each placement of a symbol. 488 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Tab Options
Name - Defines a property name. Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can choose from character, number, money, or date. Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer name, a serial number, or other descriptive information as a value. Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol. Add - Creates an attribute for the symbol. Delete - Deletes the attribute that you select in the Properties box.
Convert Command (Symbols Shortcut Menu)

Converts the selected object to another file format. For example, if you select a symbol and click this command, the symbol is converted to a group of elements on the drawing sheet. Tip You must place a symbol in a document at the default scale (1:1) if you want to use Convert. If you scale the symbol, you cannot convert the symbol to individual elements.
Scaling Symbols: An Overview

You can use scale handles on a symbol to resize it. Four black scale handles are displayed on the corners of the range box of a symbol. You can drag any of the four handles up or down. You can also change the size of the symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar. You can modify different parts of some symbols with parametric handles. Standard parameter handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to the graphics in a symbol. The four standard positions where parameter handles can appear are top center, bottom center, left center, and right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging a parameter handle changes the value of the dimension by the length readout precision set on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box when the symbol is created. You can also scale a parametric symbol by selecting the symbol and then editing the values in the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer automatically appears when you select the symbol. For example, if you select the Para Tower symbol, you can change the Top attribute from 7.29 to 9.00 so that the height of the symbol increases.
Scale a Symbol
1. Click a symbol in the document. 2. Drag one of the scale handles that appear as a black box on each corner of the symbol range box. Notes You can scale a part of a parametric symbol. Drag one of the
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview standard parameter handles. These handles appear as black boxes in the middle of each side of the symbol range box. Note that only one dimension of the symbol changes. For example, if you click the lower parametric handle on a box, only the height changes, not the width. You can also change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it and right-clicking. On the Parametrics tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, enter the value that you want and click Apply. You can also change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it and changing the values in the Attribute Viewer.
Mirroring Symbols: An Overview

You can use mirror handles to mirror a symbol about its center. The mirror handle appears at the right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging the mirror handle across the center of a symbol's range box causes the symbol to mirror about its center in dynamics. A center line for the X and Y axis appears through the range box of the symbol. The axes appear as solid when the pointer crosses one or both axes. When you manipulate a symbol, you see the same behaviors unique to that symbol that existed when you placed the symbol in the document.
Mirror a Symbol
1. Select a symbol in the document. 2. Click the mirror handle that appears as a green plus sign at the top right of the symbol's range box. 3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol.
Rotating Symbols: An Overview

You can rotate a symbol by using one of the following methods: Clicking Rotate. Selecting the symbol's rotate handle to turn it. Using a rotation angle. Using relationships applied to the symbol.
Rotate Button
To rotate a symbol, you can select the symbol and click Rotate on the Change toolbar.
Rotation Angle
You can also rotate a symbol by the rotation angle. When you drag a symbol or align it to an element, you can press the left or right arrow keys. This rotates the symbol in 15 degree increments by default. Some symbols are designed to rotate at different increments. If the symbol is created with a rotation angle other than zero, you can rotate it by the defined step angle using the left and right arrow keys.
Relationships
By default, when you rotate a symbol, it maintains its orientation on the drawing sheet. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is set in place with a lock relationship. When you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension, the symbol does not change its orientation. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale.
You can also allow symbols to change orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships applied to them. This is handy if you want to change the orientation of whole sets of geometry with one driving dimension or relationship. In the example, when you edit the driving dimension between SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 493
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview the line and symbol, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the relationships applied to it.
For a symbol to rotate according to the relationships applied to it, you must first set an option by opening the symbol document (.sym) directly. You can open the document with Open on the File menu. Then, you must click Properties on the File menu. On the Behavior tab, you must set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box. After saving and closing the symbol document, you can drag the symbol into a document.
Rotate a Symbol
1. Select a symbol in the document. 2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate Notes You can also rotate a symbol about its center with the appropriate handle. Click the green circle at the right of the range box for the symbol. Drag the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the range box for the symbol. Select the symbol and press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the symbol in predefined increments. The rotation angle can vary depending on how you created the symbol. .
Manipulating Symbols: An Overview

You can manipulate a symbol just like you would manipulate other graphics. For example, you can edit symbol properties, apply relationships, move it, or copy it. When you manipulate a symbol, it behaves as a single unit. You can view properties for the symbol in the Attribute Viewer that appears at the bottom of the Symbol Explorer. You can click any part of a symbol to move it around in a document. Some symbols are created with drag points that appear as green dots on the symbol. When you move the symbol around in the document, the pointer automatically attaches to the drag point that you used most recently. You can change drag points by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys. If you drag a symbol on an element in the document, the symbol is automatically associated with that element. When the element moves, the symbol moves with it. You must click one of the green drag points on the symbol and then move the symbol to the element. Tip Some symbols cannot be associated with an element depending on what options were set when the symbol was created.
Aligning a Symbol with an Element

Many symbols align automatically with elements in the document. When associated with an element, these symbols display a green lock handle. When the element moves, the symbol moves with it. You can click the lock handle to free the symbol from the associated element. When you unlock the handle, you can move the symbol away from the element. If you move the element, the symbols stays in its original position. You can use the lock behavior in many ways. For example, you can ensure that a door symbol moves with the wall to which it is attached if the lock handle on the door symbol is locked. If you want to move the wall, and not the door, you must click the lock handle on the symbol to unlock the door symbol from the wall. The door now remains in its current position when you drag the wall away from it.
Aligning a Symbol with Another Symbol

Some symbols can be placed only on other symbols. These symbols are created with drop points that allow you to align the symbol to a precise point on another symbol. You cannot place a symbol with drop points on an SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 495
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview element, such as line, arc, or circle. When a symbol has drop points, red dots appear to indicate the drop points defined on the symbol. These drop points let you know where you can place the symbol on the target symbol. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision.
Manipulate a Symbol
1. Click a symbol in the document. 2. Use any element manipulation command like Move, Copy, or Scale to manipulate the symbol in the drawing. Notes You can edit a symbol by selecting the symbol and clicking Open on the shortcut menu. You can manipulate only the symbol, not its individual elements. You can convert the symbol to individual elements on the drawing sheet by selecting the symbol and clicking Convert on the shortcut menu. You can change the size of a symbol by selecting the symbol and then dragging one of the handles. Tip If you cannot scale the symbol with this procedure, select the symbol and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then, on the Behavior tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, clear Lock Scale.
Unlock a Symbol From an Element

1. Select the symbol. 2. Click the green lock handle to unlock the symbol. 3. Drag the symbol away from the element. Notes If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select the symbol and click the lock handle to unlock it. You can then move the symbol away from the target element.
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target element again, you can click the lock handle again. The symbol stays in the new position, but is now associated to the target element again. If you select another element or command after unlocking the symbol and moving it, you cannot re-establish the association with the target element.
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points

Using a drag point, drag a symbol to another symbol. The available drop points appear as red dots.
Mechanism Modeling: An Overview

You can use mechanism modeling to check for clearances on moving parts. Mechanism modeling is a set of elements that are related to each other so that one group of geometry moves relative to another when the dimensions change. You can use any kind of elements for mechanism modeling, but symbols are the easiest elements to use. Symbols are easy to use because they act as one piece of geometry when you want to reposition them. For example, if you draw four lines that form a rectangle, you might want to connect the lines so that the rectangle has predictable behavior when rotated by a dimensional change. To do this, you must connect every line. The length of each line, the connections of the end points, and the angle between each line and its adjacent line must be defined as shown in the picture. If the same four lines were constructed and made into a symbol, the orientation and length of each line would always remain constant regardless of the orientation of the symbol. No relationships or dimensions for the geometry making up the symbol would be necessary as shown in the picture. If you change the angle from 90 degrees to 45 degrees, the geometry stays together with the symbol as a rigid body. The easiest way to create a mechanism is to use rigid body symbols and constrain the symbols to move like you want. Symbols can have two behaviors: rotating and non-rotating. The default behavior, non-rotating, means that the symbol cannot be rotated. The other behavior, rotating, allows rotation by relationships. This allows the symbol to rotate.
Example
The field pump mechanism serves as a good example of a kinematics animation. The mechanism is made up of five symbols and only one dimension to control the mechanism movement. If you select the dimension and change the value of the dimension from 12 degree to 60 degrees, all the geometry moves together. The other symbols that are connected to each other move to their proper position based on the angle applied and relationships to the symbols and the behavior applied to each symbol.
Sample Workflow
Create a Kinematics Animation
1. Click File > New. 2. Select the Mechanical Imperial template. Tip Selecting the Mechanical Imperial template creates a document with a C-wide sheet and a 1:1 scale. .
3. On the Main toolbar, click the Symbol Explorer button 4. Browse to the directory with the field pump symbols.
5. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the foundation symbol in the lower left area of the document. 6. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the pendulum, donkey head, beam rod, and pump thread symbols so that these do not overlap each other or the foundation.
To connect the parts

1. On the Tools menu, select Maintain Relationships. Your action confirms that the relationships are maintained when you move parts of the drawing. 2. On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock .
3. To lock the foundation, select one of the end points of the line on the lower right side. This action keeps the foundation stationary when you attach the other components or animate the movement. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 499
To connect the pendulum to the motor on the foundation

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric . 2. Select the circle on the left end of the pendulum arm as the first element. 3. Select the small circle on the motor as the next element. The pendulum moves so that the circles align and are concentric. Tip The pendulum appears on top of the motor and the foundation. If the pendulum does not do this, select the pendulum using Select on the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the pendulum is on top of the motor and foundation.
To connect the donkey head to the top of the foundation

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. 2. Select the circle at the center of the donkey head for the first element. 3. Select the circle at the top of the A-frame of the foundation symbol for the second element. The donkey head moves so it appears balanced on top of the A-frame and the circles align.
To connect the beam rod to the pendulum

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. 2. Select the lower circle on the beam rod for the first element. 3. Select the right-most circle on the pendulum arm for the second element. This circle is almost centered on the pendulum. The rod moves and connects with the pendulum.
To connect the beam rod to the donkey head

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. 2. Select the circle on top of the beam rod for the first element. 3. Select the circle on the left side of the donkey head for the second element. 4. The pendulum, donkey head, and beam rod now move so that the connections are complete. Tip The beam rod appears on top of the pendulum. Otherwise, click Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the beam rod appears on top of the other parts.
To connect the pump thread to the donkey head

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect 2. Click the top of the line on the pump thread. 3. For the second element, select the endpoint of the small line embedded along the right edge of the donkey head. The thread moves and attaches to the head. Tip You can zoom on the edge of the head to find this line, because it is very small. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area . .
To place a dimension on the pendulum for controlling the rotation angle

1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings. 2. On the Relationships tab of the SmartSketch dialog box, ensure that the Midpoint check box is set. 3. On the Dimension toolbar, click Angle Between to place the dimension. The dimension is driving, so it appears in black Tip To select the circle on the pendulum where it connects to the motor, zoom in close enough to see the entire pendulum in full view. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area. Caution You must select the right circle to ensure that a driving dimension is placed. If you use the wrong circle, the dimension will be a driven dimension, shown as green. If this should occur, delete the dimension and try again. 4. Pass the pointer over the circle where the pendulum connects to the motor. You see three ellipses appear next to the pointer. 5. Click to see a box. This is PickQuick. The box has two numbers. This PickQuick box indicates how many elements you can select at this location in the window. In this case, you can select only two elements. 6. Click the number 2 square. Tip You can see three squares in the PickQuick box, depending on the zoom distance when you see the ellipses. If you see more than two squares, dismiss the PickQuick box by selecting the X in the upper right, and then zoom in closer and try again. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area. After you can see only two numbered squares in SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 501 .
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview the PickQuick box, select the number two square. This action selects the circle associated with box number two as the first point of the dimension. If PickQuick does not appear, you can also click Bring To Front and click the motor symbol to bring it to the front to try the previous steps. You need to click Send To Back after you complete the steps to bring the pendulum back to the front.
7. Pass the pointer over the line on the right end of the pendulum and move slowly toward the mid-point of the line. When you see the midpoint indicator, click for the second point of the dimension. Place the dimension to the right of the pendulum. Location is not important. This dimension drives the animation of the pump.
To drive the model

After you place the dimension, you can select the dimension with the Select Tool and change the value in the ribbon. When the dimension changes, the angle of the pendulum changes and all of the other parts change accordingly.
Working with Attributes: An Overview

Attributes can help you work more efficiently by allowing you to enter and edit values for a symbol, object, or element. Attributes can include such items as the manufacturer, price, and other data. Attributes include user-defined properties and parameters. A user-defined property is an attribute assigned to an element or object that defines a characteristic about that element or object. A property is usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost, weight, color, and so forth. You can change user-defined properties, but these changes have no affect on the appearance of the element or object. A parameter is a mechanism to change a property. A parameter is an attribute assigned to an element or object, usually a numerical value representing a dimension. Parameters are usually used in symbols to resize the length or width of a symbol. The Attribute Viewer displays the user-defined properties and parameters for a selected item. The viewer also allows you to edit the values of the properties or parameters.
Tip User-defined properties also appear on the User tab of the Properties dialog box. Parameters appear only in the Attribute Viewer.
You cannot edit the names of attributes; you can edit only their values. The viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the value. User-defined properties appear in plain text. Parameters appear in bold text. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 503
Working with Attributes: An Overview When editing attributes, you can only work on one element or object at a time. When more than one item in the document is selected, no attributes are displayed in the Attribute Viewer.
Display the Attribute Viewer

1. Select an object or element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. If the selected item has assigned attributes, the Attribute Viewer opens and displays the properties and parameters. Notes If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide the Attribute Viewer. To display or hide the viewer, place the pointer over a toolbar at the top of the document window and rightclick. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer. You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and the Attribute Viewer to display or hide the viewer. If you close the Attribute Viewer, you can open it again by pausing the pointer in the toolbar area, right-clicking, and clicking Attribute Viewer on the shortcut menu.
Move the Attribute Viewer

Drag the title of the Attribute Viewer to move the viewer. You can dock or undock the viewer inside the Symbol Explorer and place the viewer at a different location. Notes To resize the Attribute Viewer like any document window, you can double-click the title bar of the viewer to undock it. Then, you can drag the sides of the viewer to resize. The position of the Attribute Viewer does not stay the same if you close the software and then start it again. The viewer appears docked in the default position inside the Symbol Explorer.
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer

1. Click a cell in the Attribute Viewer. 504 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with Attributes: An Overview 2. Type new information or change existing information. Notes You can delete text in the Attribute Viewer by pressing Delete. Double-click to highlight the whole word. Drag to highlight the word. You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute Viewer values. You can resize cells in the viewer by using the splitter bar between each cell at the top of the viewer.
Edit Attributes
1. Select a symbol, object, or element. 2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer .
3. If the item that you selected has attributes, the Attribute Viewer appears in the Symbol Explorer window. Notes You can use Attribute Viewer to view a symbol's user properties and parameters. These properties include the dimensions of the symbol and other items. To open the Attribute Viewer, doubleclick a symbol. You can also select a symbol and then click the Symbol Explorer button on the Main toolbar. In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text. The parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters in the Name column. To change the values, click in the Value column, type the information that you want, and press Enter. You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute Viewer values. If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide the Attribute Viewer. To display or hide the viewer, point to a toolbar at the top of the document window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer. You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and the Attribute Viewer to display or hide the viewer. You can edit the parameters of a parametric symbol to automatically change the dimensions of the symbol. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 505
Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar. 2. Select the symbol set that you want to change. Important A symbol set is a group of identical symbols containing the same attributes. Only symbols containing the same attributes can be selected and changed simultaneously. Tip You can select more than one symbol at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the symbols. Notes The Attribute Viewer displays user-defined properties and parameters of a selected element, symbol, or object. User-defined properties appear in plain text; parameters appear in bold text. Once you have changed an attribute, the change is applied to all symbols within the symbol set.
3. Make the desired changes in the Attribute Viewer window.
Create a Symbol Report

Caution You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer.
1. Open the Symbol Explorer. 2. Drag symbols from one of the following directories into the document: <drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD (INTERGRAPH). <drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID (INTERGRAPH). <drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK.
3. In the Symbol Explorer, browse to one of the following directories, depending on the symbols you placed in the document: <drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ 506 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with Attributes: An Overview SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD (INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS. <drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID (INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS. <drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK\REPORTS.
4. Drag a REPORT.sym document into the document. The software prompts you to update the report and, if you click OK, the software creates the report automatically.
Update a Symbol Report

Caution You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer. Double-click the report to update it.
Reports
The software delivers some reports that you can update automatically when you add symbols to a document. The reports work with symbols that have specific attributes assigned to them. You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer. The software includes several sample reports. When you open a template, that specific template displays a default directory of symbols in the Symbol Explorer. You can find reports in the Reports directory of the default symbol directory. Examples that you can drag into your document include the following reports: Network ReportsIn the Network template, you can drag in reports listing network equipment contacts and reports inventorying equipment. Process ReportsIn the Process Flow template, you can drag in heat exchanger, pump and tower equipment reports and a stream report. Important To use the Process Flow template, you must install the Process Solutions module.
The software prompts you to update the report when you add it to a document. After you add more symbols to the document, you can update the existing SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 507
Working with Attributes: An Overview report by double-clicking it.

Attribute Viewer Dialog Box
Displays user-defined properties and parameters of an element, symbol, or inserted document. The viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the value. User-defined properties appear in plain text. Parameters appear in bold text. You can specify user-defined properties on the User tab of the Properties dialog box for an element or symbol.
Dialog Box Options

Name - Displays the name of a user-defined property or parameter. Parameters are displayed in bold text. The Name is read-only. Value - Displays the value of a property or parameter. Parameters are displayed in bold text. You can change the value.
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview

You can use color and style formats to make your drawing a more powerful communication tool, or simply to make it more aesthetically appealing. The software provides several different methods for formatting one or more geometric elements, such as lines, arcs, and circles. You can also format dimensions, annotations, and fills.
Styles
To make elements that are the same type look alike, you can use styles to apply several formats at once. Styles are a collection of formats that are saved under a name. Styles allow you to save several formats so you can use them again and again. Using styles guarantees consistency in a drawing. To make an element look unique, you can select it and then format it directly. Formatting a few elements at a time takes more time than applying styles, but gives you greater flexibility. The software provides fills that you can apply to closed boundaries. A fill floods a closed boundary with a solid color or pattern. Besides fills, the software provides line types such as continuous, dash, chain, continuous chain, double chain, dot, and end gap. New line types can be created through Visual Basic Automation. The software provides several other tools for consistent drawings. You can save styles and background sheets in a template so that you can use them in other drawings.
Properties and Parameters

You can edit the properties of an element, symbol, or object by selecting it and then changing properties on the ribbon. You can also Select the Element, right click, and select Properties on the shortcut menu. A property is a unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or document. You can display document properties in the Windows Explorer or by clicking Properties on the File menu or Edit menu. Properties for elements or objects can be classified by three different types, as defined on the Properties dialog box: Size properties, as specified on the Info tab affect physical characteristics of the element, such as the length.
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Style properties, as specified on the Format tab, affect the format of the element. User-defined properties, as created on the User tab. User-defined properties are usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost, manufacturer, and so forth. You can change user-defined properties, but these changes have no affect on the appearance of the element or object.
For example, a valve symbol's style properties can include color, line style, and width. Other user-defined properties stored with the symbol can include the manufacturer, cost, or material. User-defined properties are displayed in the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve symbol.
Applying Formats with Styles: An Overview

If you want elements that are the same type to look alike, you should use styles, a collection of formats that can be applied to the following items: Geometric elements Dimensions Annotations Fills
Using styles ensures consistency. If you place or draw one or more elements, the formats in the style are applied directly to the elements. You do not have to spend time formatting as you draw. You can apply the formats in each style again and again. The software provides styles that you can apply to elements so that they conform to an engineering standard, such as ISO or ANSI.
Managing Styles
Using Style on the Format menu, you can create several styles so that elements in a drawing appear the way you want. You can use or modify the styles delivered with the software, or you can set up new ones that conform to your unique requirements. One or more styles can be stored in a template so that you can use them in other drawings. The software divides styles into types, such as text, dimension, line, and fill. A style type contains one or more styles. You can create styles for each style type.
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview When you create a new document based on a template, the template is copied. The copy includes any styles that are in the template. Fonts are never copied into a document. If you want someone to view the fonts, and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person the fonts along with the document.
Including Styles from Other Documents in a Template

If you want to make styles from other documents available in the current document, you can reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a style resource document to the active template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box. The Style Resources dialog box allows you to add style resource documents to the current template or document. Style resource documents can be any .igr document or .RSC line style file that contains styles native to that document. If you create a document based on a template, any style resource documents attached to the template are attached to the new document as well. When you reference a style resource document from the current document or template, the styles in the resource document are added to the Style dropdown list on the active document's ribbon. When you apply one of the line, dimension, or fill styles to an element on the drawing sheet, the style is copied from the style resource document to the current document. The fonts are added to the dropdown list on the ribbon as well, but are not copied into the current document.
Applying Styles
The style type determines what type of item to which you can apply a style. A text style can be applied to text within a text box. A fill style can be applied to a fill. A line style can be applied to any geometric element such as a line, arc, circle, or ellipse. A dimension style can be applied to a dimension or balloon. When you place dimensions or annotations, or draw elements, the formats from their default styles are applied automatically. For example, if you click SmartDimension on the Dimension toolbar, the ANSI style appears on the ribbon. Each dimension that you place receives the ANSI style. To apply a different style, you can change the style name on the ribbon before or after you draw or place an element.
Applying Styles to More Than One Element

Selecting more than one element and then applying the same style to them removes any previous formatsthe elements now all have the same formats from the style that you applied. To do this, you must select elements that are in the same style type, such as text, dimension, fill, or line. For example, you cannot apply a line style to a dimension. 512 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Apply a Style
1. Select the element you want to format. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, in the Styles list, click the style you want to apply. 4. Click Apply. Notes If you have formatted an element with Properties, or by setting options on the active ribbon, these formats are removed when you apply a style.
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements

1. Select two or more elements. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Type box, click the style type that you want. Tip If you have selected several elements from different style types, the Style Type box is blank.
4. In the Style box, click the style that you want to apply to the elements. 5. Click Apply to change all the elements that you selected. Notes If you select different types of elements, you can apply a style only to the elements that are in the style type that you selected on the Style dialog box. For example, if you select several lines and dimensions on a drawing, you can apply a line style only to the lines. You cannot apply a line style to the dimensions.
Format Part of an Element

Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu using Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw. . SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 513
1. Click Segmented Style
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview 2. On the ribbon, click the style or colors that you want to apply to part of an element. 3. Click the element to which you want to apply the style. The format extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line type or color.
Notes Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element. If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color by using Segmented Style.
Rename a Style
1. Click Format > Style. 2. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. 3. In the Style box, click the style you want to rename. 4. Click Modify. 5. In the Name box, type the new name for the style. 6. Click OK. 7. Close the dialog box.
Delete a Style
1. Click Format > Style. 2. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. 3. In the Style box, click the style you want to delete. 4. Click Delete. 5. Confirm that you want to delete the style.
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element

1. Select an element. 2. Apply the formats you want to save as a style by setting the options you want on the ribbon. 3. On the ribbon, click the Style box to select the current style name of the element. 4. Type a new name to create a style using the formats applied to the element. 5. Press Enter. Tip If you create a new style using the Style box on the ribbon, you cannot base the new style on any other style.
Create a Style with the Style Command

1. Click Format > Style. 2. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. 3. Click New to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked. 4. On the Name tab, in the Name box, type a name for the new style. 5. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field. 6. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to apply to the new style.
Change the Formats of a Style

1. Click Format > Style. 2. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want. 3. In the Style box, click the style you want to change. 4. Click Modify to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked. 5. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field. 6. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to modify. After you close the dialog box, the software updates all elements formatted with the modified style throughout the document. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 515
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Notes If an element has a style, you can override the style by editing the element's properties with the Properties command on the Edit menu. You can remove style overrides by re-applying a style. You can modify one or more styles using Style on the Format menu.
Save a Style to a Template

1. Open a document template. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, select the style you want to save to the template of the active document. 4. Click New or Modify. 5. On the dialog box that appears, click the Name tab. 6. Type a name in the Name text box, and enter other information on the dialog box, as needed. 7. Click OK to save the changes.
Add Styles to the Current Document

You can reference a style resource document from any template or document. 1. Click File > Open and open the document to which you want to add a style resource. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, click Resources. 4. On the Style Resources dialog box, click Add. 5. On the Add Style Resources dialog box, select the name of the style resources document that you want to add to the template, and then click Open. 6. On the Style Resources dialog box, click OK. 7. Close the Style dialog box. 8. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate whether or not you want to save changes to the document. The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or 516 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview document that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the styles in the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current document's ribbon. If you open a document that is based on a template with references to style resource documents, the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the current document. Tip The line styles are copied from the style resource document into the current document. The font styles are not copied. So, if you want another person to be able to view the same fonts in the document and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person a copy of the fonts along with the document. Notes Sometimes you might attach several style resource documents that contain styles with duplicate names. In these cases, the style in the style resource document that is listed first in the Style Resources list takes precedence and will be listed on the ribbon of the active document.

Style Command (Format Menu)
Modifies, creates, deletes, or applies styles.
Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other options for working with styles. Tip You cannot create or modify a fill style with this dialog box. To create a new fill style, you can type a name for a fill style in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style is saved with the current settings on the Fill ribbon.
The sample macro, PATTERN.DLL, allows you to browse through AutoCAD .PAT files and add the patterns to the active document. You can place this macro on a toolbar or menu using Customize on the Tools menu; or you can access it by clicking Macro on the Tools menu. The PATTERN.DLL macro is located in the \SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM\BIN\OLESVR. Tip If you cannot find the CUSTOM directory, you must run the Setup program again. In the Setup program, you must select the Custom setup.
Dialog Box Options

Style Type - Specifies the style type. If you are placing a new element, you can specify the style by clicking the appropriate style type in this box and then clicking the style that you want in the Styles box. You can also change the style of an existing element by selecting the element and then clicking Styles on the Format menu to set these options. Styles - Specifies the style. Before selecting an item on this list, you must first select the appropriate style type in the Style Type box. List - Specifies which styles appear in the Styles list. You can list only the styles in use, styles that you defined, or all styles. 518 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Tip The only styles that appear in the list are styles that are saved in the current document. The styles saved in a styles resource document are not listed. However, if you click New, you can select a style from a style resource document to use as a base style for the new style that you are creating.
Description - Displays a description of the settings in the style. Apply - Applies the style selected in the Styles box to elements that you selected. Applying a new style to elements that you selected removes the current formats for the element. New - Accesses one of the New Style dialog boxes so that you can create a new style. Modify - Accesses one of the Modify Style dialog boxes so that you can modify the style that you selected in the Styles list. Delete - Deletes the selected style from the document or template. Resources - Allows you to add style resource documents to the current template with the Style Resources dialog box.
New Line Style Dialog Box

Creates a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics. You can also define a new dash definition.
Name Tab
Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when you click New or Modify on the Styles dialog box.
Tab Options
Name - Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters (including aliases and separators) and can include any combination of characters and spaces, except the backslash character (\), semicolon (;), and braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive. Based On - Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is based on. Description - Displays a description of the formatting options.
General Tab
Sets formats for a line.
Tab Options
Style - Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element. Color - Sets the drawing color. Width - Sets the line width. Type - Defines how the line appears. Description - Displays a description of the formatting options.
New Text Box Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other characteristics.
New Dimension Style Dialog Box

Creates a new dimension style.
Modify Line Style Dialog Box

Modifies a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics or a dash definition. Note For a detailed explanation of the tabbed options available on the Modify Line Style dialog box, refer to the following section of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes New Line Style Dialog Box.
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box

Modifies a style by allowing you to specify new characteristics. Note For a detailed explanation of the tabbed options available on the Modify Text Box Style dialog box, refer to the following section of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes - New Text Box Style Dialog Box.
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box

Modifies a dimension style. Note For a detailed explanation of the tabbed options available on the Modify Dimension Style dialog box, refer to the following section SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 521
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes: New Dimension Style Dialog Box.
Segmented Style Command

Applies a line type, line weight, or color to part of an element. When you apply the line type, line weight, or color, the format extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line type or color. This is handy if you want to change the appearance of just part of an element.
Caution If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color using Segmented Style. Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element. Tip To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu with Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
Reapply Style Dialog Box

Redefines a style according to the formatting of selected element, or returns the formatting of selected element to that of the style currently applied to it.
Dialog Box Options

Style - Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element. Do You Want To Redefine The Style Using The Selection As An Example? - Changes the formatting of the current style to the formatting applied to the element that you selected. Do You Want To Return The Formatting Of The Selection To The Style? 522 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview - Applies the formatting of the current style to the element that you selected.
Style Resources Dialog Box

Lists style resource documents that are available to the current document. Resources can be any .igr document or MicroStation line style resource with an .RSC extension. The styles in the style resource document are available for use in the current document.
Dialog Box Options

Style Resource Files - Lists the style resource documents that are attached to the current document. When you attach one of these documents to a template, the styles in the document appear on the Style dropdown list of the ribbon in the current document. A style is copied into the current document from the style resource document when you select this style on the ribbon. A style is also copied when you apply the style to an element or annotation on the drawing sheet. For example, if you attach DIMENSION.igr to the document, the dimension styles in DIMENSION.igr appear on the dropdown list when you select a dimension on the drawing sheet of the active document. You can then apply any of the styles to the dimension. The dimension style that you applied is then copied from DIMENSION.igr into the active document when you save it. Add - Allows you to add a style resource document to the Style Resource Files list with the Add Style Resource dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select .RSC or .igr documents and add them to the Style Resource Files list on the Style Resources dialog box. Remove - Removes a style resource document from the Style Resource Files list. You must first select a document in that list.
Applying Unique Formats: An Overview

At times, you may want to make geometric elements, dimensions, fills, or annotations look different from other ones on the drawing. To do this, you can edit the formats of the element directly. When you do this, the formats are applied only to the selected element or the one you are about to draw. This overrides whatever settings are applied to it by the style, without changing the style.
Formatting Individual Elements

Before you place or draw an element, you can set unique formats with the ribbon, without changing the style. The commands on the Format menu, SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 523
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview except for Style, can also be used to set an element's formats before you place or draw it. For example, if you click Text Box, a style appears in the Style box on the ribbon. The style contains a format for bold fonts. If you turn Bold off on the ribbon, the text box that you place will not display bold text. You can also apply unique formats to an existing element, dimension, fill, or annotation. You can select the element and then edit the formats with the ribbon or Properties on the Edit menu. For example, if you select a text box that has a style that displays borders, you can remove the borders with Properties on the Edit menu. Since you are changing the element's format, and not its style, the style of the text box still contains borders. If you apply this style to any other text box, it will still display borders.
Formatting More Than One Element

You can change the format of more than one element at a time by selecting the elements and formatting them the same way you would format an individual element. However, all the elements that you select must be of the same type. For example, if you select several text boxes, you can apply settings to all of them at once. You cannot apply the same settings to a dimension and a text box by selecting both of them at once.
Format a Geometric Element

1. Select a geometric element, such as a line, arc, or circle. 2. Do one of the following: Notes You can also format an element before you draw it by clicking Line on the Format menu, or by setting options on the ribbon. Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line style formats. You can change the definition of a line style with the Style dialog box. On the ribbon, set the options you want. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
Format a Text Box

1. Select a text box. 2. Do one of the following: Notes You can format a text box before you place it by using Text Box on the Format menu or by setting options on the ribbon. To format a group of text boxes quickly and easily, select several text boxes and apply a text style by clicking a style on the ribbon. If you apply a text style, you can override the formats of the style by setting options on the ribbon or Text Box Properties dialog box. To apply a border to a text box, click a border option on the ribbon. To change the settings for the border, you must select the text and then set options with Properties on the shortcut menu. On the ribbon, set the options you want. To apply several formats at once, click a style on the ribbon. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
Format a Dimension or Annotation

1. Select a dimension or annotation. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties. 3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want. Tip For more information about the options, click Related Topics. Notes You can format a dimension or annotation before you place it by using Dimension on the Format menu, or by setting options on the ribbon. You can also set formatting options on the Dimension ribbon. You can also change a dimension style using Style on the Format menu. Dimension styles apply to dimensions and all annotations, except text boxes and callouts. If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click to select SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 525
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview the leader line of the balloon. Then, you can change the formats of the balloon.

Properties Command (Edit Menu)
Edits the properties of a selected element, group, symbol, dimension, or annotation. If you select a group of elements, you can edit only the common properties of that group. You can also edit the properties of a border around an inserted object, called a SmartFrame. Tip Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate an element and then right-click. Edit Properties is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets the display properties and user-defined properties for elements.
Info Tab
The contents of this tab varies depending on whether you selected or highlighted one of the following types of elements: Line Arc Circle Curve Ellipse Point Fillet Chamfer Rectangle
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Connector
Line Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Start Point - Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. End Point - Sets the x and y values for the end point of an element. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Length - Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value. Angle - Sets the angle of a line.
Arc Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Start Point - Sets the x and y values for the start point of the element. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Center Point - Sets the x and y values for the center point of the arc. 528 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. End Point - Sets the x and y values for the end point of an element. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Radius - Sets the radius. Start Angle - Displays the angle formed by the x axis and the first point of the sweep angle. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis. Sweep Angle - Sets the sweep angle.
Circle Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Center Point - Sets the x and y values for the center point of the circle. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Radius - Sets the radius. Diameter - Sets the diameter of the circle. Circumference - Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry. Area - Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Curve Tab Options

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Curve Type - Displays the type of curve (open or closed). You cannot edit this field. Order - Displays the order of the curve. Higher order curves are more accurate or precise than lower order curves. All curves drawn with the curve command will be 4th order curves. Vertices - Sets the coordinates of the nodes on the curve. Nodes - Lists the nodes on a selected curve. When you select a node from the list, its x and y values are displayed so you can edit them. The node type is also displayed. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. Length - Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value. Area - Displays the area of a closed curve. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Ellipse Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Center Point - Sets the x and y values for the center point of a closed element. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. 530 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Primary Axis - Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the primary axis.
Secondary Axis - Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular to the primary axis.
Rotation Angle - Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. Circumference - Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry. Area - Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Point Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Coordinate - Sets the x and y values for an element. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Fillet Tab Options

Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Radius - Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.
Chamfer Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Angle - Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first linear element you selected. Setback B - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the second linear element you selected.
Rectangle Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. 532 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Centroid - Defines the exact center of the rectangle with X and Y coordinates. Height - Sets the height of the rectangle or square. Width - Sets the width of the rectangle or square. Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. Circumference - Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry. Area - Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Connector Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet. Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element. Start Point - Sets the x and y values for the start point of the connector. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option. End Point - Sets the x and y values for the end point of a connector. X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option. # Vertices - Sets the number of vertices for a connector.
Format Tab
Tab Options
Style - Sets the drawing style. Color - Sets the drawing color. Width - Sets the line width. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 533
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Command (Format Menu)

Formats a new line as you place it.
Format Line Dialog Box

Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line on the Format menu. You define line styles by clicking Style on the Format menu. Note For a detailed explanation of the tabbed option available on the Format Line dialog box, refer to the following section of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes New Line Style Dialog Box.
Text Box Command (Format Menu)

Formats a new text box as you place it.
Dimension Command (Format Menu)

Formats a new dimension as you place it.
Format Dimension Dialog Box

Sets options for placing dimensions. You can access this dialog box with Dimension on the Format menu. You can define dimension styles with Style on the Format menu. Note For a detailed explanation of the tabbed options available on the Format Dimension dialog box, refer to the following section of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes: New Dimension Style Dialog Box.
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for a frame, called a SmartFrame, that provides a border for an object when you insert or paste the object into the current document. You can scale the object by dragging one of the handles on the frame. Or, you can crop the object by pressing the Shift and dragging one of the handles.
Info Tab
Provides information about frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from other applications.
Tab Options
Type - Displays the category of the selected element. You cannot edit the type. Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element. You cannot edit the sheet. Layers - Sets the layer that contains the selected element. Origin- Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X and Y-axes. Link - Determines the way that the object links with a SmartFrame. This option is available only for linked objects. As Part of the Model (Public)- Allows the linked object to publicly appear in any document that links to the current document. Therefore, if you link an object to the current drawing and then link to the current drawing from another document, the current drawing and the linked object appear in the other document. For example, this setting is useful if you link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents to appear in the current drawing with the comments. As Reference Only (Private)- Restricts the linked object from being displayed in any document that links to the current document. If the current drawing is linked to another document, the linked object does not appear in the other document. For example, this setting could be useful if you want to link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents to display the drawing, but not the comments. Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This means that the representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the realworld object being described.
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. Tip Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet, but allows you to specify where to insert the file by clicking the drawing sheet.
Custom- Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing sheet and the second value defines this distance in a real-world value.
Format Tab
Allows you to format frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from other applications.
Tab Options
Show Border - Displays the frame border around the object. Line Width - Sets the line width. Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line style for an element or linked object. Frame Shape - Sets the frame shape around the object. Rectangular - Sets the shape as rectangular. Elliptical - Sets the shape as an ellipse. Boundary - Sets the shape as user-defined. This option allows the user to create a customized shape that represents the SmartFrame boundary. The customized shape can consist of circles, lines, arcs, etc, which create a closed shape.
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries: An Overview

You can fill a boundary with a pattern or a solid color using Fill on the Draw toolbar. A fill is like other elements in that you can format it and move it around, but the fill is always associated with a boundary. The boundary can be made up of more than one element, but it must be closed on all sides. The following figure shows a pattern fill and solid fill.
The software provides styles for fills for various engineering standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and AIA.
Modifying Fills
A fill is associative, which means it maintains its original orientation to an element regardless of the way you manipulate the element. For example, if you move the boundary, the fill moves with it. If you change the boundary, the fill changes to conform to the new boundary area.
A fill can exist only inside a closed boundary. If you drag a fill to another region, the fill assumes the shape of the region where you dragged it. If you open a closed boundary, the fill changes color to indicate that it is disabled. If you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show that it is now active.
Formatting Fills
Formatting a fill is similar to applying formats to an element. You can apply unique formats to fills using Properties on the Edit menu or by setting options on the ribbon. To make several fills look the same, you can apply a fill style by selecting the style on the ribbon. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 537
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Tip The blank color on the Fill ribbon takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style. Tip If you want to copy a fill style from document to another, just create a fill, apply a style, and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a dropdown list on the Fill ribbon in the new document.
Place a Fill
You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. 1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fill .
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings you want. 3. Click inside one or more closed boundaries that you want to fill.
Notes When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not automatically update to fit the new boundary. You can refill the new boundary by selecting the fill handle, then
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview clicking Redo Fill on the ribbon to apply the fill to the new boundary. You can also refill an area by dragging the handle to the new area. To fill a boundary quickly, you can zoom in on it first using Zoom Area on the View menu. You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style.
Format a Fill
1. Select a fill. 2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want to update the fill. Notes You can format a fill before you place it by setting options on the ribbon or using Properties on the Edit menu. You can apply several formats at once by clicking a new fill style in the Style list box on the ribbon. You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name in the Style list box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style. If you want to copy a fill style from document to another, just create a fill, apply a style, and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a dropdown list on the Fill ribbon in the new document. The blank color on the Fill ribbon takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
Create a Fill Color

When you change a fill by setting options on the ribbon, you can create custom colors for the fill. 1. Select the Fill command. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 539
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Note: The existing fill will be replaced by the pattern and color you select. Note Pattern Color will not be selectable when Solid Color is selected. 3. At the bottom of the palette, click More 4. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to create a new color. 5. Click Add to Custom Colors. 6. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you created. This name appears on the palettes for Solid Color or Pattern Color on the Fill ribbon.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Solid Color or Pattern Color.
Refill a Modified Boundary

When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not automatically update to fit the new boundary. 1. Select the fill handle inside the fill. 2. On the Fill ribbon, click Redo Fill to apply the fill to the new boundary. Notes You can also refill an area by dragging the fill handle to the new area.

Fill Command (Draw Toolbar)
Places a fill inside a closed boundary. You can modify fill properties with the Fill ribbon.
You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.
Fill Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a fill.
Fill Ribbon
Displays the active settings for a fill. Tip To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Style - Lists and applies the available styles. To define a new fill style, you can type a name in the box. The new style uses the current settings on the ribbon. Pattern Color - Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select none, the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box.
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview Solid Color - Applies a system color to set the background color for the fill. If you select none, the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box. Tip The blank fill color takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
Redo Fill - Re-applies a fill to a filled area when the boundary changes. A fill can become disabled, and change color, if you modify its boundary by drawing another element or moving part of the existing boundary. If you click Redo Fill, the area surrounding the fill handle is filled again. Angle - Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side (B) of the x axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive value.
Spacing - Sets the spacing between the pattern lines.
Custom Color Name Dialog Box

Saves a color that you created with a name. This dialog box appears after you create a color with the Colors dialog box.
Dialog Box Options

Color Name - Specifies the name of the color that you created on the Colors dialog box. After you save the custom color with a name, the name appears on the color palette.
Sample Workflows
Formatting a New Drawing
You can use styles to make new drawings conform to your company's standards. For example, the software provides line styles with names such as Normal. You have decided to apply the Normal style to hidden lines. The Normal style has a line type that looks like a dashed line.
Your company standard may require that a hidden line look like a dotted line.
To change the Normal line style to conform to your companys standards, you can follow these steps: 1. Click Format > Style. 2. On the Style dialog box, click the line style type in the Style Type box. 3. In the Styles list box, click the Normal line style. 4. Click Modify to access the Modify Line Style dialog box. 5. On the General tab, in the Type box, select the line type that looks like a dotted line. All the lines that you draw while the Normal style is selected on the ribbon will conform to your companys standards: hidden lines will appear as dotted lines. You can save the style to a template with Style on the Format menu. This allows you to use the style again in other drawings.
Formatting an Existing Drawing

You can use styles to make existing drawings conform to your company's standards. Suppose you receive a drawing from another company, and all the hidden lines are continuous.
Your company standard indicates that hidden lines should be a line type that is dashed. You have been using a line style, called Dashed, to conform to the standards used by your company.
To change the hidden lines in the drawing quickly and efficiently, you can SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 543
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview follow these steps: 1. Open the drawing that you received from the other company. 2. Select all the lines that you want to change. 3. On the ribbon, select Dashed in the Style box to change all the lines that you have selected. All the lines now appear as dashed lines instead of continuous lines.
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview

SmartSketch supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to provide a flexible and efficient means of inserting and working with external objects. An object is data created in another application and inserted in a SmartSketch drawing. Part of the power OLE provides is the ability to update objects automatically if they've been modified in their source document, or edit objects in place. SmartSketch is fully compatible with OLE-compliant software, such as Microsoft Office. You can transfer text, numbers, sound bites, or intelligent graphics between documents that were created with SmartSketch and other Microsoft Office applications. For example, you can use Microsoft Word to create a materials report and then display the report in your SmartSketch document. You can also link a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to the Variable Table in a SmartSketch document. You can then use the value in the spreadsheet to control the dimensions in the SmartSketch drawing. You can even create a document that contains a drawing created by SmartSketch, notes from Microsoft Word, a spreadsheet created by Excel, and an image created in Photoshop. You can insert objects into your SmartSketch drawings using any of the following methods: Linking Embedding Cutting/Copying-and-Pasting
Linking
Linking takes data that's stored in one location (referred to as the source document) and places a reference to it in another location (referred to as the destination document). Linking allows you to use consistently updated versions of an object in multiple SmartSketch drawings. You can edit the linked object only by opening the source document and making your changes there. When you change the original data, the linked data automatically updates. You can link an object in a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.
Relative Paths for Linked Objects

Linked objects placed in a SmartSketch drawing are saved as relative links. You can think of a relative link as being a "child" of the SmartSketch drawing in which it is inserted. A relative link points to the location of the linked file in SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 545
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview relation to the "parent" drawing. For example, a link to Building\Doors\door1.igr points to a file called door1.igr, which is located in the Building/Doors subdirectory inside the directory or folder where the parent drawing is located. The use of relative links in your SmartSketch projects enables you to create drawings that are portable, meaning you can copy or move an entire directory structure to another location without updating the file paths. Important The parent drawing must already exist as a saved file prior to inserting the linked object; otherwise, there is no "relative" location.
Embedding
Embedding takes data from the source document and stores a copy of the information in the destination document. The copy becomes an independent version of the original information. Although editing the data in the original application has no effect on the copied version, you can edit the embedded object in-place from within the SmartSketch drawing. You can embed an object inside a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.
Linking and Embedding with Copy/Cut-and-Paste

You're not limited to using the SmartSketch Insert menu to link or embed files. You can move information between documents or between locations using Cut, Copy, and Paste on the Edit menu in any OLE-compliant software. You can also move information between SmartSketch and other software by selecting the information in a document or a document in the Windows Explorer and dragging it to another location or another document. With this method, you simply select the information that you want to move, press the left mouse button, and drag the document to a location inside SmartSketch or another Office application. To finish the operation, release the left mouse button. Note If you want to copy the information, and not move it, press Alt while dragging the object.
When you drop the information, a shortcut menu appears beside the pointer. The options on the shortcut menu allow you to select how you want to place the information in the destination document, such as pasting, linking, and so forth. 546 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview If the software that you are copying or pasting to cannot edit the information, it will automatically store, or embed, the information in the document. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. If you cannot edit the information, the information is displayed as a static picture.
When Do I Link or Embed?

Choosing whether to link or embed depends, in large part, on how you intend to use your SmartSketch drawing. Linking is useful when you want to share information in many different places and have that information update automatically. For example, if you want to display a SmartSketch drawing in several different documents, you can link the drawing inside each document. Then, later, when you edit the drawing, each document automatically displays the results of the drawing updates. Another consideration is file size. Because linking only adds a reference to a file, the data does not significantly increase the size of the SmartSketch drawing. If you want to keep the document's size small, considering linking the data. If the document's size is not an important factor, then you might want to use embedding. Because an embedded object becomes part of the SmartSketch drawing, it will increase the file size. Embedding is also useful when you want to keep your data in one file, or if you want to distribute the data among several people who may not have access to the source application. For example, if you want to send out several drawings for review, you can embed your drawing document into a Word document and mail the Word document to each reviewer. Embedding information is also a good choice if the information does not require frequent updating. Important If you want to embed an object or edit an embedded object, you must have access to the software that created it.
How Embedding Works: An Overview

When you embed data from another program, the object becomes part of the SmartSketch drawing. When you double-click the embedded object in SmartSketch, the software in which the object was created opens so that you can edit it. When you go back to SmartSketch, the object updates automatically with the changes that you made. The changes, however, exist only in the current SmartSketch drawing You can embed existing information or create a new object and then embed it.
Embedding an Object
Suppose you want to use Word to add comments to a SmartSketch drawing. First, you click Object on the Insert menu. On the dialog box, click Create New and then click Microsoft Word in the list. After you click OK, Word opens so that you can edit the object. If Word is already open, the new document creates a new window in Word. After you type your notes, you click Update on the File menu in Word. You should then switch back to the SmartSketch document or drawing. A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the Word object and display your notes on the drawing sheet. You can use this same process with any documents created with Office-compatible or OLE-aware software. If you want to insert some notes that you already have in a Word document, you can use Object on the Insert menu. On the dialog box, you should select Create From File and then enter the name of the Word document to insert the entire document into the SmartSketch document. Tip If you want to embed the object, you should make sure the Link check box is not set.
You can also embed information that you copied from another document. Copy the information and then switch to the SmartSketch document. Use Paste Special to paste the information as an embedded object. If you want to use a mouse to embed objects, you can select the information in the source software and then drag it into another document. You can also drag the document that you want to embed from the Windows Explorer or SmartSketch Explorer into a SmartSketch document. The object is placed with the mouse drop point at the center of the object. When dropping SmartSketch documents, you can place the object coincident SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 549
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview with the coordinate system of the container document. To do this, select Coincident on the Reference Files tab of the Options dialog box.
Editing an Embedded Object

To edit an embedded object, you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened. Tip The software that created both documents must support OLE. You can also click commands on the shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. To get the shortcut menu, select the embedded object and then right-click.
Embed an Object
To Embed a New Object
1. Click Insert > Object. 2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create New. 3. In the Object Type box, click the type that describes the software in which you want to create the object, and then click OK. The contents of the list depend on which applications installed on your computer support linking and embedding. 4. To return to SmartSketch, do one of the following: If the object was created in another application that is in a separate window, click Exit or Update on the File menu in that application. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document, click Yes. If the software temporarily replaces some of the SmartSketch menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object. When you return to SmartSketch, a box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created.
Tip While the box appears beside the pointer, if you hit ESCAPE, the object will be placed at the default location. You can set the default
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview location with Options on the Tools menu. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
To Embed an Existing Object

1. Click Insert > Object. 2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create From File. 3. In the File Name box, type or click the name of the object you want to embed, and then click OK. Tip If you do not see the file that you want to embed, click a different drive or volume, directory or folder.
4. A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created. Tip While the box appears beside the pointer, if you hit ESCAPE, the object will be placed at the default location. You can set the default location using Options on the Tools menu. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box. Notes If you are working in the source software, you can embed an existing object using Paste Special on the Edit menu. You can also embed an object by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows Explorer into a SmartSketch document. If you insert SmartSketch document into the current document, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document.
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software

1. Double-click the embedded object. 2. Edit the object. 3. Do one of the following: If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 551
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to SmartSketch. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces the menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to SmartSketch.
Notes If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to SmartSketch. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces the SmartSketch menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to SmartSketch.

Object Command (Insert Menu)
Inserts objects into a document through linking and embedding. The difference between linking and embedding is how data is stored and updated. The Object command inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word document, .AVI document, or CAD document. The inserted object can then be edited by double-clicking it. When you link an object to a document, the document stores information about where the object is locatedthe object is not stored in the document. When you embed an object in a document, a copy of the object is stored in the document. When you make changes to a linked object, all documents that have links to that object update. When you make changes to an embedded object, only the copy of the object that is stored in the document updates.
Insert Object Dialog Box

Create New - Creates a new object to insert into the file that is currently open. After you insert the object, you will be able to automatically enter information into it. Create from File - Inserts an entire document into the file that is currently open. You will be able to edit the inserted object with the program used to create the file. File - Provides a space to type the file name you want to insert into your document. Browse - Provides a dialog box for locating the file you want to insert into your document. Link - Allows you to choose whether you want to link or embed your file. Result - Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes depending on the type of file you are inserting. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 553
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box, and then click on a dialog box control.
How Linking Works: An Overview

Suppose you are sketching a drawing with SmartSketch and you want to include it in an engineering change request that was created in Word. You are going to update the drawing several times and want the change request to reflect the latest updates. A good way to keep the updates current is to link the drawing to the Word document and then periodically update the link.
Creating a Link
You can create links between documents as easily as you cut and paste information. To create a link to an entire document, you can insert information into the destination document with Object on the Insert menu. This is convenient when you do not want to switch away from the document in which you are currently working. You can also link information by dragging and dropping the document from the Windows Explorer or the SmartSketch Explorer into a SmartSketch document. You must press Ctrl + Shift while dragging and dropping the document. If you do not press the keys, the document is embedded. To create a link to just part of a document, you can copy the information in the source document and then use Paste Special in the destination document to create the link. You must save the document before the link is established. The software that created both documents must support OLE.
Reconnecting or Changing a Link

When you move a document or rename the source document, the links in the destination document are broken. To reconnect the link to the source document or change the link to another document, you can click Links on the Edit menu.
Updating a Link
Suppose you linked revision notes in a Word document to your SmartSketch drawing. You have revised your notes in Word since you first created the link. You must now update the link in the SmartSketch document so that it displays the latest revisions to your notes. You can specify whether the updates happen automatically when you change the Word notes or if you must manually update the link in your original document. First, click Links on the Edit menu and then, on the Links dialog box, select the link that you want to set. You can then click Automatic or Manual. With Automatic set, SmartSketch updates the links every time you open the document. With Manual set, SmartSketch updates the links only when you click Update Now on the Links dialog box.
Editing Linked Information

The best way to edit linked information is to change it in the source document, not in the destination document where the information is displayed. To edit the linked information, double-click on the linked object.
Breaking a Link
If you do not need to automatically update the information displayed in the destination document, you can break the link using Links on the Edit menu. Once the link is broken, the information still appears in the destination document, but you cannot update the information or reconnect the link. You must create a new link instead.
Link an Object
Make sure that you save the source document before you link the information.
To create a link to another document

1. In the software in which the information you want to link was created, open the source document and then select the information that you want to link. 2. Click Edit > Copy. 3. Switch to your original document. 4. Click Edit > Paste Special. 5. Click Paste Link. Tip This option is available only if the software that created the document supports OLE.
6. Under As, click the option that you want.
To create a link to another document without leaving the software

1. Click Insert > Object. 2. Click Create From File. 3. In the File Name box, type or select the name and directory path of the document to which you want to link. 4. Click the Link To File check box. Tip With this procedure, you can create a link only to an entire 556 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview document; you cannot link to a selection in a document. Notes SmartSketch creates links as automatic links by default. SmartSketch updates automatic links each time you open the document and each time the data in the source document changes, whereas it updates manual links only when you specify. To change the way the software updates links, see Update a Link. You can also link information by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows Explorer or SmartSketch Explorer onto the drawing sheet. You must press Ctrl + Shift while dragging and dropping to link the information. If you do not press a key, the information will be embedded. If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the document, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document.
Open an OLE Object for Editing

1. Select an OLE object. 2. Do one of the following: If the object is linked, right-click to display the shortcut menu and click Edit Object > Open to open the application in which the object was created. If the object is embedded, double-click the object to edit it.
Edit a Link
1. Click Edit > Links. 2. On the Links dialog box, click the link you want to edit. 3. If the link does not appear in the list, click Change Source and use the Change Source dialog box to search for the link you want to edit. 4. Click Open Source. 5. Make the changes you want in the source file. 6. Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file.
Change a Link
1. Click Edit > Links. 2. Click the link you want to change. Tip To click multiple links, hold down Ctrl while you click on each link.
3. Click Change Source. 4. In the File Name box, type or click the name of the file to which you want to change the link. Notes If you do not see the file you want to open, click a different drive, directory, or folder. If you have other links to the same source file, make sure you change all links from the previous source file to the new source file.
Break a Link
1. Click Edit > Links. 2. In the Source File box, click the link or links you want to break. 3. Click Break Link, and then when the software prompts you to confirm that you want to break the link, click Yes. 4. Click Close.
Close an Object's Document and Save the Changes

Close and Return are available only after you double-click an object and edit it. Click File > Close > Return. The changes you made to the object are saved to memory. Notes When you use Close and Return, you are not asked to save the document until you exit SmartSketch. You can use Revert to close the document without saving your
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview changes.

Links Command (Edit Menu)
Edits or updates links to objects in another document.
Links Dialog Box

Displays information about links in a document including file name, file location, and whether the link is automatically or manually updated. Links - Displays the current links in the document including the link type and the update status. Source - Displays the source of the linked file. Type - Displays the linked file type. Update - Allows you to choose whether your link is updated automatically or manually. If you select Automatic, whenever you change the linked information in the original document, this document will be updated. If you select Manual, you will need to click Update Now to update information in your document. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the in the upper right corner of the dialog box and Question Mark click the control that you want information about.
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview

Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. You can use your favorite standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware, such as Microsoft Visual Basic. There are several ways to customize the software: You can add built-in commands or macros to the toolbars and menus delivered with the software. You can go a step further and create your own macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Macros can automate a series of tasks and speed up your work.
Customizing with Built-In Commands

You can add built-in commands or macros to the toolbars and menus delivered with the software. You can also add button commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar. For example, you can place Sheet Setup on the Main toolbar as a button. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu, you click Customize on the Tools menu. From there, you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software, you can start by clicking Toolbars on the View menu. You then click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. After you click OK, the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. Tip When you add commands or buttons to the menus or toolbars in the software, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
Customizing with Macros

Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software, you can also create your own macros that can be added to the menus and toolbars in the same manner. Customize on the Tools menu allows you to add macros to software's standard menus and toolbars. You can also run the macros directly by clicking Macro on the Tools menu and selecting the macro.
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA (inside Excel), Visual C++ Delphi, Visual Basic, and so forth. A type library is delivered with the software containing all the objects, properties, and methods available with the product. On the Help menu, click Programming with SmartSketch to access the programming Help. In the Table of Contents, you can also get a complete reference to the objects, methods, and properties. You can view the type library with Visual Basic's type library browser or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application. Practical examples of macros are also delivered with the software.
Custom Command Macros Delivered with the Software

The software provides custom command macros whose source can be viewed in the \SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM directory. These macros have been compiled into the \SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM\BIN directory. There you will find stand-alone .EXE files and a subdirectory called OLESVR that contains OLE-server .EXE files and .DLL files. The files in the OLESVR directory can executed directly from within the software. A README.TXT document located in the source directory for each macro explains how to run them. Tip If you did not install the macros and macros source during installation of the software, you must run the Setup program again. In the Setup program, you must select the Custom setup.
For example, you can run the EXTEND.EXE custom command macro inside the software. This sample was written in Visual Basic and compiled as an OLE-server executable program. A README.TXT document for each custom command macro provides more details on compiling as an OLE server. You can find the README.TXT for each custom command macro in a specific directory: \PROGRAM FILES\Smartsketch\CUSTOM<SAMPLE MACRO NAME>\README.TXT. For example, the README.TXT document for EXTEND.EXE is found in \PROGRAM FILES\Smartsketch\CUSTOM\EXTEND\README.TXT.
Add-Ins Included with the Software

The following add-ins are included with the software and are located in the \Addins directory or one of its subdirectories. If you cannot locate the add-in on your hard disk or network drive, you can select Macro Library or other add-in option in the Setup program to install these add-ins.
Add-in Description
Auto Save The Wizard of ORG
Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify. Creates organization charts quickly and easily.
Customize the Software with the Options Command

You can use Options on the Tools menu to customize the software. You can change such things as the screen appearance, document location, and display colors. 1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Options dialog box, select the tab containing the information you want to customize. 3. Use the controls on the Options dialog box to make the appropriate changes.
Create a New Toolbar

1. Click View > Toolbars. 2. On the Toolbars dialog box, click New. 3. On the New Toolbars dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar. When you click OK, the Customize dialog box appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. 4. On the Toolbars tab, click the category containing the command that you want to add. 5. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar. Tip When you create a new toolbar, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
Add a Button to a Toolbar

1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Toolbars tab, click the category that contains the command you want to add. 3. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
Remove a Command from a Toolbar

1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Toolbars tab, drag the button you want to remove from the toolbar and drop it outside the toolbar boundary. Tip When you remove commands from the toolbars, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings

If you customize a toolbar, you can restore the toolbar to the original settings. 1. Click View > Toolbars. 2. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to restore. 3. Click Reset. 4. Click OK.
Run a Macro
1. Click Tools > Macro. 2. On the Run Macro dialog box, click the macro you want to run. 3. Click Run. Notes You can create macros with any programming tool that supports OLE automation, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.
Create a New Menu

1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box. 3. In the List box, click the name of an existing menu. 4. Click Add Menu. The new menu is added after the existing menu. Tip If you want to add a menu to an existing menu, set the Place Into 564 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview Selected Menu check box before you click Add Menu. You can add commands to the new menu later to create a cascading menu. 5. In the List box, type the name of the menu and click anywhere away from the name to enter it. Tip When you create menus, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
Add a Command to a Menu

1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box. 3. In the Commands/Macros box, click the name of the command that you want to add. 4. In the List box, double-click the name of an existing menu that you want to add a command to. The List box expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 5. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after. 6. Set the Place Into Selected Menu check box. Caution If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar, do not set the Place Into Selected Menu check box. The name of the new command will be added to the main menu bar after the existing menu that you selected in the List box. Tip When you add buttons to the menus, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
7. Add Command. The new command is added after the existing command.
Delete a Command From a Menu

1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Menu tab, double-click a menu in the List box. The List box expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 3. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the menu or the main menu bar. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 565
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview 4. Click Remove. Tip When you delete a command from a menu, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings

1. Click Tools > Customize. 2. On the Menu tab, click Reset All. Notes If you remove Customize from the Tools menu, you can restore it by positioning the pointer over a toolbar and, on the shortcut menu and clicking Customize.
Installing Additional Tools

Add-ins are commands or functions that add special capabilities the software. To install an add-in, choose Add-Ins from the Tools menu. After you install an add-in, its commands or functions become an integrated part of the software until you remove the add-in.
Add-Ins Included with the Software

The following add-ins are included with the software and are located in the \Addins directory or one of its subdirectories. If you cannot locate the add-in on your hard disk or network drive, you can select Macro Library or other add-in option in the Setup program to install these add-ins. Add-in Auto Save The Wizard of ORG Description Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify. Creates organization charts quickly and easily.
Install or Remove an Add-In

1. Click Tools > Add-Ins. 2. To install an add-in, select the associated check box. 566 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview Tip The add-ins you install are active until you remove them. Notes To remove, clear the check box associated with the add-in. The software removes the add-ins the next time you start this application. If the add-in you want to install is not listed in the Add-Ins dialog box, choose Browse and locate the drive, directory, and filename for the add-in.

Add-Ins Command (Tools Menu)
Allows you to select add-ins that are automatically available and ready to use when you start the software. With Add-Ins, you can install or remove: Add-ins that come with the software. Add-ins that you create.
Add-Ins Available
Lists the available add-ins. You can select or clear the add-in check boxes to install or remove add-ins in the software.
Browse
Lists the available drives and directories from which you can select an add-in to install in the software
Customize Command (Tools Menu)

Allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow.
Customize Dialog Box

Customizes toolbar buttons and menus.
Menu Tab
Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want.
Tab Options
Categories - Sets the category that you want to select a command or macro from to add to the menu or main menu bar. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box, you can click the title of a command in the Commands/Macros box. When you select Macros in the Categories box, you can click a macro document in the Commands/Macros box. Commands/Macros - Sets the command or macro that you want to add to the menu. If you select a macro, you can also click Browse and change the directory for macros. When you change the directory, the macro list in the Commands/Macros box displays a list of macros in the current directory. List - Lists the menus. Double-click on a menu name to see all the commands on a menu. When you click Add Command, Add Menu, Place Into Selected Menu, or Remove, the changes show up on this list. This list also changes to allow you type in a name for the new menu that you want to add. Place Into Selected Menu - Places a command or macro that you selected in the Commands/Macros box on the menu that you selected in the List. If you do not set this option, then the macros or commands that you are adding are placed before or after the command or menu that you selected in the List box. Reset All - Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. Add Command - Places a command on a menu or the main menu bar. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands/Macros box. Add Menu - Places a menu on an existing menu or the main menu bar. When you add a menu with this option, you can add commands to the new menu later. If you add a menu to an existing menu, this creates a cascading menu. After you click this button, you can type the name that you want in the List box and then click away from the name to enter it. Remove - Removes the command or menu that you selected in the List box.
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview Description - Displays a description or result of the options that you selected before you apply them to a menu. Browse - Changes the directory for macros with the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Browse appears only when you click Macros in the Categories box. The Select Macro Directory dialog box changes the directory for listing macros on the Customize dialog box. When you change the directory and click OK, the Commands/Macros box lists the macros for the directory that you selected. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.
When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities.
Toolbars Tab
Adds or removes commands from toolbars.
Tab Options
Categories - Specifies the category that you want to customize. Buttons - Specifies which button from the active category you want to add to a toolbar. Description - Describes the selected button displayed in the Buttons box.
Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Creates new toolbars and displays or hides selected toolbars. You can also change toolbar color schemes and button sizes.
Toolbars Dialog Box

Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars. 570 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Dialog Box Options

Toolbars - Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar you want to display, hide, or change. Toolbar Name - Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected. New - Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a name for the new toolbar. Customize - Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. Reset - Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons. Color Buttons - Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared, toolbar buttons are black and white. Large Buttons - Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. Show ToolTips - Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over it. OK - Saves changes and dismisses the dialog. Cancel - Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog. Help - Displays the Help topic for this dialog.
Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Runs a macro. Tip Macro is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Run Macro Dialog Box

Selects the macro that you want to run. When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 571
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the document somewhere else, and other activities. Tip To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the in the upper right corner of the dialog box and Question Mark click the control that you want information about.
Sample Workflow
Customizing a Toolbar
Using Extend to Next on the Draw toolbar, you can extend one line to the next line. This command is easy and intuitive to use. However, sometimes you might want to extend a line a specific distance that does not depend on the location of another element. 1. In the document, place two lines that are not connected, but are perpendicular. 2. On the Tools menu, click Customize. 3. On the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab. 4. In the Categories box, click Macros. 5. Click Browse. 6. On the Select Macro Directory dialog box, click EXTEND.EXE in the \PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM\BIN\OLESVR directory. Tip If you cannot find the Custom directory, you must run Setup again and select Custom.
7. Click OK. 8. On the Customize dialog box, in the Macros box, drag the EXTEND.EXE filename out of the dialog box. 9. On the Custom Button dialog box, in the Buttons box, click the yellow happy face button. 10. Click Assign. 11. The new button appears on a separate floating toolbar. Drag this toolbar over to the top of the window and place it beside the Main toolbar. 12. On the new toolbar, click the happy face. 13. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, in the Distance box, type 10 and press Enter. The dialog box automatically converts whatever you type into the units of measure that are set for the current document. You can set the units using Properties on the File menu. 14. In the document, drag the mouse over the line that you want to extend. A preview of what the line will look like shows up in a red color. 15. Click the line to set the distance. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 573
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview 16. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, click Close. You can write your own applications that are very similar to the EXTEND.EXE file and run them from within the current document. Click Programming with SmartSketch on the Help menu to get more information about creating your own macros.
Image Integration: An Overview

SmartSketch's Image Integrator provides integrated tools for viewing and manipulating images in a vector/raster drawing environment. You can manipulate all or part of an image using such edits as cut and move, copy and move, tint, paint, or erase. You can adjust contrast and brightness, or invert the pixel values to negative or positive. You can even scale and rotate images to match vector drawings or maps using source and target registration points. Image Integrator supports popular binary grayscale, indexed color, and true color image formats including .GIF, .JPG, .BMO, .TIF, .CAL, .PC, .RLE, .COT, .CIT, .TG4, .CRL, .CMP, and .RGB. Notes When you install the Image Integrator module in conjunction with the CAD Translators module, you can import hybrid raster.vector files into and exported from AutoCAD and Microstation files while maintaining all reference data. When you install the Image Integrator module in conjunction with the Web Publishing module, you can export hybrid raster/vector files that contain hyperlinks to ActiveCGM format and viewed web pages while maintaining hyperlink integrity.
Working with Raster Images

Images created by lines of pixels are called raster images, and the code that represents the pixels in the raster image is called raster data. The format of the raster data in the document determines how the pixels are arranged when the image is displayed. Raster data is unintelligent. A line segment in a raster image cannot be manipulated as a line segment. Rather, it must be manipulated as the collection of pixels that form the line segment. A vector data document is a collection of coherent, geometric elements. Vector data is intelligent. A line segment in a vector file can be manipulated as a line segment. A vector data object is an indivisible entity. A raster image, by contrast, is composed of pixels, arranged to give the appearance of lines, shapes, and characters. When zoomed out, a raster image appears as contiguous lines and shapes. However, if you zoom in, it becomes apparent that a raster image consists of individual foreground pixels, represented as small squares on the screen.
Displaying Raster Images

Image Integrator allows you to display and manipulate raster images along with the vector data on the drawing sheet. When you save the current document, which contains vector graphics, you can save a link to a raster image along with it. This structure can be useful in many ways. For example, if a shopping center is planned for a piece of property, and proposals are sought for the design of the shopping center, an aerial photograph may be taken of the property. The photograph can then be converted into a raster image. Proposals can be submitted as vector documents that each contain a link to the original raster image. In this way, different proposals for the shopping center can be easily evaluated, with each proposal starting from the same raster image of the property.
Inserting an Image
To insert a raster image, you must first install Image Integrator using AddIns on the Tools menu. If you do not see the add-in listed in the Add-In Manager, you must run the Image Integrator Setup to install the add-in. After installingImage Integrator, you can then insert the raster image using the Imagecommand on the Insert menu. You can only link the image; you cannot embed it. To edit various properties of the image border, you can select the image and click Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also insert raster images, edit their properties, and make other modifications using the commands on theImage Integrator ribbon.
Positioning an Image
After you insert a raster image into a document, you can use Position to align the image with a vector element or a group of elements. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or by a single click on the source image. To use Position, select an image and then click Position on the Image Integrator toolbar.
Defining Source and Target Points by Clicking and Dragging

Clicking and dragging (on the image border or within the borders) allows you to drag the image frame to the needed target location. When the image is released the source image will reposition, and display a crosshair, representing the location of the first source point. A second point will be required on the source image to reposition (rotate and/or scale) the image. Click and drag on (or within) the image border, move to the needed location and release. The 576 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Image Integration: An Overview source image will be repositioned, scaled, and rotated about the two points. The location where the source image is released represents the corresponding target points. These target points can be another image file, a vector element, or nothing at all. The source image will be skewed about the two points.
Defining Source and Target Points Using a Single Click

When you define source points using single clicks, you must also use single clicks to define the target points. Depending on where the source and target points are placed, you can use this method to move, scale, rotate, and skew the source image to match a target image.
Insert a Raster Image

1. Click Insert > Image. 2. In the Look In field, select the directory containing the raster image you want to insert. 3. In the File Name field, type the name of the raster image or select it from the list of raster images. Notes You can only link an image; you cannot embed one. You can also insert a raster image using the Insert Image command on the Image Integrator toolbar. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Position an Image by Dragging:

1. Click the image for source point one (on or within the image border). 2. Drag the displayed outline to the appropriate position and release the mouse button at target point one. 3. Click the image again for source point two (on or within the image border). 4. Drag the mouse to scale and rotate the image to the appropriate angle and release the mouse button for target point two. Tip During a drag operation, hold down the Ctrl key to restrict movement to 45 degree increments for placing the second target SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 577
Image Integration: An Overview point. You can also hold down the Shift key to restrict movement in placing the second target point. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Position an Image by a Single Click:

1. With the Select Tool 2. Select the Position active, select the raster image. command from the Image Integrator toolbar. 3. Single click the source image to select source point 1. 4. Single click the target location to place target point 1. 5. Single click the source image again to select source point 2. 6. Single click another location on the target to place target point 2. Notes When you use single clicks, the image is not moved into position until the second target point is defined. You can to exit the command by right-clicking the mouse or by pressing the Esc key.
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Select a Rectangular Area of an Image

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to define a select area. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Rectangular Select Area . 3. Drag to define the rectangular select area on the image. When you drag the crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. Tip You can use the Alt, Shift, and Space Bar keys to modify the default behavior of the Rectangular Select Area command.
4. Release the mouse button to end the rectangular select area. When you complete the rectangle, the solid select area outline becomes a dotted outline. Note As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your selection: Result Constrains the select area to a square with the same aspect ratio. Adds a new area to an existing select area (union). Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference). Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection). Constrains the select area to a square and adds a new area to the existing select area. Constrains the select area to a square and subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area. Constrains the select area to a square and designates the overlapping area as a new select area.
Keyboard Modifier Shift Alt Space Bar Space Bar + Alt Shift + Alt Shift + Space Bar Shift + Space Bar + Alt
Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to define a select area. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Polygonal Select Area . 3. Click to define the first point of the polygon select area. When you select the first point, a dynamically drawn solid line connects the first point to the cursor. 4. Click to define additional points to define the shape of the polygon select area. As you define additional points, the software dynamically displays a solid outline of the polygon. Tips While drawing a polygon-shaped select area, you can back up a point at a time using the Backspace key. When you press the Backspace key, the last line segment in the solid outline is deleted, and you can continue creating the select area from the previous point. You can continue pressing the Backspace key until you are at an appropriate point to begin defining the polygon again. You can also use the Alt and space bar keys to modify the default behavior of the Polygonal Select Area command.
5. Right-click to end the polygon. When you complete the polygon, the solid select area outline becomes a dotted outline. Notes As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection:
Result Adds a new area to an existing select area (union). Space Bar Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference). Space Bar + Alt Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection). The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select Area command. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Keyboard Modifier Alt
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image

1. Select the image or images for which you want to adjust the contrast and brightness. Tip You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you want. on the Image Integrator toolbar.
2. Click Contrast and Brightness
3. In the Contrast and Brightness dialog box, make changes to the contrast and brightness settings by dragging the sliders or clicking in the grid. Tips As you move the two slider bars in the grid, the corresponding values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes change. In the grid, the horizontal line represents the brightness of the raster image, and the vertical line represents the contrast of the image.
4. To review settings in the Preview window, click Preview Current Settings. 5. To store the new contrast and brightness settings, click Store. Notes You can also change brightness and contrast values by typing the values directly into the Contrast and Brightness boxes. To change both the contrast and brightness at the same time, drag the intersection of the sliders to a new position, or click the new position in the grid. By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is always the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in white. When they are moved, a black non-editable outline appears to show the sliders' default position. To view only the original image in the Preview window, click View Original Image. To view the results of the last stored settings in the Preview window, click Preview Stored Settings. This option is only available if you stored gradation settings previously.
Image Integration: An Overview Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Fill an Image Area with Color

1. Select the image that you want to modify. 2. Select an area of the image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar. By default, the entire image is selected. 3. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Fill . 4. In the Fill dialog box, click Edit to select the color that you want to use to fill the image area. 5. Under Opacity, drag the slider to define the level of transparency you want for the fill color. Tip As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes. Notes Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent. You can also define the opacity for the fill by typing the percentage in the Value box. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module. 6. To fill the selected area with the selected color, click OK.
Invert Colors in an Image

1. Select the image or images that you want to invert. Tip You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you want.
Image Integration: An Overview 2. Click Invert inverted. Notes Inverting the colors in a binary image swaps all foreground and background pixel values. Inverting the colors in a positive continuous tone image to a negative converts the brightness values for all pixels to their inverse values. For example, a value of 90% converts to 10%. Inverting the colors in a negative continuous tone image to a positive converts the brightness values for all pixels to their inverse values. For example, a value of 10% converts to 90%. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module. on the Image Integrator toolbar. Image pixel values are
View Image Properties

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images for which you want to view properties. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Image Properties Notes If you select multiple images, only the fields that have a common property for all the selected images display information in the Image Properties dialog box. You cannot edit image properties. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module. .
Undo Changes to Images

To undo the most recent reversible change made to the image, click Image Undo on the Image Integrator toolbar. Note The Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits to undo or when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 583
Redo Changes to Images

To redo the most recent reversed change to a raster image, click Image Redo on the Image Integrator toolbar. Notes The Image Redo command only brings back the most recent change that was reversed. The Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no commands that have been reversed using the Image Undo command. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Save Changes to a Linked Image

When you make changes to a linked raster image, the software does not save changes to the image source file when you save your document. If you want to save changes to the image source file, you must use the Save Selected Image(s) command on the Image Integrator toolbar. 1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images that you want to save. 2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Save Selected Image(s) Important The software saves changes to the source files for the selected images. Once you save changes to the image source file, you cannot undo them. To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module. .
Save as Image
1. Click File > Save as Image. 584 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Image Integration: An Overview 2. In the Save as Image dialog box, define the file format and resolution for the image. 3. To modify the compression factor for the selected file type, move the Compression factor slider to the left or right. 4. To define a specific area of the sheet to save as an image, click Define sheet area to save as image. 5. To rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise, click Rotate image 90 degrees. 6. To force the new image file to be linked to a new SmartFrame on a new sheet, click Place image on new sheet. 7. To create the new image, click OK. Important If you clicked Define sheet area to save as image, click and drag to define the area of the sheet that you want to save as an image. 8. Use the options in the Save As dialog box to provide the name and location of the newly created image file. 9. Click Save to store the new image file. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.

Image Command (Insert Menu and Image Integrator Toolbar)
Places a raster image into your document. Tip Insert Image is available only if you use the Customize command to place it on a toolbar or menu. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Position Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Positions a raster image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or by a single click on the source image. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Rectangular Select Area Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a rectangle around pixels that you define. 586 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Image Integration: An Overview A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels within an image. You can create a select area for editing purposes. When you drag the crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. When you reach the desired size, release the mouse button to create the select area. The solid select area outline then becomes a dotted outline. As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your selection: Keyboard Modifier Shift Alt Space Bar Space Bar + Alt Shift + Alt Shift + Space Bar Shift + Space Bar + Alt Result Constrains the select area to a square with the same aspect ratio. Adds a new area to an existing select area (union). Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference). Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection). Constrains the select area to a square and adds a new area to the existing select area. Constrains the select area to a square and subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area. Constrains the select area to a square and designates the overlapping area as a new select area.
Polygonal Select Area Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a polygon around pixels that you define. A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels within an image. You can create a select area for editing purposes. Following the first point, click the points to define the polygon. Points are placed when you release the mouse button. To remove a point or back up, SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 587
Image Integration: An Overview press the Backspace key. Right-click to end the polygon. The solid select area outline then becomes a dotted outline. As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection: Keyboard Modifier Alt Space Bar Space Bar + Alt Note The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select Area command. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module. Result Adds a new area to an existing select area (union). Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select area (difference). Designates the overlapping area as the new select area (intersection).
Contrast and Brightness Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image. You can modify these two attributes individually using the two-dimensional grid or the edit boxes in the Contrast and Brightness dialog box. The 2-D grid also allows you to modify contrast and brightness together by clicking anywhere in the grid. The intersection of the two lines moves to the point you click. You can also select the intersection of the two lines and dragging it within the grid to adjust the brightness and contrast at the same time. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box

Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image. 588 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Dialog Box Options

Contrast and Brightness Grid - Allows you to modify the contrast and/or brightness of an image by dragging the horizontal and vertical lines in the grid. The horizontal line represents the brightness of the raster image, and the vertical line represents the contrast of the image. You can also modify the contrast and brightness at the same time by clicking anywhere in the grid to move the intersection of the two lines. By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is always the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in white. When they are moved, a black non-editable outline appears to show the sliders' default position. As you move the sliders, the values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes for both attributes dynamically change. Contrast - Specifies the contrast for the raster image. You can enter a value directly in the Contrast box to change the contrast. When you type a value, the Contrast slider in the grid automatically moves to reflect the new value. If you move the Contrast slider or both sliders in the grid, the value automatically updates in the Contrast box. Brightness - Specifies the brightness of the raster image. You can enter a value directly in the Brightness box to change the brightness. When you type a value, the Brightness slider in the grid automatically moves to reflect the new value. If you move the Brightness slider or both sliders in the grid, the value automatically updates in the Brightness box. View Original Image - Displays the image using original gradation value settings in the Preview window. Preview Current Settings - Displays the image using new gradation value settings in the Preview window. Preview Stored Settings - Displays the image using stored gradation value settings in the Preview window. This option is only available if you stored gradation values previously. Store - Stores the current gradation value settings. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Fill Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Image Integration: An Overview Fills the select area with the selected fill color. You can also set the opacity of the fill. Setting the opacity allows you to fill the select area with a certain degree of transparency. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent.
Fill Dialog Box

Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill.
Dialog Box Options

Fill color - Specifies the current fill color. You can change the fill color by clicking Edit. Edit - Allows you to select a new fill color. Clicking Edit displays the standard Windows Color dialog box to allow you to select from existing colors or define your own custom color. Select opacity - Specifies the opacity for the fill color. To change the opacity, drag the slider bar to the left or right. As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes. Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent. Value - Allows you to enter the opacity value for the fill color. If you enter a value here, the Select opacity slider moves to reflect the new value. Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Image Properties Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Allows you to view the properties of a raster image. Image properties are not editable. 590 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Image Integration: An Overview If multiple images are selected, only the fields that have a common property for all the selected images display information. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Image Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image. Type - Specifies the image type, such as BMP, TIFF, JPG, and so on, and data type of the image, such as binary, RGB, or grayscale. Location - Specifies the storage location for the image source file. Resolution - Specifies the resolution for the image source file in pixels/inch or pixels/centimeter and microns. Size - Specifies the file size of the image source file on disk. Created - Specifies the creation date for the image source file. Modified - Specifies the last modification date for the image source file. If you make changes to the image in the product and click Save Image on the toolbar, this modification date updates with the date you saved the image. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image. Width - Specifies the actual width of the raster image. Height - Specifies the actual height of the raster image. Number of lines - Specifies the number of lines in the selected image. 592 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Image Integration: An Overview Pixels per line - Specifies the number of pixels per line in the selected image. Orientation - The scanline orientation of the selected image, such as ULH, URH, and so on. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Image Undo Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Reverses the last change made to the raster image. The Image Undo command reverses or purge raster data edits and raster transformations. The Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits to undo or when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Image Redo Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Reverses the last change most recent undo command. The Image Redo command only brings back the most recent change that was reversed. The Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no commands that have been reversed using the Image Undo command. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Invert Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Creates a negative image of the selected raster image, replacing each pixel SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 593
Image Integration: An Overview color with its opposite on the color wheel. You can invert both grayscale and color images. If an area is selected in the image, the invert conversion applies only to the select area, and changes are applied directly to the image. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Save as Image Command (File Menu)

Saves the graphic data on the sheet as a raster image and, optionally, links the new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet. The Save as Image command is useful in preparing a sheet for plotting. The new sheet has the same properties as the sheet that you converted to a raster image, with one exception: you can rotate the output by 90 degrees counterclockwise, which may cause the new sheet to be a different size. You can define an area of the sheet to convert to an image, instead of using the default sheet area, by clicking Define Area and specifying the area to include in the raster image by defining two points. Define two points by clicking the first point and dragging the cursor to the second corner point. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Save as Image Dialog Box

Saves a snapshot of the graphic data on the active sheet as a raster file and allows you to link the new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet.
Dialog Box Options

File Format - Allows you to specify the graphic file type for the new image. If you select JPEG as the file format, you can also customize the compression factor, also called Q-factor, using the Compression factor slider or the Value box. Resolution - Allows you to modify the default resolution for the new graphic. The default value is 400 dpi if the default units are not metric. If you set the units of measure to metric, the default units for the resolution are pixels per 594 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Image Integration: An Overview centimeter (DPCM). Compression - Allows you to specify the compression type for the image. Compression types vary based on the file format you select. Compression Factor - Allows you to specify the quality of compression versus file size for the image. The compression factor for an image is also referred to as the Q-factor. To change the compression factor, move the slider to the left to increase the file size and decrease compression. To create a smaller, lower quality image, move the slider to the right. A compression factor of 30 for JFIF and TIFF JPEG images provides optimal balance between quality and compression. For Intergraph JPEG images, a compression factor of 15 provides the optimal balance between quality and compression. Value - Specifies a numeric value for the compression factor of the image. As you move the Compression Factor slider, the value in the Value box changes. Define sheet area to save as image - Allows you to define the area of the sheet to be saved as an image. Select two points to define the area by clicking the first point and dragging the cursor to the second corner point. If this option is not selected, the software saves the current sheet as an image. Rotate image 90 degrees - Rotates the image output 90 degrees counterclockwise when the image is created. Place image on new sheet - Creates a new SmartFrame and links the new image file to the new SmartFrame when the image is created. The software places the SmartFrame on a newly created sheet. The size of the new sheet is the same as the source sheet unless you rotate the output, in which case the size of the new sheet is B x A, where the size of the source is A x B. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator module.
Save Selected Image(s) Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Saves changes you make to the raster image to the image source file. You can select multiple images and then use this command to save changes to all their source files.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview

As well as providing you with ready-to-use symbols, SmartSketch's Symbol Authoring module gives you the flexibility to create your own. There are several ways to create your symbols in SmartSketch. You can: Draw a shape from scratch using the drawing tools, such as the line, rectangle, ellipse, and freeform tools. Merge a shape with other shapes to create a new, unique symbol. Revise an existing SmartSketch symbol. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Planning Your Symbol: An Overview

After you have determined the need for a symbol, you need to decide how you want that symbol to behave. The goal is to create a symbol that acts the way a user expects it to. When you create a symbol, it displays the following default behaviors: 90 degree rotation angles Automatic alignment with a target element or object when the symbol is placed in a document Automatic association with a target element or object. Tip You can change these default behaviors with commands on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar
Checklist for Consideration

When planning your symbol, the first item to consider is what happens when you add text to a symbol. Do you want to add text to the shape? If so, you should consider the position and appearance of labels, text boxes, or balloons. A SmartLabel can be associated with attributes that you define. You can also define symbols that resize as a user adds text to the symbol. The second item you should consider is what template will you want to use with the symbol. The scale of the template affects how the symbol looks when SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 597
Symbol Authoring: An Overview it is dragged in from the Symbol Explorer. For example, the scale for the Architecture (metric) template is set to 1:100 mm on the Sheet Setup dialog box. Some symbols that you drag into documents based on that template appear small. The next item for you to decide is what happens when you manipulate the symbol. Should the symbol size, mirror, flip, and rotate freely? Do you want the symbol to move with an element? You can set different options on the Define Symbol Properties dialog box. You can create SmartPoints on a symbol to determine how the symbol attaches to connectors, other symbols, or elements in a document. How smart should you make the symbol? You can create symbols that have text and parametric attributes. You can create text attributes using SmartText by clicking the SmartText button on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. You can create parametric attributes by adding driving dimensions to the symbol and then adding the dimensions to the Parameters tab on the Define Symbol Properties dialog box.
Controlling Display Properties

You can control display properties for symbols in various ways. You can change the properties of various elements in the shape by applying styles or setting options such as line weight and color on the ribbon bar. You can also determine what handles appear on the symbol by setting options on the Define Symbol Properties dialog box. On this dialog box, you can also set options for how the symbol displays when a user drags it into the document. For example, if you want the symbol to display as separate elements, and not a unified symbol, you can click the Discrete Objects option on the Behaviors tab of the Define Symbol Properties dialog box.
Creating Flexible Symbols with Handles

Your symbol might need more control than users can implement by simply selecting the symbol and dragging. You can add different types of handles to give the user more control over the symbol. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define Symbol Properties

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties 598 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview . 3. On the Define Symbol Properties dialog box, select the properties that you want for the symbol. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define Handles for a Symbol

1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module. . 3. On the Behaviors tab, select the type of handles that you want.
Create a Parametric Symbol

Caution To create a parametric symbol, you must take the following steps in the order that they are listed. Before you begin, select the Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.
Create a Symbol with Driving Dimensions

1. Click File > New. 2. Draw the elements that you plan to use in the symbol. 3. On the Main toolbar, click the Dimension button 4. On the Dimension toolbar, click the SmartDimension button
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Caution On the ribbon bar, make sure that the Driving/Driven button is set, if you have turned it off when previously placing dimensions.
Tip You can use any of the dimension buttons on the Dimension toolbar to place your dimensions. Caution Do not use the Angle button on the ribbon bar if you want users to rotate the symbol.
5. Click an element. 6. Click to place a driving dimension.
Tip Repeat this step to place up to four driving dimensions. These dimensions are used to create the parametric handles for the height and width of the parametric symbol. You can use up to four dimensions for the parametric handles.
7. Select the elements that you want for the symbol and create a symbol. Set Up Parametric Handles 8. Open the symbol document that you just created. 9. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties . The Parameters tab on the Define Symbol Properties button dialog box automatically displays the driving dimensions in the symbol document. 10. On the Parameters tab, select a driving dimension in the table by clicking the appropriate row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you would want to select the row that displayed the value 30.000 mm.
Tip If you move the Define Symbol Properties dialog box to one side of the document window, you can see the dimension that you selected on the Parameters tab highlighted in the document.
11. In the Symbol Parameter box, select a row to apply Top, Bottom, Left, or Right to the row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you would want to select Right. Tip You can also click Apply. Selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right determines the place on the finished symbol where the yellow parametric handles appear. For example, if you select Top and Left, the parametric handles appear at the top center and left center of the symbol range box. Tip While creating a parametric symbol that grows when text is added, you must identify the two primary dimensions as TextHeight and TextWidth, instead of selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right.
12. Repeat the previous two steps as necessary for the number of handles that you want to appear on the symbol. You can identify up to four parametric handles. In the current example, for the dimension 20.000 mm, you would want to select Bottom.
13. Click File > Save. This procedure creates drag handles that appear as square yellow handles on the symbol's range box. You can place the symbol and use the drag handles to move the symbol in the document. In a new document, drag the symbol that you created.
Notes The parametric handles do no support grid snap. You cannot define a step distance. Parametric handles change the represented dimension by the precision units defined on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box. You can access the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Add a Symbol Attribute

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties 3. Click the Attributes tab. 4. Type the attribute name in the Name box. 5. Select the attribute type from the Type list. The available attribute types are Text, Date, Number, and Yes or No. 6. Type the attribute value in the Value box. 7. Click the Add button. The software adds the attribute at the bottom of the attribute list. Note You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of the attributes. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module. .
Modify a Symbol Attribute

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 602 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties 3. Click the Attributes tab. 4. Select an attribute in the attribute list. 5. Change the attribute data. 6. Click the Modify button. The software updates the attribute data in the attribute list. Notes If you change the attribute name in the Name box, the Add button becomes active, and the Modify button becomes inactive. You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of the attributes. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module. .
Remove an Attribute from a Symbol

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties 3. Click the Attributes tab. 4. Click an attribute in the attribute list. 5. Click the Remove button. The software deletes the symbol attribute. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module. .
Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document

Before you begin, you must create a symbol document that contains all the different elements that you would want to show up as several different versions of the same symbol. For example, if you want a symbol to appear as either a box, triangle, or circle, you must draw the box, triangle, or circle in the document and create a symbol. You can add new elements and further modify the symbol at any time during the next steps.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Tip You cannot include the same element in different representations. You must create a copy of that element in the document to allow it to appear in different representations.
1. Click File > Open to open a symbol document (.sym). 2. Select two or more elements that you want to show up as a representation of the symbol. Tip You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group. .
3. On the Change toolbar, click the Group button Caution
You cannot place one element in more than one group. To include the same element in different representations, you must copy the element and include it in a different group.
4. Define a separate group for each representation that you want to save in the symbol document.
Tip You can create the representation more easily if you keep each group in a separate section of the document at this point in the procedure. Do not allow the groups to overlap. You can define a common origin for all the groups later in the procedure. Representation button .
5. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol 6. Select a group that you want to appear in the representation. The name of the group automatically appears in the Object Name box on the Define Symbol Representation dialog box. This name is automatically generated by the software. 7. In the Name box, enter the name that you want. This is the name of the representation that appears as a command on the shortcut menu when you place the symbol in a document. 8. Click the Add button to enter the name in the table. 604 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Tip The order in which the names appear in the table is the order in which the commands appear on the shortcut menu. You can insert or delete names from the table at any time. For example, you can enter the following names in the table in the following order so that they appear in a certain order on the shortcut menu for the symbol: Name Flanged Globe Screwed Globe Bell Spigot Globe Welded Globe Soldered Globe Object Name Group 235 Group 236 Group 237 Group 238 Group 239
9. 10.
Repeat these steps for each representation that you want to appear on the shortcut menu. Select each group and move it to a position that is on top of the other groups. You should position each group so that they share a common origin.
Tip You can adjust the symbol origin by clicking the Symbol Origin button on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.
11.
Click File > Save.
Tip You should close the symbol document before dragging and dropping the symbol into a document. Notes After saving the symbol, you should test the different representations that you defined. Close the symbol. Drag the symbol from the Symbol Explorer into a new document. Select SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 605
Symbol Authoring: An Overview the symbol and click the right mouse button. Make sure that the names of the representations appear on the shortcut menu.
You can change the name of a group object by clicking a row in the table, entering a new name in the Name box, and clicking the Modify button. The group object listed first in the table is the default thumbnail for the symbol. Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Redefine the Origin of a Symbol

1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Origin button . 3. Click a point to redefine the origin of the symbol. The symbol origin is the point that the mouse cursor uses to drag the symbol into a document. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define an Icon for a Symbol

1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties. 3. On the Icons tab, set the options that you want. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Managing Text in Symbols: An Overview

You can add text to symbols by creating text boxes and balloons, placing text labels, or creating SmartLabels with SmartText. SmartText defines the text attributes for the symbol. A label with SmartText attributes is intelligent: SmartLabels with SmartText read and write properties from an element or object. A label with SmartText can assume the attributes of an element if the attributes for the element have the same name. Users can then edit the values of the text attributes in the Attribute Viewer. Users cannot change the names of the attributes. Not all labels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some labels contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the label. These are called text-driven symbols. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define Smart Text Attributes for a SmartLabel

1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Edit Text .
3. Enter the information that you want into the Property, Value, and Format boxes. 4. Click Insert Field. Notes If you want to remove a field, you can either select and edit the field in the SmartText Editor box and press Delete or select the label text on the symbol and delete it. You can also edit label text directly on the symbol or redefine the fields in the Smart Text Editor box. You cannot select individual characters between the angle brackets of the SmartText field. You can select only the entire field. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol

1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. Double-click a label in the symbol. 3. Type the text that you want and press Enter. Notes If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you can edit the label by selecting it and making the necessary changes. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define a Text-Driven Symbol

Caution To create a symbol that resizes to fit any text, you must take the following steps in the order that they are listed. Before you begin, select the Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.
For a Symbol with a Circle, Rectangle, or Ellipse

1. In a symbol document, draw a rectangle, circle, or ellipse. Caution You cannot use connected elements such as a series of arcs or lines.
2. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box 3. Click the center of the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to place a text box. 4. On the Draw toolbar, click the Select tool 5. Click Edit > Properties. 6. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that indicate the directional flow for text if you add characters to the text box. You can specify the direction by the options that you click. For example, if you want the text in the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to grow from the center of the element, you can set the following options: On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to Center. On the Info tab, set Vertical to Center. and select the text box.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview button On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center. .
7. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties 8. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox. 9. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.
For a Parametric Symbol

1. Create a parametric symbol. Tip While creating the parametric symbol, you must identify two primary dimensions as TextHeight and TextWidth.
2. Open the new symbol document that you just created. 3. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box .
4. Click the center of the symbol to place a text box. 5. On the Draw toolbar, click the Select tool 6. Click Edit > Properties. 7. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that indicate the directional flow for text if you add characters to the text box. You can specify the direction by the options that you click. For example, if you want the text in the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to grow from the center of the element, you can set the following options: button On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to Center. On the Info tab, set Vertical to Center On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center. . and select the text box.
8. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties 9. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox. 10. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox. Notes If you want to create a symbol that has text associated to attributes, you can define a SmartLabel that contains Smart Text for the symbol. SmartLabels that contain Smart Text are associated with text attributes for the symbol. When you attach a symbol with a SmartLabel to an element or object in a document, the symbol SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 609
Symbol Authoring: An Overview attributes assume the values of the element attributes. If the element or object does not have attributes, then the element or object assumes the attributes on the symbol. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Create a Leader for a SmartText Label

1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button . 3. On the Behaviors tab, click Label. 4. Click Place Leader Line. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Integrating Programs with Your Symbol: An Overview

You can kick off special processes from your symbol when a user performs an particular action, such as double-clicking the symbol, dragging it, or even modifying the symbol. The special process can be a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file that you created in other programming software. You can select an action from the Standard Actions tab on the Define Symbol Properties dialog box. You can also specify special processes that you can execute when you select a symbol, click the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on the shortcut menu. The command names of the processes that you define appear at the top of the shortcut menu. You define these processes on the Custom Actions tab of the Define Symbol Properties dialog box. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Add Commands to the Shortcut Menu for a Symbol

Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE in Visual Basic. You must place the executable file in the following directory: <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ACTIONOVERRIDES\CUSTOMACTIONS\
1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button . 3. On the Custom Actions tab in the Name box, type the command name that you want to appear on the shortcut menu. Tip The shortcut menu appears when you select the symbol in a document and then right click.
4. In the Command box, select the name and path of the .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file. This command runs when you place a symbol and select the command on the shortcut menu. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 611
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Notes You can also add commands to the shortcut menu by setting options on the Standard Actions tab. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol

Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE in Visual Basic. You must place the executable file in one of the following directories, depending on what action that you want to use to start the executable file. For example, if you want a special process to run when you drop the symbol in a document, you must place the executable file in the DROPACTIONS subdirectory. <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ACTIONOVERRIDES\DOUBLECLICKACTIONS\ <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ACTIONOVERRIDES\DROPACTIONS\ <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ACTIONOVERRIDES\MODIFYACTIONS\ <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ACTIONOVERRIDES\PROPERTYACTIONS\ <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ACTIONOVERRIDES\RIGHTCLICKACTIONS\
1. Open a document with an .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button . 3. On the Standard Actions tab, select the options that you want. For example, if you want a special process to run when you drop the symbol in a document, you must select the On Drop box. Then, you can select the name of the .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file from the list box beside the On 612 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Drop checkbox. Notes If you want to create special commands for the shortcut menu that appear when you select the symbol in a document, you can set options on the Custom Actions tab. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols: An Overview

Symbols are actually groups of graphic elements with defined behaviors and properties that are saved in an .sym document. You can enhance a symbol's display and performance during symbol design and creation. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol. This gives the appearance that the underlying lines have been broken at the edges of the symbol. In reality, the lines still exist beneath the symbol. You can apply a fill to any closed boundary. Placing many fills in a document can significantly increase the size of the document. A single fill can be used for the symbol by filling an area that represents the outer edges of the symbol and displaying the detailed graphic linework on top of the fill. The blank color can be used with any graphic object besides fill, so experiment and you might find other uses for this masking capability. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking

Before you begin, create a symbol with the outermost elements on a separate layer. If the symbol has already been drawn, just select the elements that form the outer edges of the symbol and move the select set to a new layer called Boundary. 1. Turn off all other layers in the symbol document, except the layer containing the boundary of the symbol. 2. Create a layer named Fill. This helps to organize the elements that make up a symbol. 3. With the Fill layer active and the Boundary layer displayed, click the Fill button on the Draw toolbar. 4. On the Fill ribbon bar, change the style to Solid, and then select the blank color from the pallet. Tip The blank color is located in the lower right corner of the standard color pallet.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview 5. Then, click inside the bounding line elements to place the solid blank colored fill. You can see the blank fill when grid display is turned on. 6. Click to select the fill. 7. With the fill selected, click the Send To Back button on the Change toolbar. This pushes the blank fill to the back of the symbol and allows the detailed elements that make up the interior of a symbol to display on top of the blank fill. 8. Turn on the display of the other layers containing interior graphics. 9. Save the symbol. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Defining SmartPoints: An Overview

SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions: connect points, drop points, and drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol. Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can place connect points in free space on any part of the document or on an element. Tip You can attach connectors to symbols with the Connector button on the Draw or Schematic toolbar. A drag point is the point to which the pointer attaches for dragging a symbol. This attribute, when combined with the drop point attribute, allows precise attachment between symbols. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision.
SmartPoint Graphics
The displays of connect points, drop points, and drag points have been enhanced so each is more easily identified. Connect points display as a plain red dot. For drag points, a number is displayed up and to the right of the dot. Drop points display as a red dot inside a triangle.
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring
Symbol Authoring: An Overview module.
Place a SmartPoint with Connect Point Attributes

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties . Note Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Connect point check box. 4. In the Connect point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the connector should attach to the SmartPoint. Tip You can also type a value in the Connect point angles box. 5. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that appears when you attach a connector to the SmartPoint on the symbol. 6. Click Insert. 7. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint. 8. Click Apply. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Place a SmartPoint with Drag Point Attributes

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties . Note Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drag point check box. 4. In the Drag point order box, type a number to define the drag point order SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 617
Symbol Authoring: An Overview for the SmartPoint. 5. Click Insert. 6. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint. 7. Click Apply. 8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to place additional SmartPoints with drag point attributes. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Place a SmartPoint with Drop Point Attributes

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties . Note Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document. 3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drop point check box. 4. In the Drop point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the symbol should attach to another object. Tip You can also type a value in the Drop point angles box. 5. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that appears when you attach an object to the SmartPoint on the symbol. 6. Click Insert. 7. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint. 8. Click Apply. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Edit SmartPoints for a Symbol

1. Open a document with a .sym extension. 618 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview 2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoint Properties . Note Any existing SmartPoints appear in the document. 3. In the document, click a SmartPoint. The SmartPoint's properties display on the SmartPoint Properties dialog box. 4. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, modify the properties for the SmartPoint as desired. 5. Click Apply. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Symbol Lookup Tables: An Overview

Symbol lookup tables allow you to drive parameters of a symbol using import data from a spreadsheet, database, or any other ODBC data source. Lookup tables are ideal for use with Ortho and Structural content. These imported values save time, allowing you to use a single key column to specify numerous attribute and parameter values for a symbol. The Lookup Table command takes a snapshot of the specified data source and generates an .xml file containing the information in the data source. When you have generated the .xml file containing the data, you can select a particular set of values for the selected symbols from a combo box in the Attribute Viewer. This combo box contains the list of values in the key column defined in the data source. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Set Up an ODBC Data Source

1. Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. On the Control Panel dialog box, double-click ODBC Data Sources. 3. On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click the User DSN tab or the System DSN tab, depending on the type of data source you want to use. Note Refer to Microsoft Windows NT Help for more details on the different types of data sources.
4. Click Add. 5. On the Create New Data Source dialog box, select a driver for the data source. 6. Click Finish. The system displays the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box. 7. Enter the necessary information on the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box. Note The ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box contains different settings for each driver type.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview 8. On the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving the changes. 9. On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Generate a Lookup Table

1. Set up an ODBC Data Source. 2. In SmartSketch, on the Symbol Authoring toolbar, click Lookup Table. 3. Select the option that you want from the Data Source list. 4. Select the option that you want in the Table list. 5. Drag columns from the Table list to the Driven By column in the Data Map. 6. Double-click an entry in the Driven By column to specify it as the unique Key Column. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save. The software writes the contents of the selected table into an .xml file. Notes Each entry in the Key Column list must be unique. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.

SmartPoint Properties Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Places SmartPoints on a symbol. SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions: connect points, drop points, and drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol.
Connect point attribute

Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can place connect points in free space on any part of the document or on an element. Tip You can attach connectors to symbols with the Connector button on the Draw or Schematic toolbar.
Drag point attribute

A drag point is the point to which the pointer attaches for dragging a symbol. This attribute, when combined with the drop point attribute, allows precise attachment between symbols.
Drop point attribute

Drop points allow for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Behaviors Tab
Connect point - Assigns the connect point attribute to the SmartPoint. Connect point angles - Defines the angle at which the connector line attaches to the connect point on the symbol. Connect point ToolTip - Specifies the ToolTip that appears when you attach a connector to a connect point on the symbol. Drop point - Assigns the drop point attribute to the smart point. Drop point angles - Defines the angle at which a dropped symbol attaches to the SmartPpoint on the symbol. Drop point ToolTip - Allows you to define the ToolTip that appears on the drop point of the symbol when you place it. You can use a drop point when you are placing a symbol on another symbol. The ToolTip is useful for quickly displaying important information that you want a user to know about the symbol. For example, you could define a ToolTip for a network card symbol that displays the words Network Card. If you attempt to drop the network card symbol near a hub symbol, the ToolTip appears as a visual reminder of the type of symbol that you are placing. In drawing network diagrams, you do not want to connect a network card symbol to a hub symbol. Drag point - Assigns the drag point attribute to the SmartPoint. Drag point order - Allows you to define the order that the drag points attach to the pointer when you drag the symbol. You can cycle through the drag points when dragging the symbol by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys on the keyboard.
Information and Format Tab

Style - Sets the style of the SmartPoint. Color - Sets the color of the SmartPoint. Width - Sets the size of the SmartPoint. Layer - Sets the layer where the SmartPoint displays. X - Specifies the x dimension of the SmartPoint. Y - Specifies the y dimension of the SmartPoint.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Symbol Origin Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)

Defines the origin of the symbol that you are creating. The origin of the symbol is the point that the mouse cursor uses to place the symbol in a document. When you click Symbol Origin, the symbol origin appears where it was originally placed. You can then click any position or key point on an element to define the origin. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Symbol Properties Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)

Allows you to define properties for a symbol. These properties can include the following items: A special Help document for the symbol, The types of handles the symbol displays, Special custom macros that execute when you drag the symbol, Custom behaviors that occur when you place the symbol in a document. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define Symbol Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to create properties for a symbol. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Attributes Tab
Allows you to add attributes to a symbol. Name - Defines a name for the attribute. Type - Defines the type of data you can use in the Value box. Select either Text, Date, Number or Yes or No as the type of data displayed in the Value box. Value - Defines a default value for the attribute. Add - Adds the attribute. Modify - Writes the edits that you have completed for the Type and Value boxes and updates the list of attributes to reflect the changes. Remove - Clears the information displayed in the Name, Type, and Value boxes and removes the attribute.
Behaviors Tab
Label - Select this check box if you are creating a SmartLabel. Selecting Label also allows you the option of using the Graphics Fit to Text option located on this form. See also SmartLabels Mirror About Target Object - Allows the symbol to mirror about the element or object to which you are attaching the symbol. Glue to Target Object - Specifies that the symbol moves with the element or object to which it is attached. When this option is enabled, you cannot convert a symbol currently attached to an object. While the symbol may be opened and modified, it cannot be dropped on individual components until it is no longer glued to an object. Align Parallel with Target Object - Ensures that the symbol aligns parallel to the element or object to which the symbol is being attached, no matter where you move the element or object. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 625
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships that you apply to it. If the check box is cleared, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of the way you change its relationships. The check box is cleared by default. When you clear it, a symbol maintains its orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the related symbol or other elements. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.
If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as the underlined dimensional value indicates. When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships checkbox, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships applied to it. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships. Honor layer display - Allows you to turn on and off the display of layers in a symbol file. For example, if you create a symbol with multiple layers and enable the Honor layer display check box, you can turn on/off any layer so that the items on that layer will display/not display. Additionally, the layers are created (if they do not exist) in the file in which you place the symbol. Graphics Fit to Text - Allows you to define a symbol that stretches to fit the text height and width of a text box in the symbol, when you edit the text. This checkbox is available only when you select the Label checkbox. This checkbox only affects parametric symbols or symbols created with one closed shape that is a rectangle, circle, or ellipse. The parametric symbol must have two driving dimensions defined as parameters on the Parameters tab. These parameters must be identifed as TextHeight and TextWidth. Scale Handles - Specifies that the symbol has scale handles. You can drag a scale handle to resize the entire symbol uniformly in the X and Y directions. 626 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Mirror Handles - Specifies that the symbol has mirror handles. You can drag the mirror handle across the mirror line in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol. Rotate Handles - Specifies that the symbol has rotate handles. You can drag this handle to rotate the entire symbol. Split Element on Drop - Allows a symbol to split elements on which you place the symbol. This behavior is intended primarily to split connectors when placing an inline symbol, but also will split most other elements. When a symbol is placed, the element is trimmed back to the range of the symbol. Drop As - Defines the graphical output when you place a symbol in a document. If you select Symbol, the symbol remains and behaves as a symbol when you place it in a document. If you select Group, the symbol changes to a group of elements or objects when you place it in a document. If you select Discrete Objects, the symbol is broken up into individual elements and objects that you can edit separately.
Step Rotation - Determines the increment for rotating the symbol when you place it while pressing the Left and Right arrow keys on the keyboard. If you enter 0 in the box, you cannot rotate the symbol with the Left and Right arrow keys when you place the symbol in a document. Double-Click Label Position - Allows you to define a label's location when a user double-clicks a symbol to add a text label. For example, if you select the Top radio button, you can double click to add a text label above the symbol.
Custom Actions Tab

Allows you to specify processes that you can execute when you select a symbol, click the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on the shortcut menu. The command names of the processes that you define appear at the top of the shortcut menu. The command can be a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file that you created. For example, if you create a symbol for a heat pump, you might want to place a Calculate Volume command on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu appears when you place the heat pump symbol in a document, select it, and click the right mouse button. The Calculate Volume command appears on the shortcut menu. When you click the Calculate Volume command, a Visual Basic program appears that allows you to calculate the volume of the heat pump.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Name - Specifies the name of the process that appears on the shortcut menu. Programmatic identifier - Specifies which process is executed when a specific command is selected on the shortcut menu. Tip Type the ProgID of registered files directly in the list box and press Apply. The ProgID is assigned when you create the file. See the documentation for Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
General Tab
Help File - Specifies a special Help document (.HLP) that you can use to display special information about the symbol that you create. For example, you could use a Help file to explain different ways to place a door symbol. Help Context - Defines a Help context identifier for calling a specific topic in a Help file. The Help file must be compiled with the Help context identifier mapped to the Help topic. Tip See Visual Basic documentation for information about how to create a Microsoft Windows Help file. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Icons Tab
Defines the symbol icon that you see in the Windows Explorer or the Symbol Explorer. Automatic - Uses the elements and objects in the current document window to create the symbol. This is handy if you want to see what the symbol looks like without opening it. Use Active Sheet - Allows you to save the latest changes in the symbol document to the symbol icon. Use Bitmaps - Allows you to select a bitmap document to display as the 628 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview symbol icon. You might want to assign the same icon to a group of symbols that you are creating. For example, you can assign your company logo to an entire library of symbols. Small - Displays a small icon. Large - Displays a large icon.
Parameters Tab
Automatically displays all the dimensions in the symbol document. You can use this tab to create symbols that fit to text. You can also use this tab to define drag handles for resizing when you place the symbol in a document.
Tab Options
Tip The information that appears in the Value and Symbol Parameter columns also appears in the Value and Name columns of the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer displays this information when you place or select a symbol in a document.
Name - Displays the name of the dimension or variable that you selected in the table. You can select a row in the table by clicking the row. If you want to see which dimension in the symbol corresponds to the row that you have selected, you can move the dialog box to one side of the document window. The corresponding dimension is highlighted in red. Symbol Parameter - Displays the parameter that you assign to the dimension. To assign the symbol parameter, you must first click a row in the table. You can then type in your own name for a symbol parameter or select one from the dropdown list. If you want to create a symbol with parametric handles for resizing the symbol, you must assign the following symbol parameters to dimensions in the symbol document: Top, Bottom, Right, and Left. Tip Driven dimensions cannot have parametric attributes or parametric handles for resizing the symbol. Driven dimensions appear greyed out. You cannot select a driven dimension in the table.
Name Column - Displays the name of a dimensional value in the symbol document. Value Column - Displays a dimensional value or variable in the symbol document. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 629
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Formula Column - Displays a formula for calculating the dimensional value. Symbol Parameter Column - Displays the name of the parameter that you assigned in the Symbol Parameter box below the table. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Standard Actions Tab

Allows you to define processes that can execute when you place a symbol in a document and then perform actions on that symbol, such as dropping it (during placement), double-clicking it, or clicking the Properties command on the Edit menu. Tip Type the ProgID directly in the list box and press Apply. The ProgID can be any valid executable (.dll, .exe, etc). Refer to the documentation for Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's.
Tab Options
On drop - Specifies a process that executes when you drag a symbol in a document. On double-click - Specifies a process that executes when you double-click a symbol in a document. On property change - Specifies a process that executes when you select a symbol in a document and click the Properties command on the Edit menu. You might want to select this and display a Properties dialog box that you created, rather than the one that is delivered with the software. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Lookup Table Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)

Allows you to import data from an open database connectivity (ODBC) data source to drive values for symbol parameters and attributes. 630 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Lookup Table Dialog Box

Allows you to assign data sources and tables to use with the Lookup Tables command, to save information to an .xml file, and to open existing .xml files for editing.
Dialog Box Options

Select Data Source - Specifies the open database connectivity (ODBC) Data Source. Select a Table - Specifies the table from the ODBC Data Source. Data Map - Specifies the parameters and attributes to use for the symbol. Attribute/parameter - Lists the attributes and parameters for the symbol. Driven by - Displays the column from the data source that drives an attribute or parameter. Drag columns to Driven by - Lists the columns in the specified table. You can drag these column names to the Driven by column in the Data map. Define Key - Defines the unique Key Column used to differentiate among the various symbol parameter sets.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Clear Column - Deletes the selected value in the Driven by column. Open - Opens an existing .xml file and displays the information in the Lookup Table dialog box for editing. Save As... - Saves the information from the data source to a new .xml file. OK - Saves the information from the data source to an .xml file. Cancel - Closes the Lookup Table dialog box without saving the information. Help - Displays Help for the dialog box. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Symbol Representation Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)

Defines different representations of the same symbol within one symbol document (.sym). The names of the representations that you define appear on the shortcut menu for the symbol when you drag the symbol into a document. When you click the name of the representation, the symbol changes to display the elements that you included in the representation. For example, you can define different representations of a valve with different types of actuators. When you drag the symbol into the document, you can choose which valve that you want to display from the shortcut menu.
Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box

Allows you to define several different representations of a symbol in one symbol document. For example, you might want to place a valve symbol. But you might want the actuator on the valve to display in several different positions. Rather than create several different symbols, you can define representations of the same symbol with the actuator appearing in different representations. After you place the symbol in a document, you could choose the representation that you want. You can choose it by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the representation name from the shortcut menu. The position of the actuator changes based on the representation that you selected. Caution You must define a group in the symbol document before you can use this dialog box.
Dialog Box Options

Representation name Column - Displays the name of the representation that you entered in the Name box below. You must select a group in the document, enter a name in the Name box, and then click the Add button. Group name Column - Displays the name of the group. The software automatically assigns the name. You cannot change this value. Representation name Box - Allows you to enter the name that you want for the representation. You must select a group in the document before you can enter a name for the group in the Name box. This is the name of the representation that appears on the shortcut menu when you place the symbol in a document. Group name Box - Displays the name of the group that you selected in the symbol document. The software automatically assigns the name of the group. You cannot change this value. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
SmartText Editor Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Symbol Authoring: An Overview Allows you to place SmartText in a SmartLabel. SmartText allows a SmartLabel to assume the text attributes of an element to which the SmartLabel is associated. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
SmartText Editor Dialog Box

Places and edits SmartText in a symbol. When you create SmartText in a symbol, you are defining the text attributes for the symbol. When the symbol is placed in a document, you can edit the values of the attributes in the Attribute Viewer. Smart Text is typically used to create a SmartLabel.
Dialog Box Options

Existing text Box - Specifies the text that appears in the label. You can type in plain text or enter a field by defining information in the Item, Property, Value, and Format boxes. You must press the Tab on the keyboard to enter the information that you type. Font - Determines the format of the characters that you want to appear in the SmartLabel. For example, you can select Arial Bold. Item - Defines the type of object to which the SmartLabel is associated. Property - Names the attribute value pair on the object that you want to label Value - Identifies the value of the property based on what appears in the Format box. Format - Identifies the format of the property. The format is any format supported by Visual Basic. Insert Field - Enters the information that you specified in the Property, Value, and Format boxes into the SmartText Editor box. Tip If you want to remove a field, you must select the field in the SmartText Editor box and press Delete. Then you can define a new field. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module. 634 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using the Internet: An Overview

SmartSketch is an excellent tool for publishing on the Internet. While you work on a document in the software, you can access the Internet and Intranet, which allows you to share design information within and across organizational boundaries.
Viewing the Web

You can view the World Wide Web from within SmartSketch with a special tool called the Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer is available only if you have installed Internet Explorer 3.0 or later. After you click the Symbol Explorer icon on the Main toolbar, the Symbol Explorer appears on the right of document window. You can type the URL or directory path of an HTML page in the Address Box and press Enter to view the HTML page.
Publishing on the Web

SmartSketch is an ActiveX document. This feature means that you can open a SmartSketch document with its own toolbars and menus in the Internet Explorer window, without having to activate SmartSketch. SmartSketch toolbars and menus combine with those of the Internet Explorer, allowing you to work on the document from the Web viewer. This practice can be convenient if you want to work on a SmartSketch document and then go back to the HTML page that you were viewing. Web administrators can use existing SmartSketch documents on the intranet without having to convert them to another format for viewing on the Web. Tip You can also view ActiveX documents in Netscape Navigator if you install the appropriate plug-in software. For more information, you should visit www.netscape.com on the World Wide Web.
If you want to place a graphic document in an HTML page for viewing on the Web, you can save the document to .CGM format. Important To save a document in .CGM format, you must install the Web Publishing module.
Accessing the Internet Without Leaving Your Document

If you want to access the Internet, you must have an internet connection. Then, you can access the Internet without leaving your document by clicking Help > SmartSketch on the Web.
Using the Internet: An Overview Tip SmartSketch on the Web displays in your system default web browser. If you do not have a web browser, you can install Internet Explorer. SmartSketch on the Web works with any web browser, but you do get extra settings and hot links by using Internet Explorer.
From the SmartSketch on the Web web pages, you can access a myriad of tools to help you use SmartSketch more efficiently, keep up-to-date on product happenings, view a Web gallery of SmartSketch drawings, and contact Intergraph.
Publishing Customer Drawings on the SmartSketch Web Gallery

The SmartSketch on the Web HTML page also has links to a Web Gallery that displays a collection of customer drawings produced with SmartSketch. The Web Gallery shows drawings from each industry: mechanical, civil, and architectural engineering, utilities, and so forth. You can submit your own drawings to the Web Gallery by following the instructions on the Web Gallery HTML page. Just follow the links from the SmartSketch on the Web page. Tip You can access the SmartSketch on the Web HTML page via the Help menu.
Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer

1. In the Internet Explorer, click File > Open. 2. On the dialog box, select the document that you want to open inside the Internet Explorer. Because SmartSketch is an ActiveX document, its toolbars and menus appear inside the Internet Explorer, along with the contents of the document that you selected. Notes You can also drag a SmartSketch document from the Windows Explorer to the Internet Explorer. The document automatically opens inside the Explorer.
Hyperlinks
You may want to link an element or object in a document to other documents, such as a web page. The Hyperlink command on the Main toolbar is used to create, edit, and follow hyperlink addresses attached to objects in a document. Tips You can also click Insert > Hyperlink to activate the Hyperlinks command. If you use Save As to save the document to a .cgm file, the hyperlinks are retained during the translation process, creating a .cgm drawing file that is ready for web publishing. You can also use Save As Web Page(s) to do this.
Insert a Hyperlink
1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink Tip You can also click Insert > Hyperlink. 2. Click the object or element to insert a hyperlink and to display the Add Hyperlink dialog box. 3. Click the Source field and type the URL or directory path of a HTML page. (http://. . . ) Tip You can also link to files on the intranet or your computer. For example, you can type the following path: D:\MYFILE.htm. You can also click the Browse button to open the Link to File dialog box and navigate to the file you wish to link. .
4. Click Add. By default, SmartSketch inserts the URL or filename in the Name field. Important If you link to a SmartSketch document which contains multiple sheets, you are prompted to select which sheet to link to.
5. Click the Name field and type a logical hyperlink name, if desired. 6. Click the Set as default link check box to identify this link as the default link for the object. 7. Click OK to accept the hyperlink. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 637
Using the Internet: An Overview Notes To stop the Hyperlink command, press Esc. You cannot add hyperlinks to dimensions, elements contained in nested symbols, or fills. While in the Add Hyperlink dialog box, repeat steps 3 through 6 to add any number of hyperlinks, URL addresses, or file paths to an element or object. If you add more than one hyperlink, you must choose a link as the default. Right click on any drawing object to display a list of associated hyperlinks. The text, which appears in the Name field will display as a tooltip when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will also appear in the shortcut menu when you right-click on the object.
Edit a Hyperlink
1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink Tip You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the command. Tip The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. Tip Right-click to display the shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu, you can also use Add Link, Edit Link, and Remove Link to modify the hyperlink. 3. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Link. .
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink.
4. On the Select Link To Edit dialog box, click the hyperlink to edit. 5. Click Edit. 6. On the Edit Hyperlink dialog box, click either the Source or the Name field and type your changes to the hyperlink. 7. Click the Make default link check box to identify this hyperlink as the default link for the drawing object. 638 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using the Internet: An Overview 8. Click OK. Note The Select Link to Edit dialog box only displays when an object has more than one hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only one hyperlink, the Edit Hyperlink dialog box displays after you click Edit Link.
Delete a Hyperlink
1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink Tip You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the command. Tip The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. 3. On the shortcut menu, click Remove Link. 4. On the Select Link To Remove dialog box, click the hyperlink that you want to remove. 5. Click Remove. 6. In the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box, click the OK button. Note The Select Link to Remove dialog box only displays if an object has more than one hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only one hyperlink, the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box displays after you select Remove Link from the shortcut menu. .
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink.
Follow a Hyperlink
1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink Tip You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the command. .
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink. A tooltip displays the name of the default link. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 639
Using the Internet: An Overview Tip The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. You can also click Show Links on the shortcut menu. All the elements or objects with hyperlinks highlight. Notes When an object has more than one hyperlink, the default hyperlink can be set via the Set as default link check box. If you do not select a default hyperlink, SmartSketch uses the first hyperlink assigned to the object as the default. If the hyperlink points to a SmartSketch document, then SmartSketch opens the document. The browser opens all other documents.
3. Click the left mouse button to follow the hyperlink.
ActiveCGM
If you want to place a SmartSketch document on an HTML page for viewing on the Web, you can save the document to .CGM format. Computer Graphic Metafile (cgm), a standard file format for vector and raster data, is an ideal format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web. This format requires little storage space, displays quickly in a web browser, and has the ability to zoom and display more detail. CGM documents can also contain embedded hotspots, hyperlinks, and database links, allowing you to access information outside the document instantly. You can save a document as a CGM graphic embedded in a web page using Save As Web Page on the File menu. You can also save to .CGM using Save As.
Definition of CGM
CGM supports the definition of graphic objects bound to non-graphic attributes. The CGM file format is defined by ANSI/ISO 8632-1992 (American National Standards Institute/International Standards Organization) and MIL-STD-2301 (Military Standard). CGM is the international standard that defines a hybrid (raster, vector, and text) graphics format. Definition of graphical objects is supported at any arbitrary level of abstraction through a tagging mechanism similar to SGML and HTML.
Definition of ActiveCGM
ActiveCGM technology converts 2D design files, such as construction drawings, into CGM files to link non-graphical data into graphical elements. 640 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Using the Internet: An Overview For example, you can navigate an intelligent drawing using a Web browser. ActiveCGM provides rapid, accurate, enterprise-wide access and display of graphic information. It allows hyperlinking of vector and raster graphics defined in the Version 4.0 Computer Graphics Metafile format. ActiveCGM products based on ActiveCGM technology support zooming, panning, magnification, navigation of CGM graphics. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Web Publishing module.
Save a Document as a Web Page

1. Click File > Save. 2. Specify what you would like to save. Select All Sheets if you want to save all the sheets in a document as a web page. Select Active Sheet to save only the active sheet as a web page. Select Include linked files/sheets to save links associated to the selected sheets.
3. Click the Next and then Finish buttons to create the web page(s). Important To use this functionality, you must install the Web Publishing module. Notes When the SmartSketch document is saved as a web page, you can view the HTML document as a web pages in any web browser. You can also use the Save As command to save a document to .cgm format.

Hyperlink Command (File Menu)
Adds hyperlinks to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. You can enter a link to a file or a web page on the Internet.
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box

Inserts a hyperlink to a selected object, symbol, text, connector, or element.
Dialog Box Options

Source - Specifies the URL or directory path of a HTML page. (http://. . . ) for the hyperlink. (Browse) - Opens the Link to File dialog box. From here you can navigate to the file you wish to link. Add - Adds the hyperlink to the selected object. Name - Specifies a logical name for the hyperlink. The text which appears in the Name field will display as a tooltip when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will also appear in the shortcut menu when you right-click on the object. Set as default hyperlink - Identifies the link as the default link for the object. OK - Closes the dialog box and saves the hyperlink. Cancel - Closes the dialog box without saving the hyperlink.
Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to change the web addresses or paths for hyperlinks that are applied to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups.
Using the Internet: An Overview Tip To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and then right-click.
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Removes hyperlinks from objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. Tip To see the shortcut menu, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar, and then right-click.
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to open the web page or file at which the hyperlink is pointing. Tip To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar, and then right-click.
Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu)

Displays all the hyperlinks in a document. When you click this command, all the elements or objects that have a hyperlink are highlighted. Tip To access this command, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and then right-click.
Save as Web Page Command (File Menu)

Saves the current document as a .cgm graphic embedded in an HTML document. You can view the HTML document as a web page in any Internet browser, such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer. This command starts a wizard that steps you through the process of saving your document as an HTML page. Important To use this functionality, you must install the Web Publishing SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 643
Using the Internet: An Overview module.
Save as Web Page Dialog Box

Specifies the name of, location of, and format for a document when you save it as a .cgm graphic embedded in an HTML document. All sheets - Saves all the sheets in a SmartSketch document as a web page Active sheet - Saves only the active sheet as a web page Include linked files/sheets - Save links associated to the selected sheet(s) Important To use this functionality, you must install the Web Publishing module.
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview

Use SmartSketch's CAD translation capabilities to translate or reference MicroStation (V4/5/SE) and AutoCAD (R10-2000) files for use with SmartSketch. MicroStation and AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, and fill styles are fully supported, so you can modify your drawings in SmartSketch and then save them as either MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation provides equivalent objects to and from which elements or entities may be mapped during translation. Translator options let you customize how MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, widths, views, and units are imported, referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings.
Working with MicroStation Files: An Overview

CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports MicroStation font and linestyle (*.RSC) resource files, resulting in near perfect visual fidelity when you import, reference, or export MicroStation drawings. Invisible MicroStation information such as database linkages, tag data, and user data is preserved as attributes on SmartSketch graphics. You can even import MicroStation cell libraries as SmartSketch symbols, further enhancing your re-use of existing data. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Opening and Saving MicroStation Files

SmartSketch supports opening and saving MicroStation files in two ways: you can either select a MicroStation file and translate it into equivalent elements, or you can create a reference file from a MicroStation file. If you use the method for selecting a MicroStation file and translating it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, you can click Open on the File menu. After you have opened a MicroStation file using this method, the resulting file is in SmartSketch format (igr). Tip If the MicroStation file extension is not a .dgn extension, you may need to use a utility to define other extensions as MicroStation files.
If you use the method for creating a reference file from a MicroStation file, you can either click Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer. This action enables you to display and, if MicroStation is available on your PC, edit the MicroStation file while working in SmartSketch. You can also select the view position of a 3-D MicroStation file upon placement. Once a MicroStation file has been referenced using this method, you can then locate and establish relationships between the new information and elements on the drawing sheet. Tip The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options dialog box. By selecting the Foreign Data tab and setting the
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview format to MicroStation, you can configure the settings for importing MicroStation data that applies to both of these methods. Caution Roundtrip of MicroStation data (importing MicroStation data to SmartSketch data and exporting back to MicroStation data) is currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information such as tags, database linkages, and user data are not supported during export to the MicroStation file format.
Other Methods for Importing MicroStation Data

You can use the following methods to move MicroStation (.dgn) documents into: Cutting and pasting. Dragging. Inserting the information as an object.
When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents appear as well. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. Tip You can also use Open on the File menu to translate and open documents. You can use seed files to preserve the original fonts and line types of the document when you open a MicroStation document.
Cutting and Pasting

You can select the information in the MicroStation document and then cut or copy the information and paste it into SmartSketch with Paste Special.
Dragging
You can select the information in the MicroStation document and then drag it into SmartSketch. In the Windows Explorer, select the MicroStation document and then drag it into SmartSketch. The document will be embedded in the drawing by default. Immediately before placing the document, you can embed the document in SmartSketch by pressing Ctrl. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked. When you place the document, handles appear that allow you to scale the object. The foreign document is placed into SmartSketch and behaves much like a symbol, allowing you to click to place it or move it around.
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Tip You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, you can set the options you want on the Reference File tab of the Options dialog box.
Inserting as an Object
Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object on the Insert menu. On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option to link or embed the document. After you insert the object, SmartSketch places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you to crop it without altering the scale of the object. The software recognizes the geometry of the inserted document. You can use the relationship indicators to draw or create relationships between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements in the SmartSketch document. You can edit the inserted object by doubleclicking it. Tip Object inserts any OLE 2.0-enabled object, such as a Word or .AVI document, or a CAD document, such as .dgn. You can then edit the inserted object by double-clicking it.
Saving SmartSketch to MicroStation

You can save a SmartSketch document as a MicroStation document. Before you do this, you can adjust the translation options with Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click Export Options. When you save a SmartSketch document as a .dgn document, the active sheet is saved. On the Options dialog box, you can map SmartSketch layers to MicroStation levels (163). All the remaining layers are placed on the last layer or level of the foreign document. The layer names are preserved, whether you are importing or exporting MicroStation documents. Caution If you save SmartSketch documents with raster reference files as MicroStation documents, only the files of the same type (.dgn) can be exported back into.
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples

Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Conceptual Design
Because the software gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, this software is a natural choice for sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages of a project. You can capture relationships as you draw, or easily add them later as relationships or dimensions. You can also alter dimensions to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the MicroStation (.dgn) file format to complete downstream tasks in MicroStation.
Details
You can use the software to add annotations to existing MicroStation files by inserting a MicroStation file in your document with Object on the Insert menu and then adding annotations and text. You can then save the added annotations, dimensions, text, and graphics as a MicroStation document with Save As on the File menu. If you do not have MicroStation but need to provide files in MicroStation format, you can create the document in the software and then save the file in MicroStation format.
Project Management
Managing large projects becomes easier when you use the software to integrate MicroStation drawings. You can use the software to gather drawing files from several sources and combine them into a single project book. You can then add details using the software and save the files in MicroStation format so other project team members using MicroStation can review the project. You can also assemble entire projects and then detail the project using the software. You can then save the files in MicroStation format so other project team members using MicroStation can review the project. You can also use documents created with the software as a central location for all project informationboth graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with products that are OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into a MicroStation file that has been opened with the software.
Review and Redlining

The software is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining MicroStation drawings. You can use Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or 3-D MicroStation drawing in your document and then sketch on the drawing. You can sketch and revise on top of the native data. After reviewing, you can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import

When you translate MicroStation data into SmartSketch, you are concerned with either Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after translation. SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the following areas:
Colors
MicroStation maintains a fixed number of colors in a color table for each document. Because SmartSketch uses true color, the color table of the seed file is used as the basis of the translation. The default color table provided with SmartSketch defines the first 16 colors as standard and fills in the rest of the colors as they are needed. If the color table is full, then each color is matched to the closest MicroStation color. MicroStation colors are automatically translated to the closest red, green, blue (RGB) values in SmartSketch.
Widths
SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that corresponds to standard metric pencil leads: .13, .18, .25, .35, .5, .7, 1.0, 1.4, and 2.0. When you open a MicroStation document, a default mapping determines which SmartSketch line width is assigned to go with which MicroStation weight. You can change any of the default mappings to define your own mapping with the Line Width tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu).
Linestyles
The core MicroStation linestyles 0-7 default to matching SmartSketch linestyles, unless they are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. MicroStation User Defined Line Styles (UDLS) are supported directly. If you use the Style Resources dialog box, you can attach a MicroStation linestyle resource (*.RSC) file as a resource for linestyles to use in a document.
Patterns
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview MicroStation associative patterns are automatically recreated as fill styles in the resulting SmartSketch files. Non-associative MicroStation patterns are imported as groups.
Font Styles
SmartSketch supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows NT and supplies additional ANSI and ISO TrueType engineering fonts. SmartSketch also supports MicroStation fonts. When you open a .DGN document, SmartSketch provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font is assigned to which MicroStation font. You can change to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the font resources by double-clicking on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.
References
MicroStation references are imported as SmartSketch reference files, which use the automatic defaults or same options for configuring how color, weights, line styles, patterns, and fonts are handled for visual accuracy.
Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature

SmartSketch automatically calculates the sheet scale when you import MicroStation documents so that the range of graphics automatically fits within the lower left-hand corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want the sheet scale automatically calculated, then you must uncheck the Fit imported data to active sheet check box on the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. Tip You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale you want and insert a MicroStation document to base the template on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want.
Using MicroStation Fonts and Styles in a SmartSketch Document

If you want to make line styles from MicroStation resource files available in a SmartSketch document, you can reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file from the active template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box. When you attach a .RSC file from the current document or template, the styles in the resource document are added to the Style dropdown list on the ribbon for the active document.
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Tip MicroStation resource files for line styles are treated as a document setting. If you want to have all documents that are created by importing use the same styles, you must create an .IGR template with those styles attached. You then specify the .IGR template as the template to use during import of MicroStation documents.
Data Fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase that describes how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing equivalent element types with mapped entities to SmartSketch. SmartSketch also provides support for non-displayed data such as database linkages, units, and coordinates. SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the following areas:
Units
MicroStation files are determined by the master and sub-unit labels in the file. If meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the resulting SmartSketch document has the closest matching units set on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box. If no meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the File Units setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box is used to determine the units for translated or referenced MicroStation files.
Coordinates
MicroStation data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you translate the MicroStation files (click Open on the File menu). Referenced MicroStation file coordinate positions are determined by the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box. Tip You can use Coincident to import the data in its original coordinate position at a 1 to 1 scale.
Levels
MicroStation level numbers, names, or both are preserved as SmartSketch layer names, but the color and linetype settings (level symbology) are not. The color and linestyle settings apply directly to the resulting elements. 654 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Within a SmartSketch document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet. When translating foreign files into SmartSketch, the levels in MicroStation keep the same names. The MicroStation Export Options dialog box provides a layer mapping table, due to the limit of 63 levels in MicroStation. You can access this dialog box with the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu.
Cells
When you translate a .DGN document, the default is to translate cells into symbols. You can change this default with Options on the Tools menu so that cells or blocks are embedded groups. This action translates cells and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in SmartSketch. Tip All MicroStation Type 2 cells are imported into SmartSketch as a group. The group contains a dynamic attribute set that stores the name of the cell, its origin, and any other data characterizing the cell. There is, therefore, enough information stored in the group to reconstruct an element back into a cell to export in the future.
When you import a MicroStation document that has cells, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in \\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Cells with Attribute Data

When translating a .dgn document, the default is to translate all cells containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels.
3D Data
All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on the File menu. The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box. The following information is an entity-to-element map when you translate files using Open on the File menu. MicroStation Line Linestring Bspline Curve SmartSketch Line Linestring Bspline Curve SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 655
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Shape Ellipse Arc Complex String Complex Shape Bspline Surface Curve Cone Surface Dimension Text Text Node Cell Shared Cell Multiline Point String Reference Raster Database Linkages Tags User Data Notes The Image Integrator module must be downloaded to support import of raster reference files. MicroStation symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex shapes (e.g. rectangles) will not translate successfully into SmartSketch symbols. None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or altered using SmartSketch commands. However, if MicroStation software is installed on your computer, then you can click Open on the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This action opens the MicroStation reference file in the MicroStation application. If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch file and a reference file, the relationships will be removed if you change the position of elements in the source file and then update the reference file in SmartSketch. If you change the inserted information (copied from MicroStation), the original information does not change. Linestring Ellipse Arc Complex String Complex String Bspline Curve Bspline Curve Flattened wire frame Group Dimension Text Text Group Symbol (Shared Embed) Group Points Reference Reference Dynamic Attribute set on the element Dynamic Attribute set on the element Dynamic Attribute set on the element
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export

When you translate SmartSketch files into MicroStation data, you are concerned with either Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after translation. SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a file during export to MicroStation by providing support for the following different areas:
Colors
When SmartSketch colors are saved to a .DGN file, a color table containing matching colors is created and attached to the resulting .DGN by default. If a seed file with a color table attached is specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu), SmartSketch colors are automatically mapped to the closest RGB equivalent colors in that table.
Widths
SmartSketch default widths are pre-mapped to their most equivalent MicroStation widths on the Line Width tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu).
Linestyles
SmartSketch line styles are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box. If styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the SmartSketch file being exported, the line style names are transferred to the resulting .DGN file. If a style exists in the MicroStation application by the same name, that style will be used. If there is no style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation assigns a default style.
Fill Styles
Basic fill styles such as Normal are automatically recreated as MicroStation associative hatch patterns in the resulting .DGN files. Fill styles that use symbols such as Earth (in AEC templates) are exported as individual elements in the resulting .DGN file. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 657
Font Styles
SmartSketch default font styles (TTF) are pre-mapped to their most equivalent MicroStation font styles on the Font tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box. If the font is not listed in the mapping table on the font tab, it defaults to font 3 (Engineering) in the resulting MicroStation file. If font styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the SmartSketch file being exported, the font style names are passed into the resulting .DGN file, provided it has not been mapped in the font mapping table. Mappings override automatic behaviors. If a font style exists in the MicroStation application by the same name, that font style will be used. If there is no font style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation assigns the default font 3 (Engineering) style.
References
MicroStation .DGN files that are referenced in SmartSketch will be saved as MicroStation reference files in the resulting MicroStation file. Raster reference files in SmartSketch will be saved as MicroStation raster files in the resulting MicroStation file. Other reference files (.IGR, .DGN, .or DXF files) are not currently supported during the export to MicroStation. Inserted objects such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during the export to the MicroStation file format.
Multiple Sheets
Only the active sheet and background sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to a MicroStation file. Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not currently supported. Tip The active background sheet graphics are merged into the resulting .DGN file.
Data Fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a MicroStation file during export by mapping data to its most equivalent form in MicroStation. SmartSketch does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with elements in the file. SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the following areas:
Units
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview If a seed file is specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box, then the units of that seed file are used in the resulting file. Otherwise, the following chart indicates what happens to SmartSketch units as they are exported to MicroStation units. IGR Primary Units MSTN MU inches feet meters millimeters centimeters manometers yards miles kilometers tenths hundreds thousands poles rods links chains points furlongs IN FT M MM CM NM YD MI KM TE HN TH PL RD LK CH PT FR MSTN Resolution 1000:254 12:8000 1000:10 1000:100 1000:100 Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged Seed file values unchanged
Coordinates
SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you translate to the MicroStation files.
Layers to Levels
SmartSketch layer names are preserved as MicroStation level names and numbers, but the color and linestyle settings (level symbology) are not. The color and linestyle layer settings are applied directly to the resulting elements. Tip Any translated levels past Level 63 are combined together on Level 63.
The following is an element to element map when you translate files using Save As on the File menu. SmartSketch Line Ellipse Arc MicroStation Line Ellipse Ellipse SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 659
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Point Linestring Connector Bspline Curve Rectangle Complex String Text Dimension Symbol Leader Group SmartLabel Parametric Symbols Multi Representation Symbol .DGN Reference .IGR, DWG, or .DXF Reference OLE Objects (.doc, .xls, etc.) Attribute sets Raster Reference Line Linestring Linestring Bspline Curve Shape Complex Chain Text Dimension Shared Cell Dimension Elements Elements Elements Elements .DGN Reference Ignored (no equivalent) Ignored (no equivalent) Ignored Raster Reference
Open a MicroStation Document

1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box. 3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. 4. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in the Template File box. Tip You can search for the seed file by clicking Browse. 5. On the Browse dialog box, click the seed file you want. 6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dgn extension. 7. Select the document that you want to open. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module. Notes If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview or drag a MicroStation document from the Windows Explorer into the current document. After you place the MicroStation information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that are already in the current document. You can use .dgn resource files to preserve the original fonts and line types of the document when you open a MicroStation document with File > Open. You can set font locations before opening the MicroStation document by clicking Tools > Options and then clicking the File Locations tab. You can set options for line types by clicking Format > Style and then clicking Resources. All translation options for opening MicroStation documents with File > Open are delivered through the Custom and Typical setup options when you install the software. If you cannot open a MicroStation document, you should re-install the software with the Custom or Typical setup to get these options. MicroStation line strings are imported as SmartSketch line strings. MicroStation point strings are imported as groups. A MicroStation text node (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into SmartSketch as two separate line strings (text boxes). When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents show up as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. You can use the Registration Extension utility to register alternate MicroStation extensions so that SmartSketch will view them as valid MicroStation files without having to rename them. This freeware program may be downloaded from the SmartSketch software downloads web page at http://www.smartsketch.com/support/downloads.asp
Place MicroStation Information in the Document

To place MicroStation information onto the drawing sheet, you must first open SmartSketch and open the document that you want. You set options for inserting the MicroStation information into the document with Options on the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 661
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Tools menu. The options are located on the Foreign Data tab. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
To Drag a Document
1. Open Windows Explorer and select the MicroStation document that you want. 2. Drag the document into the active document in SmartSketch.
To Insert a Document
Click Insert > Object and select MicroStation document that you want.
To Drag Selected Elements

1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want. 2. Drag the selected elements into the active document in SmartSketch. Tip If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked.
To Copy and Paste Selected Elements

1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want. 2. Copy the selected information. 3. In SmartSketch on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy the selected elements into the current document. Notes You can also open a MicroStation document directly with Open on the File menu. When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents also appear. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. After you place the MicroStation information in the current document, you can locate elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that you place using SmartSketch.
Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document

1. Click File > Open and select the document to base a template on. 2. Click View > Background Sheets. 3. Click File > Sheet Setup and set the options that you want for the background sheet. 4. Click View > Working Sheets. 5. Click File > Sheet Setup. 6. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want. 7. Click Tools > Options. 8. On the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box, select User Templates. 9. Click Modify. 10. On the Modify Location dialog box, select the directory where you want to store the template. 11. Click File > Save As to save the document in the directory that you selected. This document is the template. 12. Click File > New to create a blank document. 13. On the File New dialog box, in the Templates box, select the template that you created to base the new document on. 14. On the Insert menu, click Object and select the MicroStation document that you want to insert.
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File

You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and elements in a MicroStation reference file that you inserted. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module. Tip You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you want to see the relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 663
1. Place a MicroStation reference file in a document.
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview the Tools menu. 2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the same manner you would any elements. Notes If you change the position of elements in a MicroStation document that is linked to your current document and then update the link in the document, the relationships are no longer valid.
Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File

1. Open the MicroStation reference file. Note Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked or embedded and used for reference information is termed a reference file. on the Main toolbar.
2. Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit 3. On the Tools menu, click Display Manager.
4. If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which contains the reference file on the Sheets tab. 5. Click the Layers tab.
Turn On/Off Layer Display

1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the check box. 3. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.
Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group

1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the Colors dialog box. 3. Select a color from the list. 4. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK. Notes The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list, followed by individual layers. If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators.
Add MicroStation Linestyles to a Document

You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file that contains linestyles as a style resource document from any template or document. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
1. Click File > Open to open the document to which you want to add a style resource document. 2. Click Format > Style. 3. On the Style dialog box, click Resources. 4. On the Style Resources dialog box, click Add. 5. On the Add Style Resource dialog box, select the name of the .RSC file that you want to add to the template. 6. Click OK on each dialog box. 7. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate if you want to save changes to document. The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or document that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the styles in the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current document ribbon. If you open a document that is based on a template with references to style resource documents, the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the current document. Notes Use this procedure only for linestyle resources. You must apply linestyles to each document individually, unless you apply a template. Sometimes you can attach several style resource documents that SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 665
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview contain styles with duplicate names. In these cases, the Style Resources list in the style resource document has priority. In that list, the style listed first appears on the ribbon of the active document. If you want to add MicroStation fonts to a document, click Options on the Tools menu. Then, on the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the fonts with the Fonts 1, 2, and 3 options.
MicroStation Cells in Your Document

To use MicroStation cells as symbols in your document, the cells must first be converted into individual symbols (.sym). On the File menu, Open allows you to open a MicroStation cell library. A directory is created, with the same name as the cell library. The individual cells within the library are saved as individual symbols in the new directory. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module. Tip All MicroStation Type 2 cells are imported into your document as a group. The group contains a dynamic attribute set that stores the name of the cell, its origin, and any other data characterizing the cell. There is, therefore, enough information stored in the group to reconstruct an element back into a cell to export in the future.
You can drag these symbols from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer into other SmartSketch documents. Options for the cell library units (SU and PU) can be set on the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. You can access this dialog box by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, on the Foreign Data tab, you can enter the appropriate working units in the SU: and MU: fields. Symbols in your document are saved as MicroStation cells during translation from your document to MicroStation formats.
Open a MicroStation Cell Library

1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Foreign Data tab, in the Format box, click MicroStation. 3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import 666 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Options dialog box. 4. On the General tab, set the Units of Resolution to specify the resolution of the cells that you want to import. 5. On each dialog box, click OK. 6. On the Main toolbar, click File > Open. 7. On the Open dialog box, click the .CEL extension and select the cell library that you want to open. A progress box appears to show the progress of the translation of the cells in the cell library. The software creates a subdirectory with the same name as the .CEL file in the directory of the cell library. The software then creates one symbol for each cell that was in the .CEL file; the names of the new symbols are identical to the cells used to create them. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
MicroStation Construction Class Information

When you open a MicroStation document, the construction class information is preserved with layer names. When importing the document, the software creates special layers for construction elements. The layers are named so that you can recognize the layers, including the layer for the construction element. For example, level 6 would become Constr. 6 and level Border would also become Constr. Border. You can also save these layers back out to the MicroStation document format. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.

Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Sets options for moving information into the current document by dragging a document or by clicking one of the following commands: Paste Special on the Edit menu Object on the Insert menu Open on the File menu.
Tab Options
Format - Sets the type of format that you can use for importing or saving a document. When you click MicroStation or AutoCAD and then click the appropriate Options, you can access a specific dialog box to set options for importing or saving AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwg) or MicroStation (.dgn) documents. Import - Sets options for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. File Units - Sets the units for the document you want to import. When you insert or drag a document into the drawing sheet, the software uses this setting only when the document has units assigned that the software does not recognize. Orientation - Sets the orientation for the document that you want to import. Options - Accesses one of the dialog boxes for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. Export - Sets options for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. Options - Accesses a dialog box for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document. Important The Foreign Data tab is only available on the Options dialog box if you install the CAD Translators module.
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how a MicroStation document is opened or inserted into the current document. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Cell Library - Sets options for translating MicroStation cell libraries. When a cell library is imported, a symbol document with an .sym extension is created. Units of Resolution - Determines the sub-unit and positional unit settings for MicroStation cell libraries. Cell libraries do not have units and depend on the MicroStation document for their units of resolution. These settings have no effect on translating documents with a .dgn extension; the settings only affect documents with a .CEL extension. Cells - Sets options for importing cells in MicroStation documents. When you import a MicroStation document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open ITMSTN.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0. Options - Determines if cells are imported as elements on the drawing sheet or embedded symbols. Symbol documents have an .sym extension. For example, if you click Hybrid, regular cells, Type 2, are imported as groups and shared cells, type 34, are imported as symbols. Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create a document. Browse - Accesses the Browse dialog box. Fit imported data to active sheet - Places the MicroStation data on the active drawing sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
Font Tab
Maps the fonts in the software to a MicroStation font.
Linestyle Tab
Maps the MicroStation line types to line style definitions in the software.
Line Width Tab

Maps the MicroStation weights to line widths in the software.
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be translated to a MicroStation file format. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Version - Specifies the version of MicroStation you want to use. Seed File - Specifies the path of a default seed file that contains appropriate units, color tables, and other important information. Caution When you specify a 2D seed file while exporting a 3D MicroStation reference file from the current document, the 3D reference file is not saved in MicroStation. For the 3D MicroStation reference file to be saved in MicroStation, you must specify a 3D seed file on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box.
Browse - Displays the Seed File dialog box.
Font Tab
Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.
LineStyle Tab
Maps the line style in the software to MicroStation line styles. The values for mapping are as follows: SmartSketch 9 11 10 12 13 18 MicroStation 0 1 2 4 6 7 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 671
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview 20 6
Line Width Tab

Maps the software line widths to MicroStation weights.
Layer Tab
Tab Options
Layer Mapping Table - Displays an alphanumeric ordered list of the layers.
Working with AutoCAD Files: An Overview

CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports True Type Fonts and dashed gap linetypes for outstanding visual fidelity when you import, reference, or export AutoCAD drawings. Invisible AutoCAD information such as database linkages, attributes, and Xdata is also preserved as attributes on SmartSketch graphics. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files

Your document supports opening and saving AutoCAD files in two ways: you can either select an AutoCAD file and translate it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, or you can create a reference file from an AutoCAD file. If you use the method for selecting an AutoCAD file and translating it into equivalent elements in your document, you can click Open on the File menu. After you open an AutoCAD file using this method, the resulting file is in format (igr). Tip If an AutoCAD file contains paper space data, the resulting file contains two sheets: one sheet represents the paper space data, and is named paper space; the other sheet represents model space data, and is named model space. The paper space views are recreated as reference views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet.
If you use the method for creating a reference file from an AutoCAD file, you can either click Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer. This action enables you to display and, if AutoCAD is available on your computer, edit the AutoCAD file while working in . You can also select the view position of a 3-D AutoCAD file upon placement. After an AutoCAD file has been referenced using this method, you can then locate and establish relationships between the new information and elements on the drawing sheet. Tip The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options dialog box. By selecting the Foreign Data tab and setting the format to AutoCAD, you can configure the settings for importing SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 673
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview AutoCAD data that applies to both of these methods. Caution Roundtrip of AutoCAD data (importing AutoCAD data to SmartSketch data and exporting back to AutoCAD data) is currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information such as attributes, database linkages, and Xdata are not supported during export to the AutoCAD file format.
Other Methods for Importing AutoCAD Data

You can use the following methods to move AutoCAD (.DWG or .DXF) files into SmartSketch: Cutting and pasting. Dragging. Inserting the information as an object.
When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents also appear. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. Tip You can also use Open on the File menu to translate and open documents.
Cutting and Pasting

You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then cut or copy the information and paste it into SmartSketch with Paste Special.
Dragging
You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then drag it into SmartSketch. In the Windows Explorer, select the AutoCAD document and then drag it into SmartSketch. The document is embedded in the drawing by default. Before you drop the document, you can embed the document in SmartSketch by pressing Ctrl. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked. When you place the document, handles appear that allow you to scale the object. The foreign document is placed into SmartSketch and behaves much like a symbol, allowing you to click to place it or move it around. Tip You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, you can set the options you want on the Reference File tab of the Options dialog box.
Inserting as an Object
Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object on the Insert menu. On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option to link or embed the document. After you insert the object, SmartSketch places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you to crop it without altering the scale of the object. The geometry of the inserted document is recognized; you can use the relationship indicators to draw or create relationships between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements in the SmartSketch document. You can edit the inserted object by doubleclicking it. Tip Object inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word or .AVI document, or CAD document, such as .DWG. The inserted object can then be edited by double-clicking it.
Saving SmartSketch to AutoCAD

You can save a SmartSketch file as an AutoCAD file. Before you do this, you can adjust the translation options using Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Export Options. When you save a SmartSketch document as a .DWG or .DXF document, the active sheet is saved. You do not have to map layers for AutoCAD documents; the layer names are imported or exported as named in the native document. If a SmartSketch layer has not been mapped, it is automatically placed on the next available layer or level in the foreign document until the last level or layer occurs. Caution If you save SmartSketch documents with raster reference files as AutoCAD documents, only the files of the same type (.DWG) can be exported back into.
AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples

Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Conceptual Design
Because SmartSketch gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, it is a natural choice for sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 675
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview of a project. You can capture relationships as you draw, or easily add them later as relationships or dimensions. You can also alter dimensions to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the AutoCAD (.dwg) file format to complete downstream tasks in AutoCAD.
Drawing Files
You can use SmartSketch to add annotations to existing AutoCAD drawing files by inserting an AutoCAD drawing file in SmartSketch with Object on the Insert menu, adding annotations and text, and saving the file in AutoCAD format. If you have not installed AutoCAD but need to provide drawing files in AutoCAD format, you can create the drawing files in SmartSketch and then save the file in AutoCAD format.
Project Management
Managing large projects becomes easier when you use SmartSketch to integrate AutoCAD drawings. You can use SmartSketch to gather drawing files from several sources and combine them into a single project book. You can then add details using SmartSketch and save the files in AutoCAD format so other project team members using AutoCAD can review the project.
You can also use SmartSketch as a central location for all project informationboth graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with products that are OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into an AutoCAD file that has been opened in SmartSketch.
Review and Redlining

SmartSketch is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining AutoCAD drawings. You can use Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or 3-D AutoCAD drawing in SmartSketch and then sketch on the drawing. You can sketch and make revisions on top of the native data. After reviewing, you can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import

When you translate AutoCAD data into your document, you are concerned with either visual fidelity or data fidelity or both. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after it has been translated. Your software preserves the visual accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing support for the following seven different areas:
Colors
AutoCAD colors are automatically mapped to the closest matching red, green, blue (RGB) color in the color table. Tip Colors that were used in AutoCAD to determine plotting pen widths can also be mapped to a width in your document by using AutoCAD Color on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box.
Widths
AutoCAD R9 through R14 polylines are the only type of entity that support a SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 679
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview width. Polyline widths are automatically mapped to an exact matching in model width of your document. All other entities such as lines, arcs, and circles in AutoCAD do not support width. For the entities that do not support width, a default width is applied (all elements in your document have a width). You can make changes to any of the default mappings to define your own mapping with the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu). SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that correspond to standard metric pencil leads: .13, .18, .25, .35, .5, .7, 1.0, 1.4, and 2.0.
Linestyles
AutoCAD default line styles are pre-mapped to the most equivalent line styles for your document on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. Line styles other than the default line styles or any complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous unless they are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab.
Hatches
AutoCAD default hatches are automatically mapped to matching fill styles in your document. Hatches other than the defaults delivered with AutoCAD are stroked into their primitive elements to preserve their visual accuracy
Font Styles
AutoCAD default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent font styles in your document, True Type Fonts, on the Font tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. Other fonts default to the Arial true type font delivered with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping on the tab, it defaults to Arial.
Xrefs
AutoCAD Xrefs are imported as reference files in your document, which use the automatic defaults or same options for configuring how color, width, line styles, hatches, and fonts are handled for visual accuracy.
Paper Space
If paper space was active when an AutoCAD file was saved, the file containing paper space data causes two sheets to be created when you click Open on the File menu. One sheet represents the paper space data and is named Paper Space. The other sheet represents model space data and is named Model Space. The paper space views are recreated as reference views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet. 680 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Tip AutoCAD files that are reference files instead of files translated using Open on the File menu, do not support the display of paper space data; instead, the model space information is displayed.
Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature

The software automatically calculates the sheet scale in your document when you import AutoCAD documents so that the range of graphics automatically fits within the lower left-hand corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want the sheet scale automatically calculated, then you must manually modify the .INI file. To modify the .INI file, you click Explore on the Start menu and go to the directory where SmartSketch resides. You can use any text editor to modify the file. Double-click itacad. In the Options section of the file, set Ignore sheet scale = 0. Tip You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale you want and insert an AutoCAD document to base the template on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want
Using AutoCAD Fonts and Styles in Your Document

The software supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows and supplies additional ANSI and ISO TrueType engineering fonts. When you open a .dwg document, the software provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD font. You can make changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the font resources by double clicking on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.
Data fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. Your document preserves the data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing equivalent element types that entities are mapped to. The software also provides support for non-displayed data such as attributes on the resulting elements. Your document preserves data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing support for the following areas:
Units
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview AutoCAD files are considered unit-less files. The File Units setting for AutoCAD import data on the Options dialog box is used to determine the units for translated AutoCAD data or referenced AutoCAD data.
Coordinates
AutoCAD data is automatically positioned to the matching coordinate positions when you translate the AutoCAD files (click Open on the File menu). Referenced AutoCAD file coordinate positions are determined by the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box. Tip You can use Coincident to import the data in its original coordinate position at a 1 to 1 scale.
Layers
Within your document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet. AutoCAD layer names are preserved as layer names in your document, but the color and linetype settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied directly to the resulting element. Caution In AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on a layer-by-layer basis. When you select a different layer, the colors, line styles, and line widths change. In your document, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied directly to each individual element or object. When you select a different layer, the colors, line styles, and line widths are not affected. When you export back to AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on an entity basis.
AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one of three ways on an element:
Byblock - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of a block containing it. The software does not support the entity concept so the Byblock properties are applied directly to the resulting element. Bylayer - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of its associated layer. The software does not support the entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied directly to the resulting element. Byentity - occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to the entity and override any Byblock or Bylayer properties. The
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview software supports this concept for all of its elements and preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.
Blocks
When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate cells or blocks into symbols. You can change this default with the Options command on the Tools menu so that cells or blocks are embedded groups. This translates cells and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in your document. When you import an AutoCAD document that blocks, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in \\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ITACAD.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Blocks with Attribute Data

When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels.
3D Data
All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on the File menu. The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box. The following is an entity to element map when you translate files using Open on the File menu. AutoCAD Line Circle Polyline (lines only) Polyline (lines & arcs) Arc Trace Point Face3d Solid Block Multiline Spline Dimension Text SmartSketch Line Ellipse Linestring Complex String Arc Line Point Line Linestring Symbol Linestring Bspline Curve Dimension Text SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 683
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Paperspace Viewport Xline Ray Database Linkages Attributes Ellipse Region Solid3d Mtext Leader Tolerance Xdata Hatch Image Notes The Image Integrator module must be downloaded to support raster reference files. AutoCAD symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex shapes (e.g. rectangles) will not translate successfully into SmartSketch symbols. None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or altered using commands in the software. However, if AutoCAD software is located on your machine, then you can click Open on the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This will open the AutoCAD reference file in the AutoCAD application. If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch file and a reference file, the relationships will be removed if you change the position of elements in the source file and then update the reference file in your document. If you change the inserted information (copied from AutoCAD), the original information does not change. Reference Line Line Dynamic Attribute set on element Dynamic Attribute set on element Ellipse Ignored Ignored Text Leader Group Dynamic Attribute set on the element Fill Reference
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export

When you translate your document into AutoCAD data, you are concerned with either Visual fidelity or Data fidelity or both.
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after it has been translated. Your document preserves the visual accuracy of a file during export to AutoCAD file by providing support for the following seven different areas:
Colors
The software colors map to the closest matching red, green, blue (RGB) color in the default AutoCAD color table. Tip Widths can be mapped to an AutoCAD color by using the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. AutoCAD colors are used to determine plotting pen widths.
Widths
Every element in your document has widths applied that are exported as polyline objects with equivalent AutoCAD widths if the widths are equal to or greater than the polyline width threshold. The Polyline width threshold field is located on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Whenever possible, elements that have widths less than the threshold are exported as AutoCAD entities that do not support width.
Linestyles
The default line styles in your document are pre-mapped to the most equivalent AutoCAD line styles on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Line styles other than the default line styles or any complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous unless they are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab.
Fill Styles
SmartSketch default fill styles are exported as matching hatch styles in the resulting AutoCAD files.
Font Styles
SmartSketch default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent AutoCAD font styles (True Type Fonts (TTF)) on the Font tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Other fonts default to the txt.shx font delivered with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping table on the SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 685
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview font tab, it defaults to txt.shx in the resulting AutoCAD file.
Dimension Styles
SmartSketch dimension styles are preserved as AutoCAD dimension styles in the resulting dwg files.
Reference Files and OLE Inserts

AutoCAD dwg files that are referenced in SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD Xrefs in the resulting AutoCAD file. Raster reference files in SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD raster files in the resulting AutoCAD file. Other reference files that are not currently supported during export to AutoCAD include .IGR, .DGN, and .DXF, files. OLE inserted objects such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during export to the AutoCAD file format
Multiple Sheets
Only the active sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to an AutoCAD file. Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not currently supported.
Data fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of an AutoCAD file during export by mapping data to its most equivalent form in AutoCAD. SmartSketch does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with elements in the file. SmartSketch preserves element and document data support for the following areas:
Units
The subunits of the file being saved as a dwg file determines the model size of the graphics in the resulting AutoCAD file
Coordinates
SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you translate to AutoCAD.
Layers
SmartSketch layer names are preserved as AutoCAD layer names, but the color and linetype settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied directly to Byentity, the resulting element In AutoCAD. 686 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one of three ways on an element:
Byblock - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of a block containing it. SmartSketch does not support the entity concept so the Byblock properties are applied directly to the resulting element. Bylayer - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of its associated layer. SmartSketch does not support the entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied directly to the resulting element. Byentity - occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to the entity and override any Byblock or Bylayer properties. SmartSketch supports this concept for all of its elements and preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.
The following is an entity to element map when you translate files. SmartSketch Line Ellipse Arc Point Connector Linestring Bspline Curve Rectangle Complex String Reference Text Leader Dimension Group Symbol SmartLabel Parametric Symbols Multi-representation Symbol Raster Reference AutoCAD Line Circle Arc Point Polyline Polyline Polyline Polyline Polyline Xref Text Leader Dimension Entity Block Entities Entities Entities Raster Reference
Open an AutoCAD Document

1. Click Tools > Options. 2. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 687
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview 3. In the Import box, click Options to access the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. 4. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in the Template File box. Tip You can search for the template by clicking Browse. 5. Click File > Open. 6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dwg extension. 7. Select the document that you want to open. Notes If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag an AutoCAD document from the Windows Explorer into the current document. After you place the AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements and establish relationships among the new information and elements that are already in the current document. When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels. All translation options for opening AutoCAD documents with File > Open are delivered through the Custom and Typical setup options when you install the software. If you cannot open an AutoCAD document, you should re-install the software with the Custom or Typical setup for these options. AutoCAD polylines are imported as line strings. AutoCAD mtext (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into SmartSketch as two separate line strings (text boxes). When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document.
Place AutoCAD Information in the Document

To place AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you must first open 688 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview SmartSketch and open the document that you want. You should set options for bringing the AutoCAD information into the document with Options on the Tools menu. The options appear on the Foreign Data tab. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
To Drag a Document
1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the AutoCAD document that you want. 2. Drag the document into the current document in SmartSketch.
To Insert a Document
Click Insert > Object and select the AutoCAD document that you want.
To Drag Selected Elements

1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want. 2. Drag the selected elements into the current document in SmartSketch. Tip If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked.
To Copy and Paste Selected Elements

1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want. 2. Copy the selected information. 3. In SmartSketch, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy the selected elements into the current document. Notes You can also open an AutoCAD document directly with Open on the File menu. When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document. After you place the AutoCAD information in the current document, you can locate elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that you place using SmartSketch. SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 689
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview When placing translated AutoCAD symbols, all elements of the items that make up the body of the component need to be placed on the default layer of the document.
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File

You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and elements within an AutoCAD object that you inserted. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module. Tip You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you want to see the relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on the Tools menu.
1. Place an AutoCAD reference file on the drawing sheet.
2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the document in the same manner you would any elements. Notes If you change the position of elements in an AutoCAD document that is linked to your current document and then update the link in the document, the relationships will not be valid any more.
Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File

1. Open the AutoCAD reference file. Note Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked or embedded and used for reference information is termed a reference file. on the Main toolbar.
2. Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit 3. On the Tools menu, click Display Manager.
4. If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which 690 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview contains the reference file on the Sheets tab. 5. Click the Layers tab.
Turn On/Off Layer Display

1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the check box. 3. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.
Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group

1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list. 2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the Colors dialog box. 3. Select a color from the list. 4. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK. Notes The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list, followed by individual layers. If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators.

AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box
Controls how an AutoCAD document is opened or inserted into the current document. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module.
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Blocks - Specifies whether an AutoCAD block is imported as an embedded symbol or a group of elements. An embedded symbol document has a .sym extension. When you import an AutoCAD document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in ITACAD.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0. Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create a document. Browse - Displays the Browse dialog box. Fit imported data to active drawing sheet - Places the AutoCAD data on the active drawing sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
Font Tab
Maps the font of the current document to an AutoCAD font.
Linestyle Tab
Maps the AutoCAD line types to line style definitions in the current document. 692 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview Tip The number values listed below are used in the linestyle table to map linestyle definitions in the current document to AutoCAD line types. Type Continuous Dash Dot Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot Chain Centered Chain Double Chain Dash Dash Dot No Type Delivered End Gap Number 9 10 11 12 13 18 19 20 21 22 23
Linestyle Normal Dashed Dotted Dash Dot Dash 2Dot Chain No Style Delivered Double Chain 2Dash Dot Zig-Zag No Style Delivered
Line Width Tab

Maps a line width for the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Tab Options
Default Width - Defines the width to assign to all AutoCAD entities that do not have width or color-to-width mapping.
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be saved to AutoCAD file format. Important To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators module
General Tab
Tab Options
Version - Specifies the version of AutoCAD you want to use. Prototype DWG File - Specifies the default prototype drawing (.dwg) file to use during translation. This document can contain appropriate styles, color tables, and other pre-configured settings. Browse - Displays the AutoCAD Template File dialog box. Note Not usable without add-in for translations.
Font Tab
Maps the fonts for the current document to an AutoCAD font.
Linestyle Tab
Maps the line style of the current document to AutoCAD line types. The values for mapping are as follows: Line Style Normal Dashed Dotted Dash Dot Dash 2Dot Chain No Style Delivered Double Chain 2Dash Dot Zig-Zag 694 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide Type Continuous Dash Dot Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot Chain Centered Chain Double Chain Dash Dash Dot No Type Delivered Number 9 10 11 12 13 18 19 20 21 22
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview No Style Delivered End Gap 23
Line Width Tab

Maps a line width in the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Tab Option
Polyline Width Threshold - Defines the threshold used to determine when polylines with width must be created.
Index
Index
about the product ...................................... 72 about the product"..................................... 67 accessing" ................................................. 67 training ...................................................... 73 actions" ................................................... 258 actions:redoing........................................ 258 actions:undoing ....................................... 258 ActiveCGM .............................................. 680 ActiveX"........................................... 675, 676 ActiveX:documents ......................... 675, 676 ActiveX:opening SmartSketch documents inside Internet Explorer ....................... 676 ActiveX:using the Internet ....................... 675 adding a symbol attribute........................ 640 adding commands to the shortcut menu" 650 adding to groups" .................... 475, 479, 483 adding to groups:creating ....................... 475 adding to groups:using............................ 475 adding" ............ 220, 295, 313, 314, 365, 498 adding:dimensions to groups .................. 365 adding:favorites....................................... 498 adding:leaders ................................ 295, 313 adding:vertices ........................................ 295 add-ins" ........................... 597, 601, 602, 603 add-ins:included .............................. 597, 601 add-ins:installing ..................................... 602 add-ins:overviews ................................... 601 add-ins:removing .................................... 602 adjusting" ........................................ 617, 625 adjusting:brightness for raster images... 617, 625 adjusting:contrast for raster images 617, 625 alignments" ..................................... 332, 505 alignments:associating elements ............ 505 alignments:showing ................................ 332 angular dimensions"................ 358, 361, 388 angular dimensions:placing ............ 361, 388 angular dimensions:types ....................... 358 animations" ............................................. 527 animations:creating................................. 527 annotations symbols ............................................... 645 annotations" ... 284, 285, 288, 289, 295, 297, 307, 377, 541, 553 annotations:adding to drawings ...... 284, 285 annotations:formatting .................... 541, 553 annotations:manipulating ........................ 289 annotations:moving................................. 289 annotations:placing ......................... 288, 377 applying" ................................. 293, 543, 548 applying:borders ..................................... 293 applying:styles ................................ 543, 548 architecture templates............................. 152 areas" ........................................ 36, 397, 401 areas:measuring ..................................... 397 areas:viewing ............................................ 36 arguments ............................................... 403 associative elements"..... 263, 373, 427, 429, 434, 442, 453 associative elements:applying relationships ............................................................. 453 associative elements:changing shapes .. 427 associative elements:extending .............. 442 associative elements:mirroring................ 434 associative elements:moving .................. 263 associative elements:rotating.................. 429 associative elements:trimming ................ 442 associative elements:using dimensions .. 373 attributes" ................ 532, 533, 534, 538, 641 attributes:adding...................................... 640 attributes:displaying ........................ 533, 534 attributes:editing ...................... 533, 534, 538 attributes:modifying ................................. 641 attributes:moving the Attribute Viewer .... 533 attributes:removing.................................. 641 attributes:viewing ............................ 532, 538 AutoCAD" .......................... 38, 719, 732, 733 AutoCAD:documents............................... 732 AutoCAD:help for users of ........................ 38 AutoCAD:workflow examples.................. 719 AutoSave" ............................................... 114 AutoSave:saving documents automatically ............................................................. 114 AutoSave:setting options ........................ 114 azimuth............................................ 400, 402 background sheets"......... 100, 101, 106, 705 background sheets:changing .................. 101 background sheets:displaying................. 100 balloons".......................... 284, 285, 288, 307 balloons:adding to drawings... 284, 285, 288, 307 balloons:placing .............................. 288, 307 base bearing.................................... 400, 402 basic dimensions..................................... 369 direction........................................... 400, 402 bearing" ........................................... 400, 402 bearing:azimuth............................... 400, 402 bearing:base bearing ...................... 400, 402 bearing:setting................................. 400, 402 breaking links .......................................... 593 brightness........................................ 617, 625 bringing" .......................................... 470, 473 cascading windows ................................... 34 cgm" ........................................ 110, 675, 680 cgm:ActiveCGM ...................................... 680 cgm:drawings .......................................... 675
Index
cgm:saving .............................................. 110 cgm:using the Internet and Intranet ........ 675 chamfers" ................................ 445, 451, 557 chamfers:drawing.................................... 451 chamfers:properties ................................ 557 changing" 101, 263, 264, 267, 275, 280, 373, 374, 427, 429, 434, 436, 440, 442, 453, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 479, 481, 482, 545 changing:associative elements ...... 263, 373, 427, 434, 453 changing:background sheets .................. 101 changing:display order... 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 changing:drawings . 263, 275, 373, 427, 429, 434, 453 changing:driving ...................................... 374 changing:elements. 264, 267, 280, 429, 434, 436, 440 changing:formats of a style ..................... 545 changing:layers ....................................... 479 changing:relationships ............................ 453 character maps ............................... 294, 312 circles".... 209, 210, 211, 213, 237, 244, 247, 557 circles:drawing ................................ 213, 277 circles:isometric .............................. 244, 247 circular drawing ................................................ 275 class dimensions..................................... 369 clearing element selections" ................... 256 Clipboard" ....................................... 268, 269 Clipboard:copying to ............................... 268 Clipboard:pasting from............................ 269 closing".................................................... 116 closing:files.............................................. 116 colinear" .......................................... 459, 460 colinear:elements or key points ...... 459, 460 colinear:relationships ...................... 459, 460 colors" ............................................. 481, 571 colors:creating......................................... 481 colors:creating for fills ............................. 571 compression factor.................................. 631 computer graphic metafile....................... 680 concentric" ...................................... 456, 460 concentric:elements ........................ 456, 460 concentric:relationships .................. 456, 460 connecting" ..... 193, 200, 202, 341, 457, 460 connecting:elements ....... 193, 202, 457, 460 connecting:points .................................... 341 connecting:relationships ................. 457, 460 connecting:symbols ................................ 200 connectors" .... 194, 196, 199, 200, 201, 202, 523 connectors:attaching............................... 194 connectors:ending ................................... 194 connectors:formatting.............................. 199 connectors:merging................................. 200 connectors:modifying .............................. 196 connectors:placing .................................. 194 connectors:splitting ................................. 201 connectors:starting .................................. 194 connectors:symbols ................................ 523 construction class information" ....... 706, 733 context-sensitive Help ............................... 72 contrast............................................ 617, 625 control keys ............................................... 26 converting symbols ................................. 517 copying symbols.............................. 642, 672 copying".. 268, 269, 272, 275, 276, 434, 509, 511, 520, 522, 524, 589 copying:documents ................................. 589 copying:elements ... 253, 268, 269, 272, 275, 434 copying:embedding ................................. 589 copying:formats ....................................... 272 copying:linking......................................... 589 copying:pasting ....................................... 589 copying:symbols...... 509, 511, 520, 522, 524 corner trimming elements................ 445, 450 organizational charts ............................... 185 creating icons .......................................... 645 creating" ..... 76, 80, 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 175, 179, 315, 317, 405, 407, 408, 475, 478, 479, 481, 482, 483, 490, 527, 548, 571, 590, 594, 619, 630, 635, 646, 647, 648, 672 creating:a leader for SmartText............... 648 creating:adding to groups........................ 475 creating:animations ................................. 527 creating:colors ......................................... 481 creating:control loops .............................. 163 creating:documents .. 76, 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 175, 179, 590 creating:embedding................................. 590 creating:fill colors .................................... 571 creating:labels ......................................... 317 creating:links ........................................... 590 creating:negative images from raster images ..................................... 618, 619, 627, 630 creating:parametric symbols ................... 637 creating:styles ......................................... 548 creating:symbols ............................. 490, 635 creating:templates .. 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 175, 179 creating:text-driven symbols" .. 646, 647, 672 crosshatching"................. 568, 569, 571, 573 crosshatching:creating fill colors ..... 571, 573 crosshatching:placing fills ....... 568, 569, 571 curves"..................... 219, 220, 224, 239, 557
Index
curves:deleting ........................................ 220 curves:drawing ........................ 219, 239, 557 custom colors .......................................... 481 customer support ...................................... 69 menus ..................... 599, 600, 601, 603, 604 customizing".... 598, 599, 600, 601, 603, 604 customizing:menus ......................... 600, 601 customizing:toolbars ................. 24, 598, 599 cutting" .................................... 280, 282, 589 cutting:documents ................................... 589 cutting:elements .............................. 280, 282 cutting:embedding................................... 589 cutting:linking .......................................... 589 defining" . 637, 642, 644, 645, 646, 647, 656, 657, 663, 672, 673 defining:connect point attributes ............. 656 defining:drag point attributes................... 656 defining:drop point attributes................... 657 defining:handles for a symbol ................. 637 defining:multiple representations ............ 642 defining:SmartText.................................. 673 defining:SmartText attributes .................. 645 defining:symbol origin ..................... 644, 663 defining:symbol properties ...... 637, 663, 664 defining:symbol representation ............... 672 defining:text-driven symbols" .. 646, 647, 672 deleting" . 102, 107, 220, 280, 281, 282, 292, 329, 468, 483, 498, 502, 545, 548 deleting:drawing sheets .......................... 102 deleting:editing ........................................ 107 deleting:elements ............................ 280, 282 deleting:elements from groups................ 468 deleting:favorites ............................. 498, 502 deleting:groups ....................................... 468 deleting:relationships .............................. 329 deleting:styles ......................................... 548 deleting:text in text boxes ....................... 292 deselecting"............................................. 256 deselecting:elements .............................. 256 detail views............................................ 334, 335 DGN files" ....................................... 706, 733 dialog boxes"............................................. 23 diameter dimensions ............................... 392 diameter dimensions".............................. 358 prefixes.................................................... 390 dimension axis ........................................ 388 subfixes ................................................... 390 suffixes .................................................... 390 superfixes................................................ 390 axis.......................................................... 355 not-to-scale ..................................... 375, 391 dimensions".... 330, 355, 359, 360, 361, 362, 366, 368, 369, 370, 371, 373, 374, 375, 377, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 419, 541, 551, 553, 564 not-to-scale.............................................. 355 dimensions:adding to groups .................. 365 dimensions:angular ......................... 359, 361 dimensions:axis....................... 355, 368, 388 dimensions:changing .............. 355, 373, 377 dimensions:coordinate .................... 360, 389 dimensions:diameter ............................... 359 dimensions:diameters ............................. 392 dimensions:driving .................................. 373 dimensions:editing .......................... 374, 375 dimensions:elements ...................... 355, 373 dimensions:formatting ..................... 541, 553 dimensions:groups .................................. 360 dimensions:linear ............................ 359, 361 dimensions:locking.................................. 330 dimensions:manipulating......................... 371 dimensions:modifying.............................. 371 dimensions:moving ................................. 371 dimensions:not-to-scale .................. 355, 390 dimensions:overriding ............................. 375 dimensions:placing. 355, 361, 362, 364, 366, 368, 374, 388, 389, 391, 419 dimensions:prefixes ........................ 370, 390 dimensions:radial ............................ 359, 361 dimensions:removing overrides .............. 390 dimensions:setting .................................. 369 dimensions:styles .................................... 551 dimensions:symmetric............................. 392 dimensions:types of ................................ 369 direct modification .. 263, 275, 373, 427, 429, 434, 453 direct modification" .................................. 442 display properties"................................... 635 change toolbar......................................... 460 displaying" 31, 32, 36, 37, 99, 100, 311, 329, 332, 334, 377, 413, 414, 460, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 477, 478, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 533, 534, 605, 606 displaying:attributes ........................ 533, 534 displaying:background sheets................. 100 displaying:colors...................................... 481 displaying:dimensions ............................. 377 displaying:drawing sheets ......................... 99 displaying:elements......... 470, 473, 475, 477 displaying:horizontal or vertical alignment ............................................................. 332 displaying:layers.............................. 475, 477 displaying:magnification .......... 31, 32, 36, 37 displaying:objects .................................... 475 displaying:order ....... 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 displaying:parameters ..................... 533, 534 displaying:relationship handles ....... 329, 334 displaying:sheets..................................... 477 displaying:size ......................... 31, 32, 36, 37 displaying:toolbars .. 332, 377, 460, 605, 606 distances" ................ 389, 397, 398, 401, 418
Index
distances:dimensioning........................... 389 distances:measuring ............................... 398 document properties" ................................ 78 document properties:setting...................... 78 document properties:viewing .................... 78 documents" 33, 76, 77, 79, 80, 81, 110, 112, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 126, 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 175, 179, 185, 490, 495, 496, 589, 675, 676, 687, 688, 694, 699, 704, 706, 707, 709, 716, 722, 727, 732, 733 documents:ActiveX ......................... 675, 676 documents:closing .......................... 116, 495 documents:creating 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179 documents:creating documents ................ 76 documents:cutting ................................... 589 documents:embedding............................ 589 documents:exiting ................................... 116 documents:exporting...... 688, 699, 716, 722, 727 documents:general diagramming .. 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179 documents:importing...... 687, 688, 694, 704, 709, 716, 722, 732 documents:linking ................................... 589 documents:mailing documents ....... 112, 115 documents:MicroStation ................. 687, 688 documents:new drawing sheets ............... 80 documents:new files ................................. 80 documents:opening.... 77, 80, 110, 496, 676, 716 documents:printing. 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 126 documents:saving ........... 110, 114, 185, 716 documents:sending......................... 112, 115 documents:setting locations for ................ 79 documents:switching................................. 33 documents:templates..... 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179 documents:working with AutoCAD.......... 732 documents:working with MicroStation ... 704, 707, 709 doublelines drawing ........................................ 205, 417 placing ......................................... 205, 417 arcs 190, 215, 216, 217, 218, 223, 224, 238, 337, 557 arrays .............................. 275, 276, 277, 278 bevels.............................................. 445, 451 corners ............................................ 445, 450 doublelines ...................................... 205, 207 dynamics ................................................. 324 polygons.................................................. 190 radial patterns ................................. 275, 277 squares.................................... 231, 232, 234 activating ........................................... 99, 100 drawing sheets"...... 29, 77, 92, 99, 100, 102, 104, 106, 107, 120, 395 drawing sheets:activating........................ 100 drawing sheets:area................................ 120 drawing sheets:background sheets ........ 106 drawing sheets:creating .......................... 104 drawing sheets:deleting .......................... 107 drawing sheets:fitting sketch in real-world units ..................................................... 395 drawing sheets:inserting ......................... 104 drawing sheets:manipulating............. 99, 100 drawing sheets:printing ........................... 120 drawing sheets:renaming ........................ 102 drawing sheets:scrolling through tabs....... 99 drawing sheets:selecting......................... 104 drawing sheets:setting up ................... 77, 92 drawing sheets:tabs .................................. 99 drawing sheets:viewing ............................. 29 drawing".. 127, 188, 189, 190, 191, 205, 207, 209, 210, 211, 213, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 223, 224, 227, 228, 229, 231, 232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 243, 244, 245, 247, 248, 249, 250, 275, 276, 277, 278, 321, 324, 326, 332, 345, 346, 347, 349, 350, 395, 417, 445, 448, 450, 451, 452 drawing:arcs .................... 190, 217, 223, 224 drawing:chamfers.................................... 451 drawing:circles................................. 213, 247 drawing:corners....................................... 450 drawing:curves ........................................ 220 drawing:doublelines ................ 205, 207, 417 drawing:elements .................................... 127 drawing:extend to next ............................ 450 drawing:fillets........................................... 452 drawing:freely .......................................... 324 drawing:intent zones ............................... 326 drawing:isometrics . 243, 244, 245, 247, 249, 250 drawing:lines ........... 188, 190, 217, 244, 248 drawing:patterns.............................. 277, 278 drawing:points ......................................... 191 drawing:polygons .................................... 190 drawing:precisely .................................... 345 drawing:real-world units .......................... 395 drawing:rectangles .......................... 231, 234 drawing:relationships .............................. 324 drawing:squares .............................. 231, 234 drawing:tools .. 127, 235, 240, 241, 321, 326, 332, 347, 349 drawing:trimming elements ..................... 450 drawing:using intent zones...................... 326 drawing:with PinPoint...... 346, 349, 350, 417
Index
drawings" 263, 275, 280, 284, 285, 321, 373, 427, 429, 434, 442, 453, 675 drawings:ActiveX .................................... 675 drawings:adding annotations to ...... 284, 285 drawings:applying relationships .............. 453 drawings:cgm .......................................... 675 drawings:cutting elements ...................... 280 drawings:deleting elements .................... 280 drawings:elements .................................. 280 drawings:modifying 263, 275, 373, 427, 429, 434, 453 drawings:relationships ............................ 453 drawings:SmartSketch ............................ 321 driven dimensions".................................. 374 driven dimensions:placing....................... 374 driving dimensions" ......................... 373, 374 driving dimensions:changing................... 373 driving dimensions:placing...................... 374 editing text attributes".............................. 646 editing" ... 261, 263, 272, 275, 280, 294, 317, 370, 373, 375, 406, 409, 427, 429, 434, 442, 453, 503, 512, 513, 532, 538, 557, 591, 593, 658 editing:actions ......................................... 261 editing:attributes.............................. 532, 538 editing:breaking links .............................. 593 editing:dimensions .......................... 370, 375 editing:drawings ..... 263, 272, 275, 280, 373, 427, 429, 434, 453 editing:elements ...................................... 280 editing:formulas containing functions...... 409 editing:labels ........................................... 317 editing:links ..................................... 591, 593 editing:parameters .......................... 532, 538 editing:pasting ......................................... 272 editing:properties .................... 532, 538, 557 editing:smart points ................................. 658 editing:symbols ....................... 503, 512, 513 editing:text boxes .................................... 294 editing:variables ...................................... 406 elements" 127, 193, 255, 256, 260, 261, 264, 265, 267, 268, 269, 270, 272, 273, 275, 276, 280, 281, 282, 285, 311, 330, 334, 354, 429, 431, 434, 436, 437, 440, 442, 443, 444, 445, 450, 453, 456, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 463, 465, 467, 468, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 477, 479, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 505, 524, 541, 543, 544, 552, 554, 557, 590 elements:annotations...................... 284, 285 elements:concentric ........................ 456, 460 elements:connecting ............... 193, 457, 460 elements:copying ............ 253, 268, 272, 275 elements:cutting .............................. 280, 282 elements:displaying ........................ 475, 477 elements:drawing .................................... 127 elements:editing ...................................... 282 elements:equal ................................ 458, 461 elements:extending ......... 442, 443, 445, 450 elements:formatting................. 541, 544, 554 elements:grouping................... 463, 465, 467 elements:horizontal or vertical ........ 459, 461 elements:layers ............................... 463, 479 elements:linking and embedding............. 590 elements:locking ..................................... 334 elements:mirroring .......................... 434, 436 elements:modifying ................................. 425 elements:moving ............. 253, 264, 265, 267 elements:parallel ............................. 456, 461 elements:pasting ..... 269, 270, 272, 273, 590 elements:perpendicular................... 457, 461 elements:placing ..................... 284, 352, 442 elements:properties................................. 557 elements:relationships ............ 429, 453, 505 elements:reordering 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 elements:rotating............................. 429, 431 elements:scaling ............................. 437, 440 elements:selecting . 253, 255, 256, 260, 261, 269 elements:styles........................ 543, 544, 552 elements:symbols ........................... 505, 524 elements:tangent............................. 458, 461 elements:trimming................... 442, 444, 450 elements:ungrouping....................... 465, 468 ellipses" ........................... 227, 228, 229, 557 embedding" ............................. 587, 589, 590 embedding:linking ........................... 589, 590 embedding:objects .................................. 587 enhancements in SmartSketch 4.0 ......... 1, 3 equal" .............................................. 458, 461 equal:elements ................................ 458, 461 equal:relationships .......................... 458, 461 equations" ....................................... 413, 414 equations:displaying................................ 414 equations:filters ....................................... 414 establishing relationships ........................ 342 executables" .................................... 650, 651 exiting documents ................................... 116 exploring windows ............................... 23, 27 exporting" ........ 688, 699, 714, 716, 722, 727 exporting:AutoCAD drawings .......... 722, 727 exporting:documents...... 688, 699, 716, 722, 728 exporting:drawings .................................. 688 exporting:MicroStation documents.......... 714 exporting:MicroStation drawings ............. 699 exporting:Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files ..................................................... 716 expressions ............................................. 403 expressions" .................................... 420, 423 extending elements ......... 442, 443, 445, 450 next element............................................ 450
Index
next element............................................ 443 FAQ........................................................... 71 favorites" ......................................... 498, 502 favorites:adding....................................... 498 favorites:deleting ............................. 498, 502 favorites:showing .................................... 498 file properties" ........................................... 78 file properties:setting................................. 78 file properties:viewing ............................... 78 files".... 33, 76, 77, 80, 81, 86, 110, 112, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 185, 589, 688, 716 files:closing.............................................. 116 files:creating .............................................. 76 files:documents ................................... 76, 80 files:editing .............................................. 589 files:embedding ....................................... 589 files:exiting .............................................. 116 files:exporting .................................. 688, 716 files:finding .............................................. 110 files:importing .......................................... 589 files:linking............................................... 589 files:mailing documents................... 112, 115 files:opening ........................ 77, 80, 110, 688 files:Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files 716 files:printing ............. 117, 118, 120, 122, 123 files:properties........................................... 86 files:saving .............................. 110, 114, 185 files:sending .................................... 112, 115 files:switching ............................................ 33 fillets"............................... 442, 448, 452, 557 fillets:drawing .......................................... 452 fillets:placing............................................ 442 fills ........................................................... 573 fills".. 568, 569, 570, 571, 573, 618, 627, 653 fills:creating colors for ............................. 571 fills:defining for raster images ......... 618, 627 fills:placing....................... 568, 569, 571, 573 fills:setting properties of .......................... 573 filters" ...... 255, 413, 414, 475, 477, 484, 485 filters:selecting ........................................ 255 filters:setting .................................... 475, 477 fitting views.......................................... 30, 34 following hyperlinks"................................ 684 for symbols.............................................. 645 closed boundaries ................................... 568 columns................................................... 410 geometric elements................................. 554 formatting" ...... 272, 298, 410, 541, 551, 554, 555, 564, 568, 570, 571 formatting:annotations .................... 541, 554 formatting:closed boundaries.................. 568 formatting:columns.................................. 410 formatting:copying................................... 269 formatting:creating fill colors ................... 571 formatting:dimensions ............. 541, 551, 554 formatting:elements......................... 541, 554 formatting:geometric elements................ 554 formatting:lines ........................................ 554 formatting:painter .................................... 272 formatting:styles .............................. 541, 554 formatting:text.......................................... 564 formatting:text box................................... 298 frames" .................................................... 566 FreeForm" ....................................... 235, 241 FreeSketch"..................................... 235, 240 frequently asked questions ....................... 71 functions .................................................. 403 functions"......................................... 409, 413 functions:editing in formulas.................... 409 functions:inserting in formulas................. 409 functions:keys............................................ 26 functions:list of......................................... 413 functions:wizards..................................... 414 general diagramming templates..... 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179 generating a lookup table........................ 660 gradation settings for raster images 617, 625 grids" ......................................... 82, 352, 354 grids:setting options .................................. 82 grids:using ............................................... 352 groups" ............................................ 360, 468 groups:deleting elements from................ 469 groups:dimensions .................................. 360 groups:elements.............. 463, 465, 467, 469 groups:properties .................................... 468 handles" .......................................... 255, 269 handles:copying ...................................... 269 handles:selecting .................................... 255 handles:symbols ..................................... 503 hatching........................................... 568, 573 topics ......................................................... 72 Help".................................................... 70, 72 Help:topics................................................. 72 Help:user assistance................................. 70 hiding".............................. 478, 481, 482, 606 indicating ................................................. 332 horizontal" ............................... 332, 459, 461 horizontal:alignment display.................... 332 horizontal:elements or key points.... 459, 461 horizontal:relationships ................... 459, 461 HVAC templates...................................... 155 hyperlinks"....... 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684 hyperlinks:following ......................... 683, 684 hyperlinks:inserting 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684 hyperlinks:showing .................................. 684 icons"....................................................... 645 images".... 587, 611, 613, 614, 621, 631, 632 images:inserting .............................. 587, 611
Index
images:positioning .......................... 613, 614 images:saving ......................... 621, 631, 632 importing" 589, 687, 688, 694, 704, 706, 709, 712, 716, 722, 732, 733, 734 importing:AutoCAD ......................... 687, 722 importing:documents...... 589, 687, 688, 694, 704, 709, 716, 722, 732 importing:drawings .......................... 687, 688 importing:embedding .............................. 589 importing:linking ...................................... 589 importing:MicroStation .................... 687, 694 importing:MicroStation documents ......... 712 importing:Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files ..................................................... 716 insert > <param name= ................................ 335 characters ....................................... 294, 312 detailed view ........................................... 330 font characters ........................ 294, 312, 319 inserting" 104, 220, 294, 295, 312, 330, 409, 587, 590, 611, 623, 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684, 705 inserting:characters................................. 312 inserting:detailed view............................. 330 inserting:drawing sheets ......................... 104 inserting:font characters.......................... 312 inserting:functions into formulas ............. 409 inserting:hyperlinks 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684 inserting:images .............................. 587, 611 inserting:linking and embedding ............. 590 inserting:objects ...................... 587, 590, 705 inserting:raster images............................ 623 inserting:vertices ..................................... 295 inspection dimensions............................. 369 installing" ................................................... 67 installing:add-ins ..................................... 602 installing:tutorials ...................................... 67 zones....................................................... 326 intent zones............................................. 326 inverting colors ................................ 619, 630 isometric" 243, 244, 245, 247, 248, 249, 250 isometric:circles .............................. 244, 247 isometric:drawings .................................. 243 isometric:lines ......................... 244, 248, 249 isometric:rectangles ................ 245, 249, 250 keys........................................................... 26 keys".......................................................... 26 keys:control ............................................... 26 keys:function ............................................. 26 kinematics animation" ............................. 527 labels"...................................... 284, 317, 318 labels:creating ......................... 284, 315, 317 labels:editing ........................................... 317 labels:moving .......................................... 317 labels:overview ....................................... 284 labels:placing................................... 317, 318 layers"..... 311, 475, 477, 478, 479, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485 layers:changing ....................................... 479 layers:creating ......................................... 475 layers:creating"........................................ 479 layers:displaying...................... 463, 475, 477 layers:hiding ............................................ 478 layers:using ............................................. 475 leaders" ................... 284, 285, 295, 297, 313 leaders:adding......... 284, 285, 295, 313, 314 leaders:adding vertices ........................... 295 leaders:deleting vertices ......................... 297 leaders:moving ........................................ 289 tasks .......................................................... 72 Learning Center" ....................................... 67 limit dimensions....................................... 369 linear dimensions" ........................... 359, 361 linear dimensions:placing........................ 361 linear dimensions:types........................... 359 lines"....... 188, 190, 217, 218, 236, 244, 248, 249, 337, 550, 551, 554, 557, 564 lines:drawing ... 188, 190, 217, 236, 244, 337 lines:formatting ........................................ 554 lines:isometric.......................... 244, 248, 249 lines:properties ........................................ 557 lines:styles....................................... 550, 551 linking" .... 416, 587, 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684, 704, 706, 732, 733 linking:hyperlinks ..... 589, 590, 677, 678, 683 linking:objects.......................... 590, 704, 732 linking:showing ........................................ 684 linking:to the web ... 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684 linking:variables....................................... 416 links" ........................................ 590, 593, 594 links:breaking .......................................... 593 links:creating ........................................... 590 links:editing.............................................. 593 links:linking ...................................... 589, 590 listing windows" ......................................... 35 key points ................................................ 330 key points ................................................ 334 locking" ............................................ 330, 334 locking:dimensions .................................. 334 locking:elements ............................. 330, 334 locking:key points ............................ 330, 334 lookup table ............................................. 659 lookup table" ......................... 659, 660, 670 macros" .. 597, 599, 601, 603, 606, 607, 650, 651 macros:running 597, 599, 601, 603, 606, 607 mailing documents" ......................... 112, 115 maintaining relationships" 329, 334, 339, 341 manipulating".... 99, 100, 200, 264, 265, 267, 289, 317, 371, 429, 434, 436, 437, 440,
Index
465, 467, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 522, 523, 524 manipulating:annotations ........................ 289 manipulating:dimensions ........................ 371 manipulating:drawing sheets ............ 99, 100 manipulating:elements ... 264, 267, 429, 434, 436, 437, 440, 467, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 manipulating:labels ................................. 317 manipulating:symbols ..... 200, 522, 523, 524 manipulating:with PinPoint...................... 265 masking symbols .................................. 653 measuring" ...................... 397, 398, 401, 418 measuring:areas ..................................... 397 measuring:distances ............................... 398 mechanism modeling"............................. 527 merging connectors ................................ 200 MicroStation".. 704, 706, 707, 709, 712, 714, 734 MicroStation:export options .................... 714 MicroStation:help for users of ... 54, 691, 708 MicroStation:import options .................... 712 MicroStation:saving documents ...... 688, 699 MicroStation:styles .................................. 707 MicroStation:using cells in your document ............................................................. 708 MicroStation:workflow examples............. 691 MicroStation:working with ....... 704, 707, 709 mirroring .................................................. 434 mirroring"................................. 434, 436, 520 mirroring:elements .......................... 434, 436 mirroring:symbols.................................... 520 end points................................................ 196 modifying a symbol attribute ................... 641 modifying" ...... 263, 275, 280, 371, 373, 427, 429, 434, 442, 453, 483, 548, 551, 573 modifying:dimensions ............................. 371 modifying:drawings 263, 275, 373, 427, 429, 434, 453 modifying:elements ......................... 280, 425 modifying:fill properties ........................... 573 modifying:layer groups............ 475, 479, 483 modifying:layers ...................... 475, 479, 483 modifying:relationships ........................... 453 modifying:styles ...................................... 548 modifying:text styles................................ 551 back......................................................... 473 front ......................................................... 473 moving" .. 103, 104, 105, 200, 264, 265, 267, 289, 292, 348, 371, 470, 471, 473, 522, 524 moving:annotations ................................. 289 moving:dimensions ................................. 371 moving:elements .... 253, 264, 265, 267, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 moving:leaders ........................................ 289 moving:sheets ......................... 103, 104, 105 moving:symbols....................... 200, 522, 524 moving:text boxes ................................... 292 moving:the PinPoint target point ............. 348 naming" ........................................... 102, 483 naming:drawing sheets ........................... 102 naming:layer groups................ 475, 479, 483 new drawing sheets" ............. 34, 76, 80, 104 new drawing sheets:documents.......... 76, 80 new drawing sheets:windows.................... 34 nodes" ..................................................... 220 nodes:deleting ......................................... 220 nodes:inserting ........................................ 220 nominal dimensions ................................ 369 objects"... 255, 256, 260, 269, 311, 439, 475, 477, 479, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 557, 587, 590, 704, 705, 706, 732, 733 objects:changing layers of....................... 479 objects:copying........................................ 269 objects:displaying ............................ 475, 477 objects:handles ....................................... 255 objects:inserting ...................... 587, 590, 705 objects:linking.......................... 590, 704, 732 objects:properties .................................... 557 objects:scaling......................................... 439 objects:selecting...................... 255, 256, 260 objects:working with ................................ 733 ODBC data source .................................. 659 office layout templates ............................ 143 offsetting elements"................. 271, 273, 274 OLE" ................................ 587, 589, 590, 591 OLE:embedding ...................................... 589 OLE:linking .............................................. 589 OLE:linking and embedding .................... 590 OLE:selecting objects ............................. 591 online help"................................................ 71 opening" .................. 67, 77, 80, 81, 110, 591 opening:applications ............................... 591 opening:documents ..................... 77, 80, 110 opening:files .............................................. 80 opening:linked objects............................. 591 opening:OLE objects ............................... 592 opening:tutorials ........................................ 67 options"...................... 82, 255, 332, 333, 598 options:selecting ..................................... 255 options:setting ........................................... 82 options:SmartSketch ....................... 332, 333 order of elements" ... 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 overviews .................................................... 4 overviews" ......................................... 24, 463 panning" ........................................ 28, 31, 35 panning:IntelliMouse ................................. 28 panning:views...................................... 31, 35 paper and model units............................. 394
Index
parallel" ........................................... 456, 461 parallel:elements ............................. 456, 461 parallel:relationships ....................... 456, 461 parameters"..................... 532, 533, 534, 538 parameters:displaying............................. 533 parameters:editing .................. 533, 534, 538 parameters:viewing......................... 532, 538 parametric symbols"................................ 637 pasting" ... 269, 270, 272, 273, 280, 589, 590 pasting:cutting elements ......................... 280 pasting:documents.................................. 589 pasting:elements ..... 269, 270, 272, 273, 590 pasting:embedding.................................. 589 pasting:linking ......................................... 590 pasting:pasting elements ................ 269, 272 patterns" .......................... 275, 276, 277, 278 patterns:circular ...................................... 277 patterns:creating ..................................... 275 patterns:drawing ............................. 277, 278 perpendicular" ................................. 457, 461 perpendicular:elements................... 457, 461 perpendicular:relationships ............. 457, 461 PFD and P&ID templates........................ 176 PickQuick"....................................... 255, 256 PinPoint" . 265, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350, 417 PinPoint:drawing with.............. 349, 350, 417 PinPoint:moving elements .............. 265, 346 PinPoint:re-orienting ............................... 348 PinPoint:repositioning target point .......... 348 callouts .................................................... 287 coordinate dimensions .................... 360, 389 placing" .. 287, 288, 298, 307, 317, 318, 355, 361, 362, 364, 366, 368, 377, 388, 389, 391, 419, 491, 493, 500, 507, 509, 511, 568, 569, 571, 573 placing:annotations ................. 288, 307, 377 placing:callouts ....................................... 287 placing:dimension groups ....................... 364 placing:dimensions 355, 361, 362, 366, 368, 388, 389, 391, 419 placing:fills....................... 568, 569, 571, 573 placing:labels .................................. 317, 318 placing:symbols ..... 491, 493, 500, 507, 509, 511 placing:symmetric diameters" ................. 366 placing:text .............................................. 298 placing:text boxes ................................... 287 planning your symbol .............................. 635 playing macros"....................................... 606 plot plan templates .................................. 179 pointer feedback" .................................... 321 points" ............................. 189, 191, 503, 557 points:drawing ................................. 189, 191 points:properties" .................................... 557 points:symbols ........................................ 503 positioning".............................. 613, 614, 623 positioning:by clicking ............................. 614 positioning:by dragging ........................... 613 positioning:images .................. 613, 614, 623 precision drawing" .. 345, 346, 349, 350, 352, 354 previous view............................................. 35 printing" ... 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 124, 126 printing:documents . 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 126 printing:options ........................................ 124 printing:to files ......................................... 122 programs ................................................. 650 programs"........................................ 650, 651 SmartFrame ............................................ 566 properties" .. 78, 86, 124, 300, 314, 468, 532, 533, 534, 538, 557, 566, 573, 620, 628 properties:attributes .......................... 86, 532 properties:displaying ....................... 533, 534 properties:editing............. 532, 534, 538, 557 properties:elements................................. 557 properties:file............................................. 86 properties:fills .......................................... 573 properties:groups .................................... 468 properties:images............................ 620, 628 properties:leader ..................................... 314 properties:printers ................................... 124 properties:setting....................................... 78 properties:SmartFrame ........................... 566 properties:text.......................................... 300 properties:viewing ..................................... 78 pulling elements up" ........................ 471, 473 pushing elements down" ................. 472, 474 questions ................................................... 71 quitting..................................................... 116 radial dimensions" ........................... 359, 361 raster images" 587, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 620, 623, 624, 625, 627, 628, 630 raster images:adjusting contrast and brightness .................................... 617, 625 raster images:filling with color ......... 618, 627 raster images:inserting.................... 587, 623 raster images:inverting.................... 619, 630 raster images:positioning ........ 613, 614, 623 raster images:selecting areas 615, 616, 623, 624 raster images:viewing properties .... 620, 628 real-world units ........................................ 394 reapplying styles ..................................... 552 rectangles" .............. 231, 232, 234, 249, 250 rectangles:drawing .......... 234, 245, 276, 278 rectangles:isometric ................ 245, 249, 250 redefine symbol origin"............................ 644 redoing" ........................... 258, 261, 621, 630 redoing:actions ................................ 258, 261 redoing:image-related actions......... 621, 630
Index
reference dimensions.............................. 369 reference files" 687, 688, 694, 699, 706, 716, 722, 728, 734 reference files:AutoCAD . 687, 716, 722, 728 reference files:MicroStation ... 687, 688, 694, 699, 706, 734 refilling boundaries"................................. 571 registering software" ................................. 73 relationships".. 263, 275, 280, 281, 321, 324, 329, 330, 332, 334, 339, 341, 342, 373, 392, 427, 429, 434, 442, 453, 456, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461 relationships:applying ............................. 453 relationships:coincident................... 457, 460 relationships:colinear ...................... 459, 460 relationships:concentric .................. 456, 460 relationships:connect .............................. 457 relationships:connecting ......................... 460 relationships:copying elements............... 427 relationships:creating .............................. 332 relationships:deleting ...................... 280, 329 relationships:dimensions......................... 373 relationships:displaying........................... 329 relationships:equal .......................... 458, 461 relationships:establishing........................ 342 relationships:extending or trimming ........ 442 relationships:handles" ............................. 334 relationships:horizontal or vertical... 459, 461 relationships:indicators ........................... 321 relationships:indicators" .......................... 434 relationships:locking................................ 334 relationships:maintaining ........................ 341 relationships:moving ............................... 263 relationships:parallel ....................... 456, 461 relationships:patterns.............................. 275 relationships:perpendicular ............. 457, 461 relationships:rotating............................... 429 relationships:symmetric .................. 392, 459 relationships:tangent....................... 458, 461 overrides ................................................. 391 removing attributes.............................................. 641 removing" ........................................ 469, 602 removing:add-ins .................................... 602 removing:elements from groups ............. 469 removing:overrides ................................. 391 renaming" ........................................ 102, 544 renaming:drawing sheets........................ 102 renaming:styles ....................................... 544 reordering elements"...... 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 re-orienting with PinPoint"....................... 348 repeating actions" ................................... 261 reports".................................................... 536 reports:symbols....................................... 536 reports:types............................................ 536 reports:updating ...................................... 536 repositioning"................... 103, 104, 105, 348 repositioning:sheets ................ 103, 104, 105 repositioning:the PinPoint target point .... 348 resizing text boxes" ................................. 294 restoring" ............................................. 30, 35 restoring:previous views............................ 35 restoring:views .......................................... 30 actual value ............................................. 375 returning dimensions to actual value" ..... 375 reversing actions ..................................... 261 ribbon bars" ....................................... 23, 324 ribbon bars:for drawing ........................... 324 rotating" ................... 429, 431, 521, 522, 524 rotating:elements............................. 429, 431 rotating:symbols ...................... 521, 522, 524 routing documents through e-mail" ......... 115 running macros" .............................. 599, 606 HTML....................................................... 110 saving"...... 92, 110, 114, 185, 546, 621, 631, 632 saving:as bitmap image .................. 621, 631 saving:as image ...................................... 631 saving:automatically................................ 114 saving:documents ................... 110, 114, 185 saving:drawing sheet settings ................... 92 saving:HTML ........................................... 110 saving:images ......................................... 621 saving:selected image............................. 632 saving:styles............................................ 546 saving:templates ..................................... 185 scaling" ............ 437, 439, 440, 518, 522, 524 scaling:elements ............................. 437, 440 scaling:inserted objects........................... 439 scaling:symbols ....................... 518, 522, 524 scrolling drawing sheet tabs" .................... 99 segmented" ..................................... 544, 552 segmented:elements............................... 544 segmented:styles ............................ 544, 552 selecting" 255, 256, 260, 261, 269, 592, 615, 616, 623, 624 selecting:areas ................ 615, 616, 623, 624 selecting:elements . 253, 255, 256, 260, 261, 269 selecting:objects and elements ....... 255, 260 selecting:OLE objects ............................. 592 selecting:polygonal area on raster images ..................................................... 616, 624 selecting:rectangular area on raster images ..................................................... 615, 623 sending" .......................... 112, 115, 471, 473 sending:documents ......................... 112, 115 sending:elements to back ............... 471, 473 units of measure...................................... 399
Index
setting up an ODBC data source ............ 659 setting up drawing sheets" .................. 77, 92 setting" 78, 82, 300, 368, 369, 399, 475, 477, 484, 485, 573, 598 setting:dimension axes ........................... 368 setting:dimension types .......................... 369 setting:display criteria ..................... 475, 477 setting:document properties...................... 78 setting:fill properties ................................ 573 setting:filters .................................... 475, 477 setting:options ........................................... 82 setting:properties ...................................... 78 setting:text properties.............................. 300 setting:units of measure.......................... 399 sheets" . 77, 92, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 477, 484, 485 sheets:background.................................. 106 sheets:changing ...................................... 101 sheets:deleting ........................................ 107 sheets:displaying .................................... 477 sheets:drawing .......................................... 99 sheets:inserting ....................................... 104 sheets:manipulating ................................ 100 sheets:moving ......................... 103, 104, 105 sheets:setting up ......................... 77, 92, 100 sheets:using ...................................... 99, 104 showing".......................... 329, 332, 334, 498 showing:favorites .................................... 498 showing:horizontal or vertical alignment. 332 showing:relationship handles.......... 329, 334 sketching"................................ 127, 209, 324 smart points" ................................... 658, 661 smart points:editing................................. 658 smart points:properties ........................... 661 SmartDimension" ............................ 377, 391 SmartLabels creating................................................ 315 SmartPoints" ................................... 656, 657 SmartPoints:with connect point attributes656 SmartPoints:with drag point attributes .... 656 SmartPoints:with drop point attributes .... 657 SmartSketch Learning Center" ................. 67 SmartSketch" 1, 3, 4, 73, 321, 328, 329, 332, 333, 336, 337, 338, 339, 341, 342 SmartSketch:examples .. 336, 337, 338, 341, 342 SmartSketch:maintaining relationships.. 328, 329 SmartSketch:new features...................... 1, 3 SmartSketch:options ....................... 332, 333 SmartSketch:overview ........................ 4, 321 SmartSketch:tips ....................................... 73 SmartText" .............................. 645, 648, 673 SmartText:attributes................................ 645 SmartText:leader .................................... 648 SmartText:placing ................................... 673 software" ................................................... 73 software:registering ................................... 73 software:tips .............................................. 73 spellchecking" ................................. 292, 311 splitting a connector ................................ 201 spreadsheets" ......................................... 411 standardizing drawings" .......................... 576 style resource documents" .............. 546, 707 styles" ..... 541, 543, 544, 545, 546, 548, 550, 551, 552, 553, 554, 576 styles:applying................................. 541, 543 styles:changing formats of ...................... 545 styles:creating ......................................... 548 styles:deleting.......................................... 545 styles:dimensions ............................ 551, 552 styles:elements........................................ 554 styles:examples....................................... 576 styles:formats .................................. 544, 548 styles:lines....................................... 550, 551 styles:parts of elements .................. 544, 552 styles:reapplying ..................................... 552 styles:renaming ....................................... 544 styles:resource documents ..................... 553 styles:saving............................................ 546 styles:segmented ............................ 544, 552 styles:standardizing................................. 576 styles:supporting company standards..... 576 styles:text ................................................ 551 styles:using.............................................. 576 support ........................................ 69, 71, 675 company standards ................................. 576 suspending relationships" ....................... 328 switching" .................................................. 33 switching:documents................................. 33 symbol authoring ..................................... 635 Symbol Explorer".... 491, 494, 495, 496, 497, 498, 500, 502 Symbol Explorer:closing.......................... 495 Symbol Explorer:managing documents with ............................................................. 500 Symbol Explorer:overview....................... 491 Symbol Explorer:setting home page ....... 497 Symbol Explorer:using favorites..... 494, 495, 496, 497, 498, 500 symbol properties .................................... 664 authoring ................................................. 635 libraries.................................................... 493 symbols .................................................. 653 symbols" . 200, 269, 488, 491, 493, 500, 503, 505, 507, 509, 511, 512, 513, 516, 517, 518, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 527, 536, 635, 637, 640, 641, 642, 644, 645, 646, 647, 650, 651, 663, 664, 666, 667, 668, 669, 671, 672, 673 symbols:adding attributes ....................... 640 symbols:aligning...................................... 505
Index
symbols:animation .................................. 527 symbols:associating................................ 505 symbols:attaching to other symbols........ 525 symbols:connect points........................... 200 symbols:connecting ................................ 200 symbols:connectors ................................ 523 symbols:converting ................................. 517 symbols:copying ..................... 509, 511, 520 symbols:copying format .......................... 269 symbols:creating ..................................... 635 symbols:define properties ....................... 637 symbols:defining handles........................ 637 symbols:defining origin ........................... 663 symbols:defining properties .................... 663 symbols:defining representations ... 642, 672 symbols:drop points ................................ 525 symbols:editing ....................... 503, 512, 513 symbols:elements ................................... 524 symbols:formatting .................................. 516 symbols:handles ..................................... 503 symbols:integrating with programs . 650, 651 symbols:libraries ..................................... 493 symbols:managing text ........................... 645 symbols:manipulating .... 200, 503, 522, 523, 524 symbols:masking .................................. 653 symbols:mirroring.................................... 520 symbols:modifying attributes................... 641 symbols:multiple representations............ 671 symbols:overview.................................... 488 symbols:parametric................................. 637 symbols:placing ..... 491, 493, 500, 507, 509, 511 symbols:points ........................................ 503 symbols:properties .................................. 516 symbols:Properties dialog box664, 666, 667, 668, 669 symbols:redefining origin ........................ 644 symbols:removing ................................... 641 symbols:reports....................................... 536 symbols:rotating ...................................... 521 symbols:scaling....................................... 518 symbols:SmartText attributes ................. 645 symbols:SmartText editor ....................... 673 symbols:text attributes ............................ 646 symbols:text-driven ................. 646, 647, 672 symbols:unlocking................................... 524 symmetric" .............................. 366, 392, 459 symmetric:dimensions .................... 366, 392 symmetric:elements ........................ 392, 459 tabs on drawing sheets ............................. 99 tangent" ........... 211, 213, 216, 223, 458, 462 tangent:arcs ............................................ 223 tangent:circles ......................................... 213 tangent:elements ............................ 458, 462 tangent:points.......................................... 348 tangent:relationships ....................... 458, 462 technical support ....................................... 69 technical" ................................................... 71 technical:support ....................................... 71 control loop.............................................. 163 atlas mapping .......................................... 131 templates" 76, 131, 143, 149, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179, 185, 546, 707 templates:architectural ............................ 152 templates:atlas mapping ......................... 131 templates:control loop ............................. 163 templates:creating ..................................... 76 templates:general diagramming..... 131, 143, 149, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179 templates:HVAC...................................... 155 templates:office layout ............................ 143 templates:overviews....... 131, 143, 149, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179 templates:PFD and P&ID ........................ 176 templates:plot plan .................................. 179 templates:saving ..................................... 185 templates:style resource documents ..... 546, 707 templates:styles....................................... 546 templates:workflow.................................. 149 text attributes" ......................................... 646 text boxes"....... 287, 292, 293, 294, 298, 312 text boxes:applying borders .................... 293 text boxes:deleting text ........................... 292 text boxes:editing .................................... 294 text boxes:formatting............................... 298 text boxes:inserting font characters ........ 312 text boxes:moving ................................... 292 text boxes:placing ................................... 287 text boxes:resizing .................................. 294 text in symbols......................................... 645 text" 284, 285, 292, 298, 300, 313, 551, 555, 564 text:adding leaders to.............................. 313 text:adding to drawings ................... 284, 285 text:deleting ............................................. 292 text:formatting.......................................... 564 text:modifying styles ................................ 551 text:placing .............................................. 298 text:setting properties of.......................... 300 text:specifying styles ............................... 551 text-driven symbols ................. 646, 647, 672 Tip of the Day"........................................... 73 tolerance dimensions .............................. 369 toolbars" . 332, 460, 598, 599, 603, 604, 605, 606 toolbars:customizing ....... 598, 599, 605, 606 toolbars:displaying .......... 332, 460, 605, 606 toolbars:hiding ......................................... 606
Index
tools" 23, 127, 188, 209, 231, 235, 260, 324, 326, 346, 349, 350, 606 tools:drawing ................... 127, 188, 324, 326 tools:macros............................................ 606 tools:PinPoint .......................... 346, 349, 350 tools:relationships ................................... 324 tools:select .............................................. 260 trimming elements........................... 444, 450 trimming elements" ......................... 442, 445 starting ...................................................... 67 tutorials" .............................................. 67, 72 undoing" .......................... 258, 261, 620, 630 undoing:actions ............................... 258, 261 undoing:image-related actions........ 620, 630 ungrouping elements .............................. 469 ungrouping elements" ............................. 465 uninstall add-ins ...................................... 602 units........................................................... 86 units" ....................................................... 394 units:model.............................................. 394 units:paper .............................................. 394 unlocking symbols" ................................. 524 user assistance ......................................... 70 user interface ...................................... 23, 27 drop points .............................................. 525 IntelliMouse ............................................... 28 internet ...................................... 73, 675, 676 intranet ............................................ 675, 676 mouse ....................................................... 27 using expressions" .................. 420, 423, 475 using expressions:layer groups .............. 475 using expressions:Variable Table ... 420, 423 tables............................................... 403, 411 variable functions .................................... 413 Variable Table"....... 403, 405, 406, 407, 408, 411, 413, 414, 416, 420, 423 Variable Table:setting filters for .............. 413 Variable Table:using ....................... 411, 423 vertical" ................................... 332, 459, 461 vertical:alignment display........................ 332 vertical:elements or key points........ 459, 461 vertical:relationships ....................... 459, 461 vertices" .......................................... 295, 297 vertices:adding ........................................ 295 vertices:deleting ...................................... 297 vertices:inserting ..................................... 296 viewing" ............. 29, 104, 532, 533, 534, 538 viewing:attributes ............................ 533, 534 viewing:drawing sheets ..................... 29, 104 viewing:parameters ......................... 532, 538 views" ....... 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 35, 36, 37, 78, 106, 354, 605 views:areas ................................... 31, 32, 36 views:background sheets........................ 106 views:detail...................................... 334, 335 views:document properties ....................... 78 views:fitting................................................ 30 views:IntelliMouse ..................................... 28 views:overview .......................................... 29 views:panning...................................... 31, 35 views:properties ........................................ 78 views:restoring .................................... 30, 35 views:toolbars.......................................... 605 views:zooming in ................................. 32, 36 views:zooming in on area.......................... 31 views:zooming out............................... 32, 37 Web linking" .... 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684 Web"........................................................ 675 Web:gallery ............................................. 675 Web:linking.............. 677, 679, 680, 683, 684 Web:linking" ............................................ 678 What's New? in SmartSketch 4.0............ 1, 3 windows" ............... 23, 27, 28, 29, 34, 35, 36 windows:cascading ............................. 34, 36 windows:exploring ............................... 23, 27 windows:fitting views in ............................. 34 windows:IntelliMouse ................................ 28 windows:listing .......................................... 35 windows:new drawing sheets.................... 34 wizards" ................................................... 414 workflows" ................................................. 72 workflows:learning..................................... 72 workflows:templates ................................ 149 working sheets" ....................................... 104 working sheets:using............................... 104 Office applications ................................... 589 working with AutoCAD ............................ 733 world units ............................................... 394 World Wide Web" .............................. 73, 675 World Wide Web:accessing from the software ................................................. 73 World Wide Web:publishing .................... 675 zooming" ................................. 31, 32, 36, 37 zooming:in ........................................... 32, 36 zooming:in on area.............................. 31, 36 zooming:out......................................... 32, 37

Smart Sketch User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Smart Sketch User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartSketch v4.

Exploring the Interface: An Overview

Using the Keyboard

Using the Mouse

Viewing Your Work

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Getting Help for AutoCAD Users: An Overview

SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide iii

Getting Help for MicroStation Users: An Overview

Using the Learning Center: An Overview

Accessing Support Resources: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

UNDERSTANDING DOCUMENT CONCEPTS: AN OVERVIEW Setting Up Documents: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Managing Multi-sheet Documents: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes iv SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide

Saving and Printing Documents: An Overview Saving Documents

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Commands and Dialog Boxes

USING SMARTSKETCH TEMPLATES: AN OVERVIEW Using General Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Using AEC Solutions Templates: An Overview

SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide v

Using Electrical Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Using Mechanical Engineering Templates: An Overview

Using Process Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

DRAWING BASIC ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Drawing Lines: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing Connectors: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing Doublelines: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses: An Overview Draw Circles

Commands and Dialog Boxes

vi SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing Squares and Rectangles: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing FreeForm Shapes: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Creating Isometric Drawings: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide vii

SELECTING, MOVING, & COPYING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Selecting Elements: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Moving Elements: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Copying and Pasting Elements: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Creating Patterns: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Cutting or Deleting Elements: An Overview

viii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide

Table of Contents Commands and Dialog Boxes

ADDING TEXT TO DOCUMENTS: AN OVERVIEW Placing Annotations: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

303 306 308

SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide ix

Commands and Dialog Boxes

DRAWING PRECISELY: AN OVERVIEW Placing Elements in Precise Locations: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Placing Elements with a Grid: An Overview